2024 ENGINEERING MANUALMODULAR PLASTIC BELTS

Warranty—Intralox, LLC warrants products of its own manufacture for a period of one year from date of shipment, to the extent
that Intralox, LLC will repair or replace any products of faulty material or defective workmanship proven under normal use orservice. No other warranty is expressed or implied unless otherwise set forth in writing and approved by a representative duly
authorized to extend such approval by Intralox, LLC.
Caution—Intralox, LLC does not warrant that the design and/or operational function of any machine that incorporates and/or
intends to incorporate Intralox, LLC products, conform to any local, state and/or federal regulations and standards relating to public
safety, worker safety, safety guards, sanitation safety, fire safety, or any other safety regulations. ALL PURCHASERS AND USERSSHOULD CONSULT THEIR APPROPRIATE LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL SAFETY REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS.
Notice—The information contained in this manual is provided only as an aid and service to our customers. Intralox, LLC does notwarrant the accuracy or applicability of such information and, Intralox, LLC is specifically not responsible for property damage
and/or personal injury, direct or indirect for damages and/or failures caused by improper machine design, application, installation,
operation, abuse and/or misuse of its products whether or not based on information contained herein.
Warning—Intralox products are made of plastic and can burn. If exposed to an open flame or to temperatures above Intralox
specifications, these products may decompose and emit toxic fumes. Do not expose Intralox conveyor belting to extreme
temperatures or open flame. Flame retardant belt products are available in some series. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
Maintenance—Prior to installing, cleaning, lubricating, or performing maintenance on any conveyor belt, sprocket or system,
consult the federal, state, and local regulations in your area regarding the control of hazardous/stored energy (lockout/tagout).
A subsidiary of the Laitram, LLC. All rights reserved worldwide. Intralox is a registered trademark of Laitram, LLC.
For customer service and engineering contact information, see www.intralox.com.

The content of this document is proprietary to Intralox. Recipients may not disclose the content to anyone else without the writtenconsent of Intralox and may only use the content in connection with Intralox products.

22024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRALOX OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 5
INTRALOX RESOURCES................................................................................................................................. 6
BELT CONSTRUCTION................................................................................................................................... 6
DRIVE METHOD...............................................................................................................................................7
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................... 8
BELT SELECTION PROCESS.......................................................................................................................... 9
2 PRODUCT LINE............................................................................................................................................ 13
GENERAL APPLICATION BELT MATERIALS................................................................................................ 13
SPECIAL APPLICATION BELT MATERIALS.................................................................................................. 14
BELT MATERIAL PROPERTIES..................................................................................................................... 20
BELT MATERIAL COMPLIANCE....................................................................................................................23
GENERAL APPLICATION SPROCKET MATERIAL........................................................................................ 24
SPECIAL APPLICATION SPROCKET MATERIALS........................................................................................24
SPROCKET MATERIAL AVAILABILITY.......................................................................................................... 26
BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONS...............................................................................................................30
STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS........................................................................................................................ 35
SERIES 100.............................................................................................................................................37
SERIES 200.............................................................................................................................................45
SERIES 400.............................................................................................................................................53
SERIES 560.............................................................................................................................................81
SERIES 800.............................................................................................................................................87
SERIES 850...........................................................................................................................................123
SERIES 888...........................................................................................................................................129
SERIES 900...........................................................................................................................................137
SERIES 1000.........................................................................................................................................169
SERIES 1100.........................................................................................................................................189
SERIES 1200.........................................................................................................................................207
SERIES 1400.........................................................................................................................................223
SERIES 1500.........................................................................................................................................249
SERIES 1600.........................................................................................................................................255
SERIES 1650.........................................................................................................................................267
SERIES 1700.........................................................................................................................................271
SERIES 1750.........................................................................................................................................279
SERIES 1800.........................................................................................................................................285
SERIES 1900.........................................................................................................................................291
SERIES 4400.........................................................................................................................................297
SERIES 4500.........................................................................................................................................301
SERIES 9000.........................................................................................................................................313
SERIES 10000.......................................................................................................................................319
RADIUS BELTS............................................................................................................................................ 327
SERIES 2100.........................................................................................................................................329
SERIES 2200.........................................................................................................................................333
SERIES 2300.........................................................................................................................................345
SERIES 2400.........................................................................................................................................355
SERIES 3000.........................................................................................................................................385
SERIES 4000.........................................................................................................................................391
SPIRAL BELTS............................................................................................................................................. 407
SERIES 2600.........................................................................................................................................409
SERIES 2700.........................................................................................................................................421
SERIES 2800.........................................................................................................................................433

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3

TABLE OF CONTENTSSERIES 2850.........................................................................................................................................441
SERIES 2900.........................................................................................................................................445
SERIES 2950.........................................................................................................................................451
SQUARE SHAFTS........................................................................................................................................ 454
RETAINER RINGS AND CENTER SPROCKET OFFSET.............................................................................. 455
SPROCKET SPACERS.................................................................................................................................462
ROUND BORE ADAPTERS.......................................................................................................................... 463
SCROLL IDLERS..........................................................................................................................................464
WEARSTRIPS...............................................................................................................................................465
CUSTOM WEARSTRIPS.............................................................................................................................. 467
PUSHER BARS............................................................................................................................................ 469
TRANSFER PLATES.....................................................................................................................................471
EZ CLEAN IN PLACE (CIP) SYSTEM........................................................................................................... 471
HOLD DOWN ROLLERS.............................................................................................................................. 472
ABRASION RESISTANCE SYSTEM.............................................................................................................473
ABRASION RESISTANCE HINGE RODS..................................................................................................... 474
EZ MOUNT FLEX TIP SCRAPER................................................................................................................. 475
RETURNWAY RINGS................................................................................................................................... 475
3 DESIGN GUIDELINES.................................................................................................................................477
ADDITIONAL RESOURCES..........................................................................................................................477
CONVEYOR DESIGN................................................................................................................................... 477
CONVEYOR FRAMES.................................................................................................................................. 478
CARRYWAYS............................................................................................................................................... 481
RETURNWAYS AND TAKE-UPS..................................................................................................................487
DRIVE SYSTEM............................................................................................................................................495
PRODUCT CONTAINMENT......................................................................................................................... 502
TRANSFERS.................................................................................................................................................503
ADDITIONAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS..................................................................................................509
OTHER CONVEYOR DESIGNS.................................................................................................................... 512
4 REFERENCE TABLES................................................................................................................................ 521
TABLE 1: SERVICE FACTORS..................................................................................................................... 521
TABLE 2: TEMPERATURE FACTORS..........................................................................................................521
TABLE 3: SHAFT DATA................................................................................................................................525
TABLE 4: MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED TORQUE ON DRIVE SHAFT.........................................................525
TABLE 5: BELT PULL LIMITS VS. SHAFT SPAN FOR RETAINER RING GROOVES.................................. 526
TABLE 6: AIRFLOW RATE THROUGH BELT, PER SQUARE FOOT OF BELT AREA.................................. 527
TABLE 7: MAXIMUM DRIVE SHAFT SPAN LENGTH.................................................................................. 528
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE GUIDE................................................................................................................ 528
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................. 539

42024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

1 INTRALOX OVERVIEW
With more than 50 years of experience, Intralox continues to lead the way in helping customers achieve theirgoals by offering comprehensive conveyance solutions that create significant economic value. Intralox
delivers innovative, premium technology within a direct business model and a global, industry-specificstructure. Our industry-specific teams have an in-depth knowledge of customer applications, and provide
customer service and technical support all day, every day, year round. Working with Intralox allows you toexperience our uncompromising commitment to providing solutions and solving problems for our customers.
We pushed past the boundaries of traditional conveying systems with the revolutionary invention of modular
plastic belting, and continue to move beyond industry standards with new products, equipment, solutions,and services. Intralox’s commitment to innovation has led to over 1500 patents currently in force around theworld. When our customers have challenges, we invent smart solutions to meet them.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

5

1 INTRALOX OVERVIEWINTRALOX RESOURCES
For country- and industry-specific customer service, information about Intralox products, our company, or toaccess the resources listed below, visit www.intralox.com. For contact information for Intralox headquarters,
see the back cover.
• Engineering Manual—Download the latest version of this engineering manual.
• CalcLab—Intralox provides CalcLab™ to help calculate and evaluate many aspects of conveyor design.
CalcLab is an always up-to-date replacement for legacy engineering programs that runs in the browser
and can be accessed from any internet-connected computer. To use CalcLab, go to calclab.intralox.com.
• Evaluation Forms—Our on-line evaluation forms are the first step to creating the best design for yourapplication. After receiving your evaluation form, Intralox technical experts will contact you to provide
engineering assistance and design reviews.
• CAD Drawing Files—DXF templates for all series are available. These templates have belt and molded
sprocket details that can be used in CAD conveyor designs.
• Product Literature and Technical Guides—Downloadable technical guides include a preventive
maintenance guide for modular plastic belts, a belt sanitation guide, and more. Intralox also offers
technical and application-specific guidelines on most of the products listed in this manual.
• Installation Instructions—The Installation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual provides generalmaintenance information and step-by-step installation instructions for most Intralox belts.
• How-To Videos—Address common belt challenges with our Performance Support Videos. Each video isdesigned to help you install, maintain, or troubleshoot your Intralox conveyor belts and components.
• Belt Identifier—The belt identifier can help you select a replacement for your existing Intralox belt.

BELT CONSTRUCTION
All Intralox belts are constructed with injection molded plastic modules. These modules are assembled into
interlocked units and joined by hinge rods.

Figure 1: Plastic modules joined by hinge rods

62024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

1 INTRALOX OVERVIEW
Belts are either one module wide (for narrow or SeamFree™ belts) or built in a bricklayed pattern from two or
more modules. Bricklayed belts are built with the joints between modules staggered between the joints ofadjacent rows. This bricklayed structure interlocks the modules, giving the belt inherent lateral strength. The
hinge rods do not hold the belt together from side to side, but act only as pivot members in shear. The beltthat results from this construction process is intrinsically strong, both laterally due to the bricklaying, andlongitudinally due to the rods being placed in multiple shear.

Figure 2: Bricklayed structure

Because of modular construction, Intralox belts can be made in almost any width, from three links wide.
Each belt style incorporates several distinguishing features. Surface, pitch, and drive features are describedin detail in Belt Selection Process. Hinge and edge features are:• Open hinges—the hinge rods are visible from either the top or bottom surface (or both) of the belt to aid inbelt inspection.
• Closed hinges—the hinge rods are completely enclosed to protect them from abrasives or contaminants.
• Flush edges—flush edges ride snugly beside the conveyor frame rails without gaps or exposed rod heads.
They reduce the possibility of product, or belt, snagging on the frame.

DRIVE METHOD
Intralox belts are positively driven by plastic or metal sprockets, not friction rollers. The sprockets, anotherpart of the Intralox system, have square bores and are driven by matching square shafts.
NOTE: Round bore sprockets are available for certain belts.

Figure 3: Sprocket-driven Intralox belt

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

7

1 INTRALOX OVERVIEW
Not only do square shafts transmit torque (rotational force) without the need for troublesome keys andkeyways, they accommodate the lateral expansion differences of the plastic belt material and the metal
shafts. Only one sprocket per shaft is retained. The others are allowed to float, moving along the shaft as the
belt expands or contracts. Thus, the sprockets are always transmitting torque. Of all belt drive systems
tested, the square shaft with square bore sprockets has proven to be the most effective, economical,
reliable, trouble-free, and simple.

Figure 4: Square-bore sprockets on square shaft

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Intralox conveyor belts are available in various styles, materials, and colors, with many accessory options. To
make the appropriate selections when designing for a particular application, reliable information about
operating and environmental conditions is critical. Factors to evaluate include:• Type of belt system: straight-running, radius, or spiral• Overall dimensions of the installed belt:- Distance between drive and idle shafts- Belt width- Conveyor elevation changes• Belt speed• Product characteristics:- Density- Unit size and shape- Hardness, toughness, brittleness, rigidity- Texture (smooth, rough, granular, lumpy, spongy)- Corrosiveness- Moisture content- Temperature- Frictional nature• Any process change during conveyance:- Heating- Cooling- Washing, rinsing, draining- Drying

82024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

1 INTRALOX OVERVIEW• Cleaning and sanitation requirements and conditions:- USDA-FSIS approval- Harsh temperatures or chemicals- Continuous on-line cleaning• Product loading and removal methods: smooth or impact transfers• Operating environment conditions:- Temperature- Moisture and humidity- Chemical nature (acid, base)- Abrasive materials (sand, grit)- Hazardous materials (dusts, vapors)• Drive system type:- Motor driven- Chain driven
For more information, see Design Guidelines.

BELT SELECTION PROCESSSTEP 1: CHOOSE THE RIGHT TYPE OF BELT SYSTEM
Choose a straight-running, radius, or spiral belt system.

STEP 2: CHOOSE THE RIGHT MATERIAL FOR YOUR APPLICATION
Intralox belts and accessories are available in general and special application materials. For completematerial descriptions, see General Application Belt Materials and Special Application Belt Materials.
Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information. Current telephone numbers are listed on the backcover.
For specific recommendations on chemical properties, see Chemical Resistance Guide.

STEP 3: SELECT THE BEST BELT SURFACE, PITCH, AND DRIVE METHOD
Next in the process of choosing the belt for your application is to determine the belt surface or style best
suited for the product or material being conveyed.
NOTE: Unless otherwise noted, all belts have fully flush edges.
The pitch of the belt is the next differentiating feature. Smaller pitch reduces chordal action (over similar size
sprockets) and the space required for product transfer. Intralox belts are available in the following belt
pitches:0.315 in (8.0 mm)
1.07 in (27.2 mm)
2.07 in (52.6 mm)
0.50 in (12.7 mm)

1.44 in (36.6 mm)

2.50 in (63.5 mm)

0.60 in (15.2 mm)

1.50 in (38.1 mm)

3.00 in (76.2 mm)

1.00 in (25.4 mm)

2.00 in (50.8 mm)

Also consider the drive method. Where back tension is an important consideration, drive method plays asignificant role. Intralox belts are either hinge-driven or center-driven.

STEP 4: SELECT A BELT OF SUFFICIENT STRENGTH FOR YOUR APPLICATION
After choosing the material and surface style to meet your needs, next determine if the selected belt isstrong enough to meet your application requirements.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

91 INTRALOX OVERVIEWANALYSIS FOR STRAIGHT RUNNING BELTS
After making a tentative series and style selection, see Belt Selection Instructions for instructions todetermine the belt pull and adjusted belt pull for comparison with the allowable strength for that belt. To
make the necessary calculations for belt pull, gather the following information:
1. The product load applied to the belt, in pound-force per square foot (or Newtons per square meter),
2. The length of the proposed conveyor, in feet (or meters),
3. Any elevation changes in the conveyor, in feet (or meters),
4. The desired operating speed, in feet per minute (or meters per minute),
5. The percentage of belt area with accumulated product,
6. The maximum belt operating temperature, in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius,
7. The type of material upon which the belt will run in the conveyor frame. For example: stainless or carbon
steel, UHMW-PE, HDPE, nylon, etc.,
8. The service duty, i.e., frequent startups under heavy load, an elevating or “pushing conveyor”, etc.

ANALYSIS FOR RADIUS AND SPIRAL BELTS
These belts require a more complex analysis. The following additional information is required:
1. The length of each straight run,
2. The turning angle and direction of each turn, and3. The inside turn radius, measured from the inside edge of the belt.

STEP 5: OTHER IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONSConsider the following factors before proceeding any further with belt selection.

ROD MATERIAL
Default rod materials for each belt style and material are listed in the belt data tables in the Product Linechapter. Other rod materials are available. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

BELT MATERIAL GROWTH
Belt materials, especially nylon, can expand or contract depending on storage and use conditions. In hightemperature and high-humidity environments, belts can expand in width and length over time. In cooler, drier
conditions, belts can contract. Intralox provides belt widths and tolerances that account for potential
expansion and contraction during the belt assembly process. Operating conditions are not accounted for.
Once a belt leaves our assembly facility, environmental conditions can cause the belt width to change.
Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

BELT SPEED
The belt speed affects the wear and life expectancy in these ways:
1. Hinge and sprocket wear: The frequency of module rotation about the hinge rods (as the belt engages
and disengages the sprockets) is directly proportional to speed. The rotary motion can cause wear toboth rods and modules. This wear rate, however, is inversely proportional to the belt’s length, i.e., ashorter conveyor can wear faster than a longer one if both are running at the same speed. It follows thatsprocket/tooth wear is directly proportional to speed. Sprockets with more teeth cause less module/hinge
rotation, and so less wear than sprockets with fewer teeth.
2. Belt surface wear: As belts slide over carryways, returnways, shoes, and other fixed members, some wear
is to be expected. The most destructive conditions are high speed, heavy loads, abrasive materials, anddry or non lubricated operation.
3. Dynamic effects of high-speed operation: Two effects of high-speed conditions are belt whipping oroscillating in unsupported sections, and load surges as heavy, stationary products are suddenly
accelerated to belt speed. Where possible, avoid both of these conditions.

102024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

1 INTRALOX OVERVIEWABRASIVE CONDITIONS AND FRICTION EFFECTS
In order to extend belt life, abrasives in a conveying application must be identified, the best combination ofmaterials chosen, and protective features included. Abrasives will wear away any material, but the correctmaterial choice can significantly increase belt life. In highly abrasive applications, the hinge rods andsprockets are usually the first elements to be affected. Hinge rod wear typically results in excessive beltpitch elongation. This can prevent proper tooth engagement, increasing the wear on sprocket teeth. Intralox
offers stainless steel split sprockets and abrasion resistant rods that work to increase belt life.

CHORDAL ACTION AND SPROCKET SELECTION
As the modules of belts engage their driving sprockets, a pulsation occurs in the linear velocity of the belt.
This pulsation is due to chordal action, which is the rise and fall of a module as it rotates around a shaft
centerline. It is characteristic of all sprocket-driven belts and chains. The variation in speed is inversely
proportional to the number of teeth on the sprocket. For example, a belt driven by a six-tooth sprocket has apulsating speed variation of 13.4%, while a belt driven by a 19-tooth sprocket has a variation of only 1.36%.
• In applications where product tipping is a concern, or where smooth, even speed is critical, use sprockets
with the maximum number of teeth available.
15

15

10

10

A
5

0

5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

0

B

A Percent of speed variation
B Number of sprocket teeth
Figure 5: Pulsating speed variation

SHAFTS
Intralox, LLC USA can supply square shafts, machined to your specification, in standard sizes of 5/8 in, 1 in,
1.5 in, 2.5 in, 3.5 in, 40 mm and 60 mm. Available materials are carbon steel (C-1018) (not available in 40 mm
and 60 mm) and stainless steel (303, 304 and 316). Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
Intralox, LLC Europe offers square shafts in standard sizes of 25 mm, 40 mm, 60 mm, 65 mm, and 90 mm.
Available materials are carbon steel (KG-37) and stainless steel (304).

Figure 6: Square shaft

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

111 INTRALOX OVERVIEW
Square shafts need turning of bearing journals only. No keyways for sprockets are required. Only one
sprocket per shaft must be retained to prevent lateral belt movement and to provide positive tracking.
Sprocket retention is usually accomplished by placing retainer rings on opposite sides of the centersprocket. Some retainer rings rest in grooves cut into the four corners of the shaft. These grooves introduce
stress concentration zones on the shaft. Under high load conditions, the grooves can lead to a premature
fatigue failure of the shaft. Self-set retainer rings and split collar retainer rings are available which do not
require grooves.

SHAFT STRENGTH
The two primary concerns regarding the strength of the conveyor drive shafts are 1) the ability to pull the belt
without excessive shaft deflection, and 2) the strength to transmit the torque for driving the belt. In the firstcase, the shaft acts as a beam, supported by bearings and stressed by the belt’s tension through the
sprockets. In the second case, the shaft is being rotated by the drive motor. Resistance from the belt’s
tension introduces torsional (twisting) stresses. These two types of stresses, maximum deflection andmaximum allowable torque, are analyzed separately. Simple formulas are provided for selecting appropriate
shafts.
Maximum deflection is governed by adequate belt and sprocket tooth engagement. If the shaft deflects
more than 0.10 in (2.5 mm) the sprockets may not engage properly, resulting in “jumping”. On bi-directional
conveyors with center-drive, the limit is increased to 0.22 in (5.6 mm) because the return side tension isgreater and the tooth loading is more uniformly distributed.

WEARSTRIPS
Wearstrips are added to a conveyor frame to increase the useful life of the conveyor frame and belt, and to
reduce the sliding friction forces. Proper choice of wearstrip design and material, yielding the best coefficientof friction, reduces belt and frame wear, and power requirements.
Any clean liquid, such as oil or water, will act as a coolant and as a separation film between the belt and thecarryway, usually reducing the coefficient of friction. Abrasives such as salt, broken glass, soil and vegetablefibers will embed in softer materials and wear on harder materials. In such applications harder wearstrips will
prolong belt life.

STATIC ELECTRICITY
Plastic belts can produce a static discharge or spark when used in a dry environment. If static electricity is apotential problem in your application, electrical grounding is recommended. Lubricating or adding moisture
to the conveyor running surfaces is also recommended. Some belt styles are available in electricallyconductive (EC) acetal. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

122024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
GENERAL APPLICATION BELT MATERIALSACETAL
This material is a thermoplastic that is considerably stronger than polypropylene and polyethylene. Acetal
has a good balance of mechanical and thermal properties.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00072 in/ft/°F (0.11 mm/m/°C).
• Low coefficient of friction, making it a good choice for container handling and transport.
• High-strength electrically conductive (HSEC) acetal is available for applications where a slow static buildup has to be dissipated. With HSEC acetal, dissipation is slow and improves in a humid environment.
HSEC acetal is available in Series 400 Non Skid.
• Good fatigue endurance and resilience.
• Relatively impact, cut, and scratch resistant.
• Specific gravity: 1.40. Not buoyant in water.

POLYETHYLENE (PE)PE is a lightweight thermoplastic with superior flexibility and high impact strength. Intralox recommends
black polyethylene for low-temperature applications exposed to direct sunlight.
• Temperature range: -100°F to 150°F (-73°C to 66°C). For exact temperatures, see the belt data table forthe selected belt style.
• Thermal expansion coefficient:- S100 and S400 Raised Rib: 0.0015 in/ft/°F (0.23 mm/m/°C).
- All other belts: 0.0011 in/ft/°F (0.17 mm/m/°C).
• Excellent performance at low temperatures.
• Excellent product release characteristics.
• Resistant to many acids, bases, and hydrocarbons.
• Specific gravity: 0.95. Buoyant in water.

POLYPROPYLENE (PP)A standard material for use in general applications and where chemical resistance is required.
• Temperature range: 34°F (1°C) to 220°F (104°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient:- In operating temperatures greater than 100°F (38°C): 0.0010 in/ft/°F (0.15 mm/m/°C)- In operating temperatures less than 100°F (38°C): 0.0008 in/ft/°F (0.12 mm/m/°C)• A relatively strong material in normal use, polypropylene becomes somewhat brittle at low temperatures.
• Good balance between moderate strength and lightweight.
• Good chemical resistance to many acids, bases, salts, and alcohols.
• Specific gravity of 0.90. Buoyant in water.
• Not recommended in high-impact conditions below 45°F (7°C).
• Use black polypropylene for applications exposed to direct sunlight.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

13

2 PRODUCT LINE
SPECIAL APPLICATION BELT MATERIALSABRASION RESISTANT (AR) NYLONThis material is recommended for wet or dry abrasive, heavy-duty applications.
• FDA-compliant material is available in black and white.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 240°F (-46°C to 116°C).
• Nylon can expand or contract depending on storage and use conditions. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for more information.
• Uses the same temperature factor table as regular nylon.
• Heat stabilized for superior outdoor wear.
• Specific gravity: 1.06. Not buoyant in water.

CHEMBLOXChemBlox™ is an engineered material optimized for food processing, where a high degree of chemical
resistance is required. This material is recommended for continuous-use antimicrobial dip tanks that use
peracetic acid (PAA) or similar chemicals.
• Temperature range: 0°F to 150°F (-18°C to 66°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00087 in/ft/°F (0.13 mm/m/°C).
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-0 at 1/32 in (0.8 mm). For information about fire behavior and safeguarding
recommendations, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Exceptional resistance to strong acids.
• Highly resistant to other sanitation chemicals, salts, alcohols, and oxidants.
• Resistant to UVA and UVB light, ozone, and radiation.
• Specific gravity: 1.77-1.79. Not buoyant in water.
• Tough and durable, even after continuous chemical exposure.
• Extremely hydrophobic compared to other plastics or metals.

DETECTABLE ACETALThis material was developed for applications in the food processing industry where foreign material
contamination is a concern. Detectable acetal is optimized for detection by a metal detector. Under certain
conditions, it may also be detected by an X-ray detector. If only X-ray detection is used, Intralox
recommends selecting the X-ray detectable materials developed specifically for X-ray detection. Testing thematerial in a metal detector in the production environment is the best method for determining detection
sensitivity.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00072 in/ft/°F (0.11 mm/m/°C).
• Good impact resistance in temperatures above 34°F (1°C).
• Specially formulated for enhanced impact resistance.
• Metal-filled material does not rust or expose hazardous sharp fibers.
• Specific gravity: 1.61. Not buoyant in water.
• Available in select styles across a wide range of belt series. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.

14

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
DETECTABLE MX
This material was developed for applications in the food processing industry where foreign material
contamination is a concern. Detectable MX is optimized for detection by a metal detector. Under certain
conditions, it may also be detected by an X-ray detector. If only X-ray detection is used, Intralox
recommends selecting the X-ray detectable materials developed specifically for X-ray detection. Testing thematerial in a metal detector in the production environment is the best method for determining detection
sensitivity.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C).
• Detection package will not rust and contains only food-safe additives.
• Not buoyant in water.
• For series and accessory availability, contact Intralox Customer Service.

DETECTABLE NYLONThis material was developed for applications in the food processing industry where foreign material
contamination is a concern. Detectable nylon is optimized for detection by a metal detector. Under certain
conditions, it may also be detected by an X-ray detector. If only X-ray detection is used, Intralox
recommends selecting the X-ray detectable materials developed specifically for X-ray detection. Testing thematerial in a metal detector in the production environment is the best method for determining detection
sensitivity.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 180°F (-46°C to 82°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00072 in/ft/°F (0.11 mm/m/°C).
• Nylon can expand or contract depending on storage and use conditions. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for more information.
• Uses the same temperature factor table as regular nylon.
• Metal-filled material does not rust or expose hazardous sharp fibers.
• Specific gravity: 1.06. Not buoyant in water.
• For wet-abrasive or dry-abrasive, heavy-duty applications.
• Available for S1700 belts.

DETECTABLE POLYPROPYLENE A22
This material was developed for applications in the food processing industry where foreign material
contamination is a concern. Detectable polypropylene A22 is optimized for detection by a metal detector.
Under certain conditions, it may also be detected by an X-ray detector. If only X-ray detection is used,
Intralox recommends selecting the X-ray detectable materials developed specifically for X-ray detection.
Testing the material in a metal detector in the production environment is the best method for determining
detection sensitivity.
• Temperature range: 0°F to 150°F (-18°C to 66°C).
• Good impact resistance in temperatures above 34°F (1°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.0011 in/ft/°F (0.17 mm/m/°C).
• Specially formulated for enhanced impact resistance.
• Specific gravity: 1.13. Not buoyant in water.
• Metal-filled material does not rust or expose hazardous additives.
• Available in select styles across a wide range of belt series. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

15

2 PRODUCT LINE
EASY RELEASE PLUS
This material resists rubber sticking and maintains dimensional stability in the presence of oils and hightemperatures. Easy Release PLUS is appropriate for tire industry applications.
• Temperature range: 34°F to 220°F (1°C to 104°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.0004 in/ft/°F (0.06 mm/m/°C).
• Not buoyant in water.
• Easy Release PLUS is available in S1400 Flat Top.

EASY RELEASE TRACEABLE POLYPROPYLENE
This material was developed to resist rubber sticking and offer metal detectability for tire applications where
stickiness and product contamination can be problematic.
• Temperature range: 34°F to 220°F (1°C to 104°C).
• Buoyant in water.
• Available in S1400 Flat Top.

ENDURALOX POLYPROPYLENE
A specially formulated material designed to maximize the life of Intralox belts in a pasteurizer environment.
Enduralox™ polypropylene protects the molecular structure of polypropylene from environmental factors
such as temperature cycling, bromine, and chlorine.
• Temperature range: 34°F to 220°F (1°C to 104°C).
• A relatively strong material in normal use, Enduralox polypropylene becomes somewhat brittle at low
temperatures.
• Not recommended in high-impact conditions below 45°F (7°C).
• Same physical properties as standard polypropylene.
• Good chemical resistance to many acids, bases, salts, and alcohols.
• Specific gravity: 0.90. Buoyant in water.

FLAME RETARDANT THERMOPLASTIC POLYESTER (FR TPES)
This material is UL94 V-0 rated and does not sustain a flame. Though the material does not actively burn, it
does blacken and melt in the presence of flame. FR TPES is stronger than polypropylene, but not as strongas acetal.
• Temperature range: 40°F to 150°F (4°C to 66°C).
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-0 at 1/32 in (0.8 mm). For information about fire behavior and safeguarding
recommendations, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Specific gravity: 1.45. Not buoyant in water.

16

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINEHEAT RESISTANT (HR) NYLONThis material is available for dry, elevated-temperature applications. It complies with FDA regulations for use
in food processing and packaging applications.
• Temperature range:- Continuous exposure: -50°F to 240°F (-46°C to 116°C).
- Intermittent exposure upper limit: 270°F (132°C).
• Nylon can expand or contract depending on storage and use conditions. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for more information.
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-2. For information about fire behavior and safeguarding recommendations,contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Specific gravity: 1.13. Not buoyant in water.

HI-IMPACT
This material is available only for S800 Tough Flat Top. Hi-Impact was developed for applications in the
food-processing industry where extreme impacts are a concern.
• Temperature range: 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.001 in/ft/°F (0.156 mm/m/°C).
• Greater impact resistance than acetal and polypropylene.
• Specific gravity: 1.18. Not buoyant in water.

HIGH HEAT RESISTANT (HHR) NYLON
HHR nylon is appropriate for dry, elevated-temperature applications. This material complies with FDA
regulations for use in food processing and packaging applications and is USDA-FSIS accepted (meat andpoultry).
• Temperature range:- Continuous exposure: -50°F to 310°F (-46°C to 154°C).
- Intermittent exposure upper limit: 360°F (182°C).
• Nylon can expand or contract depending on storage and use conditions. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for more information.
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-2. For information about fire behavior and safeguarding recommendations,contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Specific gravity: 1.13. Not buoyant in water.

HIGH STRENGTH ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE (HSEC) ACETALThis material can be used to help dissipate static charges that can build up, especially when moving cans orother conductive objects. A metal rail or carryway can be used to ground the belt, dissipating any chargebuild-up in the product. Entire belts can be made from HSEC acetal, although HSEC acetal is usually spliced
into regular acetal belt sections. For example, three rows of HSEC acetal for every 2 ft (0.61 m) of S100 or
S900 belt, or five rows for every 2 ft (0.61 m) of S1100 belt).
• HSEC acetal has a surface resistivity of 1000 Ohms according to IEC 62631.
• Has the same chemical resistance and friction factors as regular acetal.
• Specific gravity: 1.40. Not buoyant in water.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts17

2 PRODUCT LINE
LOW MOISTURE ABRASION RESISTANT (LMAR)• Temperature range: -50°F to 290°F (-46°C to 143°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00096 in/ft/°F (0.14 mm/m/°C).
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-2 at 0.236 in (6 mm). For information about fire behavior and safeguarding
recommendations, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• High heat resistance.
• Abrasion resistant.
• Bio-based polymer.
• Low moisture absorption provides dimensional stability.
• Not buoyant in water.

LOW WEAR PLUS
Low Wear Plus is available for applications in the fruit and vegetable industry, where highly abrasive
dewatering applications are a concern.
• Temperature range: 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.001 in/ft/°F (0.156 mm/M/°C).
• Better wear properties than nylon.
• Specific gravity: 0.18. Buoyant in water.

NYLON
This material is appropriate for applications that require good dry abrasion and chemical resistance. The twolimitations to nylon are that it absorbs water and is more susceptible than acetal to cuts and gouges.
Because of material expansion caused by water absorption, nylon is not recommended for very wet
applications.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 180°F (-46°C to 82°C).
• Nylon can expand or contract depending on storage and use conditions. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for more information.
• Good chemical resistance and low temperature performance.
• Abrasion resistant in dry applications.
• Good fatigue resistance.
• Specific gravity: 1.13. Not buoyant in water.
• Stronger than polypropylene.

POLYPROPYLENE COMPOSITEA standard material for use in applications where both high strength and chemical resistance are required.
• Temperature range: -20°F to 220°F (-29°C to 104°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.0004 in/ft/°F (0.06 mm/m/°C).
• Excellent strength and stiffness.
• Good chemical resistance to acids, bases, salts, and alcohol.
• Specific gravity: 1.12. Not buoyant in water.
• An electrically conductive (EC) polypropylene (PP) composite can be used to help dissipate built-up static
charges. The EC PP composite is available in S1200 Non Skid.

18

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINEPK
PK has a good balance of positive mechanical and chemical resistance properties. This material has asimilar strength to acetal, with improved toughness and chemical resistance. PK has the unique property of
low hydrocarbon permeability. This property prevents oils from soaking into the belt, which results inimproved product release and product yield.
• Temperature range: -40°F to 176°F (-40°C to 80°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00073 in/ft/°F (0.11 mm/m/°C).
• Tough.
• Abrasion resistant.
• Chemically resistant. For applications that require specific chemical resistance, contact Intralox Customer
Service for a list of chemicals.
• Impact resistant.
• Specific gravity: 1.24. Not buoyant in water.

PVDF
A specialty material with excellent chemical resistance to a wide variety of acids and bases.
• Temperature range: 34°F to 200°F (1°C to 93°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00087 in/ft/°F (0.13 mm/m/°C).
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-0 at 1/32 in (0.8 mm). For information about fire behavior and safeguarding
recommendations, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Excellent resistance to acids, bases, salts, and alcohol.
• Specific gravity: 1.78. Not buoyant in water.
• Stronger than polypropylene.
• Available in S9000 Flush Grid.

SELF EXTINGUISHING LOW MOISTURE (SELM)
This material is a polymer engineered for use in spiral belts. Self-extinguishing characteristics are importantto customers who want to reduce the risk of fires in their plants. Low moisture-absorption characteristics are
particularly important to customers who want a material that performs in humid conditions and applications
that require cleaning.
• Continuous temperature range: -50°F to 240°F (-46°C to 116°C).
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-2. For information about fire behavior and safeguarding recommendations,contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Specific gravity: 1.06. Not buoyant in water.

UVFR
This material does not sustain a flame.
• Temperature range: 34°F to 200°F (1°C to 93°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00087 in/ft/°F (0.13 mm/m/°C).
• UL 94 flammability rating: V-0 at 1/32 in (0.8 mm). For information about fire behavior and safeguarding
recommendations, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Excellent resistance to ultraviolet radiation.
• Specific gravity: 1.78. Not buoyant in water.
• UVFR is available in S1100 Flush Grid and S900 Perforated Flat Top.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

19

2 PRODUCT LINEUV RESISTANT
UV-resistant acetal and black polypropylene are available for applications that require UV protection.
• Temperature range:- UV-resistant acetal: -50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C).
- UV-resistant polypropylene: 34°F to 220°F (1°C to 104°C).
- Not buoyant in water.

X-RAY DETECTABLE ACETALThis material is specifically designed for detection by X-ray machines and is recommended for applicationsin the food-processing industry where foreign material contamination is a concern. Testing the material in an
X-ray detector in the production environment is the best method for determining detection sensitivity. X-ray
detectable materials are heavier in weight and require special design considerations. Intralox encourages theuse of regular (unfilled) materials combined with conveyor design and preventive maintenance to mitigate therisk of foreign material contamination. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.0007 in/ft/°F (0.10 mm/m/°C).
• To be used upline from an X-ray detector.
• Detectable materials use additives that respond to metal detectors, X-ray detectors, or both.
• Detectable materials perform differently than materials that do not contain these additives. Dry or abrasive
environments can cause increased wear to detectable materials. Increased wear creates additional dust
throughout the conveyor system.
• When detectable materials must be used, always use Intralox conveyor design guidelines for decreasing
wear and reducing the risk of dust.
• Has the same chemical resistance as regular acetal.
• Specific gravity: 1.73–1.70. Not buoyant in water.

X-RAY DETECTABLE PK
This material is specifically designed for detection by X-ray machines and is recommended for applicationsin the food-processing industry where foreign material contamination is a concern. Testing the material in an
X-ray detector in the production environment is the best method for determining detection sensitivity. X-ray
detectable materials are heavier in weight and require special design considerations. Intralox encourages theuse of regular (unfilled) materials combined with conveyor design and preventive maintenance to mitigate therisk of foreign material contamination. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Temperature range: -40°F to 176°F (-40°C to 80°C).
• Thermal expansion coefficient: 0.00070 in/ft/˚F (0.105 mm/m/˚C).
• To be used upline from an X-ray detector.
• Detectable materials use additives that respond to metal detectors, X-ray detectors, or both.
• Detectable materials perform differently than materials that do not contain these additives. Dry or abrasive
environments can cause increased wear to detectable materials. Increased wear creates additional dust
throughout the conveyor system.
• In dry environments, use PK rods or acetal rods rather than X-ray detectable PK rods.
• When detectable materials must be used, always use Intralox conveyor design guidelines for decreasing
wear and reducing the risk of dust.
• Abrasion resistant.
• Tough and impact resistant above 32˚F (0°C).
• Specific gravity: 1.51. Not buoyant in water.

20

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
BELT MATERIAL PROPERTIESSPECIFIC GRAVITY
This value is the ratio of the material density to the density of water at normal pressures and temperatures. A
specific gravity greater than 1.0 means the material is heavier than water. A specific gravity less than 1.0
means the material is buoyant in water. For the specific gravity for each belt material, see General
Application Belt Materials and Special Application Belt Materials.

FRICTION FACTORS
Friction factors determine the amount of drag induced by the belt sliding on the conveyor frame or sliding
under the conveyed product. Lower friction factors lead to lower line pressures, less product marring, andlower belt pull and power requirements. Higher friction is sometimes required for gradual inclines or declines,
or for higher line pressures necessary to feed other equipment.
Friction factor values are highly dependent on environmental conditions. The low value of the friction factor
range is an experimentally derived friction factor for new belts on new wearstrips. Only use this value in thecleanest environments, or where water or other lubricating agents are present. Most friction factors must be
adjusted based on the environmental conditions surrounding the conveyor.
For a conveyor belt strength analysis, use a higher friction factor than normal if any abrasive material, suchas flour, sand, cardboard dust, glass, or similar are present. Very abrasive conditions can require friction
factors that are two to three times higher than recommended for clean conditions. Use either the Intralox
Engineering Program or the manual calculations provided in Belt Selection Instructions to perform a
conveyor belt strength analysis.
Friction Between Product and Belt Material(used in Product Accumulation)a

Friction Between Wearstrip andBelt Material

UHMW-PE
Nylatron
CS & SS Steel
Glass
Steel
Plastic
Cardboard
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Conditions: (S) = smooth, clean conditions. (A) = abrasive, dirty conditions. NR = not recommended.

Belt Material (Conditions)

Aluminum
Wet
Dry

Acetal (S)

0.10

0.10

0.13

0.15

0.18

0.19

0.13

0.14

0.13

0.13

0.13

0.16

–

0.18

0.33

0.27

AR nylon max. temp (A)

–

0.32

–

0.36

–

0.30

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

AR nylon max. temp (S)

–

0.19

–

0.24

–

0.31

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

Detectable nylon max. temp (A)

–

0.32

–

0.36

–

0.30

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

Detectable nylon max. temp (S)

–

0.19

–

0.24

–

0.31

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

Detectable polypropylene A22

0.24

0.27

0.28

0.29

0.26

0.30

0.18

0.20

0.26

0.30

0.26

0.29

–

0.37

0.40

0.40

Easy Release PLUS (S)

0.11

0.13

0.24

0.25

0.26

0.26

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.30

FR TPES (S)

–

0.13

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.18

–

Hi-Impact

0.23

0.21

–

–

0.31

0.33

–

–

–

0.64

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

HR nylon 72°F (22°C) (A)

–

0.30

–

0.26

–

0.26

–

0.16

–

0.27

–

0.16

–

0.19

–

0.28

HR nylon 72°F (22°C) (S)

–

0.18

–

0.17

–

0.27

–

0.16

–

0.27

–

0.16

–

0.19

–

0.28

HHR Nylon max. temp. (A)

NR

NR

–

0.32

–

0.39

–

0.19

–

0.27

–

0.47

–

0.23

–

0.25

HHR Nylon max. temp. (S)

NR

NR

–

0.18

–

0.27

–

0.19

–

0.27

–

0.47

–

0.23

–

0.25

HSEC acetal (S)

0.10

0.10

0.13

0.15

0.18

0.19

0.13

0.14

0.19

0.20

0.13

0.16

–

0.18

0.33

0.27

LMAR (A)

–

0.32

–

0.36

–

0.30

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

LMAR (S)

–

0.19

–

0.24

–

0.31

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

PK

0.10

0.21

–

–

0.21

0.24

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Polyethyleneb (S)

0.24

0.32

0.14

0.13

0.14

0.15

0.08

0.09

0.10

0.13

0.08

0.08

–

0.15

0.20

0.24

Polypropylene (A)

NR

NR

0.29

0.30

0.31

0.31

0.18

0.19

0.26

0.32

0.11

0.17

–

0.21

0.40

0.40

Polypropylene (S)

0.11

0.13

0.24

0.25

0.26

0.26

0.18

0.19

0.26

0.32

0.11

0.17

–

0.21

0.40

0.40

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

21

2 PRODUCT LINE
Friction Between Product and Belt Material(used in Product Accumulation)a

Friction Between Wearstrip andBelt Material
UHMW-PE
Nylatron
CS & SS Steel

Glass

Steel

Plastic

Cardboard

Belt Material (Conditions)

Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Dry
Wet
Conditions: (S) = smooth, clean conditions. (A) = abrasive, dirty conditions. NR = not recommended.

Dry

Aluminum
Wet

Dry

Polypropylene composite (S)

0.30

0.35

–

–

0.31

0.37

0.24

0.23

0.36

0.32

0.17

0.21

–

–

0.55

0.45

PVDF

–

–

–

–

0.20

0.20

–

–

0.20

0.20

–

–

–

–

0.15

0.15

SELM (A)

–

0.32

–

0.36

–

0.30

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

SELM (S)

–

0.19

–

0.24

–

0.31

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.22

–

0.31

UV-resistant polypropylene

0.11

0.13

0.24

0.25

0.26

0.26

0.18

0.19

0.26

0.32

0.11

0.17

–

0.21

0.40

0.40

a Friction factors for friction between product and belt only apply for Flat Top, Perforated Flat Top, Mesh Top, Flush Grid and Raised Rib belts.
b Polyethylene is not recommended for container handling.

TEMPERATURE
Temperature affects the physical properties of thermoplastic materials. Generally, as the operating
temperature increases, belts weaken in strength, but become tougher and more impact-resistant. In colder
applications, belts become stiffer and sometimes become brittle.
For temperature factors for Intralox belt materials, see Table 2: Temperature Factors.

THERMAL EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
With few exceptions, the dimensions of all substances increase as their temperature is increased andcontract as their temperature is decreased. Since plastics expand and contract rather significantly, thisfactor must be considered in the conveyor design whenever operating temperatures differ from ambient
temperature. For more information, see Dimension Changes in the Design Guidelines chapter.
To calculate expected dimension changes due to thermal expansion or contraction, use CalcLab or thefollowing formula.
Formula 1:
Δ = L or W × (T2 -T1) × e

Δchange in dimension, in (mm)L or W total belt length or width at ambient temperature, ft. (m)T1ambient temperature
T2
operating temperatureecoefficient of thermal expansion, in/ft/°F (mm/m/°C), provide in the following table.
The following table provides coefficients of thermal expansion for belt and conveyor component materials.
Coefficients of Thermal Expansion
Materials
Belts
Acetal, HSEC acetal
Composite polypropylene
ChemBlox
Detectable acetal
Detectable MX
Detectable nylon
Detectable PP A22
Easy Release PLUS
Easy Release Traceable PP (greater than 100°F [38°C])
Easy Release Traceable PP (less than 100°F [38°C])
Enduralox PP

22in/ft/°F

mm/m/°C

0.00072
0.00040.00087
0.00072
0.00072
0.000720.00110.00040.001
0.00080.0004

0.11
0.06
0.13
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.17
0.06
0.15
0.12
0.06

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Coefficients of Thermal Expansion
Materials
Belts
Flame retardant

in/ft/°F

mm/m/°C

0.00080.12

Hi-Impact
LMAR
Low Wear Plus
Nylon (HR, HHR, AR)
PK
Polyethylene: S100 belts
Polyethylene: S400 Raised Rib belts
Polyethylene: all other belts
Polypropylene (greater than 100°F [38°C])
Polypropylene (less than 100°F [38°C])
PVDF
SELM
UVFR
UV-resistant acetal
UV-resistant polypropylene (greater than 100°F [38°C])
UV-resistant polypropylene (less than 100°F [38°C])
X-ray detectable
Wearstrips

0.00100.000960.001
0.00050.000730.00150.00150.00110.00100.00080.00087
0.00050.00087
0.000720.001
0.00080.00072

0.156
0.15
0.15
0.07
0.11
0.23
0.23
0.17
0.15
0.12
0.13
0.07
0.13
0.11
0.15
0.12
0.10

HDPE and UHMW-PE -100°F to 86°F (-73°C to 30°C)
HDPE and UHMW-PE 86°F to 210°F (30°C to 99°C)
Nylatron
TeflonMetals0.00090.00120.00040.0008

0.14
0.18
0.06
0.12

Aluminum
Steel (carbon and stainless)

0.000140.00007

0.02
0.01

BELT MATERIAL COMPLIANCE
FDA COMPLIANT
The material meets the FDA requirements described in the applicable Code of Federal Regulations, Chapter
21, Part 177 as noted. The material is chemically acceptable to the USDA for repeat use applications inslaughtering, processing, transporting, and storage areas in direct contact with meat or poultry products.

EU COMPLIANT
The material complies with the framework regulation 1935/2004/EC. The monomers and additives used tomake the plastic are listed in the Union List. When tested to the criteria described in EU Regulation 10/2011,
the finished article did not exceed the overall migration limit (OML) and any applicable specific migration
limits (SML).

3A DAIRY TESTEDThis test is based on materials, not product design. In accelerated use testing, the materials show that when
they are cleaned and sanitized they maintain essential functional properties and surface finish.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts23

2 PRODUCT LINE
Belt Material Compliancea
Material Name
AcetalAR nylon

FDA Compliant
FCN 1892
21 CFR 177.1500

EU Compliant
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011

3-A Dairy Tested
20-27
20-27 (white)

ChemBlox™
Detectable acetal
Detectable MX A25
Detectable nylon
Detectable polypropylene A22
Enduralox polypropylene

21 CFR 177.2510

1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011

Not tested

21 CFR 177.2470
21 CFR 177.2480
21 CFR 177.1500
21 CFR 177.1520
21 CFR 177.1520

1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
Not compliant due to sizing agent
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011

20-25
20-27
Not tested
20-27
Not tested

HR nylon
HHR nylon
Hi-Impact
Hi-TempLMAR
Low Wear Plus
Nylon
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene composite
PK
SELM
X-ray detectable acetal
X-ray detectable PK

21 CFR 177.1500
21 CFR 177.1500
21 CFR 177.2600
21 CFR 177.2415
FCN 1573
21 CFR 177.2600
21 CFR 177.1500
21 CFR 177.1520
21 CFR 177.1520
21 CFR 177.1520
FCN 1847
21 CFR 177.1500
21 CFR 177.2470
FCN 1847

1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011
1935/2004/EC Regulation 10/2011

20-27 (white)
Not tested
Not tested
Not tested
Not tested
Not tested
Not tested
20-23 (blue, natural, red)
20-25 (blue, white, natural)
Not tested
Not tested
Not tested
Not tested
Not tested

a Contact Intralox Customer Service to verify compliance for specific belt series, styles, and material color combinations.

GENERAL APPLICATION SPROCKET MATERIALACETAL
These sprockets are used for most general-purpose applications. This material is considerably stronger thanpolypropylene and polyurethane, and has a good balance of mechanical, thermal, and chemical properties.
• Acetal has good fatigue endurance and resilience.
• Acetal is resistant to wear caused by abrasive applications.
• Temperature range: -50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C).
• This material complies with FDA regulations for use in food processing and packaging applications.

SPECIAL APPLICATION SPROCKET MATERIALS
Not all sprocket pitch diameters, bore sizes, and material combinations are available in all series. Certain
sprockets are made to order, and are not stocked. Some sprockets have long lead time items. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.

24

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINEGLASS-FILLED NYLONThis material is more abrasion resistant than acetal but not as abrasion resistant as stainless steel. Glassfilled nylon is not chemical resistant.
• Also available as a two-material split sprocket with a polypropylene joining plate and a glass-filled nylon
tooth plate.
• Temperature range for split sprockets with polypropylene joining plates: 45°F to 220°F (7°C to 104°C).
• Temperature range for all other glass-filled nylon sprockets: -51°F to 240°F (-46°C to 116°C).

NYLON
These sprockets are used in abrasive applications.
• Temperature range is -50°F to 240°F (-46°C to 116°C).

POLYPROPYLENE
These sprockets are used for applications where chemical resistance can be required.
• Polypropylene (PP) has good chemical resistance to many acids, bases, salts, and alcohols.
• The temperature range of PP is 34°F to 220°F (1°C to 104°C).
• A relatively strong material in normal use, PP exhibits a somewhat brittle quality at low temperatures. It is
not recommended in high impact conditions below 45°F (7°C).
• This material complies with FDA regulations for use in food processing and packaging applications.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for PP sprocket availability.

POLYPROPYLENE COMPOSITE
Polypropylene composite is a standard material for use in applications where both high strength andchemical resistance are required.
• Excellent strength and stiffness.
• Good chemical resistance to acids, bases, salts, and alcohol.
• Specific gravity: 1.12.
• Temperature range: -20°F to 220°F (-29°C to 104°C).
• The thermal expansion coefficient: 0.0004 in/ft/°F (0.06 mm/m/°C).

POLYURETHANE
These sprockets are used for applications where abrasive wear is common.
• The temperature range of polyurethane is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Polyurethane becomes soft andflexible at high temperatures and has good chemical resistance.

POLYURETHANE COMPOSITE
This material is extremely rigid and can handle a large range of chemicals and temperatures.
• The temperature range is -50°F to 240°F (-46°C to 116°C).
• Avoid polyurethane composite split sprockets in high impact conditions below 45°F (7°C).
• Polyurethane composite split sprockets are recommended for drive shafts only.
• Some polyurethane composite split sprockets consist of one polyurethane composite tooth plateassembled between polypropylene joining plates that form the hub of the sprocket. Other polyurethanecomposite split sprockets do not use joining plates.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts25

2 PRODUCT LINESTAINLESS STEEL
These split sprockets are used in applications with abrasive wear, or when shaft removal is not practical.
There are two types of stainless steel sprockets. The all-metal abrasion resistant sprockets are available in amany series and pitch diameters. The stainless steel split consists of one to three stainless steel tooth plates
assembled between polypropylene joining plates that form the hub of the sprocket.
• The sprocket is split into two pieces for easy assembly on and off a shaft.
• Stainless steel split sprockets have good chemical resistance.
• The temperature range for polypropylene is 34°F to 220°F (1°C to 104°C).
• A relatively strong material in normal use, polypropylene exhibits a somewhat brittle quality at low
temperatures. It is not recommended in high impact conditions below 45°F (7°C).
• These materials are FDA-compliant for use in food processing and packaging applications.
• These sprockets are built standard with 304 stainless steel plates and can be specially ordered with 316
stainless steel plates.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.

ULTRA ABRASION RESISTANT POLYURETHANE• For abrasive, heavy-duty applications.
• For non-FDA applications.
• Temperature range -40°F to 160°F (-40°C to 70°C).
• Series 400 has a lower rating when using ultra abrasion resistant polyurethane sprockets.

ULTRA HIGH MOLECULAR WEIGHT POLYETHYLENE (UHMW-PE)• Temperature range: -100°F to 150°F (-73°C to 66°C).

SPROCKET MATERIAL AVAILABILITY
The following table lists the materials available for each Intralox sprocket by series and pitch diameter. Note:
not all sprockets of each pitch diameter are available in all listed materials. A material available for one bore
type or bore size is not always available for other bore types or bore sizes of the same series and pitch
diameter sprocket. Sprockets are either stocked or made-to-order, and can have long lead times. Leadtimes vary by sprocket. Some make-to-order sprockets also have set up charges. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for specific lead times and availability.
Sprocket Materialsa
NumberPolySplit ARbof Teeth Acetal propylene Metal Metal Nylon
Symbol legend: • = available.
Pitch Diameterin (mm)Polyurethane

GlassFilled
Nylon

Polyethylene

Polyurethane
Composite

Polypropylene
Ultra ARb
Polyurethane Composite

S100
2.0 (51)6•

3.5 (89)

11

•

•
•

•

•

6.1 (155)

19

•

•

•

•

4.0 (102)6••

6.4 (163)

10

•

•

•

10.1 (257)

16

•

•

•

S200

26

•
•

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
PolySplit ARb
Pitch Diameter Numberin (mm)of Teeth Acetal propylene Metal Metal Nylon
Symbol legend: • = available.

Sprocket Materialsa
GlassPolyFilled
Polyurethane
Nylon
ethylene

Polyurethane
Composite

PolyUltra ARb
propylene
Polyurethane Composite

S400
4.0 (102)

6

•

•

•

5.2 (132)

8

•

•

•

•

•

5.8 (147)9

6.4 (163)

10

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

7.8 (198)

12

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

8.4 (213)13

10.1 (257)

16

•

•

•

•

•

•c

•c
•

•

S560
1.8 (46)18•

2.4 (61)24•

3.2 (81)32•

3.6 (91)36•

4.0 (102)6••

5.2 (132)

8

•

•

•

•

6.5 (165)

10

•

•

•d

•

•

7.7 (196)

12

•

•

•d

•

•

10.3 (262)

16

•

•

•d

4.0 (102)6••

5.2 (132)

8

•

•

•d

•

6.5 (165)

10

•

•

•d

•

7.7 (196)

12

•

•

•d

•

10.3 (262)

16

•

•

•d

6.5 (165)

10

•

•

7.7 (196)

12

•

•

6

•

•

S800
•

•

S850
•

S888

S900
2.1 (53)
3.1 (79)9••

3.5 (89)

10

•

•

•

4.1 (104)

12

•

•

•

5.1 (130)15

5.8 (147)

17

•

•

•

•

6.1 (155)

18

•

•

•

•

•

•

6.8 (173)

20

•

•

•

•

•

•

9.7 (246)

28

•

•

•

•
•

•

S1000
3.1 (7.9)

16

•

•

4.6 (117)

24

•

•

•

5.8 (147)

30

•

•

•

6.1 (155)

32

•

•

•

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

•
•

27

2 PRODUCT LINE
PolySplit ARb
Pitch Diameter Numberin (mm)of Teeth Acetal propylene Metal Metal Nylon
Symbol legend: • = available.

Sprocket Materialsa
GlassPolyFilled
Polyurethane
Nylon
ethylene

Polyurethane
Composite

PolyUltra ARb
propylene
Polyurethane Composite

S1100
1.6 (41)8

2.3 (58)12••

3.1 (79)

16

•

•
•

3.5 (89)18••

3.8 (97)

20

•

•

•

4.6 (117)

24

•

•

•

5.1 (130)

26

•

•

•

6.1 (155)

32

•

•

•

•
•

S1200
5.6 (142)12•

6.5(165)14•

7.4 (188)16•

7.9 (201)17•10.2 (258)

22

•

•

•

S1400
3.9 (99)12•

4.9 (124)

15•

5.1 (130)16

5.7 (145)18

6.7 (170)

21

7.7 (196)24

9.9 (251)

31

•
•

•
•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•
•

•

S1500
1.9 (48)12•

2.3 (58)14•

2.7 (69)17•

3.8 (97)24••

5.7 (145)

36

•

•

2.0 (51)6•

3.2 (81)10••

3.9 (99)12••

6.4 (163)

20

•

•

2.0 (51)6•

3.2 (81)10•

3.9 (99)12•

6.4 (163)

20

•

S1600

S1650

S1700
5.8 (147)12•

6.7 (170)

14•

7.7 (196)16•

10.5 (267)22•

6.8 (173)14•

7.8 (198)

16•

10.6 (269)

22

•

S1750

28

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
PolySplit ARb
Pitch Diameter Numberin (mm)of Teeth Acetal propylene Metal Metal Nylon
Symbol legend: • = available.

Sprocket Materialsa
GlassPolyFilled
Polyurethane
Nylon
ethylene

Polyurethane
Composite

PolyUltra ARb
propylene
Polyurethane Composite

S1800
5.0 (127)6•

6.5 (165)8•8.1 (206)10•

10.5 (267)

13

•

S1900
6.7 (170)10•10.0 (254)15•

10.6 (269)

16

•

S2100
2.3-6.9 (58-175)

12

•

S2200
3.9 (99)8••

5.3 (135)

11

•

•

6.3 (160)

13

•

•

7.7 (196)

16

•

•

•

S2300
3.9 (99)12•

5.1 (130)16•

5.8 (147)18•

6.4 (163)

20

•

S2400
2.0 (51)6

2.9 (74)9••

3.9 (99)12••

5.1 (130)

16

•

•

6.4 (163)

20

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

S2600
5.2 (132)8••

6.5 (165)

10

•

•

5.2 (132)8•

6.5 (165)

10

•

13

•

13

•

13

•

13

•

S2700

S2800
6.3 (160)
S2850
6.2 (157)
S2900
6.2 (157)
S2950
6.2 (157)
S3000
5.2 (132)8•

6.5 (165)10•

7.7 (196)12•2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts29

2 PRODUCT LINE
PolySplit ARb
Pitch Diameter Numberin (mm)of Teeth Acetal propylene Metal Metal Nylon
Symbol legend: • = available.

Sprocket Materialsa
GlassPolyFilled
Polyurethane
Nylon
ethylene

Polyurethane
Composite

PolyUltra ARb
propylene
Polyurethane Composite

S4000
3.9 (99)12•

4.9 (124)

15•

5.1 (130)16

5.7 (145)18

6.7 (170)

21

9.9 (251)

31

•
•

•
•
•

•

S4400
4.0 (102)6•

5.3 (135)8•

6.5 (165)10

7.8 (198)12

10.3 (262)

16

•
•
•

•

S4500
6.5 (165)

10

•

•

7.8 (198)

12

•

•

10.3 (262)

16

•

•

•

3.3 (84)10•

4.2 (107)13•

6.1 (155)19

6.5 (165)

20

S9000

8.1 (206)25

12.9 (328)

40

•
•

•

•

•

•
•

•

S100009.9 (251)10•11.8 (300)12•13.7 (348)14•15.7 (399)16•a All Intralox sprockets can be classified either as stock items or as make-to-order items. Some make-to-order items incur special setup charges. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for pricing, lead times, and availability.
b Abrasion resistant.
c For use with Series 400 Flush Grid acetal and HSEC acetal only.
d Available in three-plate, abrasion resistant split design.

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONS
To determine if a belt is suitable for a particular application, the operating load versus operating strengthmust be identified. Use the following steps to calculate this comparison:302024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
STEP 1: CALCULATE BELT PULL
BP is the belt tension when the belt is under load.
Formula 2:
BP = [(M + 2W) × Fw + Mp] × L + (M × H)

where:
BP = belt pull (belt tension load in lbf/ft (N/m)
M = product load, lbf/ft2 (N/m2)
W = belt weight, lbf/ft2 (N/m2). See Note.
L = length of conveyor, ft (m), centerline
H = elevation change of conveyor, ft (m)Fw = wearstrip to belt friction coefficient. See Note.
Mp = M × (Fp × % belt backed-up), load due to product accumulation. See Note.
NOTE: Obtain belt mass from the belt data table for each belt and convert belt mass to belt weight (W).
Obtain Fw and Fp from the belt data table for each belt. If product accumulation is not expected, ignore Mp.

STEP 2: ADJUST CALCULATED BELT PULL FOR ACTUAL SERVICE CONDITIONS
Since the belt can experience various conditions, adjust the BP by applying an appropriate service factor(SF).
1. Use the following table to determine SF:
Operating Conditions

Add

Starts under no load, with load applied gradually
Frequent starts under load (more than once per
hour)

1.0

Operation at speeds greater than 100 fpm (30 m/
min)

0.2

Elevating conveyor
Pusher conveyor
Service factor (SF)

0.4
0.2
total

0.2

NOTE: At speeds greater than 50 fpm (15 m/min) on conveyors that are started with backed-up lines,
consider soft-start motors.
2. Use one of the following formulas to determine the adjusted belt pull (ABP):
Formula 3:
ABP = BP × SF

where:
ABP = adjusted belt pull, lbf/ft (N/m) of belt width
BP = belt pull
SF = service factor
Formula 4:
ABP for bi-directional and pusher conveyors = BP × SF × 2.2

where:
ABP = adjusted belt pull, lbf/ft (N/m) of belt width
BP = belt pull
SF = service factor

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

31

2 PRODUCT LINE
STEP 3: CALCULATE ALLOWABLE BELT STRENGTH
Due to specific operating conditions, allowable belt strength (ABS) is sometimes less than the rated belt
strength. Use the following formula to calculate the ABS.
Formula 5:
ABS = BS × T × S

where:
ABS = allowable belt strength
BS = belt strength from the belt data table for the selected belt. See Product Line.
T = temperature factor from Table 2: Temperature Factors.
S = strength factor from the belt data table for the selected belt. See Product Line.
The strength factor is found at the intersection of the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line.
To get the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed (ft/min) by the shaft centerline distance (ft). The strength
factor adjusts the belt rating to account for wear caused by the combination of high speed, short conveyor
lengths, and small sprocket sizes.

STEP 4: COMPARE ABP WITH ABS
If the ABS exceeds ABP, this belt is strong enough for your application. Proceed to the next steps todetermine drive shaft sprocket spacing, shaft strength, and horsepower required.
If the ABS is less than ABP, consider changing some application parameters (for example, product load
distribution or belt speed), until the recalculated ABP is acceptable.

STEP 5: DETERMINE MAXIMUM SPACING OF DRIVE SHAFT SPROCKETSFirst, determine the percentage of allowable belt strength utilized (ABSU):
Formula 6:
ABSU = (ABP ÷ ABS) × 100%

where:
ABSU = allowable belt strength utilized
ABP = adjusted belt pull, lbf/ft (N/m) of belt width
ABS = allowable belt strength
If the calculated ABSU is above 75%, contact Intralox Customer Service to run the Intralox Engineering
Program and verify your results.
Using the ABSU, find the maximum sprocket spacing from the Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt
Strength Utilized graph for the series you are considering. See Product Line.
NOTE: Sprocket spacing on idle shafts can sometimes be greater than the spacing required on drive shafts.
Do not exceed 6.0 in (152 mm) sprocket spacing on idle shafts for all series except S200, where themaximum spacing can never exceed 7.5 in (191 mm).

STEP 6: CONFIRM DRIVE SHAFT STRENGTH
Drive shafts must be stiff enough to resist excessive bending or deflecting under the belt pull, and strong
enough to transmit the required torque from the driver. To ensure adequate shaft selection, determine both
the drive shaft deflection and torque.
1. Select a shaft size which fits your sprocket of choice from the sprocket data page.
NOTE: Most sprockets have more than one available bore size.

32

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
2. The shaft deflects under the combined loads of the adjusted belt pull and the shaft weight. Use thefollowing formula to calculate the total shaft load:
Formula 7:
w = (ABP + Q) × B

where:
w = total shaft load
ABP = adjusted belt pull, lbf/ft (N/m) of belt width
Q = shaft weight, lbf/ft (N/m), from Table 3: Shaft Data.
B = belt width, ft (m)3. For shafts supported by two bearings, use the following formula to calculate shaft deflection. Use
CalcLab to calculate deflection when using more than two bearings.
Formula 8:

w × LS
D= 5 ×384
E×I

3

where:
D = shaft deflection
w = total shaft load
Ls = length of shaft between bearings, in (mm)E = modulus of elasticity from Table 3: Shaft Data
I = moment of inertia from Table 3: Shaft Data
4. If the calculated deflection is less than the recommended maximum of 0.10 in (2.5 mm) for standard
conveyors or 0.22 in (5.6 mm) for bi-directional conveyors, use the following formula to calculate therequired torque. If the calculated deflection is at or above the recommended maximum, select a larger
size shaft, a stronger material, or a shorter span between bearings, and recalculate the deflection.
Formula 9:

TO = ABP × B × PD
2

where:
To = transmitted torque
ABP = adjusted belt pull, lbf/ft (N/m) of belt width
B = belt width, ft (m)PD = sprocket pitch diameter of the selected sprocket. See Product Line.
5. Compare To with the maximum recommended torque on the drive shaft for the shaft journal sizes shown.
See Table 4: Maximum Recommended Torque on Drive Shaft. Using a journal diameter which can bemachined on the selected shaft, determine the maximum recommended torque. Ensure this value does
not exceed To. If it does exceed To, select a stronger material or larger shaft.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

33

2 PRODUCT LINE
STEP 7: DETERMINE THE POWER NEEDED TO DRIVE THE BELT
Use the following formulas to determine the required horsepower and power in watts.
Formula 10:
HP = ABP × B × V
33000

where:
HP = drive horsepower
ABP = adjusted belt pull, lbf/ft of belt width
B = belt width, ft
V = belt speed, ft/min
Formula 11:
W = ABP × B × V
6.12
1 HP = 445.7 W

where:
W = watts
ABP = adjusted belt pull, lbf/ft of belt width
B = belt width, ft
V = belt speed, ft/min
HP = drive horsepower
To obtain the required motor power, add expected power losses in the drive train between drive shaft andmotor to the calculated power. See Power Requirements for recommendations.
Having determined the suitability of the belt, the sprocket spacing, the drive shaft size, and the power
requirements, you are now ready to select accessories and design the conveyor assembly.

34

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINESTRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

35

36

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
1.5
0.25
0.2 × 0.2

mm
25.4
38
6.4
5×5

31%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 100• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth upper surface.
• Smaller pitch reduces chordal action and transfer dead plate gap.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For more material selections and stronger belt performance, see S560,
S900, S1000, and S1100.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalHSEC acetal
AcetalaDefault Rod Material,
Diameter
0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
300
200
600
400
550

N/m
4,380
2,920
8,760
5,840
8,030

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 70°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 21

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.54
0.58
0.78
0.78
0.78

kg/m²
2.64
2.83
3.81
3.81
3.81

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

37

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
1.5
0.25
0.2 × 0.2

mm
25.4
38
6.4
5×5

31%
28%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 100• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface with closely spaced ribs.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Can be used with finger transfer plates to eliminate product tippingand hang-ups.
• For more material selections and stronger belt performance, see Series
900 Raised Rib.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
N/m
300
4,380
200
2,920
600
8,760

Temperature Range(continuous)°F°C
34 to 220
1 to 104-50 to 150-46 to 66
34 to 200
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
kg/m²
0.82
4.00
0.88
4.29
1.20
5.86

AcetalaPolyethylene

550-50 to 70

1.20

8,030

-46 to 21

5.86

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

38

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Wearstrips

in
2
4
6
7
8
10
12

mm
51
102
152
178
203
254
305

Minimum Number of
Sprockets Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
2
2
3

Carryway
2
2
2
3
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

3
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7

4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

8
9
10
11
13
15
17
21
25

5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

42
1,067
7
48
1,219
9
54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
120
3,048
21
144
3,658
25
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.c

SERIES 100

Belt Width Rangea

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 0.25 in(6.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 1.5 in (38 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

39

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

19T

A 0.5
0.4

A 4.0

11T

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

B

0.3

6T
0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

1.0
0%

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 100

Molded Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
651(13.40%) 2.0
1189(4.05%) 3.5
19
6.1 155(1.36%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

2.1

53

0.75

19

1.0

3.7

94

0.75

19

6.3

160

1.25

32

1.0,
1.5
1.5,
2.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

40
40, 60,65

Split Metal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1189(4.05%) 3.5
19
6.1 155(1.36%)

40

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

3.7

94

1.5

38

1.5

40

6.3

160

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 60,65

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Streamline/No-Cling Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
1.5
38

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal• No fasteners are required.
• Streamline/No-Cling flights are smooth on one side and vertically ribbed
on one side.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Available in linear increments of 1 in (25 mm).
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.5 in (13 mm).

Sideguards

SERIES 100

Available Sizes
inmm
Available Materials
2
51
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal• Standard overlap design ensures product containment.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• When going around the 6- and 11-tooth sprockets, the sideguards fanout, opening a gap at the top that can allow small products to fall out.
The sideguards stay completely closed when wrapping around the 19tooth sprocket.
• Standard gap between sideguards and flight edge: 0.06 in (2 mm).
• Minimum indent: 0.75 in (19 mm).

Finger Transfer Plates
Available Widths
Number ofinmm
Fingers
Available Materials
4
102
16
Acetal• Designed for use with Series 100 Raised Rib belts, to eliminate producttransfer and tipping problems.
• The fingers extend between the belt ribs, to allow a smooth continuationof the product flow as the belt engages the sprockets.
• Easily installed on the conveyor frame with the supplied shoulder bolts.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

41

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Dimensional Requirements for S100 Finger Transfer Plate Installation
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M

PP
AC

in
2.38
0.19

mm
61
5

5.83
3.96
2.50
0.74
2.00
3.979
3.976

148
101
64
19
51
101.1
101.0

SERIES 100

M spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
Figure 7: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assembly

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 8: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

42

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S100 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
2.0
3.5
6.1

51
89
155

2.0
3.5
6.1

A

Numberof Teeth

B

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm

C

E

in
Flush Grid
18–21
1.30
39–41
1.70
72–73
2.20
Raised Rib

mm

in

mm

in

mm

33
43
56

2.10
3.60
6.20

53
91
157

1.24
2.01
3.30

31
51
84

6
11
19

0.69–0.83
1.53–1.60
2.82–2.87

51

6

0.69–0.83

18–21

1.30

33

2.10

53

1.45

37

89
155

11
19

1.53–1.60
2.82–2.87

39–41
72–73

1.70
2.20

43
56

3.60
6.20

91
157

2.23
3.52

57
89

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAPSERIES 100

Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S100 Dead Plate Gap

in
2.0
3.5
6.1

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
51
89
155

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
11
19

in
0.134
0.073
0.041

mm
3.4
1.9
1.0

43

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 100
442024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.36
0.23 × 0.48

mm
50.8
51
9.1
5.8 × 12.3

33%
ClosedSecond headed; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 200• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Large, open area allows excellent drainage.
• Has double-headed hinge rods, so the belt edge is not fully flush.
• Low-profile, transverse ridges help move products up or down inclines.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flights and sideguards are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,400
900

N/m
20,40013,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220-100 to 150°C
1 to 104-73 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.24
1.26

kg/m²
6.05
6.15

45

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.36
0.22 × 0.49

mm
50.8
51
9.1
5.5 × 12.5

33%
ClosedSecond headed; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 200• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush Grid pattern with smooth upper surface.
• Provides excellent lateral movement of containers.
• One of the strongest S200 belt styles.
• Uses double-headed hinge rods, so the belt edge is not fully flush.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For more material selections, see S400, S900, S1100, S2200, andS4500 belt styles.
• Flights and sideguards are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

46

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,800
1,200

N/m
26,30017,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220-100 to 150°C
1 to 104-73 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.40
1.44

kg/m²
6.83
7.03

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Hinge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.36
0.26 × 0.48

mm
50.8
51
9.1
6.7 × 12.3

45%
Open
Second headed; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 200• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Provides a smooth surface and a generous open area for foodhandling.
• Uses double-headed hinge rods, so the belt edge is not fully flush.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ideal where air cooling, washing, or drying is required.
• For stronger belt performance, see S800 belts.
• Flights and sideguards are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
300
200

N/m
4,380
2,920

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.04
1.12

kg/m²
5.08
5.47

47

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

SERIES 200

in
2
4
6
7
8
10
12

mm
51
102
152
178
203
254
305

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
2
2
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
2
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5

3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

6
7
7
8
9
11
12
15
17

5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

42
1,067
7
48
1,219
7
54
1,372
9
60
1,524
9
72
1,829
11
84
2,134
13
96
2,438
13
120
3,048
17
144
3,658
21
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 7.5 in(191 mm) centerline spacing.ca If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 0.36 in(9.1 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 2 in (51 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

48

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

0.7
0.6

6.0

7.0

10T

0.3

6T
1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

152
127

E

A 4.0

0.4

178

D

5.0

16T

A 0.5

0.2

203

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C Percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D Dashed line: double-wide sprocket
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of E Solid line: all other sprockets
A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

90%

100%

SERIES 200

the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

Molded Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
6(13.40%) 4.0 102
10(4.89%) 6.4 163
16
10.1 257(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

3.9

99

1.5

38

1.5

40

6.4

163

2.5

64

40, 60

10.3

262

2.5

64

1.5,
2.5
1.5,
2.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

40

Double Wide Rim Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10
6.4 163(4.89%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.4

in
2.5

mm
163

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

mm
64

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

49

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Metal Abrasion Resistant Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.4 163

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.4

163

1.1

28

16
(1.92%)

10.3

262

1.1

28

10.1

257

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 60
2.5
1.5,
2.5

40, 60,65

Streamline Flights

SERIES 200

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
1
25
2
51
Polypropylene, polyethylene
376• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• An extension can be welded at a 45-degree angle to create a bent flight.
Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.
• Can be enlarged to 6 in (152 mm) high with a welded extension.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.7 in (18 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.

Double No-Cling Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
3
76

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene• Vertically ribbed for product release.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• An extension can be welded at a 45-degree angle to create a bent flight.
Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.
• Can be enlarged to 6 in (152 mm) high with a welded extension.
• Minimum indent without sideguards is 0.7 in (18 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.

50

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Ribbed Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
1.25
32

Available Materials

Polypropylene, polyethylene
376• Each flight rises out of an Open Grid module and has a triangular-shaped
buttress on the back side. No fasteners are required.
• Can be enlarged to 6 in (152 mm) high with a welded extension.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.7 in (18 mm).

Sideguards

SERIES 200

Available Sizes
inmm
Available Materials
2
51
3
76
Polypropylene, polyethylene
4
102
6
152
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Standard gap between sideguards and flight edge: 0.3 in (8 mm).
• Minimum indent: 0.7 in (18 mm).

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 9: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

51

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S200 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
4.0
6.4
10.1

102
163
257

Numberof Teeth
6
10
16

A

B

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
mm
in
Flush Grid, Open Grid, Open Hinge
1.42–1.69
36-43
2.20
2.77–2.92
70-74
3.00
4.72–4.81
120-122
3.20

C

E

mm

in

mm

in

mm

56
76
81

4.10
6.50
10.20

104
165
259

2.38
3.61
5.50

60
92
140

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S200 Dead Plate Gap

SERIES 200

in
4.0
6.4
10.1

52

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
102
163
257

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
10
16

in
0.268
0.160
0.100

mm
6.8
4.1
2.5

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.33
0.25 × 0.18

mm
50.8
51
8.4
6.4 × 4.6

17%
ClosedSee Product Notes.

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface and straightforward design provide free productmovement.
• Uses headed rods for belts without Slidelox rod retention. Uses
unheaded rods for belts with Slidelox rod retention.
• Slidelox rod retention is recommended for belts 6.0 ft (1829 mm) wide
and wider.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flights and sideguards are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalAcetalaDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,400
1,800
3,200
3,000

N/m
35,00026,30046,70043,800Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220-100 to 150
34 to 200
-50 to 70°C
1 to 104-73 to 66
1 to 93-46 to 21

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.82
1.90
2.77
2.77

kg/m²
8.89
9.28
13.51
13.51

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

53

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00

mm
50.8

See Product Notes.
0.25 × 0.24

6.4 × 6.1

26%
36%
ClosedSee Product Notes.

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• All S400 Raised Rib polyethylene belts use headed rods.
• All S400 Raised Rib polypropylene belts use the Slidelox rod retention
system and unheaded rods.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene. For improved chemical
resistance, Slidelox are also available in polyvinylidene (PVDF) for
Enduralox polypropylene belts.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Use with finger transfer plates to reduce tippage at infeed anddischarge.
• For stronger belt performance, see S1900 Raised Rib.
• Raised ribs extend 0.25 in (6.4 mm) above basic module.
• Custom-built in widths from 1.8 in (47 mm) and up for polyethylene
and 3.5 in (89 mm) and up for polypropylene, in 0.33 in (8.4 mm)increments.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Enduralox polypropylene

54

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,400
1,800
2,400

N/m
35,00026,30035,000Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220-100 to 150
34 to 220°C
1 to 104-73 to 66
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.95
1.98
1.95

kg/m²
9.52
9.67
9.52

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Hinge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.25
0.47 × 0.18

mm
50.8
51
6.4
11.9 × 4.6

30%
40%
Open
Second headed; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Large, open area improves airflow, drainage, and cleanability.
• Shares heavy-duty rating with other belts in this series.
• Has double-headed hinge rods, so the belt edge is not fully flush.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flights and sideguards are available.
• For more hygienic options, see S800 and S1600.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,550
950

N/m
22,60013,900Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.16
1.24

kg/m²
5.66
6.06

55

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.33
-

mm
50.8
51
8.4
0%
ClosedSee Product Notes.

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface and straightforward design provide free productmovement.
• All S400 Flat Top with abrasion resistant rods are available with
Slidelox rod retention.
• Slidelox rod retention is recommended for belts 6.0 ft (1829 mm) wide
and wider.
• Use headed rods for belts without Slidelox rod retention. Use unheadedrods with Slidelox rod retention.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Use abrasion resistant split sprockets with acetal S400 Flat Top.
• Flights and sideguards are available.
• For stronger belt performance, see Series 4500 Flat Top.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalAcetalaDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,400
1,800
3,200
3,000

N/m
35,00026,30046,70043,800Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220-100 to 150
34 to 200
-50 to 70°C
1 to 104-73 to 66
1 to 93-46 to 21

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.81
1.90
2.74
2.74

kg/m²
8.82
9.28
13.38
13.38

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

56

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
3.5
0.33
-

mm
50.8
89
8.4
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Among highest strength rating of all Intralox belts.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For stronger belt performance, see S4500 Non Skid and S4500 Non
Skid Raised Rib.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for flight availability.

Belt Data

Belt Material
HSEC acetal
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,720
2,400

N/m
39,70035,000Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-34 to 220°C-46 to 93
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.88
1.81

kg/m²
14.09
8.84

57

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Roller Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
2.00
-

mm
50.8
152
50.8
-

18%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edges.
• Uses acetal rollers.
• Uses stainless steel axles.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Allows for low back pressure accumulation.
• Roller diameter: 0.70 in (17.8 mm).
• Roller length: 0.825 in (20.9 mm).
• Standard roller indent: 0.90 in (23 mm)• Distance to centerline of first roller: 1.3 in (33 mm)• Spacing between first and second roller: 1.8 in (46 mm).
• Spacing between all other rollers: 2 in (50.8 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

58

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft2,200

N/m
32,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.44

kg/m²
11.94

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Transverse Roller Top™ (TRT™)
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
2.00
-

mm
50.8
152
50.8
-

18%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edges.
• Uses acetal rollers.
• Stainless steel axles provide durability and long-lasting performance.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for 90-degree transfers.
• For stronger belt performance, see S4400 Transverse Roller Top.
• Roller diameter: 0.70 in (17.8 mm).
• Roller length: 0.825 in (20.9 mm).
• Roller spacing: 2 in (50.8 mm).
• Standard roller indent: 0.90 in (23 mm).
• Distance to centerline of first roller: 1.3 in (33 mm).
• Spacing between first and second roller: 1.8 in (46 mm).
• Spacing between all other rollers: 2 in (50.8 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft2,200

N/m
32,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.44

kg/m²
11.94

59

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
0.85-in Diameter Transverse Roller Top™ (TRT™)
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
2.00
-

mm
50.8
152
50.8
-

18%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Uses acetal rollers.
• Stainless steel axles provide durability and long-lasting performance.
• Slidelox flush edges.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for 90-degree transfers.
• For stronger belt performance, see S4400 Transverse Roller Top.
• Roller diameter: 0.85 in (21.6 mm).
• Roller length: 0.825 in (20.9 mm).
• Standard roller indent: 0.90 in (23 mm).
• Distance to centerline of first roller: 1.3 in (33 mm).
• Spacing between first and second roller: 1.8 in (46 mm).
• Spacing between all other rollers: 2 in (50.8 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

60

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft2,200

N/m
32,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.81

kg/m²
13.71

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
0-Degree Angled Roller™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
2.00
-

mm
50.8
152
50.8
-

11%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Uses Activated Roller Belt™ (ARB ™) technology.
• Black or grey polyurethane rollers are available.
• Black polyurethane rollers are not recommended for productaccumulations.
• All rollers have an acetal core.
• Axles are stainless steel.
• Rollers are inline with the direction of belt travel.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed to run on a flat, continuous carryway. A chevron carryway is
not recommended.
• When belt rollers are in motion, product moves faster than the speedof the belt. When belt rollers are not in motion, product travels at belt
speed.
• Product behavior varies depending on shape and weight of product,
conveyor design, and belt speed.
• Intralox can help you reach a more accurate estimate of productbehavior based on product and conveyor characteristics. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Custom belts with any combination of 0-degree, 30-degree, 45degree, or 60-degree angled rollers are available. Custom belts canalso include rollers oriented in different directions. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• 2.0 in (50.8 mm) roller spacing.
• Not compatible with the 4.0 in (102 mm) pitch diameter split sprocket
or all 5.2 in (132 mm) pitch diameter sprockets with 2.5 in or 60-mm
square bores.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene/black polyurethane
Polypropylene/grey polyurethane

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
1,600

N/m
23,40023,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 120°C
1 to 93
1 to 49

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.65
2.73

kg/m²
12.94
13.33

61

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
30-Degree Angled Roller™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
2.00
-

mm
50.8
152
50.8
-

11%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Uses Activated Roller Belt (ARB) technology.
• Rollers are skewed 30 degrees from the direction of belt travel.
• Grey polyurethane rollers with an acetal core are available.
• Uses stainless steel axles.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Polyethylene belts require ultra-abrasion resistant polyurethane sprocket on the drive shaft.
Any sprocket can be used on the idle shaft, except for sprockets with low back-tension
teeth.
• When belt rollers are in motion, product moves faster than the speed of the belt. When beltrollers do not rotate, product travels at belt speed.
• Product behavior varies depending on shape and weight of product, conveyor design, andbelt speed. Intralox can help you estimate product behavior based on product and conveyor
characteristics. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Centering configuration is possible using two belts with rollers oriented towards the centerof the conveyor.
• Custom belts with any combination of 0-degree, 30-degree, 45-degree, or 60-degree
angled rollers are available. Custom belts can also include rollers oriented in different
directions. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Designed to run on a flat, continuous carryway. A chevron carryway is not recommended.
• Belt can be supported using parallel wearstrips placed in between belt rollers. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Alignment belts on a flat, continuous carryway require a side wearstrip. Install the belt to
run flush along this wearstrip.
• 2 in (50.8 mm) roller spacing.
• Minimum belt width for polyethylene is 8 in (203 mm).
• Polyethylene belts between 8 in (203 mm) to 10 in (254 mm) wide must be derated to 450
lbf/ft. (6,570 N/m).
• Not compatible with the 4.0 in (102 mm) pitch diameter split sprocket.
• Not compatible with all 5.2 in (132 mm) pitch diameter sprockets with 2.5 in or 60 mm
square bores.
• If any moisture is present, the low-temperature limit of the polyethylene belt is 34° F (1° C).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene/grey polyurethane
Polyethylene/grey polyurethane

62

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
500

N/m
23,4007,300

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 120
17 to 150°C
1 to 49-8 to 65

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.64
2.93

kg/m²
12.89
14.31

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
90-Degree Angled Roller™
in
2.00
6
2.00
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
50.8
152
50.8
-

11%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

SERIES 400

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Black polyurethane rollers with an acetal core are available.
• Black polyurethane rollers are not recommended for productaccumulation conditions.
• Axles are stainless steel.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Do not allow black polyurethane rollers to contact flat, continuous
carryways or chevron carryways.
• Belt can be supported using parallel wearstrips placed between beltrollers. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Not compatible with the 4.0 in (102 mm) pitch diameter split sprocket.
• Not compatible with all 5.2 in (132 mm) pitch diameter sprockets with
2.5 in and 60-mm square bores.
• Roller spacing: 2.0 in (50.8 mm).

0.125"(3.2 mm)0.625"(15.9 mm)2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm)

0.125"(3.2 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene/black polyurethane

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,600

N/m
23,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.65

kg/m²
12.94

63

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
0.78-in Diameter 90-Degree Angled Roller™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.0
6
2.0
-

mm
50.8
152.4
50.8
-

11%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Black acetal rollers are available.
• Axles are stainless steel.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not compatible with the 4.0 in (102 mm) pitch diameter split sprocket.
• Not compatible with all 5.2 in (132 mm) pitch diameter sprockets with
2.5 in and (60 mm) square bores.
• Roller spacing: 2.0 in (50.8 mm).
0.08 in(2.0 mm)0.625 in(15.9 mm)

2.0 in(50.8 mm)0.08 in(2.0 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene/black acetal

64

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,600

N/m
23,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.65

kg/m²
12.94

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Ball Belt
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
10
2.00
-

mm
50.8
254
50.8
-

0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 400• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Acetal balls protrude beyond top and bottom of belt. Module does notcontact carryway.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Product movement is controlled by driving balls with a perpendicularsecondary conveyor, underneath the main belt.
• Product moves faster than belt speed.
• Product speed varies, depending on shape and weight of product.
• A flat continuous carryway is required.
• Designed for applications that require product redirection, alignment,
transfer, diverting, palletizing, orientation, accumulation, or
justification.
• Install alignment configurations to run flush along the side wearstrip.
• Self-set retaining rings for locking sprockets are not recommended.
• Ball diameter: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
• Distance between balls: 2 in (50.8 mm).
• Standard ball indent: 1.1 in (27.9 mm).
• Rod centerline to top or bottom of module: 0.313 in (7.9 mm).
• Rod centerline to top or bottom of ball: 0.50 in (12.7 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,400
1,600

N/m
35,00023,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 200°C
1 to 93
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.71
2.78

kg/m²
18.11
13.57

65

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

SERIES 400

in
2
4
6
7
8
10
12

mm
51
102
152
178
203
254
305

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
2
2
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
2
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

3
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7

3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

6
7
7
8
9
11
12
15
17
Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacingd

5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

42
1,067
7
48
1,219
9
54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
120
3,048
21
144
3,658
25
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.c

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing.

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Flat Top, Flush Grid, andRaised Rib belts are available in 0.33 in (8.4 mm) increments beginning with a minimum width of 2 in (51 mm). The increment for Open Hinge belts is 0.25 in (6mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.
b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.
c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.
d Ball Belt and some Angled Roller belts require a flat continuous carryway.

66

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 0.5
0.3

0.2

A 4.0

1
1 6T
8T
-9T 2T-1
1 3T
6T 0T

0.4

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

SERIES 400

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

Molded Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
6(13.40%) 4.0 102

This sprocket is compatible with all belts except Flush Grid acetal.
Nom. Outer
Nom. Hub
Diameter
Width
Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
mm
in
mm
ina
in
mma
mm
3.6

91

1.5

38

1.5

40

1.5,
2.5
1.5,
2.5

40, 608 (7.61%) 5.2

132

5.0

127

1.5

38

10
(4.89%)

6.4

163

6.3

160

1.5

38

12
(3.41%)
16(1.92%)

7.8

198

7.7

196

1.5

38

10.1

257

10.2

259

1.5

38

2.0

1.5,
2.5
1.5,
2.5,
3.5

82

40, 60,70
40, 6040, 60,90

a Round bore molded and split sprockets are frequently furnished with two keyways. Use of two keys is NOT REQUIRED nor recommended. Round bore sprockets

do not have setscrews for locking the sprockets in place. As with square bore sprockets, only the center-most sprocket must be locked down. U.S. key sizes onround bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967(R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

67

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Split Low Back Tension Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Sprocketa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.4 163
12(3.41%) 7.8 198
16
10.1 257(1.92%)

Available for all belts except Flush Grid acetal, Open Hinge, and roller belts
Nom. Outer
Nom. Hub
Diameter
Width
Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
mm
in
mm
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
6.3
160
1.5
38
40
2.5
7.7

196

1.5

38

2.5

10.2

259

1.5

38

2.5

a When using these sprockets, the maximum belt strength for all styles and materials is 1,000 lbf/ft (14,600 N/m). The sprocket temperature range is -40°F to

SERIES 400

160°F (-40°C to 71°C).

Split Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10
6.4 163(4.89%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.3

in
1.5

mm
160

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40
2.5

a When using these sprockets, the maximum belt strength for all styles and materials is 1,000 lbf/ft (14,600 N/m), and the temperature range is -40°F to 160°F(-40°C 71°C).

68

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Molded Tooth Plate Split Low Back Tension Polyurethane Composite Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.4 163
12(3.41%) 7.8 198
16
10.1 257(1.92%)

Available for all belts except Open Hinge and Roller belts.
Nom. Outer
Nom. Hub
Diameter
Width
Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
mm
in
mm
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
6.3
160 1.70
43
40, 60
2.5
1.5,
7.7
196
1.5
38
40, 602.5
10.2 259
1.5
38
3.5
1.5,
90
2.5,
3.5

a Recommended for use on drive shafts only. There is very little belt tension when a belt engages the idle sprockets. In some applications, the belt does not have

SERIES 400

enough tension to engage the added low back tension teeth, causing the belt to disengage on the idle sprockets.

Molded Tooth Plate Split Polyurethane Composite Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10
6.4 163(4.89%)
12
7.8 198(3.41%)
16
10.1 257(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.3

mm
160

in
1.7

mm
43

7.7

196

1.5

38

10.2

259

1.5

38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

4.0

1.5

40

3.5

90

Split Metal with Polyurethane (FDA) Joining Plates Reduced Clearance Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)8 (7.61%)10(4.89%)
12(3.41%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.2

mm
132

in
5.0

mm
127

in
1.5

mm
38

6.4

163

6.3

160

1.5

38

7.8

198

7.7

196

1.5

38

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40
1.5,
40, 602.5
1.5,40, 60
2.5

69

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
HR Nylon Split Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1610.1 257(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
10.2

in
2.0

mm
196

mm
51

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
2.5
60

a For wet applications, contact Intralox Customer Service.

SERIES 400

HR Nylon Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.4 163
12(3.41%) 7.8 198
16
10.1 257(1.92%)

70

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.3

160

1.5

38

7.7

196

1.5

38

10.2

259

1.5

38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
2.5
1.5,
40, 602.5
1.5,60, 902.5,
3.52024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Split Metal Sprocket
Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

3.6

91

1.5

38

8 (7.61%) 5.2

5.0

127

1.5

38

132

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
1.5
1,
1-3/16,
1-1/4,
1-7/1610(4.89%)

6.4

163

6.3

160

1.5

38

12
(3.41%)

7.8

198

7.7

196

1.5

38

1,
1-3/16,
1-1/4,
1-3/8,
1-7/16,1-1/2,
1-15/16
1-7/16,
1-15/16

16(1.92%)

10.1

257

10.2

259

1.5

38

1-7/16,
1-15/1640

1.5

20, 30, 40, 60
40

1.5,
2.5

20, 40 40, 60

1.5,
2.5
1.5,
2.5,
3.5

40

40, 6040, 60,90

a Round bore molded and split sprockets are frequently furnished with two keyways. Use of two keys is NOT REQUIRED nor recommended. Round bore sprockets

do not have setscrews for locking the sprockets in place. As with square bore sprockets, only the center-most sprocket must be locked down. U.S. key sizes onround bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967(R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

Split Support Wheel
Pitch Diameter
in
6.4

mm
163

Available Bore Sizes
Round in1

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Square in
1.5, 2.5

Round mmSquaremm

71

SERIES 400

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
6(13.40%) 4.0 102

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Base Flights (Streamline/No-Cling)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
1
25

Available Materials

Polypropylene, polyethylene
2
51
3
76
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• The Streamline side of the flight is smooth and the No-Cling side isvertically ribbed.
• An extension can be welded at a 45-degree angle for a bent flight.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.8 in (20 mm) and the minimum
indent for a Slidelox edge (without sideguards) is 1.4 in (36 mm).

Flush Grid Base Flights (Double No-Cling)

SERIES 400

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
6152
Polypropylene, polyethylene• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.8 in (20 mm).
• Minimum indent for a Slidelox edge without sideguards: 1.4 in (36 mm).
• 45-degree bent flights are available in polypropylene with a 3 in (76 mm)tall base and with a 1 in (25 mm) or 2 in (51 mm) extension.

Open Hinge Base Flights (Streamline/No-Cling)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
1
25
2
51

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene

376• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Streamline/No-Cling flights are smooth on one side and vertically ribbed
on one side.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Flights can be extended to 6 in (152 mm) high (welded extension). The
extension can also be welded at a 45-degree angle for a bent flight.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.6 in (15 mm).

722024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top Base Flights (Streamline)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
4
102

Available Materials

Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal
6152• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Flat Top base flights cannot be used with Flush Grid belts.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.8 in (20 mm) Minimum indent fora Slidelox edge without sideguards: 1.4 in (36 mm).

Sideguards

SERIES 400

Available Sizes
inmm
Available Materials
2
51
3
76
Polypropylene, polyethylene
4
102
6
152
• Standard overlap design ensures product containment.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• When going around the 6- and 8-tooth sprockets, sideguards fan out,
opening a gap at the top that can allow small products to fall out. The
sideguards stay completely closed when going around the 10-, 12- and16-tooth sprockets.
• Standard gap between sideguards and flight edge: 0.4 in (10 mm).
• Minimum indent: 0.8 in (20 mm).

Hold Down Tabs
• Available on Non Skid and Flat Top belts.
• Carryway wearstrips or rollers that engage the tabs are only required at
the transition between the horizontal sections and angled sections. Thisapproach reduces initial system cost as well as ongoing maintenancecost and effort.
• Ensure that adequate lead-in radii and/or angles are used to prevent thepossibility of snagging the tab on the frame.
• Design the conveyor with a carryway radius at the transition between
horizontal sections and angled sections. This radius must be at least 48
in (1.22 m) for belts that are loaded near the belt strength rating. This
radius is one of the most important factors to consider when designinghighly loaded conveyors that utilize hold down tabs.
• Tabs can be spaced along the length of the belt at either4 in (101.6 mm)
or 6 in (152.4 mm). Due to the potential for mistracking, avoid tab
spacings greater than 6 in (152.4 mm).
• Strength rating for each hold down tab: 100 lbf (445 N) of force
perpendicular to the hold down surface.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

73

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Insert Nuts
Available Base Belt Style; Material
Flat Top; acetal, polypropylene
Maximum Fixture Weight
Belt Material

lb/nuta

kg/nutaSizes
5/16 in–18 in (8 mm–
1.25 mm)
Fastener TorqueSpecification
in-lbf

N-m

SERIES 400

Acetal
200
91
120
13.5
Polypropylene
175
79
65
7.3
• Insert nuts allow easy attachment of fixtures to the belt.
• Ensure attachments connected to more than one row do not prohibit belt
rotation around the sprockets.
• For attachment bases that extend across multiple rows, ensure reduced
backbend is considered during design.
• Do not place sprockets in-line with insert nuts.
• All nut placement dimensions are referenced from the edge of the belt
when placing an order. Contact Intralox Customer Service for nut location
options available for application.
• See S4500 Flat Top with Insert Nuts as an alternate option.
• Minimal indent from the edge of the belt: 2 in (50 mm).
• Minimal distance between nuts across the width of the belt: 1.33 in(34 mm).
• Spacing along the length of the belt: 2 in (50 mm) increments.
a Fixture weight only. Product weight need not be included.

Finger Transfer Plates
Available Widths
Number ofinmm
Fingers
Available Materials
6
152
18
Polypropylene• Eliminates product transfer and tipping problems. The 18 fingers extend
between the belt ribs, allowing a smooth continuation of the product flow
as the belt engages the sprockets.
• Easily installed on the conveyor frame with the supplied shoulder bolts.
Caps easily snap into place over the bolts, and keep foreign materials outof the slots.
• The finger transfer plates for Series 400 are the same for Series 1200.

742024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M

PP
PE

mm
89
8

7.25
5.91
3.00
1.45
2.00
5.952
5.933

184
150
76
37
51
151.2
150.7

SERIES 400

Dimensional Requirements for S400 Finger Transfer Plate Installation
in
3.50
0.31

M spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
Figure 10: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assembly

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

75

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Two-Material Finger Transfer Platesin

Available Widths
mm

6

152

Standard

No. ofFingers
18

Available Materials
Glass-filled thermoplastic
fingers, acetal backplate

Available Configurations
Standard Extended Back
Glass-Handling
Short fingers with extended backplateLong fingers
with a short
backplateLong fingers with anextended backplate

short fingers with short backplatea
mid-length fingers with a short
backplate

SERIES 400

mid-length fingers with extended
backplate• Provides high-strength fingers combined with a low-friction backplate.
• Eliminates product transfer and tipping problems. The 18 fingers extend
between the belt ribs, allowing smooth, continuous product flow as the belt
engages the sprockets.
• Low-friction backplate is permanently attached to the two high-strength finger
inserts.
• Plastic shoulder bolts and bolt covers are included for installing the standard
two-material finger transfer plates (FTPs).
• Mounting hardware for the glass-handling two-material FTPs is sold separately.
Mounting hardware consists of stainless steel oval washers and bolts, whichgive more secure fastening for tough, glass applications.
• For applications that require better chemical resistance, Introlox offers a singlematerial polypropylene standard FTP. Mounting hardware for this finger transfer
plate includes plastic shoulder bolts and snap-cap bolt covers.
• Long fingers provide good support for unstable products like PET containers andcans. Short fingers are sturdy enough for harsh, broken-glass applications.
These fingers are designed to resist breaking, but if confronted with deeply
embedded glass, the individual fingers yield and break off, preventing belt orframe damage.
• Short backplate has two attachment slots and the extended backplate has threeattachment slots.
• S400 and S1200 use the same FTPs.
• For best product transfer with the glass-handling finger transfer plates, use
10.1 in (257 mm) PD, 16-tooth sprockets.
a Contact Intralox Customer Service for lead times.

76

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Dimensional Requirements for S400 Two-Material Finger Transfer Plate Installation

1

PP
PE

1 spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient
temperature
2 0.5 in (13 mm) radius on leading edge of frame
member
3 frame member
Figure 11: Finger transfer plate and conveyor
assembly2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

77

SERIES 400

F
G
H
I
J
K
L

Glass-Handling
Glass-Handling
Mid-Length
Standard Long Fingers
Short Fingers
Fingers
Short Back
Extended Back
Extended Back
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
3.50
89
3.50
89
3.50
89
3.50
89
0.31
8
0.31
8
0.31
8
0.31
8
7.2
183
10.75
273
8.26
210
9.04
230
5.91
150
5.91
150
5.91
150
5.91
150
3.00
76
3.00
76
3.00
76
3.00
76
1.45
37
1.45
37
1.45
37
1.45
37
2.00
51
5.50
140
5.50
140
5.50
140
5.952 151.2 5.952 151.2 5.952 151.2 5.952 151.2
5.933 150.7 5.933 150.7 5.933 150.7 5.933 150.7

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Platesa
Available Width
in
mm
6
152

No. ofFingers
18

Available Materials
Glass-filled thermoplastic

SERIES 400• Consists of a finger transfer plate and a transfer edge belt that aredesigned to work together.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Flat, smooth top surface provides excellent lateral movement ofcontainers.
• Fully flush edges, headed rod retention system, and nylon rods forsuperior wear resistance.
• Eliminates the need for a sweeper bar, a pusher arm, or wide transfer
plates. Transfers are smooth and 100% self-clearing, making right angle
transfers possible for all container types.
• Ideal for warmer/cooler applications with frequent product changeovers.
• Bi-directional system allows same transfer belt use for both left-handand right-hand transfers.
• Compatible with any series and style of Intralox belt on the discharge andinfeed conveyors.
• Capable of transferring product to and from Intralox Series 400, Series
1200, and Series 1900 Raised Rib belts.
• Robust design for durability in tough, glass applications.
• Easily installed and secured to mounting plates of any thickness withstainless steel bolts and oval washers that allow movement with the belt
expansion and contraction.
• Stainless steel hardware is sold separately.
a Licensed under Rexnord U.S. Patent Nos. 7,314,130 and 7,448,490

Dimensional Requirements for S400 Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Plate Installationa

PP

in
5.25
1.15
8.05
5.89
2.92
1.51
2.71
5.952

mm
133.4
29.2
204.5
149.6
74.2
38.4
68.8
151.2

PE

5.933

150.7

F
G
H
I
J
K
L
1

1.75"

(44.5 mm)1.46"
(37.1 mm)0.59"

(15.0 mm)

1 spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
2 frame member

Figure 12: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assemblya Licensed under Rexnord U.S. Patent Nos. 7,314,130 and 7,448,490

782024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 13: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S400 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (bottom to top)a
in

4.0
5.2
5.8
6.4
7.8

102
132
147
163
198

6
8
9
10
12

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30
2.44-2.61
2.77-2.92
3.42-3.55

8.4

213

131

10.1

257

16

4.0
5.2
6.4
7.8
10.1

102
132
163
198
257

4.0
5.2
5.8
6.4
7.8
8.4
10.1

102
132
147
163
198
213
257

in
mm
mm
Flat Top, Flush Grid, Open Hinge

in

mm

in

mm

4.10
5.30
5.95
6.50
7.90

104
135
151
165
201

2.38
2.99
3.49
3.61
4.24

60
76
89
92
108

36-43
53-58
62-66
70-74
87-90

2.20
2.60
2.70
2.77
3.00

56
66
69
70
76

3.75-3.87

95-98

3.22

82

8.46

215

4.74

120

4.72-4.81

120-122
3.20
Raised Rib

81

10.20

259

5.50

140

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30
2.77-2.92
3.42-3.55
4.72-4.81

36-43
2.20
53-58
2.60
70-74
2.77
87-90
3.00
120-122
3.20
Non Skid

56
66
70
76
81

4.10
5.30
6.50
7.90
10.20

104
135
165
201
259

2.75
3.24
3.99
4.49
5.88

70
82
101
114
149

6
8
9
10
12
13
16

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30
2.43-2.61
2.77-2.92
3.42-3.55
3.74-3.87
4.71-4.81

36-43
53-58
62-66
70-74
87-90
95-98
120-122

41
50
59
57
66
72
75

4.09
5.31
5.93
6.56
7.81
8.44
10.34

104
135
151
167
198
214
263

2.46
3.07
3.38
3.70
4.32
4.64
5.59

62
78
86
94
110
118
142

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

1.60
1.98
2.31
2.26
2.60
2.84
2.97

79

SERIES 400

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S400 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

Range (bottom to top)a
in
mm
in
mm
Roller Top, Transverse Roller Top

4.0
5.2
6.4
7.8
10.1

102
132
163
198
257

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30
2.77-2.92
3.42-3.55
4.72-4.81

4.0
5.2
6.4
7.8
10.1

102
132
163
198
257

6
8
10
12
16

1.27-1.54
1.95-2.15
2.62-2.77
3.27-3.40
4.56-4.66

in

mm

in

mm

4.10
5.30
6.50
7.90
10.20

104
135
165
201
259

2.56
3.17
3.79
4.42
5.68

65
81
96
112
144

3.96
5.18
6.42
7.68
10.20

101
132
163
195
259

2.48
3.09
3.71
4.34
5.60

63
78
94
110
142

43
53
61
70
80

4.00
5.23
6.47
7.73
10.25

102
133
164
196
260

2.50
3.11
3.74
4.36
5.63

64
79
95
111
143

44
55
63
72
82

4.00
5.23
6.47
7.73
10.25

102
133
164
196
260

2.56
3.18
3.80
4.43
5.69

65
81
96
112
144

36-43
2.20
56
53-58
2.60
66
70-74
2.77
70
87-90
3.00
76
120-1223.20
810.85-in Diameter Transverse Roller Top
32-39
50-55
67-70
83-86
116-118

1.72
2.13
2.43
2.78
3.20

E

44
54
62
71
81

Angled Roller (0-, 30-, 45-, 60-, and 90-degree)b

SERIES 400

4.0
5.2
6.4
7.8
10.1

102
132
163
198
257

6
8
10
12
16

1.29-1.56
1.98-2.18
2.64-2.80
3.29-3.43
4.59-4.69

33-40
50-55
67-71
84-87
117-119

1.70
2.11
2.40
2.75
3.16

Ball Beltb
4.0
5.2
6.4
7.8
10.1

102
132
163
198
257

6
8
10
12
16

1.23-1.50
1.91-2.11
2.58-2.74
3.23-3.36
4.53-4.63

31-38
49-54
65-69
82-85
115-117

1.75
2.16
2.47
2.82
3.25

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.
b To establish dimensions, use the top of the roller as the top of the belt and the bottom of the roller as the bottom of the belt.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S400 Dead Plate Gap

in
4.0
5.2
5.8
6.4
7.8
8.4
10.1

80

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
102
132
147
163
198
213
257

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
8
9
10
12
13
16

in
0.268
0.200
0.178
0.160
0.130
0.121
0.100

mm
6.8
5.1
4.5
4.1
3.3
3.1
2.5

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.315
4
62
1.00

mm
8.0
101.6
1575
25.4

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 560• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Rod diameter: 0.140 in (3.6 mm).
• Designed for 0.236 in (6 mm) diameter nosebars.

A preferred run direction
0.12 in(3.0 mm)0.24 in(6.0 mm)0.315 in
(8.0 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalLMAR
PK
PK
Detectable MX

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.14 in(3.6 mm)
AcetalLMAR
LMAR
PK
AcetalDetectable MX

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
375
325
275
300
300
300

N/m
5,470
4,740
4,010
4,380
4,380
4,380

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 290-40 to 176-40 to 176-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 143-40 to 80-40 to 80-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.08
0.91
0.87
0.85
0.88
1.24

kg/m²
5.27
4.4426
4.24734.14974.2962
6.0542

81

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.315
4.0
62
1.0
0.4 x 0.14

mm
8.0
101.6
1575
25.4
10.2 x 3.5

32%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 560• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for orientation-sensitive transfers.
• Rod diameter: 0.140 in (3.6 mm).
• Designed for 0.236 in (6 mm) diameter nosebars.

0.12 in(3.0 mm)0.24 in(6.0 mm)0.315 in
(8.0 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalAcetal
LMAR
PK
PK

82

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.14 in(3.6 mm)
AcetalLMAR
LMAR
PK
AcetalBelt Strength
lbf/ft
300
250
200
200
275

N/m
4,380
3,650
2,920
2,920
4,010

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 290-40 to 176-40 to 176°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 143-40 to 80-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.87
0.84
0.72
0.71
0.74

kg/m²
4.25
4.10
3.52
3.4662
3.61272024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Wearstrips

inmm

Minimum Number of
Sprockets per Shaftb

Carryway

Returnway

4

102

2

2

2

6

152

2

2

2

8

203

3

3

3

12

305

3

3

3

18

457

4

4

4

24

610

5

4

4

30

762

6

5

5

36

914

7

6

6

42

1,067

8

7

7

48

1,219

10

8

8

54

1,372

11

9

9

60

1,524

12

10

10

Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline
spacing

Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline
spacing

For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in (102mm) centerline spacing.c, da If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.0 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with a minimum width of 4 in (101.6 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

d For drive shafts, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum of 4.0 in (102 mm) centerline spacing.

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized
8.0

203

7.0

178

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 4.0

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

C

60%

70%

80%

B

25
90% 100%

A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

83

SERIES 560

Belt Width Rangea

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Molded Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
2461(0.86%) 2.4

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

2.5

64

1

25

32
(0.48%)

3.2

3.3

84

1

25

Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)18(1.52%)
36(0.38%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

1.8

46

1.9

48

1

25

3.6

91

3.7

94

1

25

81

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1

1

25

25

1.5

40

Machined Sprockets

SERIES 560

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1

0.75
1.5

25

20
40

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

842024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 14: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

Pitch Diameter
in
mm
1.8
2.4
3.2
3.6

46
61
81
91

Numberof Teeth
18
24
32
36

A

B

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
mmin
Flat Top, Flush Grid
0.78
20
1.15
1.08
27
1.35
1.48
38
1.57
1.68
43
1.67

C

E

mm

in

mm

in

mm

29
34
40
42

1.81
2.41
3.21
3.61

46
61
82
92

1.09
1.39
1.79
1.99

28
35
45
51

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S560 Dead Plate Gap

in
1.8
2.4
3.2
3.6

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
46
61
81
91

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
18
24
32
36

in
0.014
0.010
0.008
0.007

mm
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.2

85

SERIES 560

S560 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 560
862024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
in
2.00
2
0.66
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
50.8
51
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Impact-resistant belt designed for tough, meat-industry applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flights and sideguards are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalNylon
Detectable polypropylene A22

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
500
900
1,200
650

N/m
14,6007,300
13,10017,5009,490

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150-50 to 150
34 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66-46 to 66
1 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.77
1.87
2.75
2.32
2.21

kg/m²
8.66
9.13
13.43
11.33
10.79

87

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Hinge Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
4
0.66
-

mm
50.8
102
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners, so there are no pockets or sharp
corners to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link designed hinges expose more hinge and rod area as the belt
goes around the sprocket. This exclusive Intralox feature allows
Figure 15: Top surface
unsurpassed cleaning access to this area.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Compatible with S800 Flat Top. Can be spliced directly into S800 Flat
Figure 16: Bottom surface
Top, using the same sprockets and accessories.
• Streamlined flights are available. Standard height is 6 in (152.4 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.
.313"(7.9 mm)2.0"(50.8 mm).625"
(15.9 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalPK
X-ray detectable acetal

88

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene
PK
X-ray detectable acetal

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
900
500
900
900
900

N/m
13,1007,300
13,10013,10013,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150-40 to 176-50 to 200°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66-40 to 80-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.63
1.70
2.52
2.26
3.06

kg/m²
7.96
8.30
12.3
12.01
11.03

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Hinge Flat Top with Heavy-Duty Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
10
0.66

mm
50.8
254.0
16.8

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Impact-resistant belt designed for tough, meat-industry applications.
• Closed flush edge provides belt robustness and no catchpoints.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners, with no pockets or sharp corners
that can catch and hold debris.
• Like S1600 and S1800, the drive bar on the underside of this belt stylechannels water and debris to the outside of the belt for easier, fastercleanup. The drive bar sweeps into the closed edge to further aid in
washing away debris. Drive bar effectiveness is proven both in-houseand in field tests.
• Available with Clean Release variation. Clean Release allows tool-free
Figure 17: Top surface
belt removal and installation and eliminates foreign material
contamination caused by belt or rod damage when opening or closing
belts.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Also available in 6 in (152 mm) and 8 in (203 mm) mold to width.
• Streamlined flights are available.
• For flight options, contact Intralox Customer Service.

Figure 18: Clean Release variation
2.00 in NOM. (50.8 mm)

2.00 in NOM. (50.8 mm)

0.625 in(15.9 mm)0.313 in(7.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt MaterialPK
X-ray detectable PK

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
PK
PK

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft900
900

N/m
13,10013,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F-40 to 176-40 to 176°C-40 to 80-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.46
2.93

kg/m²
12.01
14.31

89

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Hinge Flat Top Mold to Width with Heavy-Duty Edge
Pitch
Molded Widths
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
8

mm
50.8
152.4
203.0

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Impact-resistant belt designed for tough, meat-industry applications.
• Closed flush edge design provides a robust belt and eliminates
catchpoints.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners, with no pockets or sharp corners
that can catch and hold debris.
• Like S1600 and S1800, the drive bar on the underside of this belt stylechannels water and debris to the outside of the belt for easier, fastercleanup. The drive bar sweeps into the closed edge to further aid in
washing away debris. Drive bar effectiveness is proven both in-houseand in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For flight options, contact Intralox Customer Service.

2.00 in NOM. (50.8 mm)

2.00 in NOM. (50.8 mm)

0.625 in(15.9 mm)0.313 in(7.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt MaterialPK90Standard Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
PK

Belt Strength
lbf/ft900

N/m
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F-40 to 176°C-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft
2.18

kg/m
10.64

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
SeamFree™ Open Hinge Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
0.66
-

mm
50.8
152
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Cam-link designed hinges expose more hinge and rod area as the belt
goes around the sprocket. This exclusive Intralox feature allows
unsurpassed cleaning access to this area.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners, so there are no pockets or sharp
corners to catch and hold debris.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Compatible with S800 Flat Top. Can be spliced directly into S800 Flat
Top, using the same sprockets and accessories.
• Belts over 36 in (914 mm) are built with more than one module perrow, but seams are minimized.
• Blue polyethylene belts over 18 in (457 mm) are built with more than
one module per row.
• Streamlined flights are available. Standard height is 6 in (152.4 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polyethylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polyethylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
500
900

N/m
7,300
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 150-50 to 150°C-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.70
2.52

kg/m²
8.30
12.3

91

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Tough Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.66
-

mm
51.0
51
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Cam-link designed hinges expose more hinge and rod area as the belt
goes around the sprocket. This exclusive Intralox feature allows
unsurpassed cleaning access to this area.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• White and grey material is fully Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
and EU MC compliant.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Withstands extreme impact in food processing applications.
• Compatible with S800 Flat Top and S800 Open Hinge. Can be spliced
directly into either style, using the same sprockets and accessories.
• Easy retrofit from S1800 without extensive conveyor frame changes formost meat industry applications since the A, B, C, and E dimensions
are within 0.25 in (6 mm) of S1800.
• A molded-in indent 1.3 in (33 mm) from the edge is available.
• Streamlined Tough flights are available. Standard height is 4 in or(101.6 mm) or 6 in (152.4 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.

2.00" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.00" NOM.
(50.8 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Hi-Impact
Hi-Impact

92

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)PK
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
500
450

N/m
7,300
6,570

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
0 to 120
0 to 120°C-18 to 49-18 to 49

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.26
2.26

kg/m²
11.03
11.03

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Perforated Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size(approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.66
0.29 × 0.08
0.44 × 0.08

mm
50.8
51
16.8
7.4 × 1.9
11.1 × 1.9

18%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Perforated version of S800 Flat Top.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flights and sideguards are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
500
900

N/m
14,6007,300
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.54
1.59
2.28

kg/m²
7.25
7.76
11.15

93

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Perforated Flat Top Round Hole
in
mm
2.00
50.8
2
51
0.66
16.8
See photos on right.
See photos on right.
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Round hole version of S800 Perforated Flat Top.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
Figure 19: 5/32 in (4 mm) - 20% open area
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Stainless steel split sprockets are not recommended.
• For abrasive applications, use with Series 800 polyurethane sprockets.

Figure 20: 11/32 in (8.7 mm) - 14% open area

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalChemBloxa
PKb

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene
ChemBlox
PK

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
500
900
900
900

N/m
14,6007,300
13,10013,10013,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150
0 to 150-40 to 176°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66-18 to 66-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.54
1.59
2.28
2.87
2.05

kg/m²
7.52
7.76
11.15
14.01
10.01

a Only available in 11/32 in (8.73 mm).

94

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Perforated 11/32 in Round Hole with Heavy-Duty Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2
10
0.66
11/32

mm
50.8
254.0
16.8
8.75

14%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

2.00 in NOM. (50.8 mm)

2.00 in NOM. (50.8 mm)

0.625 in(15.9 mm)0.313 in(7.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
PK

Default Rod Material,
Diameter
0.24 in (6.1 mm)
PK2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft900

N/m
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F-40 to 176°C-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.22

kg/m²
10.84

95

SERIES 800

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Closed flush edge design provides a robust belt and eliminates
catchpoints.
• The drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris
to the outside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. The drive bar
sweeps into the closed edge to further aid in washing away debris.
Drive bar effectiveness is proven both in-house and in field tests.
• Impact-resistant belt designed for tough, meat-industry applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
4.6
0.66
0.15 × 0.90

mm
50.8
117
16.8
3.8 × 22.9

27%
73%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Open slots improve drainage and cleanability.
• Perforations on polyethylene edge modules are slightly different. See
inset photo on right.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Provides excellent drainage during production and cleanup. Holedesign eliminates water collecting on belt surface and being carriedthroughout processing line.
• Bi-directional belt design allows sprockets to drive or idle belt in both
directions. Reduces chances of installation error.
• Complete range of accessories available, including round-top flights,
flights with drainage bases, and sideguards.

A Inset: polyethylene edge module
2.0"(50.8 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm).625"
(15.9 mm).313"
(7.9 mm)Figure 21: Polyethylene belts

Figure 22: All other materials

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalAcetalDetectable polypropylene A22
ChemBlox

96

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
ChemBlox

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
800
500
1,000
1,000
500
1,000

N/m
11,7007,300
14,60014,6007,300
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150
34 to 200
34 to 150
0 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66
1 to 93
1 to 66-18 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.45
1.63
2.25
2.25
1.71
2.83

kg/m²
7.08
7.96
10.99
10.99
8.35
13.82

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mesh Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.66
0.50 × 0.04

mm
50.8
51
16.8
12.7 × 1.0

9%Open
Snap-lock; headed

SERIES 800

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flights are available.

Figure 23: Top surface

Figure 24: Underside surface

Figure 25: Dimensions

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,000

N/m
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.60

kg/m²
7.86

97

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mini Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2
0.66
-

mm
50.8
51
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed surface with fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Impact resistant belt designed for tough meat industry applications.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. If values are
required, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• 0.125 in (3 mm) Mini Rib on surface accommodates gradual inclinesand declines.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Acetal98

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
500
900

N/m
14,6007,300
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.77
1.87
2.92

kg/m²
8.66
9.13
14.26

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
4
0.66

mm
50.8
102
16.8

0%
15%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. If values are
required, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Standard flights and sideguards (without nubs) are available.
• Standard nub indent: 1.3 in (33.0 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
500
900

N/m
14,6007,300
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.90
2.01
2.95

kg/m²
9.26
9.80
14.40

99

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
4.6
0.66
0.15 × 0.90

mm
50.8
117
16.8
3.8 × 22.9

27%
15%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Perforations on polyethylene edge modules are slightly different. See
inset photo.
• Nub pattern reduces contact between belt surface and product.
• Nub pattern is continuous over the surface of the belt, even over the
hinges.
• Available in acetal and polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Recommended for products large enough to span the distance
between the nubs.
• Compatible with S800 Flush Grid flights only.
• Standard nub indent: 1.3 in (33.0 mm).

A Inset: polyethylene edge module

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalAcetalPolyethylene

100

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
800
1,000
1,000
500

N/m
11,70014,60014,6007,300

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
-50 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.56
2.36
2.36
1.85

kg/m²
7.62
11.52
11.52
9.03

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
SeamFree™ Open Hinge Nub Top™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
0.66
-

mm
50.8
152
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners, with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinge provides easy cleaning, with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Nub height: 0.100 in (2.5 mm).
• Nub spacing: 0.333 in (8.5 mm).
• Standard nub indent: 1.3 in (33.0 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPK

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)PolyethylenePK2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft900
900

N/m
13,10013,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 150-40 to 176°C-46 to 66-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.72
2.4

kg/m²
13.26
11.72

101

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Cone Top™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
4
0.66
-

mm
50.8
102
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. If values are
required, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Standard flights and sideguards (without cones) are available.
• Standard cone indent: 1.3 in (33.0 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal102

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft900

N/m
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 150°C-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.84

kg/m²
13.89

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Hinge Cone Top™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
0.66
-

mm
50.8
152
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners, with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinge provides easy cleaning, with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Standard cone indent: 1.3 in (33.0 mm).
• Standard flights and sideguards (without cones) are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
900
500
900

N/m
13,1007,300
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.63
1.70
2.52

kg/m²
7.96
8.30
12.3

103

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
SeamFree™ Open Hinge Cone Top™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
0.66
-

mm
50.8
152
16.8
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinge provides easy cleaning, with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Cone height: 0.125 in (3.2 mm).
• Cone spacing: 0.295 in (7.5 mm).
• Standard cone indent: 1.3 in (33 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal104

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft900

N/m
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 150°C-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.61

kg/m²
12.72

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
14
2.00
0.51 x 0.49

mm
50.8
356
50.8
12.9 x 12.4

40%
Open
Barn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Open slots improve drainage and cleanability.
• Cam-link design hinges provide easy cleaning with greater hinge androd exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Fully compatible with S800 EZ Clean™ angled sprockets.
• Finger transfer plates are available.
• Raised ribs extend 0.275 in (7.0 mm) above basic module with fully
flush edges.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Enduralox PP

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
1,000

N/m
14,60014,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220°C
1 to 104
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.48
1.48

kg/m²
7.23
7.23

105

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Roller Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00

mm
50.8

See Product Notes.
-

3%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Has fully flush edges.
• Uses acetal rollers.
• Uses stainless steel axles.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Impact resistant belt designed for tough box and package, low backpressure applications.
• Product accumulation load is 5%–10% of product weight.
• Roller diameter: 0.70 in (17.8 mm). Roller length - 0.825 in (20.9 mm).
• Roller spacing: 2.0 in (50.8 mm).
• Standard roller indent: 0.60 in (15 mm).
• Custom widths of 4 in (102 mm) and 6 in (152 mm) and from 10 in(254 mm) and up, in 2.00 in (50.8 mm) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Acetal106

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalAcetalBelt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
500
900

N/m
14,6007,300
13,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
-50 to 150-50 to 200°C
1 to 93-46 to 66-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.93
2.99
4.11

kg/m²
14.34
14.62
20.10

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Rounded Friction Top
in
2.00
8
0.66
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
50.8
203
16.8
-

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 800• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• The Rounded Friction Top module is black rubber on a white PP
composite base module.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• No mistracking or stick-slip effect, even on long runs. Belt is positively
tracked by the sprocket drive system instead of unreliable friction
rollers.
• Thermally bonded rubber does not peel off. Friction Top surface is comolded (thermally bonded) with the plastic base instead of glued on ormechanically fastened.
• Rounded Friction Top module can be used with other S800 styles. Use
the belt strength rating of the accompanying modules.
• Easy to maintain and repair: Intralox reusable unheaded rods arequickly removed and installed with only minimal tools, so one canreplace individual modules in minutes.
• No tensioning required, which eliminates expensive tensioning
systems.
• Lower construction cost: Intralox sprocket drive requires far less spacethan a friction roller system, allowing shallow, less expensive trench
construction.
• Lower wearstrip replacement cost: Flat Top edge modules prevent
premature wearstrip erosion. The smooth surface spans 1.5 in (38.1)
mm from the outer edge.

Belt Data

Base Belt
Material
Polypropylene
composite

Belt Strength

Base/
FrictionTop

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)lbf/ftN/mWhite/black

Acetal

2,500

36,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F°C-50 to 150 -29 to 66

Belt Mass

AgencyAcceptability

lb/ft²

kg/m²

FDA
(USA)

2.3

11.25

b

EU MCaa European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.

b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

107

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

SERIES 800

in
2
4
6
8
10
12
14

mm
51
102
152
203
254
305
356

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
2
3
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

16
18
20
24
30
32
36
42
48

406
457
508
610
762
813
914
1,067
1,219

3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9

3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
7

3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5

7
8
9
11
12
15
17

6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
120
3,048
21
144
3,658
25
For other widths, use odd number of sprockets at maximum 6 in (152mm) centerline spacing.ca If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 0.66 in(16.8 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 2 in (51 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets. Polyurethane sprockets require a maximum 4 in (102 mm) centerline

spacing.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

1082024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

16T
12T
10T
6T 8T

A 0.5
0.4
0.3

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

A 4.0

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

SERIES 800

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed (V) by theshaft centerline distance (L). The strength factor is found at theintersection of the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line.
See Belt Selection Instructions for more information.

EZ Clean™ Sprocketa
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)6(13.40%)8 (7.61%)10(4.89%)
12(3.41%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
inb
in
mmb
mm

4.0

102

3.8

97

1.5

38

1.0

1.5

30

40

5.2

132

5.0

127

1.5

38

1.0

1.5

30

40

6.5

165

6.2

157

1.5

38

1.5

40

7.7

196

7.5

191

1.5

38

1.5

40

16
(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.1

257

1.5

38

1.5

40

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) is de-rated to 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m). All other belts maintainthe published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability ofpolyurethane sprockets.
b U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

109

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Split Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane (FDA) Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.5 165

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.2

157

1.5

38

12
(3.41%)

7.7

196

7.5

191

1.5

38

16
(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.1

257

1.5

38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
inb
in
mmb
mm
1.5
1.5,
2.5

40
40, 6040, 60a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) is de-rated to 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m). All other belts maintain

SERIES 800

their published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability ofpolyurethane sprockets. These sprockets are FDA-compliant.
b U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

Molded Sprocketa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
8 (7.61%) 5.2 132
10
6.5 165(4.89%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.0
6.2

mm
127
157

in
1.5
1.5

mm
38
38

12
(3.41%)

7.7

196

7.5

191

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 6016(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.1

257

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 60Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40
1.5,
40, 602.0,
2.5

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) is de-rated to 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m). All other belts maintainthe published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability ofpolyurethane sprockets.

1102024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Abrasion Resistant Split Metal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
8 (7.61%) 5.2 132

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.0

mm
127

in
1.7

mm
43

10
(4.89%)

6.5

165

6.2

157

1.7

43

1.5,
2.5

40, 6012(3.41%)

7.7

196

7.5

191

1.7

43

1.5,
2.5

40, 6016(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.1

257

1.7

43

1.5,
2.5

40, 60Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5

Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)6(13.40%)8 (7.61%)10(4.89%)
12(3.41%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
4.0

mm
102

in
3.8

mm
97

in
2.0

mm
50.8

5.2
6.5

132
165

5.0
6.2

127
157

2.0
2.0

50.8
50.8

1.5
1.5

40
40

7.7

196

7.5

191

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

16
(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.1

257

2.0

50.8

1.5,
2.5

40, 60SERIES 800

Angled EZ Clean™ Sprocketa
Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

a Do not use Angled EZ Clean sprockets with S800 Mesh Top, Flush Grid, and Flush Grid Nub Top.

Streamline Flightsa
Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
1
25
2
51
3
76
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal, nylon
4
102
6
152
• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• An extension can be welded at a 45-degree angle to create a bent flight.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).
a Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

111

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top Base Flights (No-Cling)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
4
102

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

Nub Top Base Flights (Double No-Cling)

SERIES 800

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
4102
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal• No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

Flush Grid Base Flights (No-Cling)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
2
51
4

102

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal,
ChemBlox™, detectable polypropylene
A22• The No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• These flights cannot be used with the S800 Perforated Flat Top (slottedversion with 18% open area).
• Molded 1.3 in (33 mm) indent available.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

1122024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
No-Cling Impact Resistant Open Hinge Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
4
102

Available Materials
Acetal, polypropylene, polyethylene• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Available with a 1.3 in (33 mm) molded indent.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

No-Cling Impact Resistant Open Hinge Nub Top Flights

SERIES 800

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
4102
Acetal, polypropylene, PK• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Available with a 1.3 in (33 mm) molded indent.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

Heavy-Duty Edge Flights
Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
4102
PK• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Available with 1.3 in (33 mm) and 2 in (51 mm) molded indent.
• Flights can be cut down to custom heights. Minimum height: 1.0 in (25.4mm).
• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

113

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Impact Resistant Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
1
25

Available Materials

251
Acetal, X-ray detectable acetal
3
76
4
102
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

Open Hinge Impact Resistant Flights
Available Flight Heightinmm

SERIES 800

4102

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal, X-ray
detectable acetal, ChemBlox™, PK

6152• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Standard 4 in (102 mm) height can be cut to suit application.
• Available with 1.3 in (33 mm) and 2 in (51 mm) molded indent.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

Tough Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
4
102
6
152

Available Materials
Hi-Impact• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Molded 2 in (51 mm) indent available.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

114

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Scoop Flightsa
Available Flight Height
in
mm
3
76

Available Materials

Acetal, polyethylene, polypropylene,
4102
ChemBlox™, nylon, PK
6152• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Bucket flights and scoop flights can be cut and combined for custombuilt belts. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards:1.3 in (33 mm).

a Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.

Heavy-Duty Edge Scoop Flightsb

SERIES 800

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
4
102
PK
6
152
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Bucket flights and scoop flights can be cut and combined for custombuilt belts. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

b Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.

Bucket Flightsa
Available Flight Height
in
mm
2.25b

Available Materials

57b

3
76
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal
4
102
6
152
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Bucket flights and scoop flights can be cut and combined for custombuilt belts. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 1.3 in (33 mm).

a Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.

b 2.25 in (57 mm) bucket flight only available in polypropylene.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

115

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
3-Piece Perforated Bucket and Scoop Flights
Available Flight Heightinmm

Available Materials

Polypropylene, polyethylenea, acetala• Flights consist of 3 pieces: the base module, the attachment, and therod.
• Open slots improve drainage for inclines.
• Flight surface has 30% open area.
• Belt surface has 0% open area. Base module is S800 Flat Top Open
Hinge.
• Flights can be cut and combined for custom-built belts. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Do not use with S800 Perforated Flat Top (slotted version with 18% openarea) or S800 Flush Grid Nub Top.
• Bucket profile has a 0.27 in (6.9 mm) gap between the belt top surface
and the bottom surface of bucket side panel.
• Approximate flight surface opening size: 0.130 in (3.3 mm) × 2.40 in(70.0 mm).
• Minimum indent without sideguards:2.00 in (50.8 mm).
4102

SERIES 800

a Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability.

Combining Bucket Flights and Scoop Flights

6 in (152 mm) bucket flights with
3 in (76 mm) bucket flight and
4 in (102 mm) bucket flight and
6 in (152 mm) bucket flight andindentscoop flights, no indent
scoop flights, no indent
scoop flights with indent
Bucket flights and scoop flights can be cut and combined for custom-built belts. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

Tapered Edge
Available Materials
Polypropylene, acetal• Compatible with S800 Flat Top and S800 Mesh Top.
• Designed to accept headed plastic rods.
• Steel rods can be retained with plastic rodlets.

116

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Threaded Barrel Attachments
Available Materials
Acetal• Attaches to S800 Open Hinge Flat Top modules–4 in (102 mm) wide.
• 3/4 in-10 thread.
• Commonly used on poultry cone assemblies for the manual deboning
process.

Sideguards

SERIES 800

Available Sizes
inmm
Available Materials
2
51
3
76
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal
4
102
6
152
• Standard overlap design ensures product containment.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• When going around the 6- and 8-tooth sprockets, sideguards fan out,
opening a gap at the top that can allow small products to fall out. The
sideguards stay completely closed when going around the 10-, 12- and16-tooth sprockets.
• Standard gap between sideguards and flight edge: 0.3 in (8 mm).
• Minimum indent: 0.7 in (18 mm) except for Flush Grid which is 1.3 in (33mm).

Molded-in Sideguards
Available Sizes
inmm
Available Materials
4102
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal• Molded as integral part of the belt with no fasteners required.
• Part of the Intralox EZ Clean product line.
• Overlapping sideguards fully open when wrapping around sprocket,
allowing greater access during cleaning. Sideguards partially open on
forward bends of elevating conveyors.
• Sideguards can be spliced into all S800 belts, except Flat Top, Perforated
Flat Top (18% open area) and Flush Grid Nub Top.
• Standard 4 in (102 mm) height can be cut to suit application.
• Molded indent: 1.3 in (33 mm).
• Minimum backbend radius: 12 in (305 mm).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

117

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Nub Top Molded-In Sideguards
Available Sizes
in
mm
4
102

Available Materials
Acetal, polypropylene• Molded as integral part of the belt with no fasteners required.
• Part of the Intralox EZ Clean product line.
• Nub Top design and No-Cling rib feature provide a non-stick conveying
surface that delivers superior product release and cleanability.
• Overlapping sideguards fully open when wrapping around sprocket,
allowing greater access during cleaning. Sideguards partially open on
forward bends of elevating conveyors.
• Sideguards can be spliced into all Series 800 belts, except Series 800
Perforated Flat Top (18% open area) and Series 800 Flush Grid Nub Top.
• Standard 4 in (102 mm) height can be cut to suit application.
• Molded indent: 1.3 in (33 mm).
• Minimum backbend radius:10 in (254 mm).

Scoop/Bucket Flight Cross-Sectional Area for Vertical Incline
in

SERIES 800

mm
Scoop Height
3
76
4
102
6
152
Bucket Height

sq in

2.25
3.00
4.00
6.00

2.3
4.3
6.0
9.5

57
76
102
152

sq mm
Area

4.3
6.0
9.5

2774
3871
6129
Area
1484
2774
3871
6129

Minimum row spacing: 6 in (152 mm) for 6 in (152 mm) scoops andbuckets, and 4 in (102 mm) for all other sizes.

1 height
2 areaIntralox Rod Removers
U.S. Units
Metric Units
Length6.5 in165.1 mmWidth
2.2 in55.9 mm
Height1.1 in27.9 mm
Weight0.54 lb
1.2 kg• Designed to minimize belt and rod damage when inserting or
removing headed and unheaded rods.
• Eliminates foreign material contamination caused by belt or rod
damage.
• Etched QR code on the tool links to an instructional video.
• Intuitive design for sanitation and maintenance users.
• Compatible with:- S800 Flat Top- S800 Open Hinge Flat Top- S800 Open Hinge Flat Top with Heavy-Duty Edge
- S800 Perforated Flat Top- For up-to-date compatibility with other belts, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

118

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Intralox Belt Puller Set

HeightWeightU.S. Units
14.4 in
4.2 in0.5 in2 lb
Belt Puller Set

Metric Units
365.8 mm
106.7 mm
12.7 mm
0.9 kgWeight6 lb
2.7 kg• Can be used in carryways and returnways to install, close, or open
compatible belts.
• Improves worker safety.
• Reduces the number of people required to install or remove large or
inclined belts.
• Reduces the risk of belt damage that can lead to foreign material
contamination.
• Set includes two belt pullers and one Intralox ratchet strap.
• Solid metal construction with dedicated metal rod that locks into thebelt puller.
• Etched QR code on the tool links to an instructional video.
• Compatible with S800, S888, and S1800 belts. For up-to-datecompatibility information, contact Intralox Customer Service.

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 26: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

119

SERIES 800

Single Belt Puller
LengthWidth

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S800 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description

A

B

C

E

Pitch Diameter
Range (bottom to top)a
Numberinmmof Teeth
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
Flat Top, Flush Grid, Mesh Top, Open Hinge Flat Top, Open Hinge Flat Top with Heavy-Duty Edge, SeamFree Open Hinge Flat Top, Tough
Flat Top, Perforated Flat Top (all styles)

SERIES 800

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7

102
132
165
196

6
8
10
12

1.42-1.69
2.09-2.29
2.78-2.94
3.41-3.54

36-43
53-58
71-75
87-90

1.73
2.00
2.16
2.45

44
51
55
62

4.00
5.20
6.50
7.70

102
132
165
196

2.38
2.98
3.63
4.23

60
76
92
107

10.3

262

16

4.74-4.84

120-123

2.84
Mini Rib

72

10.30

262

5.53

140

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

102
132
165
196
262

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
36-43
1.73
44
4.13
2.09-2.29
53-58
2.00
51
5.33
2.78-2.94
71-75
2.16
55
6.63
3.41-3.54
87-90
2.45
62
7.83
4.74-4.84
120-123
2.84
72
10.43
Flush Grid Nub Top, Nub Top, SeamFree Open Hinge Nub Top

105
135
168
199
265

2.50
3.10
3.75
4.35
5.65

64
79
95
110
144

4.0
5.2

102
132

6
8

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30

4.10
5.33

104
135

2.48
3.09

63
78

6.5
7.7
10.3

165
196
262

10
12
16

2.77-2.92
70-74
2.18
55
6.57
3.42-3.55
87-90
2.43
62
7.83
4.72-4.81
120-122
2.88
73
10.35
Cone Top, Open Hinge Cone Top, SeamFree Open Hinge Cone Top

167
199
263

3.71
4.34
5.60

94
110
142

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

102
132
165
196
262

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30
2.77-2.92
3.42-3.55
4.72-4.81

36-43
1.73
53-58
1.98
70-74
2.18
87-90
2.43
120-122
2.88
Roller Top

44
50
55
62
73

4.13
5.35
6.60
7.85
10.38

105
136
168
199
264

2.50
3.11
3.74
4.36
5.63

64
79
95
111
143

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

102
132
165
196
262

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30
2.77-2.92
3.42-3.55
4.72-4.81

36-43
1.73
53-58
1.98
70-74
2.18
87-90
2.43
120-122
2.88
Raised Rib

44
50
55
62
73

4.44
5.66
6.91
8.17
10.69

113
144
176
207
272

2.81
3.43
4.05
4.68
5.94

71
87
103
119
151

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

102
132
165
196
262

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.09-2.29
2.78-2.94
3.41-3.54
4.74-4.84

36-43
1.73
53-58
2.00
71-75
2.16
87-90
2.45
120-123
2.84
Round Friction Top

44
51
55
62
72

4.28
5.48
6.78
7.98
10.58

109
139
172
203
269

2.65
3.25
3.90
4.50
5.80

67
83
99
114
147

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

102
132
165
196
262

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.09-2.29
2.78-2.94
3.40-3.54
4.74-4.84

36-43
53-58
71-75
86-90
120-123

44
51
55
62
72

4.16
5.36
6.66
7.86
10.46

106
136
169
200
266

2.53
3.13
3.78
4.38
5.68

64
80
96
111
144

36-43
53-58

1.73
1.98

1.74
2.00
2.17
2.45
2.84

44
50

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

1202024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S800 Dead Plate Gap
Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
8
10
12
16

in
0.268
0.200
0.158
0.132
0.098

mm
6.8
5.1
4.0
3.4
2.5

SERIES 800

in
4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
102
132
165
196
262

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

121

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 800
1222024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
SeamFree™ Minimum Hinge Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
1.00
-

mm
50.8
152
25.4
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 850• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinge provides easy cleaning, with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• Designed for use with S800 Angled EZ Clean sprockets. Also fullycompatible with standard S800 EZ Clean sprockets.
• Belts over 36 in (914 mm) are built with multiple modules per row, but
seams are minimized.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetalPolyethylene
Polyethylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalPolypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalPolyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
275
250
150
200
150

N/m
4,010
3,650
2,190
2,920
2,190

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 150-50 to 150-50 to 150°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 66-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.19
2.13
2.13
1.50
1.44

kg/m²
10.68
10.41
10.40
7.32
7.05

123

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
SeamFree™ Minimum Hinge Cone Top™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
6
36
1.00
-

mm
50.8
152
914
25.4
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 850• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinges provide easy cleaning with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris to theoutside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness isproven both in-house and in field tests.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Cone height: 0.125 in (3.2 mm).
• Cone spacing: 0.268 in (6.88 mm).
• Standard cone indent: 1.3 in (33 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetalPolyethylene
Polyethylene

124

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalPolypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalPolypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
275
250
150
200
150

N/m
4,010
3,650
2,190
2,920
2,190

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 150-50 to 150-50 to 150°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 66-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.28
2.22
2.22
1.56
1.50

kg/m²
11.13
10.84
10.84
7.62
7.32

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

mm
51
102
152
203
254
305
356

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
2
3
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

16
18
20
24
30
32
36
42
48

406
457
508
610
762
813
914
1,067
1,219

3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9

3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
7

3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5

7
8
9
11
12
15
17

6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
120
3,048
21
144
3,658
25
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.c

SERIES 850

in
2
4
6
8
10
12
14

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.0 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 2 in (51 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets. Polyurethane sprockets require a maximum 4 in (102 mm) centerline

spacing.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

125

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

16T
12T
10T
6T 8T

A 0.5
0.4
0.3

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

15

9 10

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

A 4.0

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 850

Angled EZ Clean™ Sprocketa
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)6(13.40%)8 (7.61%)10(4.89%)
12(3.41%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
4.0

mm
102

in
3.8

mm
97

in
2.0

mm
50.8

5.2
6.5

132
165

5.0
6.2

127
157

2.0
2.0

50.8
50.8

1.5
1.5

40
40

7.7

196

7.5

191

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

16
(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.1

257

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 60Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

a Do not use Angled EZ Clean sprockets with Series 800 Mesh Top.

Streamline Flights
Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
4102
Acetal• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• SeamFree flights are available in 12 in (304 mm) widths. Flighted belts
greater than 12 in (304 mm) wide are available with seams minimized.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Molded-in, 1.3 in (33 mm) indent from each edge.

1262024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 27: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S850 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

102
132
165
196
262

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.09-2.29
2.78-2.94
3.41-3.54
4.74-4.84

4.0
5.2
6.5
7.7
10.3

102
132
165
196
262

6
8
10
12
16

1.42-1.69
2.10-2.30
2.77-2.92
3.42-3.55
4.72-4.81

inmm
mm
SeamFree Minimum Hinge Flat Top
36-43
1.73
44
53-58
2.00
51
71-75
2.16
55
87-90
2.45
62
120-123
2.84
72
SeamFree Minimum Hinge Cone Top
36-43
53-58
70-74
87-90
120-122

1.73
1.98
2.18
2.43
2.88

44
50
55
62
73

in

mm

in

mm

4.00
5.20
6.50
7.70
10.30

102
132
165
196
262

2.38
2.98
3.63
4.23
5.53

60
76
92
107
140

4.13
5.35
6.60
7.85
10.38

105
136
168
199
264

2.50
3.11
3.74
4.36
5.63

64
79
95
111
143

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

127

SERIES 850

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S850 Dead Plate Gap

in
5.2
6.5
7.7

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
132
165
196

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
8
10
12

in
0.200
0.158
0.132

mm
5.1
4.0
3.4

SERIES 850
1282024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Medium Slot
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Slot Size, Linear
Slot Size, Transverse
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.99
6.0
0.66
0.08 x 0.40
0.09 x 0.24

mm
50.5
152
17
2.0 x 10.2
2.3 x 6.1

20%
OpenBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 888• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Available with or without molded-in sideguards. Specify sideguards
when ordering.
• Molded-in sideguards are flush with belt edges to provide maximum
use of belt surface.
• Barn door style rod retention system simplifies installation and routine
maintenance.
• Enduralox polypropylene material increases resistance to chemical andtemperature cycling.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Drive system requires less back-tension and is less sensitive to belt
elongation.
• Robust design reduces contamination risks.
• For belts with molded-in sideguards, provide a minimum backbend
radius of 7.0 in (180 mm).

2.0"
(50.8 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm).625"
(15.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Enduralox polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)303/304 stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,500

N/m
21,900Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.4

kg/m²
11.7

129

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Medium Slot Stainless Steel Link (SSL)
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Slot Size, Linear
Slot Size, Transverse
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.99
11.3
0.66
0.08 x 0.40
0.09 x 0.24

mm
50.5
288
17
2.0 x 10.2
2.3 x 6.1

26%
Open
Barn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 888• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Available with or without molded-in sideguards. Specify sideguards
when ordering.
• Molded-in sideguards are flush with belt edges to provide maximum
use of the belt surface.
• Stainless steel links (SSL) are integrated into the belt design tomanage high loads and thermal expansion associated withtemperature variations.
• Barn door style rod retention system simplifies installation and routine
maintenance.
• Enduralox polypropylene material increases resistance to chemical andtemperature cycling.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Drive system requires less back tension and is less sensitive to belt
elongation.
• Robust design reduces contamination risks.
• For belts with molded-in sideguards, provide a minimum backbend
radius of 7 in (180 mm).

3.0"
(76 mm)sideguard

sideguard.625"(15.9 mm)1.99"
(50.5 mm)1.99"
(50.5 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Enduralox polypropylene

130

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Wear-resistant stainless
steel

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf/ft

N/m

°F

°C

lb/ft²

kg/m²

2,000

29,20034 to 220

1 to 104

2.6

12.7

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Large Slot Stainless Steel Link (SSL)
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Slot Size, Linear
Slot Size, Transverse
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.99
16.0
0.66
0.16 x 0.39
0.12 x 0.50

mm
50.5
406
17
4.1 x 9.9
3.0 x 12.7

22%
Open
Barn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 888• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Available with or without molded-in sideguards. Specify sideguards
when ordering.
• Molded-in sideguards are flush with belt edges and provide maximum
use of belt surface.
• Barn door style rod retention system simplifies installation and routine
maintenance.
• Stainless steel links (SSL) are integrated into the belt design tomanage high loads and thermal expansion associated withtemperature variations.
• Proven Enduralox polypropylene material increases resistance tochemical and temperature cycling.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Proven drive system requires less back tension and is less sensitive tobelt elongation.
• Robust design reduces contamination risks.
• For belts with molded-in sideguards, provide a minimum backbend
radius of 7 in (180 mm).

3.0"
(76 mm)sideguard

sideguard.625"(15.9 mm)1.99"
(50.5 mm)1.99"
(50.5 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Enduralox polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Wear-resistant stainlesssteel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf/ft

N/m

°F

°C

lb/ft²

kg/m²

2,000

29,20034 to 220

1 to 104

2.6

12.7

131

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Round Hole Enhanced
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.99
6
0.66
5/32 (0.156)

mm
50.5
152.4
16.8
4

20%
Open
Barn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 888• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Enhanced design and hole pattern of S800 Perforated Flat Top.
• Improved hole pattern and more open hinge design provides better
airflow and drainage.
• S888 sprocket design requires all sprockets to be retained in positionon the drive and idle shaft.
• To maintain proper tracking, design conveyors to use tracking shoes orsimilar devices.
• Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimum sprocket indent: 2.0 in (50 mm) to the sprocket edge.
• Maximum clearance between the sprocket and the retainer rings orcollars: no greater than 0.125 in (3 mm) for all sprockets on the shafts.

1.99 in(50.5 mm)

1.99 in(50.5 mm)0.625 in(15.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal
X-ray detectable acetal

132

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
304 stainless steel
Stainless steel

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,500
1,500

N/m
21,90021,900Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.10
3.1

kg/m²
15.14
15.14

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Referencein22.6-28.0
28.6-30.6
31.3-35.3
36.0-40.6

mm
575-711727-778795-897914-1,032

Maximum
Number of
Sprockets Per
Shaftb
6
7
8
9

14
16
18
20
24
30
32
36
42
48

41.3-46.0
46.6-48.0
48.6-52.6
53.3-58.6
59.3-64.6
65.3-66.6
67.3-72.6
73.3-79.9
80.6-84.6
85.3-87.9

1,049-1,167
1,184-1,218
1,235-1,336
1,353-1,489
1,506-1,641
1,658-1,692
1,709-1,844
1861-2030
2,047-2,148
2,165-2,233

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

356
406
457
508
610
762
813
914
1,067
1,219

3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9

Medium Slot SSL, Large Slot SSL
Belt Width Rangea

54
1,372
9
88.6-91.9
2,250-2,335
20
60
1,524
11
92.6-95.2
2,351-2,419
21
72
1,829
13
95.9-98.6
2,436-2,504
22
84
2,134
15
99.2-103.2
2,521-2,622
23
96
2,438
17
103.9-109.2
2,639-2,774
24
120
3,048
21
109.9-118.6
2,791-3,011
25
144
3,658
25
119.2-119.9
3,028-3,045
26
For other widths, use an odd number of
To avoid sprocket interference with stainless steel links, seesprockets at maximum 6 in (152 mm) centerline the sprocket installation instructions or belt maintenance andspacing
installation guidelines.

Wearstrips Medium Slot andLarge Slot SSL

Carryway2
2
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2

3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
7

3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5

7
8
9
11
12
15
17

6
6
7
8
9
11
13

SERIES 888

Medium Slot, Round Hole Enhanced
Minimum
Belt Width Rangea
Number of
Sprockets Per
inmm
Shaftb
6
152
2
8
203
2
10
254
2
12
305
3

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 0.66 in(16.8 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 2 in (51 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b Lock all sprockets. Use appropriate locking collars to restrict axial movement.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

133

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6

A 0.5
12T
10T

0.4
0.3

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 888

Nylon Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)Nom. Pitch Nom. Outer
Diameter
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

10
(4.70%)

6.5

165

6.2

157

1.0

12
(3.29%)

7.78

196

7.5

191

1.0

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
50, 60, Available
70, 80,as a
25
90,
custom100
order.
Available as acustom order. 50, 60,
60,
70, 80, 50,
2570, 80,90,
90
100• U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989)
and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.
• Lock all sprockets in place on the shaft.

Buildup Resistant Acetal Sprockets
Nom. Hub
Number Nom. Pitch Nom. Outer
Diameter
Width
Available Bore Sizes
of Teeth Diameter(ChordalRound Square Round Square
Action)
in mm
in
mm
in
mm
in
in
mm
mm
10
6.5 165 6.2
157
1.5
38
2.5
60a
(4.89%)• Designed to work with the Round Hole Enhanced belt in freezer tunnel applications.
Contact Intralox Customer Service before using in other applications.
• Ensure all sprockets are locked in place on the shaft.

a Available as standard 60-mm square bore or available with four retention notches.

1342024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Universal Sideguards
Available Height
in
mm
2
51

Available Materials
Blue polypropylene

376Blue polypropylene
4102Blue polypropylene
6152
Blue polypropylene• Part of the Intralox EZ Clean product line.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• Minimum indent at edges: 2.0 in (51 mm).
• Minimum back bend radius: 4.5 in (115 mm).

Intralox Belt Puller Set
U.S. Units
14.4 in
4.2 in0.5 in2 lb
Belt Puller Set

Metric Units
365.8 mm
106.7 mm
12.7 mm
0.9 kgSERIES 888

Single Belt Puller
LengthWidth
HeightWeightWeight6 lb
2.7 kg• Can be used in carryways and returnways to install, close, or open
compatible belts.
• Improves worker safety.
• Reduces the number of people required to install or remove large or
inclined belts.
• Reduces the risk of belt damage that can lead to foreign material
contamination.
• Set includes two belt pullers and one Intralox ratchet strap.
• Solid metal construction with dedicated metal rod that locks into thebelt puller.
• Etched QR code on the tool links to an instructional video.
• Compatible with S800, S888, and S1800 belts. For up-to-datecompatibility information, contact Intralox Customer Service.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

135

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 888

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 28: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S888 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
6.5
7.7

165
196

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a

Numberof Teeth
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
S888 Medium Slot, Medium Slot SSL, Large Slot SSL, Round Hole Enhanced
10
2.77-2.925
70-74
3.00
76
6.5
165
12
3.42-3.55
87-90
3.00
76
7.9
201

in

mm

3.61
4.24

92
108

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S888 Dead Plate Gap

in
6.5
7.7

136

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
165
196

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
10
12

in
0.158
0.132

mm
4.0
3.4

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
2
0.33
0.24 × 0.28

mm
27.2
51
8.4
6.1 × 7.1

38%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Large, open area provides excellent drainage.
• Low-profile transverse ridges help move product up inclines and down
declines.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Transverse ridge height: 0.188 in (4.8 mm).
• Normal ridge indent: 0.25 in (6.4 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalAcetalaDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
350
1,480
1,000

N/m
10,2005,110
21,60014,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
-50 to 70°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93-46 to 21

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.81
0.84
1.26
1.26

kg/m²
3.95
4.09
6.14
6.14

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

137

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
2
0.33
0.24 × 0.28

mm
27.2
51
8.4
6.1 × 7.1

38%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Open pattern with smooth upper surface and fully flush edges.
• HR nylon belts use short rodlets to hold the main hinge rod in place.
The rodlets are made from the same material as the main rod.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Provides excellent lateral movement of containers.
• Flights and sideguards are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Enduralox polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalHSEC acetal
Hi-Temp
FR TPESHR nylon
HHR nylon
AcetalaDetectable polypropylene A22

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Hi-Temp
Polypropylene
HR nylon
HHR nylon
Polyethylene
Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
700
350
1,480
800
1,200
750
1,200
1,200
1,000
350

N/m
10,200
10,2005,110
21,60011,70017,50010,90017,50017,50014,6005,110

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
34 to 200
70 to 400
40 to 150
-50 to 240-50 to 310-50 to 70
34 to 150°C
1 to 104
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93
1 to 93
21 to 204
4 to 66-46 to 116-46 to 154-46 to 21
1 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.76
0.76
0.81
1.15
1.15
1.08
1.19
1.10
1.10
1.15
0.89

kg/m²
3.70
3.70
3.96
5.62
5.62
5.27
5.81
5.40
5.40
5.62
4.35

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

138

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid with Heavy-Duty Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
4.7
0.33
0.24 x 0.28

mm
27.2
118.4
8.4
6.1 x 7.1

35%Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

0.344 in
(8.8 mm)1.07 in(27.2 mm)1.07 in(27.2 mm)1.07 in(27.2 mm)0.172 in(4.4 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Enduralox™ polypropylene

Standard Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ftN/m
700
10,200700
10,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F°C
34 to 220
1 to 104
34 to 220
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
kg/m²
0.76
3.71
0.76
3.71

139

SERIES 900

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Open pattern with smooth upper surface and fully flush edges.
• Heavy-duty edge reduces catchpoints and increases belt lifespan.
• The combination of heavy-duty edge and unheaded rods inhibits rod
migration caused by thermal expansion in microwave applications.
• Compatible with the Intralox Rod Remover.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments (See Product Notes.)
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
mm
1.07
27.2
10
254
1.0
25.4
0.17 x 0.29
4.3 x 7.4
0.28 x 0.29
7.1 x 7.4
43%
ClosedOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Open pattern with a smooth upper surface and fully flush edges.
• Flush edge accommodates special abrasion resistant nylon rod growthfor belt widths that are 42 in (1066 mm) or narrower.
• Other width increments may be available. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for more information.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• To accommodate the rod retention design, ensure that outer sprockets
are indented 2.5 in (63.5 mm) from the edge of the belt to thecenterline of the sprocket.
• Flights are available.

1.07”(27.2 mm)1.07”
(27.2 mm)1.07”
(27.2 mm)0.172”(4.4 mm)0.344”(8.7 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Acetal
HR nylon
HHR nylon

140

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
HR nylon
HHR nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
1,480
1,200
1,200

N/m
10,20021,60017,50017,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 200
-50 to 240-50 to 310°C
1 to 104
1 to 93-46 to 116-46 to 154

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.76
1.10
1.02
1.04

kg/m²
3.71
5.37
4.98
5.08

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flush Grid
Pitch
Molded Widths
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
3.25
4.5
7.5
0.24 × 0.28

mm
27.2
83
114
191
85
6.1 × 7.1

38%
Open
Snap-lock; headed• Width tolerances: +0.000/-0.020 in (+0.000/-0.500 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

SERIES 900

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not compatible with sprockets that have a pitch diameter smaller thanthe 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch diameter (10 tooth) sprocket. If a 3.5 in (89mm) pitch diameter is required, do not use a split sprocket.
• Sprockets required:- 85-mm belt: one sprocket- 4.5 in (114 mm) belt: up to three sprockets- 7.5 in (191 mm) belt: up to five sprockets

A Arrow indicates preferred run direction
0.344"(8.7 mm)Figure 29: Series 900 Flush Grid Mold to Width

0.344"(8.7 mm)Figure 30: Series 900 Flush Grid 85 mm Mold to Width

Belt Data
Belt Width
in
3.25
3.25
4.5
4.5
7.5
7.5

mm
83
83
114
114
191
191
85

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalPolypropylene
AcetalPolypropylene
AcetalAcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf
130
250
263
555
438
800
275

N
578
1,110
1,170
2,470
1,950
3,560
1,220

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 200-50 to 200°C
1 to 104-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.31
0.42
0.39
0.54
0.59
0.85
0.38

kg/m
0.46
0.62
0.58
0.80
0.88
1.26
0.57

141

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
ONEPIECE™ Live Transfer Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
4.7
0.33
0.24 × 0.28

mm
27.2
119
8.4
6.1 × 7.1

38%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
0.344"
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
(8.7 mm)• Transfer edge is an integral part of this belt.
• Nylon rods provide superior wear resistance.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
Figure 31: 6.0 in (152 mm) double tracking tab belt
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Addition of a fixed frame support can be necessary. The support
ensures that the transfer belt does not snag when it intersects with the 0.344"
takeaway belt. Add support below the transfer belt, before the transfer. (8.7 mm)
See 90-Degree Container Transfers for more information.
• When moving products from transfer belt to takeaway belt, ensure thetransfer belt surface is no more than 0.06 in (1.5 mm) above thetakeaway belt surface. When product is moving from the infeed belt
onto the transfer belt, ensure the belts surfaces are level.
Figure 32: 4.7 in (119 mm) single tracking tab belt
• For custom belt widths, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Do not use with sprockets smaller than a 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch
0.344"(8.7 mm)diameter (10 tooth) sprocket. If a 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch diameter isrequired, do not use a split sprocket.
• For belt-strength calculations, subtract 1.5 in (38 mm) from the actual
belt width.
• Also available in a 4.7 in (119 mm) wide single-tracking tab belt and 6
in (152 mm) wide double-tracking tab belt.
• Molded tracking tabs fit into standard 1.75 in (44.5 mm) wearstrip
tracks, ensuring proper belt alignment.
Figure 33: Installation dimensions• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalFR TPES

142

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
1,480
1,000

N/m
10,20021,60014,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 200
40 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 93
4 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.93
1.15
1.63

kg/m²
4.54
5.62
7.95

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
2
0.33
0.24 × 0.28

mm
27.2
51
8.4
6.1 × 7.1

38%
35%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• HR nylon belts use short rodlets to hold the main hinge rod in place.
The rodlets are made from the same material as the main rod.
• Use HR nylon in dry, elevated-temperature applications.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Raised ribs extend 3/16 in (4.7 mm) above basic module, with fully
flush edges.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Enduralox polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalHSEC acetal
HHR nylon
AcetalaDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
HHR Nylon
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
700
350
1,480
800
1,200
1,000

N/m
10,200
10,2005,110
21,60011,70017,50014,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 310-50 to 70°C
1 to 104
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 154-46 to 21

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.07
1.07
1.14
1.68
1.68
1.60
1.68

kg/m²
5.21
5.21
5.57
8.19
8.19
7.80
8.19

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

143

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Rib with Heavy-Duty Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approx.)
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
4.7
0.33
0.24 x 0.28

mm
27.2
118.4
8.4
6.1 x 7.1

38%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• The combination of a heavy-duty edge and unheaded rods inhibits rod
migration caused by thermal expansion in microwave applications.
• Compatible with Intralox Rod Remover.
• Can be used with finger transfer plates to eliminate product tippingand hang-ups.
• Raised ribs extend 3/16 in (4.7 mm) above basic module, with fully
flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.

1.07 in(27.2 mm)1.07 in(27.2 mm)1.07 in(27.2 mm)0.563 in(14.3 mm)0.172 in(4.4 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Enduralox polypropylene

144

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft700
700

N/m
10,200
10,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220°C
1 to 104
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.07
1.07

kg/m²
5.22
5.22

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Raised Rib
Pitch
Molded Widths (Blue acetal)
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
mm
1.07
27.2
1.1
29
1.5
37
1.8
46
2.2
55
0.24 × 0.28
6.1 × 7.1
38% - 40%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Raised ribs span the entire belt width, increasing container stability.
• Nylon rodlets provide longer service life.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Supports both small and larger products, allowing easy productchanges.
• The 1.8 in (46 mm) belt is also available in grey polypropylene forapplications where higher friction is needed.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data
Belt Width
in
1.1
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.2

mm
29
37
46
46
56

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetalPolypropylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf
140
200
230
90
200a

N
623
890
1,020
400
890a

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.19
0.23
0.29
0.19
0.34

kg/m
0.29
0.35
0.43
0.28
0.50

a 270 lbf (1,200 N) for 2.2 in (55 mm) with two (2) sprockets.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

145

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
in
1.07
2
0.33
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
27.2
51
8.4
-

0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed surface with fully flush edges.
• HR nylon belts use short rodlets to hold the main hinge rod in place.
The rodlets are made from the same material as the main rod.
• Use HR nylon in dry, elevated-temperature applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ideal for handling glass and other containers.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalHSEC acetal
HR nylon
HHR nylon
AcetalaDetectable polypropylene A22

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
HR nylon
HHR nylon
Polyethylene
Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
350
1,480
800
1,200
1,200
1,000
450

N/m
10,2005,110
21,60011,70017,50017,50014,6006,570

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 240-50 to 310-50 to 70
34 to 150°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 116-46 to 154-46 to 21
1 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.96
1.01
1.50
1.50
1.40
1.40
1.50
2.21

kg/m²
4.69
4.95
7.30
7.30
6.80
6.80
7.30
10.79

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

146

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flat Top
Pitch
Molded Widths
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
3.25
4.5
7.5
-

mm
27.2
83
114
191
85
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed surface with fully flush edges.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Do not use with sprockets smaller than a 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch
diameter (10 tooth) sprocket. If a 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch diameter isrequired, do not use a split sprocket.
• One sprocket can be placed on the 3.25 in (83 mm) and 85-mm belt.
Up to three sprockets can be placed on the 4.5 in (114 mm) belt. Up to A preferred run direction
five sprockets can be placed on the 7.5 in (191 mm) belt.
0.384 in
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
(9.8 mm)0.313 in
(8.0 mm)
1.308 in(33.2 mm)
1.688 in
(42.9 mm)Figure 34: S900 Flat Top Mold to Width
3.341 in(84.9 mm)0.384 in(9.8 mm)0.245 in(6.2 mm)

1.177 in(29.9 mm)1.657 in
(42.1 mm)Figure 35: S900 Flat Top 85 mm Mold to Width

Belt Data
Belt Width
in
3.25
3.25
4.5
4.5
7.5
7.5

mm
83
83
114
114
191
191
85

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalPolypropylene
AcetalPolypropylene
AcetalAcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf
130
250
263
555
438
800
500

N
578
1,110
1,170
2,470
1,950
3,560
2,220

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 200-50 to 200°C
1 to 104-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.37
0.52
0.52
0.74
0.83
1.18
0.50

kg/m
0.55
0.77
0.77
1.10
1.24
1.76
0.74

147

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
ONEPIECE™ Live Transfer Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
4.7
0.33
-

mm
27.2
119
8.4
-

0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
0.384"(9.8 mm)before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Transfer edge is an integral part of the belt.
• Nylon rods provide superior wear resistance.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
Figure 36: 6.0 in (152 mm) double tracking tab belt
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Addition of a fixed frame support can be necessary. The support
ensures that the transfer belt does not snag when it intersects with the 0.384"
takeaway belt. Add support below the transfer belt, before the transfer. (9.8 mm)
See 90-Degree Container Transfers for more information.
• When moving products from transfer belt to takeaway belt, ensure thetransfer belt surface is no more than 0.06 in (1.5 mm) above thetakeaway belt surface. When product is moving from the infeed belt
onto the transfer belt, ensure the belts surfaces are level.
Figure 37: 4.7 in (119 mm) single tracking tab belt
• For custom belt widths, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
0.384"(9.8 mm)• Also available in a 4.7 in (119 mm) wide single tracking tab belt and 6
in (152 mm) wide double tracking tab belt.
• Molded tracking tabs fit into standard 1.75 in (44.5 mm) wearstrip
tracks ensuring proper belt alignment.
• Do not use with sprockets smaller than a 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch
diameter (10 tooth) sprocket. If a 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch diameter isrequired, do not use a split sprocket.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Acetal

148

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
1,480

N/m
10,20021,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 200°C
1 to 104-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.93
1.50

kg/m²
4.54
7.30

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Perforated Flat Top
in
mm
1.07
27.2
2
51
0.33
8.4
See Product Notes.
See Product Notes.
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod TypeSERIES 900

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Hole sizes include 3% open area at the hinge.
• Holes have a radiused top edge, allowing quiet operation and goodvacuum performance.
• Other hole dimensions and patterns can be created by drilling S900
Flat Top.
• HR nylon belts use short rodlets to hold the main hinge rod in place
and are made from the same material as the main rod.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Use stainless steel split sprockets in elevated-temperatures.
• Designed for vacuum transfer applications, with a scalloped underside
to reduce carryway blockage.
• Available hole sizes:- Ø 0.125 in (3.2 mm) - 5% open area
- Ø 0.15625 in (4.0 mm) - 6% open area
- Ø 0.1875 in (4.8 mm) - 8% open area

A molded hole detail

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalHSEC acetal
FR TPESHR nylon
AcetalaUVFR

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
HR Nylon
Polyethylene
UVFR

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
350
1,480
800
750
1,200
1,000
700

N/m
10,2005,110
21,60011,70010,90017,50014,600
10,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
34 to 200
40 to 150
-50 to 240-50 to 70-34 to 200°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93
1 to 93
4 to 66-46 to 116-46 to 21
1 to 93

Belt Mass 1/8
inBelt Mass
5/32 inBelt Mass
3/16 inlb/ft² kg/m² lb/ft² kg/m² lb/ft² kg/m²––
0.93 4.54––––
0.98 4.79––
1.48 7.23 1.46 7.11 1.43 6.98––
1.46 7.11––––
1.59 7.76––––
1.40 6.80––
1.48 7.23 1.46 7.11 1.43 6.98
2.04 9.96 2.04 9.96 2.04 9.96

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating. 1/8 in (3.2 mm) and 3/16 in (4.8 mm)

hole sizes are available in acetal only.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

149

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mesh Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
2
0.33
0.05 × 0.31

mm
27.2
51
8.4
1.3 × 7.9

24%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ideal for fruit and vegetable processing, especially for stemmed
products and dewatering applications.

Figure 38: Top surface

Figure 39: Underside surface

Figure 40: Dimensions

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
Polyethylene

150

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,480
700
350

N/m
21,600
10,2005,110

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 150°C
1 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.39
0.93
0.99

kg/m²
6.79
4.55
4.84

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Diamond Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
3.0
0.33

mm
27.2
76
8.4

Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two-material rubber modules provide a high friction surface without
interfering with carryways and sprockets.
• Available in grey PP with black rubber, white PP with white rubber, andnatural PE with white rubber.
• Abrasion resistant rods are recommended.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for information about friction values between
product and belt.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 1 in (25 mm) and 1.7 in(43 mm).
Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Grey/black
Polypropylene
White/white
Polypropylene
Natural/white
Polyethylene

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf/ftN/m°F°C
Polypropylene
1,000 14,600
34 to 150
1 to 66
Polypropylene
1,000 14,600
34 to 150
1 to 66
Polyethylene
350
5,110
-50 to 120-46 to 49
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.40
1.40
1.50

kg/m²
6.83
6.83
7.32

Friction Top
Hardness
45 Shore A
56 Shore A
56 Shore A

FDA(USA) EU MCa
b
b
c
b
c

151

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Square Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
3.0
0.33

mm
27.2
76
8.4

Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two-material rubber modules provide a high-friction surface without
interfering with carryways and sprockets.
• Available in grey PP with black rubber and white PP with white rubber.
• Abrasion resistant rods are recommended.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for information about friction values between
product and belt.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the effective maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors
when designing conveyor systems to use these belts.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 1 in (25 mm) and 1.7 inand (43 mm).
Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Grey/black
Polypropylene
White/white
Polypropylene

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf/ftN/m°F°C
Polypropylene
1,000 14,600
34 to 150
1 to 66
Polypropylene
1,000 14,600
34 to 150
1 to 66
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

152

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.50
1.50

kg/m²
7.32
7.32

Friction Top
Hardness
45 Shore A
56 Shore A

FDA
(USA)
b
b

EU
MCa
c

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width 29 mm Square Friction Top
Pitch
Molded Width
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
1.1

mm
27.2
29

ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two-material rubber modules provide a high-friction surface without
interfering with carryways and sprockets.
• Available in grey PP with black rubber, grey acetal with black rubber,and blue acetal with black rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for information about friction values between
product and belt.

Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Grey/black
Nylon
Grey/black
Nylon
Blue/black
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf
N
°F
°C
Polypropylene
65289
34 to 150
1 to 66
Acetal140623-10 to 130-23 to 54
Acetal140623-10 to 130-23 to 54
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.17
0.21
0.21

kg/m
0.25
0.31
0.31

Friction Top
Hardness
45 Shore A
54 Shore A
54 Shore A

FDA
(USA)
b

EU
MCa

153

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
3.0
0.33

mm
27.2
76
8.4

Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two-material rubber modules provide a high-friction surface without
interfering with carryways and sprockets.
• Available in grey PP with black rubber and white PP with white rubber.
• Abrasion resistant rods are recommended.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for information about friction values between
product and belt.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the effective maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors
when designing conveyor systems to use these belts.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 1 in (25 mm) and 1.7 in(43 mm).
Belt Data

Base Belt
Material
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Grey/black
Polypropylene
White/white
Polypropylene
High-Performance Polypropylene
FT blue/blue

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

AgencyAcceptability

lbf/ft
1,000
1,000

N/m
14,60014,600°F
34 to 150
34 to 150°C
1 to 66
1 to 66

lb/ft²
1.40
1.40

kg/m²
6.83
6.83

Friction Top
Hardness
45 Shore A
56 Shore A

1,000

14,60034 to 212

1 to 100

1.40

6.83

59 Shore A

Belt Mass

FDA(USA) EU MCa
b
b
c
b

c

a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

1542024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid with Insert Rollers
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
6
1.00
0.24 × 0.28

mm
27.2
152
25.4
6.1 × 7.1

38%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Uses acetal rollers.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For applications where low back-pressure accumulation is required.
• Product accumulation load is 5% to 10% of product weight.
• For low back pressure applications, place wearstrips between rollers.
For driven applications, place wearstrip directly under rollers.
• Do not place sprockets inline with rollers.
• Standard roller diameter: 0.75 in (19.05 mm). Other roller diameters
are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Standard roller spacing across belt width: 2 in (51 mm), 3 in (76 mm),or 4 in (102 mm) inline or staggered.
• Standard roller spacing along belt length: 1.07 in (27.2 mm), 2.14 in(54.4 mm).
• For custom roller-placement options, contact Intralox Customer
Service.
• Minimum roller indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).

Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
Diameter 0.18 in 2 inBelt Material(4.6 mm)lbf/ftPolypropylene Polypropylene
490
AcetalPolypropylene
1,030

Belt Strength
Roller Width Spacing
51 mm

3 in

76 mm

4 in

102 mmN/m
7,150
15,000lbf/ft
550
1,170

N/m
8,030
17,100lbf/ft
590
1,240

N/m
8,610
18,1002024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 200°C
1 to 104
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.76
1.15

kg/m²
3.71
5.61

155

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
10
0.33

mm
27.2
254
8.4

0%
7%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ideal for batch-off applications.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 2 in (51 mm) and 3 in (76mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft700

N/m
10,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.98

kg/m²
4.78

a When using steel sprockets, the belt strength for polyethylene is 240 lbf/ft (3,500 N/m). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability of polyurethane

sprockets.

156

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.07
6
0.33
0.24 × 0.28

mm
27.2
152
8.4
6.1 × 7.1

38%
3%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Built with Flush Grid edge modules.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. For
information about friction values between product and belt, contact
Intralox Customer Service.
• Can only be used with S900 Flush Grid base flights.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 1 in (25 mm) and 2 in (51mm) pattern.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft700

N/m
10,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.80

kg/m²
3.91

a When using steel sprockets, the belt strength for polyethylene is 240 lbf/ft (3,500 N/m).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

157

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flat Top with Holes
in
mm
1.07
27.2
3.35
85
4.5
114
See Product Notes.
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Pitch
Molded Widths
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

Product Notes

SERIES 900• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Has fully flush edges.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Holes have a chamfered top edge allowing quiet operation and goodvacuum performance.
• Rod material is abrasion resistant.
• HHR nylon belt material has a UL94 flammability rating of V2,
appropriate for elevated temperature applications, such as pin
strippers and light testers.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Use a nylon, machined, split sprocket in high-speed vacuum
applications.
• Split sprocket is available for easy installation.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
• Belt has 3% open area at the hinges and 3% to 4% open area at theholes.
• Hole diameter: 0.217 in (5.51 mm) on the 3.35-in (85-mm) belt; 0.219
in (5.56 mm) on the 4.5-in (114-mm) belt.

0.384 in(9.8 mm)0.313 in
(8.0 mm)
1.308 in(33.2 mm)
1.688 in
(42.9 mm)Figure 41: S900 Flat Top 4.5 in Mold to Width
3.341 in(84.9 mm)0.384 in(9.8 mm)0.245 in(6.2 mm)

1.177 in(29.9 mm)1.657 in
(42.1 mm)Figure 42: S900 Flat Top 85 mm Mold to Width

Belt Data
Belt Width
in
3.35
4.5

158

mm
85
114

Belt Material
HHR nylon
HHR nylon

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf
220
450

N
979
2,000

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 310-50 to 310°C-46 to 154-46 to 154

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.41
0.53

kg/m
0.61
0.79

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
in
2
4
6
7
8
10
12
14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

mm
51
102
152
178
203
254
305
356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
7
9
9
9

42
1,067
11
48
1,219
13
54
1,372
15
60
1,524
15
72
1,829
19
84
2,134
21
96
2,438
25
120
3,048
31
144
3,658
37
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in
(102 mm) centerline spacing.d

Wearstrips
Carryway
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7

Returnwayc
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

8
9
10
11
13
15
17
21
25

5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing.

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing.

SERIES 900

Belt Width Rangea

a If your belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range listed. Belts areavailable in 0.33 in (8.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 2 in (51 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c For Friction Top applications, use caution and contact Intralox Customer Service.

d Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

159

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

28T

0.7
0.6

A 0.5
0.3

0.2

6T
1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

203

7.0

178

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 4.0

20T
17T-18T
15T
12T

9T
-10
T

0.4

8.0

102

D

3.0

20

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed (V) by theshaft centerline distance (L). The strength factor is found at theintersection of the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line.
See Belt Selection Instructions for more information.

1.0
0%

76

E

2.0

B

51
25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D solid line: Flush Grid and Raised Rib
E dashed line: Open Flush Grid

90%

100%

SERIES 900

Molded Sprocketa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
6cc(13.40%) 2.1 53

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

2.2

56

0.75

19

9 (6.03%) 3.1

79

3.2

81

1.0

25

10
(4.89%)

89

3.6

91

0.75

19

3.5

12
(3.41%)

4.1

104

4.3

109

1.5

38

17
(1.70%)

5.8

147

5.9

150

1.5

38

18
(1.52%)

6.1

155

6.3

160

1.5,
1.0

38,
25

20
(1.23%)

6.8

173

7.0

178

1.5

38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
inb
in
mmb
mm
1.0
1

1 to
1-1/2,
1-15/16to2-3/161-3/16
to 1-1/2
1 to
11/2,
1-15/16,
2-3/161 to
1-1/2,
1-15/16to2-3/16

1.0,
1.5
1.0,
1.5
1.5

25
25

25, 4040

25 to40, 50
to 55

40

30 to
40
1.5,
2.5

25 to
40, 50 40,6560,
to 55

1.5,
2.5

25 to
40, 50 40,6560,
to 55

a When using 1.5 in (40 mm) bore polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 650 lbf/ft (9,490 N/m) is de-rated to 650 lbf/ft (9,490 N/m). Whenusing 2.5 in (60 mm) bore polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 1,100 lbf/ft (16,100 N/m) is de-rated to 1,100 lbf/ft (16,100 N/m. Allother belts maintain their published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service
for availability of polyurethane sprockets.
b Round bore molded and split sprockets are frequently furnished with two keyways. Use of two keys is NOT REQUIRED nor recommended. Round bore sprockets
do not have setscrews for locking the sprockets in place. As with square bore sprockets, only the center-most sprocket must be locked down. Imperial key sizes
on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.
c For more information on retaining the 2.1 in (53 mm) pitch diameter sprocket, see Retainer Rings and Center Sprocket Offset.

160

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
EZ Clean™ Sprocketa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
12(3.41%) 4.1 104

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

4.3

109

1.5

38

1.5

40

18
(1.52%)

6.3

160

1.5

38

1.5

40

6.1

155

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

N/m). When using when using 2.5 in (60 mm) bore polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 1,100 lbf/ft (16,100 N/m) is de-rated to 1,100
lbf/ft (16,100 N/m). All other belts maintain their published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact
Intralox Customer Service for availability of polyurethane sprockets.

Split Metal Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 3.5 89
12(3.41%) 4.1 104
15(2.19%) 5.1 130

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

3.6

91

1.5

38

1.5

40

4.3

109

1.5

38

1.5

40

5.3

135

1.5

38

17
(1.70%)
18(1.52%)
20(1.23%)
28(0.63%)

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm

1-3/16,
1-1/4

5.8

147

6.1

155

1.5

38

6.1

155

6.3

160

1.5

38

1-1/4,
1-1/2

6.8

173

7.0

178

1.5

38

1-1/4

9.7

246

9.7

246

1.5

38

1.5

30, 40
40

1.5,
2.5
1.5,
2.5

40
40, 6040, 6060

a Round bore molded and split sprockets are frequently furnished with two keyways. Use of two keys is NOT REQUIRED nor recommended. Round bore sprockets

do not have setscrews for locking the sprockets in place. As with square bore sprockets, only the center-most sprocket must be locked down. Imperial key sizes
on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

161

SERIES 900

a When using when using 1.5 in (40 mm) bore polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 650 lbf/ft (9,490 N/m) is de-rated to 650 lbf/ft (9,490

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Split Metal with Polyurethane (FDA) Joining Plates Reduced Clearance Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
15(2.19%) 5.1 130

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.3

135

1.5

38

17
(1.70%)

5.8

147

6.1

155

1.5

38

18
(1.52%)

6.1

155

6.3

160

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 6020(1.23%)

6.8

173

7.0

178

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40

28
(0.63%)

9.7

246

9.7

246

1.5

38

2.5

60

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5

40
40

Molded Tooth Plate Split Glass-Filled Nylon Sprockets

SERIES 900

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
15(2.19%) 5.1 130
17(1.70%) 5.8 147
18(1.52%) 6.1 155

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.3

135

1.5

38

6.1

155

1.5

38

6.3

160

1.5

38

1-1/4,
1-1/2

1.5,
2.5

40, 6020(1.23%)

7.0

178

1.5

38

1-1/4

1.5,
2.5

40, 606.8

173

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
1,
1.5 30, 40
40
1-3/1630, 4040

a Round bore molded and split sprockets are frequently furnished with two keyways. Use of two keys is NOT REQUIRED nor recommended. Round bore sprockets

do not have setscrews for locking the sprockets in place. As with square bore sprockets, only the center-most sprocket must be locked down. U.S. key sizes onround bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

Nylon Split Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)18(1.52%)

162

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.2

in
6.4

in
1.5

mm
157

mm
163

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
30, 402024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top Base Flights (Streamline)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
1
25

Available Materials

Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal
2
51
3
76
• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.7 in (17.8 mm).

Flush Grid Nub Top Base Flights (Double No-Cling)

SERIES 900

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
4102
Polypropylene, acetal• No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.7 in (17.8 mm).

Flush Grid Base Flights (Streamline/No-Cling)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
1
25
2
51

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal, HR
HHR nylon, HR nylon• Streamline/No-Cling flights are smooth on one side and vertically ribbed
on one side.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 0.7 in (17.8 mm).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

163

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Flush Grid, Flush Edge Base Flights (No-Cling)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
2
51

Available Materials
Polypropylene, HR nylon, HHR nylon• Flight is ribbed vertically (No-Cling) on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Flight is molded with a 1 in (25 mm) indent. Can be machined to any
indent between 1 in (25 mm) and 3 in (76 mm).

Flat Top Base Flights (Streamline Rubber)

SERIES 900

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
1
25
2
51
Polypropylene
3
76Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

Sideguards
Available Sizes
inmm

Available Materials
Polypropylene,
polyethylene, acetal, HR
251nylon, HHR nylon• Standard overlap design ensures product containment.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• When going around the 6-, 9-, and 10-tooth sprockets, sideguards fanout, opening a gap at the top that can allow small products to fall out.
The sideguards stay completely closed when wrapping around the 12tooth and larger sprockets.
• Standard gap between sideguards and flight edge: 0.2 in (5 mm).
• Minimum indent: 1 in (25.4 mm).

1642024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Finger Transfer Plates
Available Widths
in
mm
6
152

Number ofFingers
18

Available Materials

Acetal4
102
12• Eliminates product transfer and tipping problems. The fingers extend
between the belt ribs to allow a smooth continuation of the product flow
as the belt engages the sprockets.
• Easily installed on the conveyor frame with the supplied shoulder bolts.
Caps easily snap into place over the bolts, and keep foreign materials outof the slots.
• When retrofitting from Series 100 Raised Rib to Series 900 Raised Rib,
only use the 4 in (102 mm) 12 finger) width.
• Do not mix 4 in (102 mm) and 6 in (152 mm) wide finger plates.

Dimensional Requirements for S900 Finger Transfer Plate Installation

M

PP
AC

6 in (152 mm)
in
3.50
0.25
6.50
5.92
3.00
1.45
2.00
5.981
5.975

mm
89
6
165
150
76
37
51
151.9
151.8

SERIES 900

F
G
H
I
J
K
L

4 in (152 mm)
Retrofit
in
mm
2.38
61
0.19
5
5.83
148
3.94
100
2.18
55
0.90
23
2.00
51
–
–
3.976 101.0

M spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
Figure 43: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assembly

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

165

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Hold Down Tabs
Available Clearance
in
mm
0.16
4.1

Available Materials

SERIES 900

Acetal0.35
8.9• Tabs are placed on every other row.
• Carryway wearstrips or rollers that engage the tabs are only required at
the transition between horizontal sections and angled sections. Use acarryway radius design at this transition.
• Ensure that adequate lead-in radii and/or angles are used to prevent thepossibility of snagging the tab on the frame.
• The 0.16 in (4.1 mm) tab is available in both Flat Top and Flush Gridstyles. The 0.35 in (8.9 mm) tab is available with a Flat Top style. The topof this tab sits 0.04 in below the top of Flat Top belts and is level with the
top of Flush Grid belts.
• Hold down tabs do not work with 2.1 in (53 mm) and 3.1 in (79 mm)
pitch diameter sprockets. 3.5 in (89 mm) pitch diameter sprockets canbe used with a 1.5 in (40 mm) square bore.
• A minimum of 2.7 in (69 mm) is required between tabs to accommodate
1 sprocket.
• Tabs width: 1.4 in (36 mm).
• Minimum indent: 0.7 in (17.8 mm).

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 44: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S900 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
Numberof TeethinmmA
Range (bottom to top)
in
mm

B
in

C
mm

in

E
mm

in

mm

58
81
91

1.51
1.75
2.01

38
44
51

Flat Top, Flush Grid, Mesh Top, Nub Top, Perforated Flat Topa
2.1
3.1
3.5

166

53
79
89

6
9
10

0.75-0.90
1.30-1.39
1.47-1.56

19-23
33-35
37-40

1.25
1.51
1.70

32
38
43

2.28
3.20
3.60

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S900 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
Numberinmmof Teeth
4.1
104
12
5.1
130
15
5.8
147
17
6.1
155
18
6.8
173
20
9.7
246
28

A
Range (bottom to top)inmm
1.82-1.90
46-48
2.34-2.40
60-61
2.69-2.74
68-70
2.86-2.91
73-74
3.21-3.25
81-82
4.65
118

B
in
1.74
2.00
2.13
2.20
2.32
2.71

C

E

mm
44
51
54
56
59
69

in
4.25
5.20
5.80
6.20
6.75
9.74

mm
108
132
147
155
171
247

in
2.51
2.77
3.15
3.30
3.86
5.13

mm
64
70
80
84
98
130

31
39
42
44
50
53
54
57
69

2.19
3.17
3.51
4.19
5.19
5.87
6.21
6.89
9.74

56
81
89
106
132
149
158
175
247

1.35
1.85
2.02
2.35
2.86
3.20
3.37
3.70
5.13

34
47
51
60
73
81
86
94
130

2.1
3.1
3.5
4.1
5.1
5.8
6.1
6.8
9.7

53
79
89
104
130
147
155
173
246

6
9
10
12
15
17
18
20
28

0.75-0.90
1.30-1.39
1.47-1.56
1.82-1.90
2.34-2.40
2.69-2.74
2.86-2.91
3.21-3.25
4.65

19-23
33-35
37-40
46-48
59-61
68-70
73-74
82-83
118

1.22
1.52
1.64
1.75
1.95
2.09
2.12
2.25
2.71

Raised Rib, Flush Grid with Insert Rollers, Open Grida
2.1
3.1
3.5
4.1
5.1
5.8
6.1
6.8
9.7

53
79
89
104
130
147
155
173
246

6
9
10
12
15
17
18
20
28

0.75-0.90
1.30-1.39
1.47-1.56
1.82-1.90
2.34-2.40
2.69-2.74
2.86-2.91
3.21-3.25
4.65

19-23
33-35
37-40
46-48
60-61
68-70
73-74
81-82
118

1.25
1.51
1.70
1.74
2.00
2.13
2.20
2.32
2.71

32
38
43
44
51
54
56
59
69

2.28
3.20
3.60
4.25
5.20
6.00
6.20
6.75
9.92

58
81
91
108
132
152
157
171
252

1.73
1.97
2.23
2.73
2.99
3.40
3.52
4.08
5.30

44
50
57
69
76
86
89
104
135

32
38
43
44
51
54
56
59
69

2.28
3.20
3.60
4.25
5.20
5.80
6.20
6.75
9.70

58
81
91
108
132
147
155
171
246

1.51
1.75
2.01
2.51
2.77
3.15
3.30
3.86
5.08

38
44
51
64
70
80
84
98
129

58
81
91
108
132
152
157
171

1.76
1.96
2.22
2.72
2.98
3.40
3.51
4.08

45
50
56
69
76
86
89
104

Open Flush Grida
2.1
3.1
3.5
4.1
5.1
5.8
6.1
6.8
9.7

53
79
89
104
130
147
155
173
246

6
9
10
12
15
17
18
20
28

0.75-0.90
1.30-1.39
1.47-1.56
1.82-1.90
2.34-2.40
2.69-2.74
2.86-2.91
3.21-3.25
4.65

19-23
33-35
37-40
46-48
60-61
68-70
73-74
81-83
118

1.25
1.51
1.70
1.74
2.00
2.13
2.20
2.32
2.71

Diamond Friction Top, Flat Friction Top, Square Friction Topa
2.1
3.1
3.5
4.1
5.1
5.8
6.1
6.8

53
79
89
104
130
147
155
173

6
9
10
12
15
17
18
20

0.75-0.90
1.30-1.39
1.47-1.56
1.82-1.90
2.34-2.40
2.69-2.74
2.86-2.91
3.21-3.25

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

19-23
33-35
37-40
46-48
60-61
68-70
73-74
81-82

1.25
1.51
1.70
1.74
2.00
2.13
2.20
2.32

32
38
43
44
51
54
56
59

2.28
3.20
3.60
4.25
5.20
6.00
6.20
6.75

167

SERIES 900

Flush Grid Nub TopaSTRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S900 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
Numberinmmof Teeth
9.7
246
28

A
Range (bottom to top)
in
mm
4.65
118

B
in
2.71

C
mm
69

E

in
9.95

mm
253

in
5.33

mm
135

32
40
43
48

2.38
3.36
3.70
4.38

60
85
94
111

1.54
2.04
2.21
2.54

39
52
56
65

59-61
2.10
53
68-70
2.32
59
72-73
2.31
59
82-83
2.42
61
118
2.71
69
Mold to Width Flat Top with Holes

5.38
6.06
6.34
7.08
9.94

137
154
161
180
252

3.05
3.39
3.52
3.89
5.32

77
86
89
99
135

6.20

157

3.36

6.2

Mold to Width 29 mm Square Friction Topa
2.1
3.1
3.5
4.1

53
79
89
104

6
9
10
12

0.75-0.90
1.30-1.39
1.47-1.56
1.82-1.90

5.1
5.8
6.1
6.8
9.7

130
147
155
173
246

15
17
18
20
28

2.34-2.40
2.69-2.74
2.83-2.88
3.21-3.25
4.65

6.2

157

18

2.86

19-23
33-35
37-40
46-48

73

1.27
1.58
1.70
1.88

2.20

56

SERIES 900

a For alternate layouts for the B dimension, see Anti-Sag Wearstrip Configuration.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S900 Dead Plate Gap

in
2.1
3.1
3.5
4.1
5.1
5.8
6.1
6.8
9.7

168

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
53
79
89
104
130
147
155
173
246

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
9
10
12
15
17
18
20
28

in
0.147
0.095
0.084
0.071
0.057
0.050
0.047
0.042
0.029

mm
3.7
2.4
2.1
1.8
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
0.7

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
3
0.50
-

mm
15.2
76
12.7
-

0%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Closed edges on one side of the belt.
• Underside design and small pitch allow the belt to run smoothly aroundnosebars.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Can be used over 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers.

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

SERIES 1000

Product Notes

0.17"(4.3 mm)

0.34"(8.7 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
Polyethylene
HR nylon

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Nylon2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,500
1,000
600
1,000

N/m
21,90014,6008,760
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 240°C
1 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 116

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.55
1.07
1.11
1.31

kg/m²
7.57
5.22
5.42
6.43

169

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Insert Roller
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
9
3.00

mm
15.2
228
76

12.5%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Has fully flush edges on one side and closed edges on opposite side.
• Rollers protrude above and below the belt surface.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Roller density: 240 rollers/ft2 (2580 rollers/m2).
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Compatible with 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter notched nosebars fortight transfers. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Belt can be supported using 1.38 in (35.1 mm) wide or narrower
parallel wearstrips.
• For low back-pressure applications, place wearstrip between rollers.
For activated roller applications, place wearstrip directly under rollers.
• Yellow acetal rollers are 0.3 in (7.6 mm) wide and 0.48 in (12.1 mm)
diameter. Rollers are on the belt rod.
• Rollers are spaced in groups with 1.5 in (38.1 mm) between roller
zones.
• Roller indent from edge of belt to edge of roller: 2.25 in (57.2 mm).
• Sprocket locations are indented 1.5 in (38.1 mm) from edge of belt.
• Sprocket locations are 3.0 in (76.2 mm) apart.

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)
0.48"
(12.2 mm)

0.34"
(8.7 mm)
0.17"(4.3 mm)

0.24"(6.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal170

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,000

N/m
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.7

kg/m²
8.3

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Insert Roller
Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
6

mm
15.2
152.4

12.5%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)
0.48"
(12.2 mm)

0.34"
(8.7 mm)
0.17"(4.3 mm)

0.24"(6.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf
1,000

N
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.85

kg/m
4.15

171

SERIES 1000

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Rollers protrude both above and below the belt.
• Rollers are on the hinge rod.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Compatible with 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tight transfer
applications. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• The belt can be supported using 1.38 in (35.1 mm) wide or narrower
parallel wearstrips.
• For low back-pressure applications, place the wearstrips between therollers. For activated roller applications, place the wearstrip directly
under rollers.
• Yellow acetal rollers are 0.3 in (7.6 mm) wide and 0.48 in (12.1 mm)
diameter.
• Roller indent from edge of belt to edge of roller: 0.44 in (11.2 mm).

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
High-Density Insert Roller
in
0.60
9
3.00

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
229
76.2

4%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges on one side and closed edges on opposite side.
• Rollers protrude above and below the belt surfaces.
• Uses one unheaded rod across the entire belt width on each belt row.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• For activated roller applications, place wearstrip directly under rollers.
• For low back-pressure applications, place wearstrip between rollers inparallel. Wearstrip of 0.50 in (13 mm) wide is recommended to allow
some manufacturing and installation tolerance in the conveyor, whileproviding adequate support to the belt. Maximum allowed wearstrip
width is 0.75 in (19 mm).
• Compatible with 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers. For high-speed and load applications, a nose-roller isrecommended.
• Yellow acetal rollers are 0.30 in (7.6 mm) wide and 0.48 in (12.1 mm)
diameter. Rollers are on the belt rod.
• Roller density: 320 rollers/ft2 (3440 rollers/m2).
• Roller indent: 0.70 in (17.8 mm) from edge of belt to edge of roller.
• Sprocket indent: 1.5 in (38.1 mm) from edge of belt.
• Sprocket spacing: 3.0 in (76.2 mm) apart.

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)
0.48"
(12.2 mm)

0.34"
(8.7 mm)
0.17"(4.3 mm)

0.24"(6.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal172

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,000

N/m
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.87

kg/m²
9.13

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
High-Density Insert Roller 85 mm
in
0.60
10
3.35

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
255
85

3.6%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges on one side and closed edges on opposite side.
• Rollers protrude above and below the belt surfaces.
• Uses one unheaded rod across the entire belt width on each belt row.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• For activated roller applications, place wearstrip directly under rollers.
• For low back-pressure applications, place wearstrip between rollers inparallel. Use 0.50 in (13 mm) wide wearstrips to allow manufacturing
and installation tolerance, while providing adequate belt support.
Maximum wearstrip width is 0.75 in (19 mm).
• Compatible with 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers. For high-speed and load applications, a nose-roller isrecommended.
• Yellow acetal rollers are 0.30 in (7.6 mm) wide and 0.48 in (12.1 mm)
diameter. Rollers are on the belt rod.
• Roller density: 360 rollers/ft2 (3875 rollers/m2).
• Roller indent: 0.89 in (22.6 mm) from edge of belt to edge of roller.
• Sprocket indent: 1.67 in (42.5 mm) from edge of belt.
• Sprocket spacing: 3.35 in (85 mm) apart.

SERIES 1000

Product Notes

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)
0.48"
(12.2 mm)

0.34"
(8.7 mm)
0.17"(4.3 mm)

0.24"(6.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,000

N/m
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.95

kg/m²
9.52

173

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Friction Top 85 mm
in
0.60
3.35
66.9
3.35
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
85.0
1700
85
-

0%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Closed edges on one side of the belt.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Underside design combined with small pitch allows the belt to runsmoothly around a 0.75 in (19 mm) nosebar. Use a dynamic nose-roller
for package handling applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.

0.085"(2.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.34"
(8.7 mm)

Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Grey/black
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf/ftN/m°F°C
Acetal
1,500 21,900-10 to 130-23 to 54
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b Fully compliant

174

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.80

kg/m²
8.79

Friction Top
Hardness
54 Shore A

FDA
(USA)
b

EU
MCa

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flat Top with Tabs
in
0.60
3.25
3.35
4.50
—

Pitch
Molded Widths
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
83
85
114
—

0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

SERIES 1000

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• 3.25 in (83 mm) tabbed belts use one sprocket.
• 4.50 in (114 mm) and 3.35 in (85 mm) tabbed belts use up to threesprockets.
• Can be used over 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers.
• Width tolerances: +0.000/-0.020 in (+0.00/-0.50 mm).
• 3.35 in (85 mm) molded tracking tabs fit into standard 1.65625 in (42.1mm) wearstrip tracks, ensuring proper belt alignment.
• 3.25 in (83 mm) and 4.50 in (114 mm) molded tracking tabs fit into
standard 1.75 in (44.5 mm) wearstrip tracks, ensuring proper beltalignment.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

0.60 in NOM(15.2 mm)

0.60 in NOM(15.2 mm)

0.60 in NOM(15.2 mm)0.17 in(4.3 mm)0.64 in(16.2 mm)0.30 in(7.6 mm)

Belt Data
Belt Width
in
3.25
3.35
4.50

mm
83
85
114

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf
250
419
563

N
1,110
1,860
2,500

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.44
0.44
0.60

kg/m
0.65
0.65
0.89

175

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top 85 mm
in
0.60
3.35
67
3.35
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
85
1700
85
-

0%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Closed edges used on one side of the belt.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Underside design, combined with small pitch, allows the belt to runsmoothly around a 0.75 in (19 mm) nosebar.
• A dynamic nose-roller is highly recommended for package handling
applications.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal176

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,500

N/m
21,900Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.55

kg/m²
7.57

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top ONEPIECE™ Live Transfer 6.3 in
in
0.60
6.3
-

Pitch
Molded Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
160
-

0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

SERIES 1000

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Transfer edge is an integral part of this belt.
• Designed for smooth, self-clearing, right-angle transfers onto takeaway
belts.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses three sprockets.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Retainer Rings and Center Sprocket Offset.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Addition of a fixed frame support can be necessary. The support
ensures that the transfer belt does not snag when it intersects with thetakeaway belt. Add support below the transfer belt, before the transfer.
See 90-Degree Container Transfers for more information.
• Requires sprockets with a pitch diameter of 1.50 in (38.1 mm) or
larger.
• Cannot be used over 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers.
• Molded tracking tabs fit into standard 1.75 in (44.5 mm) wearstrip
tracks to ensure proper belt alignment.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

4.70 in(119.4 mm)

0.34 in(8.7 mm)0.70 in(17.8 mm)0.29 in(7.4 mm)

1.715 in
(43.6 mm)

3.84 in(97.5 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
500

N/m
7,300

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.78

kg/m²
3.81

177

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
3
0.5
-

mm
15.2
76
12.7
-

0%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Available in grey acetal with black rubber.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Friction Top extends to the edge of the belt (no indent).
• Closed edges on one side of the belt.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Underside design and small pitch combine to allow the belt to runsmoothly around nosebars.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Can be used over 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers.

0.085"(2.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.34"
(8.7 mm)

Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Grey/black
Nylon
White/white
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf/ftN/m°F°C
Acetal
1,500 21,900-10 to 130-23 to 54
Acetal
1,500 21,900-10 to 130-23 to 54
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b Fully compliant

178

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.80
1.80

kg/m²
8.79
8.79

Friction Top
Hardness
54 Shore A
54 Shore A

FDA
(USA)
b
b

EU
MCa

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flat Top
in
0.60
1.1
1.5
1.8
2.2
-

Pitch
Molded Widths
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
29
37
46
55
-

0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 1000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Underside design and small pitch allow the belt to run smoothly aroundnosebars.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
• Can be used over 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers.
• 29 mm and 37-mm belts use one sprocket.
• 46 mm and 55-mm belts can use up to two sprockets.

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60" NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.17"
(4.3 mm)

0.34"(8.7 mm)

Belt Data
Belt Width
in
1.1
1.5
1.8
2.2

mm
29
37
46
55

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetalAcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf
140
200
230
201a

N
623
890
1,020
894a

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.15
0.19
0.23
0.28

kg/m
0.22
0.28
0.35
0.42

a 270 lbf (1,200 N) for 2.2 in (55 mm) with two (2) sprockets

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

179

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flat Friction Top
Pitch
Molded Widths

in
0.60
1.1
2.2

Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
29
55

ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 1000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Friction top extends to the end of the belt, with no indent.
• Underside design and small pitch allow the belt to run smoothly aroundnosebars.
• Available in grey acetal with black rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Can be used over 0.75 in (19.1 mm) diameter nosebars for tighttransfers.
• 29-mm belts use one sprocket.
• 55-mm belts can use up to two sprockets.

0.085 in(2.2 mm)0.26 in(6.6 mm).425 in(10.8 mm)

0.60 in NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60 in NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60 in NOM.
(15.2 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Width
in
1.1
2.2

mm
29
55

Default Rod
Base/Material,
Friction
Diameter
Belt MaterialTop
0.18 in (4.6 mm)
AcetalGrey/black Nylon
AcetalGrey/black Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
140
200b

°F
34 to 130
34 to 130lb/ft kg/m
0.17 0.25
0.34 0.48

N
623
890

°C
1 to 54
1 to 54

Friction Top
Hardness
54 Shore A
54 Shore A

Agency Acceptability:
1=White, 2=Blue,
3=Natural, 4=Grey
FDA (USA)
a
a

EU MC

a Fully compliantb 270 lbf (1,200 N) for 2.2 in (55 mm) with two (2) sprockets

1802024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
3.0
0.5
-

mm
15.2
76.0
12.7
-

0%
ClosedBarn door; unheaded

0.43 in(10.9 mm)0.086 in(2.2 mm)

0.60 in NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60 in NOM.
(15.2 mm)

0.60 in NOM.
(15.2 mm)0.17 in(4.3 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalHSEC acetal

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,000
1,800

N/m
29,20026,300Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.86
1.88

kg/m²
9.08
9.18

181

SERIES 1000

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two edge options available: no indent and 21 mm indent.
• Non Skid Raised Rib surface increases traction.
• Closed edges on one side of the belt.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Lug tooth sprockets improve sprocket engagement and simplify
installation.
• Low profile conveyor reduces the installation costs associated with
digging pits.
• Finger transfer plates ensure safe transfers, eliminating the need forsafety stops and reducing downtime.

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

SERIES 1000

in
3
4
6
7
8
10
12
14
15
18
24
30
36
42
48
54

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
5
5
7
7
9
9

mm
76
102
152
178
203
254
305
356
381
457
610
762
914
1,067
1,219
1,372

60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
120
3,048
21
144
3,658
25
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.d

Wearstrips
Carryway
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Returnwayc
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
6

11
13
15
17
21
25

6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacinga Belts are available in 0.5 in (12.7 mm) increments beginning with 3 in (76 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.
c For Friction Top applications, use caution and contact Intralox Customer Service.

d Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

Strength Factor
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6

32T
24T
16T

A 0.5
0.4
0.3

0.2

1

2

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed (V) by theshaft centerline distance (L). The strength factor is found at theintersection of the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line.
See Belt Selection Instructions for more information.

182

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Molded Sprockets
Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

16
(1.92%)

in
0.5

mm
13

3.1b

79b

3.2

81

1.0

25

24
(0.86%)

4.6

117

4.8

121

1.0

25

1.5

38

1.0

25

1.5

38

1.0
1.5

25
38

30
(0.54%)

5.8

147

5.9

150

32
(0.48%)

6.1

155

6.5

164

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mm
mm
1.5
40
1.0,
1.25
1.5,
2.5

40, 60
30

1.0,
1.25,
1-7/16
1.5

40

1.25

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

b When using 3.1 in (79 mm) pitch diameter sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 1,200 lbf/ft (17,500 N/m) is de-rated to 1,200 lbf/ft (17,500 N/m). Allother belts maintain the published rating.

Acetal Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
24(0.86%) 4.6 117
32
6.1 155(0.48%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm

4.8

121

1.5

38

1.25

6.5

164

1.5

38

30, 40a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

183

SERIES 1000

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
HR Nylon Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)
in mm
16
3.1
79
(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
3.2

in
1.0

mm
81

mm
25

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.9b

a Cannot be used with S1000 High Density Insert Rollers.
b 0.25 in keyway

SERIES 1000

HR Nylon Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
30
5.8 147(0.54%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.9

in
1.48

mm
150

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1-7/16

Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

24
(0.86%)

4.6

117

4.8

121

1.5

38

30
(0.54%)

5.8

147

6

152

1.5

38

32
(0.48%)

6.1

155

6.5

164

1.5

38

Available Bore Sizesa
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.0,
1.25,
1.5 30, 40
40
1.5
1.25,
1-7/16,30, 401.5
1.0,
1.5 30, 40
40
1.25,
1-7/16,
1.5

a The 24-tooth, 30-mm round bore sprocket is available with or without keyway. Identify keyway requirements when ordering these sprockets.

1842024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Polypropylene Composite Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
24
4.6 117(0.86%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
4.8

mm
121

in
1.5

mm
38

32
(0.48%)

6.5

164

1.5

38

6.1

155

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40
1.5

40

Dynamic Nose-Rollers

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SERIES 1000

Standard Nose-Roller Widths
U.S. Sizes (in)Metric Sizes (mm)
4.5
170.0
6.0
255.0
9.0
340.0
12.0
425.0
15.0
18.0
24.0
• U.S. sizes are available in 4.5 in, 6 in, and then in 3 in increments.
Metric sizes are available in 85 mm (3.35 in) increments.
• For other belt widths, combine multiple nose-rollers in the available
increments. For assistance, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Made of FDA-compliant, blue, oil-filled nylon.
• Roller diameter: 0.75 in (19 mm)

185

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 1000

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 45: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S1000 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm
in
mm
Flat Top, Flat Top 85 mm, Mold to Width Flat Top
1.34-1.37
34-35
1.59
40
3.08
2.11-2.13
54
1.99
50
4.60
2.88-2.89
73
2.43
62
6.12
High Density Insert Roller, Insert Roller

mm

in

mm

78
117
155

1.77
2.53
3.29

45
64
84

3.13

80

1.84

47

4.65
6.18

118
157

2.60
3.36

66
85

3.17
4.70
6.22

81
119
158

1.86
2.62
3.39

47
67
86

in

3.1
4.6
6.1

79
117
155

16
24
32

3.1

79

16

1.33

4.6
6.1

117
155

24
32

2.10
2.87

3.1
4.6
6.1

79
117
155

16
24
32

1.35
2.12
2.88

34

1.60

41

53
2.02
51
73
2.46
62
Flat Friction Top, Flat Friction Top 85 mm
34
54
73

1.59
2.01
2.44

40
51
62

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

186

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1000 Dead Plate Gap
Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
16
24
32

in
0.029
0.020
0.015

mm
0.7
0.5
0.4

SERIES 1000

in
3.1
4.6
6.1

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
79
117
155

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

187

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 1000
1882024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size(approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60

mm
15.2

See Product Notes.
0.17 × 0.10
0.31 × 0.10

4.3 × 2.5
7.9 × 2.528%OpenOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight with smooth surface grid.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Custom-built in widths that vary by material.
- Acetal and polypropylene are available in widths from 3 in (76 mm)
and up, in 0.5 in (12.7 mm) increments.
- Flame retardant thermoplastic polyester (FR TPES) is available inwidths from 5 in (127 mm) and up, in 1.0 in (25.4 mm) increments.
- All other materials are available in widths 3 in (76 mm) and up, in
1.0 in (25.4 mm) increments.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalHSEC acetal
FR TPESHHR nylon
HR nylon
UV resistant polypropylene
Detectable polypropylene A22
AcetalaUVFR
PKDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
HHR nylon
Nylon
UV resistant polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
UVFR
PKBelt Strength
lbf/ft
700
450
1,300
800
750
1,100
1,100
700
450
1,200
700
1,300

N/m
10,2006,570
19,00011,7007,355
14,60014,600
10,2004,413
17,500
10,20019,000Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
34 to 200
40 to 150
-50 to 310-50 to 240
34 to 220
34 to 150
-50 to 70-34 to 200-40 to 176°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93
1 to 93
4 to 66-46 to 154-46 to 116
1 to 104
1 to 66-46 to 21
1 to 93-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.81
0.87
1.19
1.19
1.30
1.14
1.07
0.81
1.04
1.19
1.57
1.04

kg/m²
3.95
4.25
5.80
5.80
6.34
5.57
5.22
3.98
5.08
5.80
7.67
5.08

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

189

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
in
0.60
3
1.00
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
15.2
76
25.4
-

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Lightweight with smooth, closed surface grid.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers. See Tight-Transfer Methods for more information.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
HR nylon
HHR nylon
AcetalAcetalb
X-ray detectable acetal
Detectable polypropylene A22
PKDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Nylon
HHR nylon
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
X-ray detectable acetal
Polypropylene
PK

Belt Strength
lbf/ft

N/m

500a
300a
500
800
1,000
900
800
300
1,000

4,903a2,942a4,903
7,845
14,6008,826
11,7002,942
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 240-50 to 310
34 to 200
-50 to 70-50 to 200
34 to 150
-40 to 176°C
1 to 104-46 to 66-46 to 116-46 to 154
1 to 93-46 to 21-46 to 93
1 to 66-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.90
0.96
1.15
1.175
1.30
1.30
1.6
1.09
1.14

kg/m²
4.40
4.69
5.61
5.74
6.35
6.35
7.81
5.32
5.57

a When using steel split sprockets, the belt strength for polypropylene is 400 lbf/ft (5,840 N/m): polyethylene is 240 lbf/ft (3,500 N/m)b Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

190

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Perforated Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
mm
0.60
15.2
3
76
1.00
25.4
See Product Notes.
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• 5.3% open area includes 2.1% open area at the hinge.
• Available with 5/32 in (4 mm) round perforations on a nominal 1 in
(25.4 mm) × 0.6 in (15.2 mm) perforation pattern.
• Underside design and small pitch allow the belt to run smoothly aroundnosebars.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers. See Tight-Transfer Methods for more information.
• For use on vacuum applications requiring tight, end-to-end transfers.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalaDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
900

N/m
14,60013,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
-50 to 70°C
1 to 93-46 to 21

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.30
1.30

kg/m²
6.35
6.35

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

191

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
3
0.5
0.17 × 0.10

mm
15.2
76
12.7
4.3 × 2.528%OpenOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Abrasion resistant rods are recommended.
• Available in grey polypropylene with grey rubber, blue polypropylene
with blue rubber, grey polypropylene with black rubber, and white
polypropylene with white rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the effective maximum degree of incline. Take these items into
consideration when designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers.
• Molded indent: 0.34 in (8.6 mm)
Belt Data

Base Belt
Material
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Default Rod
Material,
Base/Friction
DiameterTop
0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Grey/grey
Polypropylene
Grey/black
Polypropylene
White/white
Polypropylene
Highperformance FT Polypropylene
blue/blue

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass

lbf/ft
700
700
700

N/m
10,200
10,200
10,200°F
34 to 150
34 to 150
34 to 150°C
1 to 66
1 to 66
1 to 66

lb/ft²
1.18
1.18
1.18

kg/m²
5.76
5.76
5.76

Friction Top
Hardness
64 Shore A
55 Shore A
55 Shore A

700

10,20034 to 212

1 to 100

1.18

5.76

59 Shore A

FDA(USA) EU MCa
b
b

c

b

c

a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

1922024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Friction Top, No Indent
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
3
0.5
0.17 × 0.10

mm
15.2
76
12.7
4.3 × 2.528%OpenOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Abrasion resistant rods are recommended.
• Available in blue PP with blue rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers.
Belt Data

Base Belt
Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod
Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)

Base/Friction
Top
High-Performance Polypropylene
FT Blue/Blue

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

AgencyAcceptability

lbf/ft

N/m

°F

°C

lb/ft²kg/m²

Friction Top
Hardness

700

10,20034 to 212

1 to 100

1.18

5.76

59 Shore A

Belt Mass

FDA(USA) EU MCabca European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

193

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
ONEPIECE™ Live Transfer Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size(approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
6
1.00
0.17 × 0.10
0.31 × 0.10

mm
15.2
152
25.4
4.3 × 2.5
7.9 × 2.5

28%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight with smooth surface grid.
• Transfer edge is an integral part of this belt.
• Built with nylon rods for superior wear resistance.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Recommended for use with EZ Track sprockets.
• Use sprockets with a pitch diameter of 3.5 in (89 mm) or larger.
• Designed for smooth, self-clearing, right angle transfers onto takeaway
belts.
• Addition of a fixed frame support can be necessary. The support
ensures that the transfer belt does not snag when it intersects with thetakeaway belt. Add support below the transfer belt, before the transfer.
See 90-Degree Container Transfers.
• Also available in 6 in (152 mm) Mold to Width.
• For custom belt widths, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Molded tracking tabs fit into standard 1.75 in (44.5 mm) wearstrip
tracks ensuring proper belt alignment.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalFR TPESHHR nylon

194

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
HHR nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,300
750
1,100

N/m
19,00010,900
16,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
40 to 150
-50 to 310°C
1 to 93
4 to 66-46 to 154

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.19
1.30
1.20

kg/m²
5.80
6.34
5.80

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
3
1.00
0.18 × 0.09

mm
15.2
76
25.4
4.4 × 2.3

15%
26%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Nub pattern reduces contact between belt surface and product.
• Available in acetal, polypropylene, and polyethylene (for frozen
products).
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Recommended for products large enough to span the distance
between the nubs.
• Flush Grid Nub Top flights are available.
• Standard nub indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalPolyethylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polyethylene

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft
700
1,300
450
1,200

N/m
10,20019,0006,570
17,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220
-50 to 150-50 to 150°C
1 to 104
7 to 93-46 to 66-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.93
1.36
1.00
1.36

kg/m²
4.55
6.65
4.90
6.65

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for polypropylene, acetal, and nylon is750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m), and the temperature range for the sprocket

is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability of polyurethane sprockets.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

195

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Embedded Diamond Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
3
1.00
-

mm
15.2
76
25.4
-

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight with smooth, closed surface grid.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polyethylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polyethylene

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft
300

N/m
4,380

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 150°C-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.96

kg/m²
4.69

a When using steel sprockets, the belt strength for polyethylene is 240 lbf/ft (3,400 N/m).

1962024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Cone Top™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.60
9
1.00
-

mm
15.2
229
25.4
-

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Small pitch reduces chordal action and the gap required at the transfer
dead plate.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For information regarding sprocket placement, see the center sprocket
offset table in Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 2 in (51 mm) and 3 in (76mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal
HR nylon

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Nylon2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
500

N/m
14,6007,300

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
-50 to 240°C
1 to 93-46 to 116

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.31
1.18

kg/m²
6.40
5.76

197

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Mold to Width, 38 mm and 46 mm Wide
Pitch
Molded Widths
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size(approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Typein
0.60
1.5 & 1.8
0.17 × 0.10
0.31 × 0.10mm
15.2
38 & 46
4.3 × 2.5
7.9 × 2.5

26%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 1100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight with smooth surface grid.
• Flush edges.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Standard nylon rodlets provide longer service life.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Use only EZ Track sprockets.
• Use one sprocket maximum per shaft for both widths.
• Spacing between tracking tabs:- 38-mm belt: 1.2 in (30.6 mm)- 46-mm belt: 1.54 in (39.1 mm)• Can be used over 0.875 in (22.2 mm) diameter nosebar for tighttransfers.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal (38 mm)
Acetal (46 mm)

198

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf
130
150

N
578
667

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.185
0.216

kg/m²
0.275
0.321

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Referencea
Belt Width Rangeb

Wearstrips

mm
76
102
152
178
203
254
305

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftc
1
1
2
2
2
3
3

Carryway
2
2
2
3
3
3
3

Returnwayd
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

5
5
5
5
5
7
9
9
9

4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

8
9
10
11
13
15
17
21
25

5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

42
1,067
11
48
1,219
13
54
1,372
15
60
1,524
15
72
1,829
19
84
2,134
21
96
2,438
25
120
3,048
31
144
3,658
37
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in
(102 mm) centerline spacing.e

SERIES 1100

in
3
4
6
7
8
10
12

a Because of the single plate steel design, Intralox recommends using twice as many 8- and 12-tooth sprockets as indicated.

b If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 3 in (76 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

c This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

d For Friction Top applications, use caution and contact Intralox Customer Service.

e Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

199

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

32T
20T 24
T-2
12
6T
T 16
T-1
8T
8T

A 0.5
0.4
0.3

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

A 4.0

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 1100

Molded Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
12(3.41%) 2.3 58
16(1.92%) 3.1 79
18(1.52%) 3.5 89

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm

2.3

58

0.75

19

1.0

1.0

25

25

3.1

79

1.0

25

1, 1.25

1.5

25 to
30

40

3.5

89

0.75

19

1.0,
1.5

25, 4020(1.23%)
24(0.86%)
26(0.73%)
32(0.48%)

1.5

40

3.8

97

3.8

97

1.0

25

4.6

117

4.7

119

1.0

25

5.1

130

5.1

130

1.0

25

6.1

155

6.2

157

1.0

25

1 to
1.25
1 to
1.25
1 to
1.25

1.5 m
2.5
1.5
1.5,
2.5

25 to
30
25 to
30
25 to
30

40, 6040
40, 60a Round bore molded and split sprockets are frequently furnished with two keyways. Use of two keys is NOT REQUIRED nor recommended. Round bore sprockets

do not have setscrews for locking the sprockets in place. As with square bore sprockets, only the center-most sprocket must be locked down. Imperial key sizes
on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

200

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Abrasion Resistant Metal Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)8(7.61%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mm a
mm

1.6

41

1.6

41

0.164

4.2

0.75

0.625

20

12
(3.41%)

2.3

58

2.3

58

0.164

4.2

1.0

1.0

25

25

track the belt. The male key requires running the shaft keyway along the entire length of the shaft. Imperial key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI
standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

Split Metal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1889(1.54%) 3.5

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

3.5

89

1.7

43

24
(0.86%)

4.6

117

4.7

119

1.7

43

1,
1-3/16,
1-1/4

1.5

26
(0.73%)

5.1

130

5.1

130

1.7

43

1,
1-3/16,
1-1/4

1.5,
2.5

40, 6032(0.48%)

6.1

155

6.2

157

1.7

43

1,
1-3/16,
1-1/4,
1-1/2

1.5,
2.5

40, 60Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
1.5

40
30

40

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

EZ Track™ Molded Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)
in mm
16
3.1
79
(1.92%)
18
3.5
89(1.52%)
24
4.6 117(0.86%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
3.1

mm
79

in
1.0

mm
25

3.5

89

1.0

25

1.5

40

4.7

119

1.0

25

1.5,
2.5

40, 6032(0.48%)

6.2

157

1.0

25

1.5,
2.5

40, 606.1

1552024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

201

SERIES 1100

a The stainless steel sprockets have a male key in the round bore sizes. Since the key is part of the sprocket, only the center sprockets must be locked down toSTRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
EZ Track™ Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
24(0.86%) 4.6 117

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

4.7

119

1.5

38

1.5

40

32
(0.48%)

6.2

157

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 606.1

155

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

EZ Track™ and EZ Clean™ Sprockets

SERIES 1100

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
12(3.41%) 2.3 58

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

2.3

58

1.0

25

1.0

16
(1.92%)

3.1

79

3.1

79

1.0

25

1.0,
1-1/16,
1-1/8,
1-1/4

18(1.52%)

3.5

89

3.5

89

1.0

25

1.0

20
(1.23%)

3.8

97

3.8

97

1.0

25

24
(0.86%)

4.6

117

4.7

119

1.0

25

26
(0.73%)

5.1

130

5.1

130

1.0

25

32
(0.48%)

6.1

155

6.2

157

1.0

25

202

1.0

25

25, 30
1.0

25

1.5

40

1.0,
1-1/16,
1-1/8,
1-3/16,
1-1/4
1.0,
1-1/16,
1-1/8,
1-1/4
1.0,
1-1/16,
1-1/8,
1-3/16,
1-1/4
1-1/2

25

25, 301.5

25, 3040

25, 30,40

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top Base Flights (Streamline)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
2

51

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal,
detectable polypropylene A22• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Flat Top base Streamline flights are used in both Flat Top and Flush Gridbelts.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• For recommended minimum indent, contact Intralox Customer Service.

Flush Grid Nub Top Base Flights (No-Cling)

SERIES 1100

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
2
51
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal
376
Polypropylene, acetal• The No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• For recommended minimum indent, contact Intralox Customer Service.

Sideguards
Available Sizes
inmm
Available Materials
2
51
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• When going around the 8-, 12-, 16-, and 18-tooth sprockets, sideguards
fan out, opening a gap at the top that can allow small products to fall out.
The sideguards stay completely closed when wrapping around the 24tooth and larger sprockets.
• Standard gap between sideguards and flight edge: 0.2 in (5 mm).
• Minimum indent: 1 in (25 mm).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

203

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 1100

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 46: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S1100 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
Numberof TeethinmmA
Range (Bottom to Top)
in
mm

B
in

C
mm

in

E
mm

in

mm

Embedded Diamond Top, Flat Top, Flush Grid, Perforated Flat Topa
1.6
2.3
3.1
3.5
3.8

41
58
79
89
97

8
12
16
18
20

0.53-0.59
0.93-0.97
1.31
1.51
1.70

13-15
24-25
33
38
43

1.02
1.31
1.51
1.66
1.77

26
33
38
42
45

1.70
2.40
3.20
3.60
3.79

43
61
81
91
96

1.00
1.37
1.75
1.94
2.13

25
35
44
49
54

4.6
5.1
6.1

117
130
155

24
26
32

2.08
2.28
2.85

53
58
72

1.92
1.96
2.20

49
50
56

4.75
5.14
6.20

121
131
155

2.60
2.73
3.30

66
69
84

41
60
79
89
98
118
127
157

1.08
1.46
1.84
2.03
2.22
2.60
2.79
3.36

27
37
47
51
56
66
71
85

Flush Grid Friction Topa, Flush Grid Friction Top, No Indenta
1.6
2.3
3.1
3.5
3.8
4.6
5.1
6.1

204

41
58
79
89
97
117
130
155

8
12
16
18
20
24
26
32

0.53-0.59
0.93-0.97
1.31
1.51
1.70
2.08
2.28
2.85

13-15
24-25
33
38
43
53
58
72

1.04
1.30
1.55
1.66
1.77
1.97
2.06
2.25

27
33
39
42
45
50
52
57

1.61
2.36
3.12
3.50
3.88
4.64
5.02
6.16

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S1100 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
Numberinmmof TeethA
Range (Bottom to Top)
in
mm

B
in

C

E

mm

in

mm

in

mm

Flush Grid Nub Topa
1.6
2.3
3.1
3.5
3.8

41
58
79
89
97

8
12
16
18
20

0.53-0.59
0.93-0.97
1.31
1.51
1.70

13-15
24-25
33
38
43

1.04
1.30
1.55
1.66
1.70

27
33
39
42
43

1.57
2.32
3.08
3.46
3.84

40
59
78
88
98

1.05
1.42
1.80
1.99
2.18

27
36
46
51
55

4.6
5.1
6.1

117
130
155

24
26
32

2.08
2.28
2.85

53
58
72

1.97
2.06
2.25

50
52
57

4.60
4.98
6.13

117
127
156

2.56
2.75
3.32

65
70
84

26
33
39
42
43
50
52
57

1.66
2.41
3.17
3.55
3.93
4.69
5.07
6.22

42
61
81
90
100
119
129
158

1.13
1.50
1.88
2.07
2.26
2.64
2.83
3.41

29
38
48
53
57
67
72
87

1.6
2.3
3.1
3.5
3.8
4.6
5.1
6.1

41
58
79
89
97
117
130
155

8
12
16
18
20
24
26
32

0.54-0.60
0.93-0.97
1.32
1.51
1.71
2.09
2.28
2.86

14-15
24-25
34
38
43
53
58
73

1.04
1.30
1.55
1.66
1.70
1.96
2.05
2.24

a For alternate layouts for the B dimension, see Anti-Sag Wearstrip Configuration.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1100 Dead Plate Gap

in
1.6
2.3
3.1
3.5
3.8
4.6
5.1
6.1

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
41
58
79
89
97
117
130
155

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
8
12
16
18
20
24
26
32

in
0.058
0.040
0.029
0.026
0.024
0.020
0.018
0.015

mm
1.5
1.0
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.4

205

SERIES 1100

Cone TopaSTRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 1100
206

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.44
6
1.00
-

mm
36.6
152
25.4
-

24%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1200

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Made of engineered resin for increased stiffness and minimal belt
elongation through thermal expansion.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Belt strength depends on the run direction. When the belt is notinstalled in the preferred run direction, the belt strength is reduced byhalf.
• Molded split plastic sprockets available for easy installation.
• Module thickness: 0.75 in (19.1 mm), which provides superior belt
strength and stiffness.

A preferred run direction
Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene composite

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in(7.9 mm)Polypropylene

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft3,300

N/m
48,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.87

kg/m²
14.01

a Belt strength rating depends on preferred belt run direction. If run in the opposite direction, the belt rating is 2,000 lbf/ft (29,000 N/m).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

207

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.44
6
1.00
-

mm
36.6
152
25.4
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1200

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Module thickness is 0.75 in (19.1 mm), which provides superior belt
strength and stiffness.
• Made of engineered resin for increased stiffness and minimal belt
elongation through thermal expansion.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Molded split plastic sprockets available for easy installation.
• Belt strength depends on the run direction. When the belt is notinstalled in the preferred run direction, the belt strength is reduced byhalf.
• Belt strength for narrow belts:- 3,750 lbf/ft (54,700 N/m) for belt widths under 60 in (1,524 mm).
Contact Intralox Customer Service if a more precise belt strength isrequired.
- 3,250 lbf/ft (47,400 N/m) for belt widths under 30 in (762 mm)- 2,750 lbf/ft (40,100 N/m) for belt widths under 12 in (305 mm)

A preferred run direction
Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene composite
EC polypropylene composite

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in (7.9 mm)
Polypropylene composite
Polypropylene composite

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft
4,000
4,000

N/m
58,40058,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F-20 to 220-20 to 220°C-29 to 104-29 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.17
3.2

kg/m²
15.45
15.66

a Belt strength rating depends on preferred belt run direction. If run in the opposite direction, the belt rating is 2,000 lbf/ft (29,000 N/m). The belt strength fornarrow belts is reduced to 3,750 lbf/ft (54,700 N/m) for belt widths under 60 in (1524 mm), 3,250 lbf/ft (47,400 N/m) for belt widths under 30 in (762 mm), and2,750 lbf/ft (40,100 N/m) for belt widths under 12 in (305 mm). Contact Intralox Customer Service if a more precise belt strength is required for belt widths
under 60 in (1,524 mm).

208

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.44
6
1.00

mm
36.6
152
25.4

24%
24%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1200

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Made of engineered resin for increased stiffness and minimal belt
elongation through thermal expansion.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Belt strength depends on the run direction. When the belt is notinstalled in the preferred run direction, the belt strength is reduced byhalf.
• Molded split plastic sprockets available for easy installation.
• Module thickness: 1.0 in (25.4 mm), which provides superior belt
strength and stiffness.

A preferred run direction
Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene composite

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in(7.9 mm)Polypropylene

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft3,300

N/m
48,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.3

kg/m²
16.11

a Belt strength rating depends on preferred belt run direction. If run in the opposite direction, the belt rating is 2000 lbf/ft (29,000 N/m).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

209

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style

in
1.44
6
1.00
-

mm
36.6
152
25.4
0%
ClosedRod Retention; Rod Type

Slidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1200

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Made of engineered resin for increased stiffness and minimal belt
elongation through thermal expansion. Engineered resin is a static
dissipative material that does not rely on moisture to dissipate acharge, so it is effective in all environments.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Molded split plastic sprockets available for easy installation.
• Belt strength depends on the run direction. When the belt is notinstalled in the preferred run direction, the belt strength is reduced byhalf.
• 1.44 in (36.6 mm) pitch allows use of smaller drive sprockets than
traditional moving-platform belts, providing tighter transfers andrequiring shallower floor trenches for installation.
• Module thickness: 0.75 in (19.1 mm) provides superior belt strengthand stiffness. In the preferred run direction, S1200 belts are rated
4,000 lbf/ft (58,400 N/m).
• Non Skid indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).

A preferred run direction

Belt Data

Belt Material
EC polypropylene composite

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in(7.9 mm)Polypropylene composite

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft4,000

N/m
58,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F-20 to 220°C-29 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.21

kg/m²
15.65

a Belt strength rating depends on preferred belt run direction. If run in the opposite direction, the belt rating is 2,000 lbf/ft (29,000 N/m). The belt strength fornarrow belts is reduced to 3,750 lbf/ft (54,700 N/m) for belt widths under 60 in (1524 mm), 3,250 lbf/ft (47,400 N/m) for belt widths under 30 in (762 mm), and2750 lbf/ft (40,100 N/m) for belt widths under 12 in (305 mm). Contact Intralox Customer Service if a more precise belt strength is required for belt widths under
60 in (1,524 mm).

210

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid Raised Rib
in
1.44
6
1.00
-

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
36.6
152
25.4
-

0%
10%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1200

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Tread pattern provides a non-skid walking surface to increase safety.
• Staggered yellow edges make it easy to distinguish the moving belt
from the stationary floor.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Made of engineered resin for increased stiffness and minimal belt
elongation through thermal expansion. Engineered resin is a static
dissipative material that does not rely on moisture to dissipate acharge, so it is effective in all environments.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Belt strength depends on the run direction. When the belt is notinstalled in the preferred run direction, the belt strength is reduced byhalf.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions.
• For information about friction values between product and belt, contact
Intralox Customer Service• 1.44 in (36.6 mm) pitch allows use of smaller drive sprockets than
traditional moving-platform belts, providing tighter transfers andrequiring shallower floor trenches for installation.
A preferred run direction• Rib indent: 1.0 in (25 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
EC polypropylene composite
UV resistant acetalb

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in(7.9 mm)Polypropylene composite
AcetalBelt Strengtha
lbf/ft
4,000
2,500

N/m
58,40036,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F-20 to 220-50 to 150°C-29 to 104-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.58
4.51

kg/m²
17.48
22.02

a Belt strength rating depends on preferred belt run direction. If run in the opposite direction, the belt rating is 2,000 lbf/ft (29,000 N/m). The belt strength fornarrow belts is reduced to 3,750 lbf/ft (54,700 N/m) for belt widths under 60 in (1,524 mm), 3,250 lbf/ft (47,400 N/m) for belt widths under 30 in (762 mm), and2,750 lbf/ft (40,100 N/m) for belt widths under 12 in (305 mm). Contact Intralox Customer Service if a more precise belt strength is required for belt widths
under 60 in (1,524 mm).
b UV resistant acetal requires special sprockets. Contact Intralox Customer Service when ordering sprockets for this belt.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

211

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

SERIES 1200
212

in
6
7
8
9
10
12
14

mm
152
178
203
229
254
305
356

15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36
42
48
54
60
72
84
96
120
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb

Wearstrips

2
2
2
2
2
3
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914
1,067

3
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7

3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6

3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5

1,219
1,372
1,524
1,829
2,134
2,438
3,048
3,658
3,683
3,708
3,734
3,759
3,785
3,810
3,835
3,861
3,886
3,912
3,937
3,962
3,988
4,013
4,039
4,064
4,089
4,115
4,140
4,166
4,191
4,216

9
9
11
13
15
17
21
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27

7
7
8
9
11
12
15
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20

5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb

174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182

4,420
4,445
4,470
4,496
4,521
4,547
4,572
4,597
4,623

Wearstrips

27
29
29
29
29
29
29

Carryway
20
20
20
20
20
21
21

Returnway
15
15
16
16
16
16
16

29
29
29
29
29
29
31
31
31

21
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22

16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17

22
22
22

17
17
17

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

183
4,648
31
184
4,674
31
185
4,699
31
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.ca If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 6 in (152 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

A 0.5

A 4.0

5.0

0.4

17T

0.3

0.2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

22T

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

127
102

D

3.0

14T

152

E

76

2.0
20

1.0
0%

51
25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D dashed line: polypropylene rods
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of E solid line: polypropylene composite rods

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

90%

100%

the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

213

SERIES 1200

Belt Width Rangea
in
mm
167
4,242
168
4,267
169
4,293
170
4,318
171
4,343
172
4,369
173
4,394

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Plastic Split Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
14(2.51%) 6.5 165

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.3

161

1.5

38

17
(1.70%)

7.9

201

7.7

196

1.5

38

22
(1.02%)

10.2

259

10.1

255

1.5, 38, 44
1.67

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
inb
mma
mm
1.5,
2.5
2.5
3.5

2.5,
3.5

90

a Imperial key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

b The 2.5 in square bore is created by using a bore adapter in the 3.5 in square bore sprocket.

SERIES 1200

Split Metal Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)12(3.41%)
14(2.51%)
22(1.70%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

5.6

142

5.4

137

1.7

43

2.5

6.5

165

6.3

161

1.7

43

1.5, 2.5

10.2

259

10.1

255

1.7

43

2.5, 3.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

Hold Down Tabs
• Available for Non Skid and Flat Top belts.
• Carryway wearstrips or rollers that engage the tabs are only required at
the transition between the horizontal sections and angled sections. Thisapproach reduces initial system cost, as well as ongoing maintenancecost and effort.
• Ensure that adequate lead-in radii and/or angles are used to prevent thepossibility of snagging the tab on the frame.
• Place tabs in every other row (2.9 in [73.2 mm]) along the length of thebelt. Tabs can be placed every fourth row (5.8 in [146.3 mm]) for lightly
loaded applications.
• Each line of tabs along the length of the belt reduces the available
number of sprockets by two. Belt rating is reduced by 1,300 lbf (5,780 N)
for each line of tabs.
• When designing conveyors, include a carryway radius at the transition
between horizontal sections and angled sections. This radius must be atleast 48 in (1.22 m) for belts that are loaded near the belt strength rating.
This radius is one of the most important factors to consider when
designing highly loaded conveyors that utilize hold down tabs.
• Strength rating for each hold down tab: 100 lbf (445 N) of force
perpendicular to the hold down surface.

214

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Insert Nuts
Available Base Belt Style - Material
Flat Top - Polypropylene Composite
Maximum Fixture Weight
Belt Material

lb/nuta

Available Insert Nut Sizes
0.3125 in to 18 in (8 mm to1.25 mm)
Fastener TorqueSpecificationkg/nutain-lbf

N-m

SERIES 1200

Polypropylene
355
155
100
11.3
Composite• Insert Nuts allow easy attachment of fixtures to the belt.
• All nut placement dimensions are referenced from the edge of the belt
when placing an order. Contact Intralox Customer Service for nut location
options available for your application.
• Ensure attachments connected to more than one row do not prohibit belt
rotation around the sprockets.
• Do not locate sprockets in-line with the insert nuts.
• For attachment bases that extend across multiple rows, ensure reduced
backbend is considered during design.
• Minimal indent from the edge of the belt: 0.833 in (21 mm) for odd-width
belts, 1.833 in (47 mm) for even-width belts.
• Minimal distance between nuts across the width of the belt: 1.33 in (34mm).
• Spacing along the length of the belt: 1.44 in (36.6 mm) increments.
a Fixture weight only. Product weight need not be included.

Finger Transfer Plates
Available Widths
Number ofinmm
Fingers
Available Materials
6
152
18
Polypropylene• Identical to Series 400 finger transfer plates.
• Eliminates product transfer and tipping problems. The fingers extend
between the belt ribs to allow a smooth continuation of the product flow
as the belt engages the sprockets.
• Easily installed on the conveyor frame with the supplied shoulder bolts.
Caps easily snap into place over the bolts, and keep foreign materials outof the slots.
•

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

215

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Dimensional Requirements for S1200 Finger Transfer Plate Installation
F
G

in
3.50
0.31

mm
89
8

H
I
J
K
L
M

7.25
5.91
3.00
1.45
2.00
6.000

184
150
76
37
51
152.4

SERIES 1200

M spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
Figure 47: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assembly

2162024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Two-Material Finger Transfer Platesin

Available Widths
mm

6Standard

No. ofFingers

Available Materials
Glass-filled thermoplastic
152
18
fingers, acetal backplate
Available Configurations
Standard
Extended Back
Glass-Handling
Short fingers with extended
backplateLong fingers
with a short
backplateLong fingers with anextended backplate

short fingers with short backplatea

SERIES 1200

mid-length fingers with a short
backplate
mid-length fingers with extended
backplate• Provides high-strength fingers combined with a low-friction backplate.
• Eliminates product transfer and tipping problems. The 18 fingers extend
between the belt ribs allowing a smooth, continuous product flow as the belt
engages the sprockets.
• Low-friction backplate is permanently attached to the two high-strength finger
inserts.
• Plastic shoulder bolts and bolt covers are included for installing the standard
two-material finger transfer plates (FTPs).
• Mounting hardware for the glass-handling two-material FTPs is soldseparately. Mounting hardware consists of stainless steel oval washers andbolts, which give more secure fastening for tough, glass applications.
• For applications that require better chemical resistance, Introlox offers asingle-material polypropylene standard FTP. Mounting hardware for this finger
transfer plate includes plastic shoulder bolts and snap-cap bolt covers.
• Long fingers provide good support for unstable products like PET containers
and cans. Short fingers are sturdy enough for harsh, broken-glass applications.
These fingers are designed to resist breaking, but if confronted with deeply
embedded glass, the individual fingers yield and break off, preventing belt orframe damage.
• Short backplate has two attachment slots and the extended backplate has
three attachment slots.
• S400 and S1200 use the same FTPs.
• For best product transfer, use 10.2 in (259 mm) PD, 22-tooth sprockets withglass-handling finger transfer plates. 10.2 in (259 mm) PD 22-tooth sprockets
are the maximum-size sprockets to use with short finger glass-handling finger
transfer plates.
a Contact Intralox Customer Service for lead times.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

217

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Dimensional Requirements for S1200 Two-Material Finger Transfer Plate Installation

F
G
H
I
J
K
L
1

Standard Long Fingers
Short Back
Extended Back
in
mm
in
mm
3.50
89
3.50
89
0.31
8
0.31
8
7.25
184
10.75
273
5.91
150
5.91
150
3.00
76
3.00
76
1.45
37
1.45
37
2.00
51
5.50
140
6.0
152.4
6.0
152.4

Glass-Handling
Glass-Handling
Short Fingers
Mid-Length Fingers
Extended Back
in
mm
in
mm
3.50
89
3.50
89
0.31
8
0.31
8
8.26
210
9.04
230
5.91
150
5.91
150
3.00
76
3.00
76
1.45
37
1.45
37
5.50
140
5.50
140
6.0
152.4
6.0
152.4

SERIES 1200

1 spacing between finger transfer plates, atambient temperature
2 0.5 in (13 mm) radius (leading edge of frame
member)3 frame member
Figure 48: Finger transfer plate andconveyor assembly

218

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Platesa
Available Width
in
mm
6
152

No. ofFingers
18

Available Materials
Glass-Filled Thermoplastic

SERIES 1200

• Consists of a finger transfer plate and a transfer edge belt that aredesigned to work together.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Flat, smooth top surface provides excellent lateral movement ofcontainers.
• Fully flush edges, headed rod retention system, and nylon rods forsuperior wear resistance.
• Eliminates the need for a sweeper bar, a pusher arm, or wide transfer
plates. Transfers are smooth and 100% self-clearing, making right angle
transfers possible for all container types.
• Ideal for warmer/cooler applications with frequent product changeovers.
• Bi-directional system allows same transfer belt use for both left-handand right-hand transfers.
• Compatible with any series and style of Intralox belt on the discharge andinfeed conveyors.
• Capable of transferring product to and from Intralox Series 400, Series
1200, and Series 1900 Raised Rib belts.
• Robust design for durability in tough, glass applications.
• Easily installed and secured to mounting plates of any thickness withstainless steel bolts and oval washers that allow movement with belt
expansion and contraction.
• Stainless steel hardware is sold separately.
a Licensed under Rexnord U.S. Patent Nos. 7,314,130 and 7,448,490

Dimensional Requirements for S1200 Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Plate Installationa

F
G
H
I
J
K
L

Self-Clearing
in
mm
5.25
133.4
1.15
29.2
8.05
204.5
5.93
150.6
2.92
74.2
1.51
38.4
2.71
68.8

1

6.000

1.75"

(44.5 mm)1.46"
(37.1 mm)

152.4
0.59"

(15.0 mm)

1 spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
2 frame member

Figure 49: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assemblya Licensed under Rexnord U.S. Patent Nos. 7,314,130 and 7,448,490

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

219

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 1200

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 50: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S1200 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in

in
mm
mm
Flat Top, Flush Grid
59-61
2.15
55
71-73
2.35
60
88-90
2.62
67
118-119
3.02
77
Non Skid Raised Rib, Raised Rib

in

mm

in

mm

5.56
6.48
7.85
10.13

141
165
199
257

3.22
3.87
4.55
5.69

82
98
116
145

5.6
6.5
7.9
10.2

142
165
201
259

12
14
17
22

2.31-2.41
2.78-2.87
3.48-3.55
4.64-4.69

5.6
6.5
7.9
10.2

142
165
201
259

12
14
17
22

2.31-2.41
2.78-2.87
3.48-3.55
4.64-4.69

59-61
2.15
71-73
2.35
88-90
2.62
118-119
3.02
Non Skid

55
60
67
77

5.81
6.73
8.10
10.38

148
171
206
264

3.47
4.12
4.80
5.94

88
105
122
151

5.6
6.5
7.9
10.2

142
165
201
259

12
14
17
22

2.31-2.41
2.78-2.86
3.51-3.58
4.67-4.73

59-61
71-73
89-91
119-120

55
59
65
77

5.65
6.56
7.99
10.29

144
167
203
261

3.30
3.76
4.47
5.62

84
96
114
143

2.15
2.34
2.57
3.02

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

220

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1200 Dead Plate Gap
Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
12
14
17
22

in
0.095
0.081
0.067
0.052

mm
2.4
2.1
1.7
1.3

SERIES 1200

in
5.6
6.5
7.9
10.2

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
142
165
201
259

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

221

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 1200
222

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
1.00
-

mm
25.4
127
25.4
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed surface with fully flush edges.
• Flat Top surface provides excellent lateral movement of containers.
Ideal for container handling.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal. For Easy Release
PLUS belts, use polypropylene Slidelox. For Easy Release traceable
polypropylene belts, use detectable polypropylene Slidelox.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic, with large lug teeth for excellent durability
and wear life.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough glass applications.

SERIES 1400

Product Notes

A Inset: Slidelox edge

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
HHR nylon
HSEC acetal

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,500
1,800
2,000
1,600

N/m
36,50026,30029,20023,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 310-50 to 200°C-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 154-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.75
1.85
2.32
2.69

kg/m²
13.43
9.03
11.33
13.13

223

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flat Top
Pitch
Molded Widths

Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
3.25
4.5
6.0
7.5
-

mm
25.4
83
114
152
191
85.0
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed surface with fully flush edges.
• Flat Top provides excellent lateral movement of containers. Ideal for container
handling.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy side-loading
applications.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Sprockets are all plastic.
• Most sprockets use a split design, so shafts do not have to be removed for
retrofits and changeovers.
• Split sprockets are designed with thick, lug-style teeth for excellent durability
and wear life.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially in tough,glass applications.
• Sprocket placement:- Use one sprocket on 3.25 in (83 mm) mold to width belts, and on 4.5 in (114mm) tabbed mold to width belts.
- Use one or two sprockets on 4.5 in (114 mm) no tab mold to width belts.
- Use up to three sprockets on 6.0 in (152 mm) belts, and on 7.5 in (191 mm)
mold to width belts.
• Optional tracking tabs fit into single barreled belt wearstrip with 1.75 in (44.5mm) spacing.
• Width tolerances: +0.000/-0.020 in (+0.000/-0.500 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Figure 51: S1400 Mold to Width Flat Top

Figure 52: S1400 Mold to Width Flat Top 85 mm

Belt Data
Belt Width

Belt Strengtha

Default Rod Material,inmmBelt Material
Diameter 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
lbf
N
3.25
83 Acetal
Nylon
700
3,110
–
85 Acetal
Nylon
700
3,110
4.5
114 Acetal
Nylon
850
3,780
6.0
152 Acetal
Nylon
1,200 5,340
7.5
191 Acetal
Nylon
1,550 6,890
6.0
152 Polypropylene
Nylon
850
3,780
3.25
83 HHR nylon
Nylon
700
3,110
4.5
114 HHR nylon
Nylon
850
3,780
6.0
152 HHR nylon
Nylon
1,200 5,340
7.5
191 HHR nylon
Nylon
1,550 6,890
a Ratings are based on non-tabbed belts using the maximum number of sprockets.

224

Belt Mass

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 310-50 to 310-50 to 310-50 to 310°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 154-46 to 154-46 to 154-46 to 154

Tab
lb/ft
0.80
0.80
1.13
1.40
1.75
0.95
0.85
0.95
1.18
1.47

kg/m
1.19
1.19
1.68
2.08
2.60
1.14
1.27
1.41
1.76
2.19

No Tab
lb/ft
0.75
–
1.07
1.35
1.71
0.90
–
1.07
1.35
1.71

kg/m
1.12
–
1.59
2.01
2.54
1.34
–
1.59
2.01
2.54

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
ONEPIECE™ Live Transfer Flat Top
Pitch
Molded Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
6
-

mm
25.4
152
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, flat surface with fully flush edges.
• Transfer edge is an integral part of the belt.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Nylon rods provide superior wear resistance.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic, with large lug teeth for excellent durability
and wear life.
• Most sprockets use the split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Designed for smooth, self-clearing, right angle transfers onto takeaway
belts.
• Provides excellent lateral movement of PET, glass, and othercontainers. Provides excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially intough, glass applications.
• Addition of a fixed frame support can be necessary. The support
ensures that the transfer belt does not snag when it intersects with thetakeaway belt. Add support below the transfer belt, before the transfer.
See 90-Degree Container Transfers.
• When moving products from transfer belt to takeaway belt, ensure thetransfer belt surface is no more than 0.06 in (1.5 mm) above thetakeaway belt surface. When product is moving from the infeed belt
onto the transfer belt, ensure the belts surfaces are level.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf
850

N
3,780

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
1.25

kg/m
1.86

225

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
6 in (152 mm) Flat Top Mold to Width Self-Clearing Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
6
-

mm
25.4
152
-

0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough, material-handling applications.
• Belt is bi-directional. It can be used for left-hand and right-handtransfers.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• All sprockets are plastic.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Provides 100% self-clearing transfers of all container types, including
energy drink cans, when used with finger transfer plates.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal

226

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf
1,000

N
4,450

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
1.08

kg/m
1.61

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
ONEPIECE™ 9.3 in (236 mm) Live Transfer Flat Top
Pitch
Molded Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
9.3
-

mm
25.4
236
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, flat surface with fully flush edges.
• Transfer edge is an integral part of this belt.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Nylon rods provide superior wear resistance.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic, with large lug teeth for excellent durability
and wear life.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Designed for smooth, self-clearing, right angle transfers onto takeaway
belts.
• Provides excellent lateral movement of PET, glass, and othercontainers. Provides excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially intough, glass applications.
• Addition of a fixed frame support can be necessary. The support
ensures that the transfer belt does not snag when it intersects with thetakeaway belt. Add support below the transfer belt, before the transfer.
See 90-Degree Container Transfers.
• When moving products from transfer belt to takeaway belt, ensure thetransfer belt surface is no more than 0.06 in (1.5 mm) above thetakeaway belt surface. When product is moving from the infeed belt
onto the transfer belt, ensure the belts surfaces are level.
• Tracking tab height: 0.35 in (8.9 mm).
• Tab spacing: 1.6875 in (43 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf
1,550

N
6,890

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
1.86

kg/m
2.77

227

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.0
9
1.0
0.17 × 0.30

mm
25.4
229
25.4
4.2 × 7.6

21%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Polypropylene belts are grey with blue polypropylene Slidelox. Acetal
belts are grey with yellow acetal Slidelox.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimum sprocket spacing: 3 in (76.2 mm).
• Maximum recommended sprocket spacing: 6 in (152.4 mm).
• Installation is the same as current S1400 belts, with the addition of a
A run direction
locked sprocket location chart and preferred run direction.
• Recommended adjusted belt pull: greater than 900 lbf/ft (13,100 N/m).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strengtha
lbf/ft
1,800
1,800
2,500

N/m
26,30026,30036,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220
-50 to 200°C
1 to 104
1 to 104-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.61
1.66
2.52

kg/m²
7.86
8.10
12.30

a Belt strength is divided by 2 when using 6 in (15.2 cm) sprocket spacing; full strength when using 3 in (7.6 cm) sprocket spacing.

2282024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
1.00

mm
25.4
127
25.4

ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Available in grey polypropylene with grey rubber, grey polypropylene
with black rubber, white polypropylene with white rubber, and black
polyethylene with black rubber.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially
A Inset: Slidelox rod retention feature
in tough, material-handling applications.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Standard indents for Friction Top surface: 2.0 in (50.8 mm) and 0.22 in(5.6 mm). Indent availability varies by material. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
Belt Data
Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

lbf/ft
1,800
1,800
1,800

N/m
26,30026,30026,300°F
34 to 150
34 to 150
34 to 150°C
1 to 66
1 to 66
1 to 66

1,800

26,30034 to 150

1 to 66

Polyethylene
1,000 14,600 -50 to 120-46 to 49
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

Base Belt
Material
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Grey/grey
Nylon
Grey/black
Nylon
White/white
Nylon
Black/TPV 65A
Nylon
black
Black/blackNylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
kg/m²
12.79
12.79
12.79

Friction Top
Hardness
64 Shore A
55 Shore A
55 Shore A

2.62

12.79

65 Shore A

2.70

13.18

50 Shore A

lb/ft²
2.62
2.62
2.62

FDA
(USA)

EU MCa

b
b

c

b

229

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Square Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
6
1.00

mm
25.4
152
25.4

ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Available in grey polypropylene with black rubber and black
polyethylene with black rubber.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
A Inset: Slidelox rod retention feature• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough, material-handling applications.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 2 in (51 mm) and 3 in (76mm).
Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Grey/black
Nylon
Black/black
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf/ftN/m°F°C
Polypropylene
1,800 26,300
34 to 150
1 to 66
Polyethylene
1,000 14,600-50 to 120-46 to 49
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

230

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.60
2.68

kg/m²
12.69
13.08

Friction Top
Hardness
50 Shore A
50 Shore A

FDA
(USA)
b
b

EU
MCa

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
3.25 in Mold to Width Flat Friction Top with Tabs
Pitch
Molded Width
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
3.25
-

mm
25.4
83
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

SERIES 1400

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Available in blue acetal with black rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic.
• Most sprockets feature a split design so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• One sprocket can be placed on the 3.25 in (83 mm) Mold To Width
tabbed belt.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough, material-handling applications.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions.
• For information about friction values between product and belt, contact
Intralox Customer Service• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Width tolerances: +0.000/-0.020 in (+0.000/-0.500 mm).
• Indent for Friction Top surface: 0.5 in (12.7 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

0.500 in12.70 mm0.325 in8.26 mm1.073 in27.25 mm1.656 in42.06 mm

Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Blue/black
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf
N
°F
°C
Acetal700
3,110-10 to 130-23 to 54
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft
0.94

kg/m
1.40

Friction Top
Hardness
54 Shore A

FDA
(USA)
b

EU
MCa

231

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Square Friction Top
Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
6

mm
25.4
152

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Available in grey polypropylene with black rubber.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic.
• Most sprockets feature a split design so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Up to three sprockets can be placed on the 6.0 in (152 mm) mold towidth belt.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough, material-handling applications.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Width tolerances: +0.000/-0.020 in (+0.000/-0.500 mm).
• Rubber indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
Diameter
0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Base/Friction
Material
Top
lbf
N
°F
°C
Polypropylene
Grey/black
800
3,560
34 to 150
1 to 66
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

232

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft
1.15

kg/m
1.71

Friction Top
Hardness
50 Shore A

FDA(USA) EU MCab2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Oval Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
1.00

mm
25.4
127
25.4

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Available in grey polypropylene with black rubber.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough, material-handling applications.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Rubber indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Grey/black
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf/ftN/m°F°C
Polypropylene
1,800 26,300 34 to 150
1 to 66
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.29

kg/m²
11.18

Friction Top
Hardness
55 Shore A

FDA(USA) EU MCab233

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Oval Friction Top
Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
6

mm
25.4
152

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Available in grey polypropylene with black rubber.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets are all plastic.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Up to three sprockets can be placed on the 6.0 in (152 mm) mold towidth belt.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough, material-handling applications.
• When using this belt on a center-drive conveyor, it can be necessary toretain the belt laterally, by placing collars at the backbend roller before
the drive.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the effective maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors
when designing conveyor systems to use these belts.
• Width tolerances: +0.000/-0.020 in (+0.000/-0.500 mm).
• Rubber indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction Top 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Grey/black
Nylon

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Material
lbf
N
°F
°C
Polypropylene
800
3,560
34 to 150
1 to 66
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

234

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft
1.15

kg/m
1.71

Friction Top
Hardness
55 Shore A

FDA
(USA)
b

EU
MCa

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Roller Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Roller Diameter
Roller Length
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
1.00
0.70
0.83

mm
25.4
127
25.4
17.8
21.0

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edges.
• Available in white or grey acetal.
• 144 rollers per square foot of belt provide greater product-to-roller
contact.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Stainless steel roller axle pins provide durability.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability.
• Allows low back-pressure accumulation for gentle product handling.
• Product accumulation load: 5%–10% of product weight.
• Roller spacing: 1 in (25.4 mm).
• Standard roller indent: 0.75 in (19 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft2,500

N/m
36,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
5.83

kg/m²
28.47

235

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
9
1.00
-

mm
25.4
229
25.4
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability.
• Diamond tread pattern provides a non-skid walking surface to increasesafety.
• Staggered yellow edges make it easy to distinguish the moving belt
from the stationary floor.
• Edges have a Flat Top surface, without treads.
• Slidelox are available in polypropylene or acetal.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• 1.00 (25.4 mm) pitch accommodates small drive sprockets for lowprofile people carriers.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 2 in (51 mm) and 3 in (76mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
HSEC acetal
Polypropylene

236

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,875
1,800

N/m
27,40026,300Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 220°C
-46 to 93
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.78
2.32

kg/m²
13.57
11.33

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Embedded Diamond Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
12.0
-

mm
25.4
304.8
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed surface with fully flush edges.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Split sprockets are designed with thick, lug-style teeth for excellent
durability and wear life.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 3 in (76 mm) and 4 in (102mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,800

N/m
26,300Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.70

kg/m²
8.30

237

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top Easy Release PLUS
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
1.00
-

mm
25.4
127
25.4
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed surface with fully flush edges.
• Easy Release PLUS material resists rubber adhesion and has minimal
dimensional expansion when exposed to oil and heat.
• Slidelox are polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Provides excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially in toughmaterial handling applications.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Split sprockets are designed with thick, lug-style teeth for excellent
durability and wear life.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Easy Release PLUS

238

Default Rod Material, Diameter
0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Orange polypropylene (non-FDA)

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,600

N/m
23,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.00

kg/m²
9.78

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top Easy Release Traceable Polypropylene
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
1.00
-

mm
25.4
127
25.4
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed surface with fully flush edges.
• Slidelox are detectable polypropylene.
• Sprockets are all plastic, with large, lug-style teeth for excellent
durability and wear life.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Most sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough glass applications.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Easy Release Traceable PP

Default Rod Material, Diameter
0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Orange polypropylene (non-FDA)

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft1,200

N/m
17,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.86

kg/m²
9.08

239

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
ProTrax™ with Tabs
Pitch
Molded Widths
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4.5
-

mm
25.4
114.3
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Powerful magnets are embedded in the belts.
• Standard belt configuration consists of magnetic modules and S1400
Raised Flat Top modules alternating every other row to maximize wear
resistance.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Tabs fit into a straight track style carryway with 1.75 in (44.5 mm)
spacing.
• Slidelox provide rod and cap retention.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Needs only one drive sprocket and one idle sprocket per belt strand.
• Sprockets are all plastic with stainless steel fasteners and large, lugstyle teeth for excellent durability and wear life.
• Most sprockets feature a split design so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Ideal for incline, decline, vertical switch, pan indexing, and metering
applications.
• Install belt strands to run in the same direction.
• Determine belt spacing based on maximum surface area contact withthe bottom surface of the conveyed product.

0.551 in(14.0 mm)0.500 in(12.7 mm)0.325 in(8.3 mm)1.072 in(27.2 mm)1.656 in
(42.1 mm)
1.0 in(24.5 mm)

1.0 in(24.5 mm)

1.0 in(24.5 mm)

1.0 in(24.5 mm)

0.896 in(22.8 mm)0.876 in(22.3 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal
HHR nylon

240

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf
550
550

N
2,450
2,450

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 310°C-46 to 93-46 to 154

Belt Mass
lb/ft
1.46
1.296

kg/m
2.18
1.95

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
in
5
6
7
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
32
36
42
48

mm
127
152
178
203
254
305
356
406
457
508
610
762
813
914
1,067
1,219

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9

54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
12
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing. deWearstrips
Carryway
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
9

Returnwayc
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5

10
11
13
15
17

6
6
7
8
9

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 5 in (127 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c For Friction Top applications, use caution and contact Intralox Customer Service.

d Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

e For Flush Grid, see the locked sprocket location table in the Installation Instructions or contact Intralox Customer Service.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

241

SERIES 1400

Belt Width Rangea

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized
7.0

0.7
0.6

0.4
0.3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

5.0

152
127

F

A 4.0

20

178

D

6.0

31T
24T
21T
18T-19T
16T
12T

A 0.5

0.2

203

8.0

1.0
0.9
0.8

E

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D long dashed line: Flush Grid
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of E short dashed line: round bores
F solid line: all other styles
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

90%

100%

Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 1400

MAGNET FORCE VS. METAL THICKNESS
7.00

31.1

6.00

26.7

5.00

22.2

4.00

17.8

A 3.00

13.3

2.00

8.9

1.00

4.5

0.00

o

5

10

20

15

25

30

35

B

0

C
A magnet force (lbf)
B magnet force (N)C metal thickness (steel gauge)
Figure 53: S1400 ProTrax with Tabs magnet force vs. metal thickness

NOTE: The magnet force shown is typical for an aluminized steel product with a flat surface and maximum
surface area contact. Results can vary, based on material and surface texture.

242

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Machined Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)18(1.52%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.7

in
5.8

in
0.75

Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)12(3.41%)
15(2.19%)
18(1.52%)
24(0.86%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

3.9

99

3.9

99

1.5

38

1.5

40

4.9

124

4.9

124

1.5

38

2.5

60

5.7

145

5.8

148

1.5

38

7.7

196

7.8

198

1.5

38

mm
145

mm
148

mm
19

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
30, 40SERIES 1400

Molded Sprockets
Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

2

2.5

50

2.5

60
60

Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)inmm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

16
(1.92%)

5.1

130

5.2

132

2.0

51

18
(1.52%)

5.7

145

5.8

148

2.0

51

21
(1.12%)

6.7

170

6.8

172

2.0

51

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mmb
mm
25
to
1.5
40
1 to 2c
50d
25 to
1.5,
40, 60
1 to 2c
2.5
50d
1 to 2b,
c

1.5,
2.5

25 to
50d

40, 60a Imperial key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.
b Tight fit round bores are available in 1-1/4, 1-3/16, 1-1/2, and 1-7/16 in.

c Available in 1/16 in increments
d Available in 5 mm increments

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

243

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Maximum Belt Rating for Glass-Filled Nylon Round Bore Split Sprockets Based on Round Bore Size Rangea
Numberof Teeth161821

Nom. Pitch
Diameter
in
mm
5.1
130
5.7
145
6.7
170

1-1/4 in to
1-3/8 inlbf/ftN/m1740 25,400
2040 29,800
1650 24,100

1 in to 1-3/16 in
lbf/ftN/m1500 21,900
1800 26,300
1350 19,700

1-7/16 in to1-3/4 in
1-13/16 in to 2 in 25 mm to 35 mm 40 mm to 50 mm
lbf/ftN/m
lbf/ftN/m
lbf/ftN/m
lbf/ftN/m2100 30,600 2160 31,500
1140
16,600 2160 31,500
2400 35,000 3240 47,300
1440
21,000 2460 35,900
2100 30,600 3000 43,800
1050
15,300 2400 35,000

a The belt rating based on round bore sprocket size is used to determine sprocket spacing as a function of belt strength utilized. It can also be used for all othercalculations. However, if the rating for the belt material and belt style is lower then the belt rating based on the round bore sprocket size, then the lower ratingmust be used for all calculations other than sprocket spacing.

Nylon FDA Split Sprockets

SERIES 1400

Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)12(3.41%)
16(1.92%)
18(1.52%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Squareina
inmma mm

3.9

99

3.9

99

0.75

19

1.25

1.5

5.1

130

5.2

132

1.5

38

1.5

30

40

5.7

145

5.8

148

1.5

38

1.25,
1.5
1.25

1.5

25,
30, 4040

40

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

Enduralox Polypropylene Composite Split Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16
5.1 130(1.92%)
18(1.52%) 5.7 145
21(1.12%) 6.7 170
31
9.9 251(0.51%)

244

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.2

132

2.0

51

1.5

40

5.8

148

2.0

51

40, 60

6.8

172

2.0

51

10.1

257

2.0

51

1.5,
2.5
1.5,
2.5
3.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

40

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Polyurethane Composite Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
31
9.9 251(0.51%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter
in
10.1

mm
257

Nom. Hub
Width

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
mm
in
in
mm
mm
1.50, 38, 44
3.5,
1.67
2.5a

a The 2.5 in square bore is created by using a bore adapter in the 3.5 in square bore sprocket.

SERIES 1400

Flat Top Base Flights (Streamline)
Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
0.43
11
Easy Release traceable polypropylene• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part. No fasteners are
required.
• The minimum indent is a function of belt width. Contact Intralox Customer Service for valid
indent increments.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

245

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Platesa
Available Width
in
mm
6
152

No. ofFingers
18

Available Materials
Glass-filled thermoplastic

SERIES 1400

• Consists of a finger transfer plate and a transfer edge belt that aredesigned to work together.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Flat, smooth top surface provides excellent lateral movement ofcontainers.
• Fully flush edges, headed rod retention system, and nylon rods forsuperior wear resistance.
• Eliminates the need for a sweeper bar, a pusher arm, or wide transfer
plates. Transfers are smooth and 100% self-clearing, making right angle
transfers possible for all container types.
• Ideal for warmer/cooler applications with frequent product changeovers.
• Bi-directional system allows same transfer belt use for both left-handand right-hand transfers.
• Compatible with any series and style of Intralox belt on the discharge andinfeed conveyors.
• Capable of transferring product to and from Series 400, Series 1200, andSeries 1900 Raised Rib belts.
• Robust design for durability in tough, glass applications.
• Easily installed and secured to mounting plates of any thickness withstainless steel bolts and oval washers that allow movement with belt
expansion and contraction.
• Stainless steel hardware is sold separately.
a Licensed under Rexnord U.S. Patent Nos. 7,314,130 and 7,448,490

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 54: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

246

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S1400 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm
in
mm
Embedded Diamond Top, Flat Top, Flush Grid
1.62-1.68
41-43
1.80
46
2.10-2.15
53-55
2.06
52
2.26-2.32
57-59
2.11
54
2.59-2.63
66-67
2.22
56
3.07-3.10
78-79
2.44
62

E

in

mm

in

mm

3.86
4.81
5.13
5.76
6.71

98
122
130
146
170

2.24
2.72
2.88
3.19
3.75

57
69
73
81
95

3.9
4.9
5.1
5.7
6.7

99
124
130
145
170

12
15
16
18
21

7.7
9.9

196
251

24
31

3.55-3.58
90-91
2.64
67
7.66
4.67
119
3.07
78
9.88
Flat Friction Top, Oval Friction Top, Square Friction Top

195
251

4.14
5.25

105
133

3.9
4.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
7.7

99
124
130
147
170
196

12
15
16
18
21
24

1.62-1.68
2.10-2.15
2.26-2.31
2.59-2.63
3.07-3.10
3.55-3.58

41-43
53-55
57-59
66-67
78-79
90-91

1.80
2.06
2.11
2.22
2.44
2.64

46
52
54
56
62
67

4.06
5.01
5.33
5.96
6.91
7.86

103
127
135
151
176
200

2.44
2.92
3.08
3.39
3.87
4.34

62
74
78
86
98
110

9.9

251

31

4.67

119

3.07
Roller Top

78

10.08

256

5.45

138

3.9
4.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
7.7
9.9

99
124
130
145
170
196
251

12
15
16
18
21
24
31

1.62-1.68
2.10-2.15
2.26-2.31
2.59-2.63
3.07-3.10
3.55-3.58
4.67

41-43
1.80
53-55
2.06
57-59
2.11
66-67
2.22
78-79
2.44
90-91
2.64
119
3.07
Non Skid, ProTrax

46
52
54
56
62
67
78

4.66
5.61
5.93
6.56
7.51
8.46
10.68

118
142
151
167
191
215
271

3.04
3.52
3.68
3.99
4.47
4.94
6.05

77
89
93
101
113
125
154

3.9
4.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
7.7
9.9

99
124
130
145
170
196
251

12
15
16
18
21
24
31

1.62-1.68
2.05-2.10
2.26-2.31
2.59-2.63
3.07-3.10
3.55-3.58
4.67

41-43
52-53
57-59
66-67
78-79
90-91
119

46
52
54
56
62
67
78

3.91
4.86
5.18
5.81
6.76
7.71
9.93

99
123
132
148
172
196
252

2.29
2.77
2.93
3.24
3.72
4.19
5.30

58
70
74
82
94
106
135

1.80
2.06
2.11
2.22
2.44
2.64
3.07

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

247

SERIES 1400

Sprocket Description

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1400 Dead Plate Gap

in
3.9
4.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
7.7
9.9

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
99
124
130
145
170
196
251

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
12
15
16
18
21
24
31

in
0.066
0.053
0.050
0.044
0.038
0.033
0.025

mm
1.7
1.3
1.3
1.1
1.0
0.8
0.6

SERIES 1400
248

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Sizes (approximate)

in
0.50
8
0.50
0.87 × 0.30
0.66 × 0.30

mm
12.7
203
12.7
22.1 × 7.6
16.8 × 7.6

Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

48%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1500

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface with fully flush edges.
• The detectable material has surface resistivity per ASTM_D257 of 545
Ohms per square.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Rod diameter: 0.140 in (3.6 mm).
• Designed for a 0.5 in (12.7 mm) diameter nosebar.

A preferred run direction
Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
HR nylon
HHR nylon
AcetalDetectable acetal
Detectable polypropylene A22
X-ray detectable acetala

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.14 in(3.6 mm)Polypropylene
AcetalNylon
HHR nylon
AcetalAcetalAcetalAcetalBelt Strength
lbf/ft
125
150
175
175
240
200
80
240

N/m
1,820
2,190
2,550
2,550
3,500
2,920
1,170
3,500

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 200
-50 to 240-50 to 310-50 to 200-50 to 200
0 to 150-50 to 200°C
1 to 104
1 to 93-46 to 116-46 to 154-46 to 93-46 to 93-18 to 66-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.44
0.51
0.58
0.58
0.73
0.69
0.57
0.78

kg/m²
2.12
2.40
2.83
2.83
3.56
3.35
2.78
3.66

a Designed specifically for detection by X-ray machines.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

249

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid with Contained Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size(approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
0.50
8
2.0
0.87 × 0.30
0.66 × 0.30

mm
12.7
203
50.8
22.1 × 7.6
16.8 × 7.6

48%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1500

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Recessed rod retention feature provides superior rod containment.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Available in 2 in (50.8 mm) increments.
• Designed for a 0.5 in (12.7 mm) diameter nosebar.
• Rod diameter: 0.140 in (3.6 mm).

A preferred run direction
Belt Data

Belt Material
HR nylon

250

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.14 in(3.6 mm)
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
175

N/m
2,550

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 240°C-46 to 116

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
0.58

kg/m²
2.83

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

mm
203
254
305
356
406
457
508

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
3
3
3
3
5
5
5

Carryway
3
3
3
4
4
4
5

Returnway
2
2
2
3
3
3
3

22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38

559
610
660
711
762
813
864
914
965

5
7
7
7
7
9
9
9
9

5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8

3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5

8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12

5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

40
1,016
11
42
1,067
11
44
1,118
11
46
1,168
11
48
1,219
13
50
1,270
13
52
1,321
13
54
1,372
13
56
1,422
15
58
1,473
15
60
1,524
15
62
1,575
15
64
1,626
17
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 4 in
(102 mm) centerline spacing.c

SERIES 1500

in
8
10
12
14
16
18
20

a Belts are available in 0.50 in (12.7 mm) increments beginning with 8 in (203 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

251

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

36T

0.7
0.6

19T
17T 24T
12T
14T

A 0.5
0.4
0.3

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

8.0

203

7.0

178

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 4.0

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 1500

Molded Sprocket
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1041(4.89%) 1.6
1248(3.41%) 1.9

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

1.8

46

0.65

17

2.1

53

0.65

17

1

1.0

25

14
(2.51%)

2.3

58

2.4

61

0.75

19

3/4, 1,
1-3/16,
1-1/4

1.0

25

17
(1.70%)

2.7

69

2.9

73

0.75

19

3/4, 1,
1-3/16,
1-1/4,
1-3/8

19(1.36%)
24(0.86%)
36(0.38%)

3.1

79

3.2

82

0.75

19

1, 1-3/8

3.8

97

4.0

101

0.75

19

1

1.5

5.7

145

5.9

150

0.75

19

1

1.5, 2Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Squareina
in
mm a mm
5/8

25

25

40
40

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

252

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Nylon FDA Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)
in mm
24
3.8
97
(0.86%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
4.0

mm
101

in
1.5

mm
38

36
(0.38%)

5.9

150

1.5

38

5.7

145

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
40
40

Flush Grid Base Flights (Streamline)

SERIES 1500

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
1
25
Acetal, HR nylon• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent is a function of belt width. Minimum indent range: 3 in
(76 mm) to 3.75 in (95 mm).

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 55: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

253

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S1500 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description

A

B

C

1.6
1.9
2.3
2.7
3.1

41
48
58
69
79

10
12
14
17
19

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm
in
mm
Flush Grid, Flush Grid with Contained Edge
0.64-0.68
16-17
1.13
29
0.81-0.84
21
1.24
31
0.97-1.00
25
1.34
34
1.21-1.24
31
1.49
38
1.37-1.39
35
1.59
40

3.8
5.7

97
145

24
36

1.77-1.79
2.73-2.74

Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

45
69-70

1.76
2.71

45
55

E

in

mm

in

mm

1.62
1.93
2.25
2.72
3.04

41
49
57
69
77

1.00
1.15
1.31
1.55
1.71

25
29
33
39
43

3.83
5.74

97
146

2.10
3.06

53
78

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAPSERIES 1500

Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1500 Dead Plate Gap

in
1.6
1.9
2.3
2.7
3.1
3.8
5.7

254

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
41
48
58
69
79
97
145

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
10
12
14
17
19
24
36

in
0.040
0.033
0.028
0.023
0.021
0.017
0.011

mm
1.0
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Open Hinge Flat Top
Pitch (nominal)
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
0.50
—

mm
25.4
127
12.7
—

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radius corners.
• No pockets or sharp corners to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinges provide easy cleaning with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets. This exclusive
Intralox feature allows unsurpassed cleaning access to this area.
• The drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris
to the outside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar
effectiveness is proven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• No-Cling flights are available.
• Standard flight height: 4 in (102 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalAcetalHi-Temp
X-ray detectable acetalb
PK

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylenea
Hi-Temp
X-ray detectable acetal
PK

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
350
1,400
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000

N/m
10,2005,110
20,40014,60014,60014,60014,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
-50 to 150
70 to 400
-50 to 150-40 to 176°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93-46 to 66
21 to 204
-46 to 66-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.05
1.10
1.58
1.58
1.54
1.92
1.39

kg/m²
5.13
5.37
7.71
7.71
7.52
9.35
6.79

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.
b Designed specifically for detection by X-ray machines.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

255

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Open Hinge Flat Top
Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
7.5

mm
25.4
190.5

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 1600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Molded with robust tracking tabs to support the belt in heavy sideloading applications.
• Uses recessed rods.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Do not use with sprockets smaller than a 3.9 in (99 mm) diameter (12tooth) sprocket.

1.308"(33.2 mm)0.313"(8 mm)

1.688"(42.9 mm)Figure 56: Front view
1.00" NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.00" NOM.
(25.4 mm)0.20"
(5.1 mm)0.40"(10.2 mm)Figure 57: Side view

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal256

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polyethylene

Belt Strength
lbf
625

N
2,780

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 150°C-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft
1.02

kg/m
1.52

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
0.50

mm
25.4
127
12.7

0%
10%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Not recommended for product accumulation conditions. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for information about friction values between
product and belt.
• Standard flights available in polypropylene, polyethylene, and acetal.
Flights are molded as part of the belt, and can be cut to any size.
• Recommended for products large enough to span the distance
between the nubs [0.250 in (6.35 mm)].
• Standard nub indent: 1.3 in (33.0 mm).
• Flight height: 4 in (102 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
AcetalAcetal
X-ray detectable acetal

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylenea
X-ray detectable acetal

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
350
1,400
1,000
1,400

N/m
10,2005,110
20,40014,60020,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
-50 to 150-50 to 200°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93-46 to 66-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.13
1.18
1.74
1.74
2.01

kg/m²
5.52
5.76
8.49
8.49
9.81

a Polyethylene rods can be used in cold applications when impacts or sudden starts/stops occur. Please note lower rating.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

257

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mini Rib
Pitch (nominal)
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
0.50
—

mm
25.4
127
12.7
—

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinges provide easy cleaning with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets. This exclusive
Intralox feature allows unsurpassed cleaning access to this area.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• The drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris
to the outside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar
effectiveness is proven both in-house and in field tests.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• 0.16 in (4 mm) Mini Rib on surface accommodates gradual inclinesand declines. Not recommended for product accumulation
applications.
• No-Cling flights are available.
• Standard flight height: 4 in (102 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 1.5 in (38 mm) and 2 in
(51 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Acetal258

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
700
1,400

N/m
10,20020,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 200°C
1 to 104
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
kg/m²
1.135
5.54
1.705
8.32

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mesh Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
0.50
0.06 x 0.12
0.06 x 0.20

mm
25.4
127
12.7
1.5 x 3.0
1.5 x 5.1

16%Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Cam-link hinges provide easy cleaning with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets. This exclusive
Intralox feature allows unsurpassed cleaning access to this area.
• The drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris
to the outside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar
effectiveness is proven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Standard mesh top indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
• No-Cling flights are available.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
LMAR

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
HR nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
700
1,100

N/m
17,500
10,200
1,6,000

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 220
0 to 240°C
1 to 93
1 to 104-18 to 116

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.40
0.94
1.18

kg/m²
6.84
4.59
5.76

259

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mesh Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size(approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
0.50
0.06 x 0.12
0.06 x 0.20

mm
25.4
127
12.7
1.5 x 3.0
1.5 x 5.1

16%Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• The drive bar on the underside of this belt channels water and debris
to the outside of the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar
effectiveness is proven both in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Standard Mesh Nub Top indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
• No Cling flights are available.
• Standard flight height: 4 in (102 mm).
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene

260

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
700

N/m
17,500
10,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 220°C
1 to 93
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
kg/m²
1.45
7.08
0.98
4.81

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Open Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
5
60
0.50
0.20 x 0.16

mm
25.4
127
1524
12.7
5.1 x 4.1

28%
n/a
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Open area is designed to limit water film formation and maximize
water drainage.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Like S800 and S1800, the drive bar on the underside of this belt
channels water and debris to the outside of the belt for easier, fastercleanup. Drive bar effectiveness is proven both in-house and in fieldtests.
• Standard indent: 1 in (25.4 mm).

0.09"
(2.2 mm)0.29"(7.4 mm)0.49"(12.4 mm)1.00"
(25.4 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
Polyethylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
800
400
200

N/m
11,7005,840
2,920

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 150°C
1 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.32
0.89
0.92

kg/m²
6.44
4.35
4.49

261

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

SERIES 1600

in
5
6
7
8
9
10
12

mm
127
152
178
203
229
254
305

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
2
2
2
3
3
3
3

Carryway
2
2
3
3
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

5
5
5
5
5
7
9
9
9

4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

8
9
10
11
13
15
17
21
25

5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing.

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

42
1,067
11
48
1,219
13
54
1,372
15
60
1,524
15
72
1,829
19
84
2,134
21
96
2,438
25
120
3,048
31
144
3,658
37
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in
(102 mm) centerline spacing.ca Belts are available in 0.50 in (12.7 mm) increments beginning with 5 in (127 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

262

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 0.5
10T
6T

0.3

0.2

A 4.0

20T

0.4

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

12T
9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

SERIES 1600

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

EZ Clean™ Sprocketa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
651(13.40%) 2.0
1081(4.89%) 3.2
1299(3.41%) 3.9

20(1.23%)

6.4

163

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
inb
in
mmb
mm

1.8

46

1.0

25

1.0

3.2

81

1.0

25

1.0

3.8

97

1.0

25

1.5

40

6.4

163

1.0

25

1.5

40

25
1.5

25

40

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 500 lbf/ft (7,300 N/m) is de-rated to 500 lb/ft (7,300 N/m) All other belts maintain the

published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability ofpolyurethane sprockets.
b U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

263

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Angled EZ Clean™ Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1299(3.41%) 3.9

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

3.8

97

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

16
(1.92%)

5.2

132

5.1

130

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

20
(1.23%)

6.4

163

6.4

163

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

UHMW Polyethylene Sprockets

SERIES 1600

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16
5.3 135(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.1

in
1.0

mm
130

mm
25

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
40

Open Hinge Flat Top Base Flight (No-Cling)
Available Flight Heightinmm

Available Materials
Acetal, polyethylene, polypropylene, X-ray detectable
4.0
102
acetal• The No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part. No fasteners are
required.
• Minimum indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm)• Flights can be cut down to custom heights. Minimum height: 0.25 in (6.4 mm).

2642024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mesh Nub Top Base Flights (No-Cling)
Available Flight Height
in
mm
4.0
102

Available Materials
Acetal, polyethylene• The No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part. No fasteners are
required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• Minimum indent: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).

Sideguards

SERIES 1600

Available Sizes
inmm
Available Materials
2
51
Polypropylene
376• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Can be used in multiple rows to separate product.
• Sideguards are installed with the back ends angled inward, toward the
product. This is called a product-friendly orientation. On request, theback ends can be angled outward, toward the conveyor sides.
• When going around the 6- and 10-tooth sprockets, sideguards fan out,
opening a gap at the top that can allow small products to fall out. The
sideguards stay completely closed when going around the 12-, 16-, and20-tooth sprockets.
• Standard gap between sideguards and flight edge: 0.3 in (7.6 mm).
• Minimum indent: 1.0 in (25 mm)

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 58: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

265

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S1600 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm
in
mm
Mesh Top, Open Hinge Flat Top
0.67-0.80
17-20
1.10
28
1.34-1.42
34-36
1.56
40
1.67-1.73
42-44
1.70
43
2.31-2.36
59-60
1.99
51
2.96-3.00
75-76
2.25
57
Mesh Nub Top, Nub Top

E

in

mm

in

mm

2.00
3.24
3.86
5.13
6.39

51
82
98
130
162

1.26
1.88
2.19
2.83
3.46

32
48
56
72
88

SERIES 1600

2.0
3.2
3.9
5.2
6.4

51
81
99
132
163

6
10
12
16
20

2.0
3.2
3.9
5.2
6.4

51
81
99
132
163

6
10
12
16
20

0.67-0.80
1.34-1.42
1.67-1.73
2.31-2.36
2.96-3.00

17-20
34-36
42-44
59-60
75-76

1.10
1.56
1.70
1.99
2.25
Mini Rib

28
40
43
51
57

2.08
3.31
3.94
5.13
6.47

53
84
100
130
164

1.34
1.96
2.27
2.83
3.53

34
50
58
72
90

2.0
3.2

51
81

6
10

0.67-0.80
1.34-1.42

17-20
34-36

1.10
1.56

28
40

2.16
3.40

55
86

1.42
2.04

36
52

3.9
5.2
6.4

99
132
163

12
16
20

1.67-1.73
2.31-2.36
2.96-3.00

42-44
59-60
75-76

1.70
1.99
2.25

43
51
57

4.02
5.13
6.55

102
130
166

2.35
2.83
3.62

60
72
92

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1600 Dead Plate Gap

in
2.0
3.2
3.9
6.4

266

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
51
81
99
163

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
10
12
20

in
0.134
0.079
0.066
0.039

mm
3.4
2.0
1.7
1.0

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
SeamFree™ Minimum Hinge Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4
1.00
-

mm
25.4
102
25.4
-

0%
Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 1650

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Fully sculpted and radiused corners with no pockets or sharp corners
to catch and hold debris.
• Belts over 18 in (457 mm) are built with multiple modules per row, but
seams are minimized.
• Cam-link hinges provide easy cleaning with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets. This exclusive
Intralox feature allows unsurpassed cleaning access to this area.
• The drive bar on the underside of this belt combines with a patentpending flume feature to channel water and debris to the outside of
the belt for easier, faster cleanup. Drive bar effectiveness is provenboth in-house and in field tests.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for use with S1600 Angled EZ Clean sprockets. Also
compatible with standard S1600 EZ Clean sprockets.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
AcetalPolypropylene
Polyethylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
350
325
225

N/m
5,110
4,740
3,280

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 150°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 66

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.47
1.40
1.40

kg/m²
7.18
6.84
6.83

267

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

SERIES 1650

in
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

mm
102
127
152
178
203
229
254

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
2
2
2
2
3
3
3

Carryway
2
2
2
3
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

12
14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32

305
356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813

3
5
5
5
5
5
7
9
9

3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7

2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4

7
8
9
10
11
13
15
17
21
25

4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

36
914
9
42
1,067
11
48
1,219
13
54
1,372
15
60
1,524
15
72
1,829
19
84
2,134
21
96
2,438
25
120
3,048
31
144
3,658
37
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in
(102 mm) centerline spacing.ca Belts are available in 1.0 in (25.4 mm) increments beginning with 4 in (101.6 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.
b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

268

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 0.5
10T
6T

0.3

0.2

A 4.0

20T

0.4

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

12T
9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

SERIES 1650

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

Angled EZ Clean™ Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1299(3.41%) 3.9
16(1.92%) 5.2 132
20
6.4 163(1.23%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

3.8

97

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

5.1

130

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

6.4

163

2.0

50.8

1.5

40

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

Minimum Hinge Flat Top Base Flights (Double No-Cling)
Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
3.0
76.2
Acetal• The No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part. No fasteners are
required.
• Flights can be cut down to a minimum height of 0.5 in (12.7 mm).
• Flights of even-inch widths come standard with 1 in (25.4 mm) indents. Flights of oddinch widths are available for retrofits and require machined indents, which contain marks
and evidence of modification.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

269

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 1650

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 59: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S1650 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
2.0
3.2
3.9
5.2
6.4

51
81
99
132
163

Numberof Teeth
6
10
12
16
20

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
0.67-0.80
1.34-1.42
1.67-1.73
2.31-2.36
2.96-3.00

inmm
mm
SeamFree Minimum Hinge Flat Top
17-20
1.10
28
34-36
1.56
40
42-44
1.70
43
59-60
1.99
51
75-76
2.25
57

in

mm

in

mm

2.00
3.24
3.86
5.13
6.40

51
82
98
130
163

1.26
1.88
2.19
2.83
3.46

32
48
56
72
88

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1650 Dead Plate Gap

in
2.0
3.2
3.9
6.4

270

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
51
81
99
163

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
10
12
20

in
0.134
0.079
0.066
0.039

mm
3.4
2.0
1.7
1.0

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)

in
1.50
5
1.00
0.62 × 0.50
0.70 × 0.26

Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
38.1
127
25.4
15.7 × 12.7
17.8 × 6.6

37%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1700

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Slidelox are highly visible, orange acetal.
• Multi-rod hinge design significantly reduces cam shaft requirements.
Every row contains two rectangular rods.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ultra-abrasion-resistant polyurethane sprockets with large lug teeth.
• Abrasion resistant system lasts 2.5 to 3 times longer than conventional
modular plastic belts.
• Provides excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially in toughmaterial-handling applications.
• Conveyor requirements: Intralox recommends steel carryways witheither a chevron pattern or a flat continuous carryway. Do not use
straight, parallel wearstrips. Do not use on pusher conveyors.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AR nylon
Detectable nylon
Low Wear Plus

Default Rod Material
0.25 × 0.17 in(6.4 × 4.3 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Low Wear Plus

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,800
1,500
500

N/m
26,30021,9007,300

Temperature Range(continuous)a°F-50 to 240-50 to 180
0 to 120°C-46 to 116-46 to 82-18 to 49

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.21
2.28
2.56

kg/m²
10.78
11.13
12.50

a Sprocket temperatures must be limited to -40°F to 160°F (-40°C to 70°C). Belt used in temperature range of 212°F to 240°F (100°C to 116°C) are not FDA-

compliant.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

271

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid Nub Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.50
16
1.00
0.70 × 0.26

mm
38.1
406.4
25.4
18 × 7

37%
8%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1700

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Slidelox are highly visible, orange acetal.
• Multi-rod hinge design significantly reduces cam shaft requirements.
Every row contains two rectangular rods.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ultra-abrasion-resistant, polyurethane split sprockets with large lug
teeth.
• Abrasion resistant system lasts 2.5 to 3 times longer than conventional
modular plastic belts.
• Provides excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially in toughmaterial handling applications.
• Conveyor requirements: Intralox recommends steel carryways witheither a chevron pattern or a flat continuous carryway. Do not use
straight, parallel wearstrips. Do not use on pusher conveyors.
• Minimum nominal alternating edge indents: 4 in (102 mm) and 6 in
(152 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Nylon (FDA)
Easy Release Traceable PP
Low Wear Plus

Default Rod Material
0.25 × 0.17 in(6.4 × 4.3 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Low Wear Plus

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,800
1,500
500

N/m
26,30021,9007,300

Temperature Range(continuous)a°F-50 to 240
34 to 220
0 to 120°C-46 to 116
1 to 104-18 to 49

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.21
1.84
2.58

kg/m²
10.78
8.98
12.60

a Sprocket temperatures must be limited to -40°F to 160°F (-40°C to 70°C). Belt used in temperature range of -212°F to 240°F (100°C to 116°C) are not FDA-

compliant.

272

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Transverse Roller Top™ (TRT™)
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments (See ProductNotes.)
Minimum Opening Size (approximate)
Maximum Opening Size(approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.475
12
2.00

mm
37.5
304.8
50.8

0.62 x 0.50
0.70 x 0.26

16 x 1318 x 7

26%
ClosedOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1700

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Roller axles are stainless steel for durability and long-lasting
performance.
• Must be assembled in two-row increments.
• Available in width increments of 2 in (50.8 mm) except 14 in (356 mm)
belts are not available.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ultra-abrasion-resistant, polyurethane split sprockets with large lug
teeth.
• Split sprockets are available.
• Provides excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially in toughmaterial handling applications.
• Roller diameter: 0.95 in (24.1 mm).
• Roller length: 0.825 in (21 mm).
• Roller spacing: 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
• Minimum return roller diameter: 6.0 in (152.4 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in(7.9 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft2,200

N/m
32,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
4.70

kg/m²
22.96

273

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference Flush Grid and Flush Grid Nub Top
Belt Width Rangea

SERIES 1700

in
5
6
7
8
9
10
12

mm
127
152
178
203
229
254
305

Minimum Number of
Sprockets Per Shaftb
2
2
3
3
3
3
3

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

3
3
5
5
5
5
7
9
11

42
1,067
13
48
1,219
15
54
1,372
17
60
1,524
19
72
1,829
23
84
2,134
27
96
2,438
31
120
3,048
39
144
3,658
47
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in (102 mm)
centerline spacing.c

Wearstrips
Carryway

Returnway

Place wearstrips in a
Place wearstrips in a
chevron pattern or use a
chevron pattern or use aflat continuous carryway. flat continuous returnway.
Do not use straight, parallel Do not use straight, parallel
wearstrips.
wearstrips.

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacinga Belts are available in 1.00 in (25.4 mm) increments, beginning at 5 in (127 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.
b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference for Transverse Roller Top
Belt Width Rangea

274

Wearstrips

in
5
6
7
8
9
10
12

mm
127
152
178
203
229
254
305

Minimum Number of
Sprockets Per Shaftb
2
2
3
3
3
3
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

14
15
16
18
20

356
381
406
457
508

3
3
5
5
5

3
3
3
3
4

3
3
3
3
3

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference for Transverse Roller Top
in
24
30
32
36
42
48
54

Wearstrips

Minimum Number of
Sprockets Per Shaftb
5
7
7
9
9
11
11

mm
610
762
813
914
1,067
1,219
1,372

60
1,524
13
72
1,829
15
84
2,134
17
96
2,438
21
120
3,048
25
144
3,658
29
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in (102 mm)
centerline spacing.c

Carryway
4
5
5
5
6
7
7

Returnway
3
4
4
4
5
5
6

8
9
11
12
15
17

6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacinga Belts are available in 1.00 in (25.4 mm) increments beginning with 5 in (127 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

22T

A 0.5
0.4

14T 16T

0.3

0.2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

102

D

3.0

12T
1

E

A 4.0

76

2.0
20

1.0
0%

51
25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D dashed line: Transverse Roller Top
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of E solid line: Flush Grid and Flush Grid Nub Top

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

90%

100%

the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

275

SERIES 1700

Belt Width Rangea

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
12(3.41%) 5.8 147

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.85

149

1.5

38

1.5

40

14
(2.51%)

6.7

170

6.80

173

1.5

38

1.5

40

16
(1.92%)

7.7

196

7.74

197

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 6022(1.02%)

10.5

267 10.59

269

1.5

38

2.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Split Sprockets

SERIES 1700

Number Nom. Pitch Nom. Outer
Diameterof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)
in mm
in
mm
14
6.7 170 6.80 173(2.51%)
16
7.7 196 7.74 197(1.92%)
22
10.5 267 10.59 269(1.02%)

Nom. Hub
Width
in
1.5

mm
38

1.5

38

1.5

38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5
1.5,40, 60
2.5
2.5,
60
3.5

Streamline Flights
Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
4.0102
Nylon (AR), detectable nylon
6.0152• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part. No fasteners are
required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• Minimum indent: 2.0 in (51 mm).

276

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 60: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S1700 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain

in
Flush Grid
60-62
2.42
72-74
2.63
85-86
2.81
121-123
3.30
Flush Grid Nub Top

mm

in

mm

in

mm

61
67
71
84

5.67
6.61
7.56
10.41

144
168
192
264

3.27
3.74
4.22
5.64

83
95
107
143

mm

5.8
6.7
7.7
10.5

147
170
196
267

12
14
16
22

2.36-2.46
2.85-2.93
3.33-3.40
4.78-4.83

5.8
6.7
7.7
10.5

147
170
196
267

12
14
16
22

2.36-2.46
2.85-2.93
3.33-3.40
4.78-4.83

60-62
2.42
72-74
2.63
85-86
2.81
121-123
3.30
Transverse Roller Top

61
67
71
84

5.79
6.73
7.68
10.53

147
171
195
267

3.39
3.86
4.34
5.76

86
98
110
146

5.8
6.7
7.7
10.5

147
170
196
267

12
14
16
22

2.42-2.52
2.91-3.00
3.40-3.47
4.84-4.90

61-64
74-76
86-88
123-124

60
65
69
81

6.92
7.87
8.81
11.67

176
200
224
296

4.46
4.93
5.41
6.83

113
125
137
173

2.36
2.56
2.73
3.20

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

277

SERIES 1700

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1700 Dead Plate Gap

in
5.8
6.7
7.7
10.5

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
147
170
196
267

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
12
14
16
22

in
0.099
0.085
0.074
0.054

mm
2.5
2.2
1.9
1.4

SERIES 1700
278

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.52
12
120
1.00
0.66 x 0.53

mm
38.6
304.8
3048
25.4
16.7 x 13.5

21%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

SERIES 1750

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Highly visible Slidelox rod retention feature.
• Large belt openings allow high-volume water flow and drainage.
• Semi-circle rod design significantly reduces rod wear and pitch
elongation, and delivers predictable performance for maintenanceplanning in tough applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Ultra-abrasion-resistant polyurethane sprockets. Sprockets have large
lug teeth that provide reliable engagement, extend sprocket life, andclear debris from the drive pockets.
• Provides excellent belt and sprocket durability, especially in toughmaterial handling applications.
• Conveyor requirements: Intralox recommends steel carryways in either
a chevron pattern or a flat continuous carryway. Do not use straight,
parallel wearstrips. Do not use on pusher conveyors.
• For specific conveyor design guidelines, contact Intralox Customer
Service.

A preferred run direction

Belt Data

Belt Material
Low Wear Plus
LMAR

Default Rod Material
0.5 in (12.5 mm)
Half RoundStainless steel
Stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,800

N/m
17,50026,300Temperature Range(continuous)°F
0 to 120
0 to 212°C-18 to 49-18 to 100

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
7.10
6.73

kg/m²
34.66
32.86

279

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference Flush Grid
Belt Width Rangea

SERIES 1750

in
12-14
15-18
20
24
30
32
36

mm
305-356381-457
508
610
762
813
914

Minimum Number of
Sprockets Per Shaftb
5
7
9
11
13
15
17

42
48
54
60
72
84
96
108
120

1,067
1,219
1,372
1,524
1,829
2,134
2,438
2,743
3,038

19
23
25
29
35
41
47
53
59

Wearstrips
Carryway

Returnway

For specific carryway
For specific returnway
guidelines, contact Intralox guidelines, contact Intralox
Customer Service, or see
Customer Service, or see
the S1750 Design
the S1750 Design
Guidelines.
Guidelines.

For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 2 in (51 mm)
centerline spacing.ca Belts are available in 1.00 in (25.4 mm) increments beginning with 12 in (305 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

22T

A 0.5
0.4

14T 16T

0.3

0.2

A 4.0
3.0

12T
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

102
76

D

2.0
20

1.0
0%

51
25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D solid line: Flush Grid
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

90%

100%

centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

280

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16
7.8 198(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
7.9

mm
201

in
1.5

mm
38

22
(1.02%)

10.9

277

1.5

38

10.6

269

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
2.5
60
2.5,
3.5

60

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.9

175

1.5

38

7.9

201

1.5

38

22
(1.02%)

10.9

277

1.5

38

10.6

269

SERIES 1750

Ultra Abrasion Resistant Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
14(2.51%) 6.8 173
16(1.92%) 7.8 198

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5
1.5,40, 60
2.5

2.5,
3.5

60

3-Piece Streamline Flights
Flight HeightinmmMaterials
3.0
76
Low Wear Plus, LMAR
4.0102
• Flight consists of three pieces: the base module, the attachment, and the rod.
• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Available with zero indent. The first available indent is 1.625 in (41 mm). Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Flights can be cut as short as 1.5 in (38 mm). If a shorter flight is needed, the flight basemodule without a flight attachment functions as a 0.75 in (19 mm) raised link. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

281

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Urethane Wearstrip
Dimensions
in0.50 x 2 x 216

mm
13 x 51 x 5486

Available Colors
Blue• Intended for dry, aqueous, and solid fatty food applications. Do not use forliquid-oil applications.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for friction and belt strength analysis.
• Temperature range is 32°Fto 120°F (0°C to 49°C).

Split Metal Sprockets

SERIES 1750

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
2210.6 269(1.02%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
10.7

in
1.625

mm
272

mm
41

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
2.5,
90
3.5

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 61: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

282

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S1750 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
6.8
7.8
10.6

173
198
269

Numberof Teeth
14
16
22

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm

mm

in

mm

in

mm

2.72-2.81
3.21-3.29
4.67-4.73

72
77
93

6.81
7.77
10.65

173
197
271

4.06
4.54
5.98

103
115
152

in
Flush Grid
69-71
2.83
82-84
3.04
119-120
3.68

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1750 Dead Plate Gap

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
14
16
22

in
0.085
0.075
0.054

SERIES 1750

in
6.8
7.8
10.6

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
173
198
269

mm
2.2
1.9
1.4

283

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 1750
284

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.50
5
1.00
-

mm
63.5
127
25.4
-

0%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1800

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Impact resistant belt designed for abusive applications.
• Like S800 and S1600, the drive bar on the underside of this belt
channels water and debris to the outside of the belt for easier, fastercleanup. Drive bar effectiveness is proven both in-house and in fieldtests.
• Cam-link hinges provide easy cleaning with greater hinge and rod
exposure as the belt moves around the sprockets.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Easy retrofit from S800 without extensive conveyor frame changes formost meat industry applications since the A, B, C, and E dimensions
are within 0.25 in (6 mm) of S800.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalAcetal
X-ray detectable acetalaPK
X-ray detectable PK

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in(7.9 mm)Polypropylene
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polyethylene
PK
PK

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,200
1,500
1,000
1,200
1,200

N/m
17,50017,50021,90014,60017,50017,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 150
34 to 200
-50 to 150-40 to 176-40 to 176°C
1 to 104-46 to 66
1 to 93-46 to 66-40 to 80-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.06
3.36
3.36
3.77
3.02
3.52

kg/m²
10.06
16.40
16.40
18.41
14.74
17.19

a Designed specifically for detection by X-ray machines.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

285

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mesh Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.50
5
1.00
0.07 × 0.75

mm
63.5
127
25.4
1.7 × 19.1

32%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1800

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges with recessed rods prevent edge damage and rod
migration.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flights and other accessories are available.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
UV resistant acetal
Polyethylene
Nylon

286

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.31 in(7.9 mm)Polypropylene
AcetalPolyethylene
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
800
1,500
400
1,000

N/m
11,70021,9005,840
14,600Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
-50 to 200-50 to 150-50 to 240°C
1 to 104-46 to 93-46 to 66-46 to 116

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.44
2.27
1.50
1.81

kg/m²
7.03
11.08
7.32
8.84

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
in
5
6
7
8
9
10
12

mm
127
152
178
203
229
254
305

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb

Wearstrips

1
2
2
2
2
2
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
2
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
7

3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

6
7
7
9
11
12

5
5
6
6
7
8
9

Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

42
1,067
7
48
1,219
9
54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
For other widths, use odd number of sprockets at maximum 6 in (152mm) centerline spacing.c

8

SERIES 1800

Belt Width Rangea

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with 5.0 in (127 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

287

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 0.5
0.3

0.2

6T
1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

A 4.0

13T
10T

0.4

8T

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 1800

EZ Clean™ Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)6(13.40%)8 (7.61%)10(4.89%)
13(2.91%)

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

5.0

127

4.6

117

1.5

38

1.5

40

6.5

165

6.2

157

1.5

38

1.5

40

8.1

206

7.8

198

1.5

38

1.5

40

10.5

267

10.3

262

1.5

38

1.5,
2.5

40, 60Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

Angled EZ Clean™ Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
8 (7.61%) 6.5 165288

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.2

in
2.0

mm
157

mm
50.8

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Impact Resistant Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
4.0

102

Available Materials
Acetal, PK, polyethylene, polypropylene, Xray detectable acetal• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.

Intralox Belt Puller Set
U.S. Units
14.4 in
4.2 in0.5 in2 lb
Belt Puller Set

Metric Units
365.8 mm
106.7 mm
12.7 mm
0.9 kgSERIES 1800

Single Belt Puller
LengthWidth
HeightWeightWeight6 lb
2.7 kg• Can be used in carryways and returnways to install, close, or open
compatible belts.
• Improves worker safety.
• Reduces the number of people required to install or remove large or
inclined belts.
• Reduces the risk of belt damage that can lead to foreign material
contamination.
• Set includes two belt pullers and one Intralox ratchet strap.
• Solid metal construction with dedicated metal rod that locks into thebelt puller.
• Etched QR code on the tool links to an instructional video.
• Compatible with S800, S888, and S1800 belts. For up-to-datecompatibility information, contact Intralox Customer Service.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

289

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 1800

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 62: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S1800 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
5.0
6.5
8.1
10.5

127
165
206
267

Numberof Teeth
6
8
10
13

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
1.77-2.10
2.62-2.87
3.45-3.65
4.67-4.82inmm
Flat Top, Mesh Top
45-53
1.87
66-73
2.23
88-93
2.59
119-123
3.02

mm

in

mm

in

mm

47
57
66
77

4.95
6.48
8.04
10.40

126
165
204
264

2.91
3.68
4.46
5.64

74
93
113
143

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1800 Dead Plate Gap

in
5.0
6.5
8.1
10.5

290

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
127
165
206
267

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
8
10
13

in
0.150
0.108
0.091
0.074

mm
3.8
2.8
2.3
1.9

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.07
15
1.00
-

mm
52.6
381
25.4
-

27%
ClosedShuttleplug; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 1900

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Increased module thickness and rod diameter provide superior belt
strength and increased belt life.
• Tall belt ribs and strong fingers enable robust transfers.
• Engineered resin module material provides increased resistance tochemicals and temperature changes.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Split sprockets available for easy installation.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Enduralox polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.38 in(9.7 mm)Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft4,000

N/m
58,400Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220°C
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.90

kg/m²
19.04

291

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea
in
15
18
24
30
36
42
48

Wearstrips

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
3
3
5
5
7
7
9

mm
381
457
610
762
914
1,067
1,219

SERIES 1900

54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
120
3,048
21
144
3,658
25
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.c

Carryway
3
3
4
5
5
6
7

Returnway
3
3
3
4
4
5
5

7
8
9
11
12
15
17

6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. If the actual width is critical,

contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

16T

A 0.5

A 4.0

0.4

10T

0.3

0.2

1

2

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

292

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Split Metal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.7 170

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

7.0

177

1.7

43

2.5

15
(2.19%)

10.0

254

10.3

262

1.7

43

3.5

16
(1.92%)

10.6

269

11.0

279

1.7

43

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

3.5

3.5

60

90

Two-Material Finger Transfer Plates
Number ofFingers
18

SERIES 1900

Available Widths
in
mm
152
6.0

Available Materials
Glass-filled thermoplastic fingers,
acetal backplate• Provides high-strength fingers combined with a low-friction backplate.
• Low-friction backplate is permanently attached to the two high-strength finger inserts.
• Eliminates product transfer and tipping problems. The 18 fingers extend between the belt
ribs, allowing smooth, continuous product flow as the belt engages the sprockets.
• Easily installed on the conveyor frame with supplied shoulder bolts. Caps snap easily into
place over the bolts, keeping foreign materials out of the slots.
• The extended backplate has three attachment slots. Mounting hardware is soldseparately and includes stainless steel oval washers and bolts. Plastic bolt covers arealso included.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

293

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Dimensional Requirements for S1900 Two-Material Finger Transfer Plate Installation
F
G

in
3.50
0.31

mm
89
8

H
I
J
K
L
1

9.56
5.91
3.00
1.45
5.50
5.98

243
150
76
37
140
151.9

SERIES 1900

1 spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
2 0.5 in (13 mm) radius (leading edge of frame member)
3 frame member

Figure 63: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assembly

Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Platesa
Available Width
No. ofinmm
Fingers
Available Materials
6
152
18
Glass-filled thermoplastic• Consists of a finger transfer plate and a transfer edge belt that aredesigned to work together.
• Flat, smooth top surface provides excellent lateral movement ofcontainers.
• Fully flush edges, headed rod retention system, and nylon rods forsuperior wear resistance.
• Eliminates the need for a sweeper bar, a pusher arm, or wide transfer
plates. Transfers are smooth and 100% self-clearing, making right angle
transfers possible for all container types.
• Ideal for warmer/cooler applications with frequent product changeovers.
• Bi-directional system allows same transfer belt use for both left-handand right-hand transfers.
• Compatible with any series and style of Intralox belt on the discharge andinfeed conveyors.
• Capable of transferring product to and from Intralox Series 400, Series
1200, and Series 1900 Raised Rib belts.
• Robust design for durability in tough, glass applications.
• Easily installed and secured to mounting plates of any thickness withstainless steel bolts and oval washers that allow movement with belt
expansion and contraction.
• Stainless steel hardware is sold separately.
a Licensed under Rexnord U.S. Patent Nos. 7,314,130 and 7,448,490

294

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Dimensional Requirements for S1900 Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Plate Installationa
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
1

in
5.25
1.15
8.05
5.93
2.92
1.51
2.71
5.98

mm
133.4
29.2
204.5
150.6
74.2
38.4
68.8
151.9

1.75"

(44.5 mm)1.46"
(37.1 mm)

0.59"

SERIES 1900

(15.0 mm)

1 spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature
2 frame member

Figure 64: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assemblya Licensed under Rexnord U.S. Patent Nos. 7,314,130 and 7,448,490

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 65: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

295

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S1900 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
6.7
10.0
10.6

170
254
269

Numberof Teeth
10
15
16

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm

mm

in

mm

in

mm

2.69-2.85
4.37-4.48
4.71-4.81

72
89
93

7.08
10.33
11

180
262
279

4.29
5.91
6.25

109
150
159

in
Raised Rib
68-72
2.82
111-1143.52
120-122
3.65

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S1900 Dead Plate Gap

SERIES 1900

in
6.7
10.0
10.6

296

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
170
254
269

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
10
15
16

in
0.164
0.109
0.102

mm
4.2
2.8
2.6

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Transverse Roller Top™ (TRT™)
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
mm
2.00
50.8
8
203
2.00
50.8
0.43 x 0.53
10.9 x 13.5
17.8%
Open
Barn door; unheaded• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Uses acetal rollers with plastic axles.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for 90-degree transfers.
• Sprockets have large lug teeth.
• S4400 alternating tooth, glass-filled split sprockets are recommended.
• Robust design offers excellent belt and sprocket durability, especiallyin tough, material-handling applications.
• Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Adjust belt length in 4 in (10.16 cm), two-row increments.
• Roller diameter: 0.95 in (24.1 mm).
• Roller length: 0.825 in (20.9 mm).
• Standard roller indent: 0.26 in (6.6 mm).
• Roller spacing: 2 in (50.8 mm), alternating.

SERIES 4400

Product Notes

2.00"(50.8 mm)1.00"
(25.4 mm)0.314"(7.98 mm)0.625"(15.88 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Straight Belt Strength
lbf/ft2,200

N/m
32,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200°C
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.25

kg/m²
10.985297

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

SERIES 4400

in
10-14
16-18
20-24
26
28-32
34-36
38-42

mm
254-356406-457508-610660
711-813864-914965-1,067

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
2
3
3
4
4
5
5

Carryway
3
3
4
4
5
5
6

Returnway
2
3
3
3
3
4
4

44
46-50
52-54
56-60
62
64-68
70-72
74-78
80

1,118
1,168-1,270
1,321-1,372
1,422-1,524
1,575
1,626-1,727
1,778-1,829
1,879-1,981
2,032

6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10

6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10

5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7

Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum spacing 12 in (304.8mm)

Maximum 9 in (229 mm) centerline spacing, minimum indent fromflush edge

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 2.00 in(51 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 10 in (254 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized
10.0

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

0.7
0.6

A

0.3

6T
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

A 6.0

1
12 6T
T-1

8T
-9T

0.4

9 10

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

150

4.0

100

3.0
20

2.0
0%

50

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D solid line: square bore sprockets
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

5.0

3T
10
T

15

200

D

7.0

0.5

0.2

250

9.0

90%

100%

centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

298

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Glass-Filled Nylon Alternating Tooth Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.5 165

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.5

165

1.95

50

12
(3.41%)

7.8

198

7.8

198

1.95

50

1.5,
2.5

40, 6016(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.4

264

1.95

50

1.5,
2.5

40, 60Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.5
10.5

in
1.9
1.9

mm
140
267

mm
48
48

SERIES 4400

Nylon Alternating Tooth Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
8 (7.61%) 5.3 135
16
10.3 262(1.92%)

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40
3.5

Nylon Alternating Tooth Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
6
4.0 102(13.40%)Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
3.8

in
1.9

mm
97

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

mm
48

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

299

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Glass-Filled Nylon Alternating Tooth Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.5 165

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.5

165

2.0

51

12
(3.41%)

7.8

198

7.8

198

2

51

1.5,
2.5

40, 6016(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.4

264

2

51

2.5

60

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 60
2.5

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSSERIES 4400

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 66: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S4400 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
4.0
5.3
6.5
7.8
10.3

102
135
165
198
262

Numberof Teeth
6
8
10
12
16

A

B

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
inmm
Transverse Roller Top
1.43-1.70
36-43
1.85
2.12-2.32
54-59
2.24
2.79-2.95
71-75
2.39
3.45-3.58
88-91
2.64
4.75-4.85
121-123
3.10

C

E

mm

in

mm

in

mm

47
57
61
67
79

4.40
5.64
6.90
8.16
10.70

112
143
175
207
272

2.76
3.38
4.01
4.64
5.91

70
86
102
118
150

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

300

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
5.00
1.00
0.24 x 0.23

mm
50.8
127
25.4
6.1 x 5.8

35%OpenBarn door; unheaded

Product Notes

2.0"(50.8 mm)

SERIES 4500

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface and straightforward design provide free productmovement.
• Opening size prevents 0.25 in (6.35 mm) or larger bolt from fallingthrough the belt surface.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets have large lug teeth.

2.0"(50.8 mm)0.625"(15.9 mm)0.313"(7.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon
Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,400
2,200

N/m
35,00032,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220°C
1 to 104
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.54
1.54

kg/m²
7.52
7.52

301

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
5.00
1.00
—

mm
50.8
127
25.4
—

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 4500

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface.
• Fully flush edges.
• Available with yellow edges. Staggered yellow edges make it easy to
distinguish the moving belt from the stationary floor.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.

2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm).625"
(15.9 mm).313"
(7.9 mm)

Belt Data
Default Rod Material,
Belt Material
Diameter 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
AcetalNylon
HSEC acetal
Nylon
AC/EC
Nylon
Polypropylene
Nylon
Easy Release Traceable polypropylene Nylon

302

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
4,400
4,100
4,400
2,900
2,500

N/m
64,20059,80064,20042,30036,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200
34 to 220
34 to 220°C
-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.07
3.08
3.08
1.97
2.26

kg/m²
14.96
15.04
15.04
9.62
11.03

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
5.00
1.00
—

mm
50.8
127
25.4
—

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm).660"
(16.8 mm).348"
(8.8 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalHSEC acetal
AC/EC
Polypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
4,400
4,100
4,400
2,900

N/m
64,20059,80064,20042,300Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200
34 to 220°C
-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.09
3.10
3.10
1.98

kg/m²
15.09
15.14
15.14
9.67

303

SERIES 4500

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Edges have Flat Top surface with no tread pattern.
• Available with yellow edges. Staggered yellow edges make it easy to
distinguish the moving belt from the stationary floor.
• Diamond tread pattern provides a non-skid walking surface to increasesafety.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Flat Top indent: 2.0 in (50 mm) from the belt edge.

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
5.00
1.00
—

mm
50.8
127
25.4
—

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 4500

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges.
• Edges have Flat Top surface with no tread pattern.
• Available with yellow edges. Staggered yellow edges make it easy to
distinguish the moving belt from the stationary floor.
• Non-skid tread pattern increases safety.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Finger transfer plates are available. Finger transfer plates remove
debris from the belt surface.
• Flat Top indent: 2.0 in (50 mm) from the belt edge.

2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.0" NOM.
(50.8 mm).825"
(21.0 mm).513"
(13.0 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalHSEC acetal
AC/EC

304

Default Rod Material,
Diameter
0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
4,400
4,100
4,400

N/m
64,20059,80064,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
3.39
3.39
3.39

kg/m²
16.55
16.55
16.55

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Embedded Diamond Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
5.00
1.00

mm
50.8
127.0
25.4
0%
ClosedSlidelox®; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 4500

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges• The Embedded Diamond Top pattern allows sticky materials to releaseeasily from the belt.
• Slidelox are glass-reinforced polypropylene.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.

2.0 in NOM.
(50.8 mm)

2.0 in NOM.
(50.8 mm)

2.0 in NOM.
(50.8 mm)0.625 in(15.9 mm)0.313 in(7.9 mm)

Belt Data
Default Rod Material,
Belt Material
Diameter 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
Polypropylene
Nylon
Easy Release traceable polypropylene Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
2,900
2,500

N/m
42,30036,500Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 220
34 to 220°C
1 to 104
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.97
2.26

kg/m²
9.62
11.03

305

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

SERIES 4500

in
2
4
6
7
8
10
12

mm
51
102
152
178
203
254
305

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
2
2
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
2
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

3
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7

3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

6
7
7
8
9
11
12
15
17

5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

42
1,087
7
48
1,219
9
54
1,372
9
60
1,524
11
72
1,829
13
84
2,134
15
96
2,438
17
120
3,048
21
144
3,658
25
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.ca If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 5 in (127 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

306

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0

8.0

203

0.9

7.0

178

0.8
0.7
0.6

22T

A 0.5
0.3
0.2

12T
1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

152

5.0

127

A 4.0

16T
14T

0.4

6.0

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

SERIES 4500

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed (V) by theshaft centerline distance (L). The strength factor is found at theintersection of the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line.
See Belt Selection Instructions for more information.

Enduralox Polypropylene Composite Split Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.5 165
12(3.41%) 7.8 198
16
10.3 262(1.92%)b

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.7

170

1.5

38

8

203

1.5

38

10.5

267

1.5

38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5
1.5,40, 602.5
2.5, 3.5 2.5 60, 90
60

a Hardware made from 316 stainless steel.

b Bores are over-sized.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

307

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

10
(4.89%)

6.5

165

6.7

170

1.45

37

1.5a,
2.5

40a, 60

12(3.41%)

7.8

198

8

203

1.45

37

1.5a,
2.5,
3.5

40a,
60, 9016(1.92%)

10.3

262

10.5

267

1.45

37

2.5,
3.5

60, 90Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

a 1.5 in and 40-mm bores have a hub width of 1.95 in (50 mm).

SERIES 4500

Nylon Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1610.3 262(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
10.5

in
1.95

mm
267

mm
50

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

Glass-Filled Nylon Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.89%) 6.5 165
12
7.8 198(3.41%)

308

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

6.5

165

1.45

37

7.8

198

1.45

37

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5
1.5,40, 602.52024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Enduralox Polypropylene Composite Dual Tooth Split Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1610.3 262(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
10.5

in
1.5

mm
267

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
3.5b

90b

a Hardware made from 316 stainless steel

SERIES 4500

b Bores are over-sized.

Flat Top Wheel Chocks
Available Height
Available Width
in
mm
in
mm
Available Materials
1.6
41
5
127
UHMW
1.97
50
5
127
UHMW
• Fasteners and modified S4500 Flat Top modules are required.
• Fastener torque specification: 40-45 in-lbf (4.5-5 N-m).
• Minimum indent from the edge of the belt without wheel chocks: 2.0 in(50 mm).

Insert Nuts
Available Base Belt Style; Material
Available Insert Nut Sizes
Flat Top; Acetal
6 mm –1 mm
Flat Top; Polypropylene
6 mm –1 mm• Insert nuts allow easy attachment of fixtures to the belt.
• Square insert nuts are provided. The square flange ensures that the insert
nut stays in place when the bolt is tightened or loosened.
• Ensure that attachments connected to more than one row do not prohibit
belt rotation around the sprockets.
• Do not locate sprockets in-line with the insert nuts. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for sprocket and insert nut placement.
• Fasteners and modified Series 4500 Flat Top modules are required.
• Fastener torque specification: 40-45 in-lbf (4.5-5.0 N-m).
• Minimum indent from the belt edge: 3.5 in (89 mm)• Minimum distance between nuts along the length of the belt: 1.0 in (25mm)• Contact Intralox Customer Service for assistance with insert nut
placement.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

309

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Finger Transfer Plates
Available Widths
inmm
6

Number ofFingers

152

18

Available Materials
Glass-filled thermoplastic
fingers, acetal backplate• For use with Series 4500 Non Skid Raised Rib belt styles.
• Fingers extend between the ribs to prevent hardware from dropping off
the end of the conveyor.
• Plastic shoulder bolts and bolt covers are included for installing thestandard two-material finger transfer plates.
• Easily installed on the conveyor frame.
• Available in two different configurations. The standard configuration
features long fingers with a short backplate. Standard Extended Backconfiguration features long fingers with an extended backplate. The short
backplate has two attachment slots and the extended backplate has
three attachment slots.

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSSERIES 4500

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 67: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S4500 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in

in
mm
Flat Top, Flush Grid

mm

in

mm

in

mm

6.5
7.8
10.3

165
198
262

10
12
16

2.77-2.92
3.46-3.59
4.71-4.81

70-74
2.40
88-91
2.63
120-122
3.15
Non Skid

61
67
80

6.47
7.80
10.25

164
198
260

3.61
4.28
5.50

92
109
140

6.5

165

10

2.77-2.92

70-74

2.40

61

6.56

167

3.70

94

7.8
10.3

198
262

12
16

3.46-3.59
4.71-4.81

88-91
120-122

2.63
3.15

67
80

7.89
10.34

200
263

4.36
5.59

111
142

310

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S4500 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
6.5
7.8
10.3

165
198
262

Numberof Teeth
10
12
16

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
mm
in
Non Skid Raised Rib

mm

in

mm

in

mm

2.77-2.92
3.46-3.59
4.71-4.81

61
67
80

6.67
8.00
10.45

169
203
265

3.81
4.48
5.70

97
114
145

70-74
88-91
120-122

2.40
2.63
3.15

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S4500 Dead Plate Gap

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
10
12
16

in
0.160
0.130
0.100

SERIES 4500

in
6.4
7.8
10.1

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
163
198
257

mm
4.1
3.3
2.5

311

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 4500
3122024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.01
6
1.00
0.7 x 0.5

mm
25.7
152.4
25.4
17.8 x 12.7

58%
ClosedOccluded edge; unheaded

SERIES 9000

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Open surface enhances spray-through cleaning performance andairflow cooling performance, depending on the application.
• PVDF is a polymer material proven for long-term use in washer
environments.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Available with split steel sprockets for longer sprocket life and easierreplacement.
• Easy to retrofit from existing steel belting with virtually no conveyor
changes.

A preferred run direction
1.01" NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.01" NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.01" NOM.
(25.4 mm)

0.25"
(6.4 mm)1.01" NOM.
(25.4 mm)
0.50"
(12.7 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
PVDF
Polypropylene
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)PVDF
Polypropylene
Polypropylene

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,000
750
900

N/m
14,60010,90013,100Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
34 to 220
34 to 200°C
1 to 93
1 to 104
1 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
kg/m²
1.57
7.64
0.82
4.00
1.14
5.57

313

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea
in
12
24
36
48
60
72
84

Wearstrips

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
3
6
9
12
15
18
21

mm
305
610
914
1,219
1,524
1,829
2,134

Carryway
2
4
6
8
10
12
14

96
2,438
24
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in
(102 mm) centerline spacing.c

Returnway

Minimum 3 in (76.2 mm) diameterrollers.

16

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 6 in (152.4 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings and

SERIES 9000

Center Sprocket Offset.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

25T

A 0.5
0.3

10T
0.2

A 4.0

20T
19T

0.4

1

2

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

4

5

13T
6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

314

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Split Metal Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

20
(1.23%)

6.5

165

6.5

165

1.7

25 (0.8%) 8.1

206

8.1

206

1.7

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
2-3/16,2-7/16, 2.5
43 2-11/16,
3-7/1643

2-7/16,
2-11/16,
3-7/16

2.5

90

a Split metal sprocket is made of 316 stainless steel.

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
4012.9 328(0.31%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
13.0

in
1.48

mm
330

SERIES 9000

UHMW Polyethylene Split Sprockets
Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
38 2-7/16,
60
2-11/16,
3-7/16

Nylon FDA Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
13(2.90%) 4.2 107
19
6.1 155(1.38%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

4.2

107

1.48

38

1-1/4

1-1/2

40

6.1

155

1.48

38

1-1/4

1-1/2

40

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

315

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Acetal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
20
6.5 165(1.23%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.5

in
0.75

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
20
6.5 165(1.23%)
25 (0.8%) 8.1 206

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.5

mm
165

in
1.48

8.1

206

1.48

40
(0.31%)

13.0

330

1.48

mm
165

mm
19

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5

Enduralox Polypropylene Composite Sprockets

SERIES 9000

12.9

328

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
38 2-7/16,
90
3-7/1638 2-7/16,
90
3-7/1638 2-11/16
60

Flat Top Base Flights (No-Cling)
Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
376
Polypropylene, nylon• No-Cling vertical ribs are on both sides of the flight.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Minimum indent without sideguards: 2.0 in (50.8 mm).

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

316

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
S9000 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
3.3
4.2
6.1
6.5
8.1

84
107
155
165
206

Numberof Teeth
10
13
19
20
25

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm

mm

in

mm

in

mm

1.30-1.38
1.80-1.86
2.78-2.82
2.94-2.98
3.75-3.78

42
47
57
60
67

3.26
4.22
6.14
6.46
8.06

83
107
156
164
205

1.95
2.42
3.38
3.54
4.34

50
61
86
90
110

in
Flush Grid
33-35
1.65
46-47
1.85
71-72
2.23
75-76
2.35
95-96
2.63

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S9000 Dead Plate Gap

in
3.3
4.2
6.1
6.5
8.1

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
84
107
155
164
205

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
10
13
19
20
25

in
0.081
0.061
0.042
0.040
0.032

mm
2.1
1.5
1.1
1.0
0.8

317

SERIES 9000

Figure 68: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS

SERIES 9000
318

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Flat Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
3.0
5.9
153.5
0.98
-

mm
76
150
3900
25
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

3.0"(76 mm)

3.0"(76 mm)SERIES 10000• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Available with yellow edges. Staggered yellow edges make it easy to
distinguish the moving belt from the stationary floor.
• Available in high strength electrically conductive acetal, which has asurface resistivity of 1,000 Ohms according to IEC 62631.
• Slidelox are an acetal copolymer.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Wheel chock attachments are available.
3.0"(76 mm).70"(17.8 mm)

1.40"
(35.6 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalHSEC acetal

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.50 in(12.7 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft10,0008,000

N/m
146,000
117,000

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
6.36
6.36

kg/m²
31.05
31.05

319

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Mold to Width Flat Top
in
3.0
3.9
7.9
-

Pitch
Molded Widths
Opening Size
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
76
100
200
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 10000• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth, closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Available in high strength electrically conductive acetal, which has asurface resistivity of 1,000 Ohms according to IEC 62631.
• Slidelox are an acetal copolymer.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.

3.0"
(76 mm)

3.0"(76 mm)

3.0"(76 mm).70"(17.8 mm)

1.40"
(35.6 mm)

Belt Data
Belt Width
Belt Material
AcetalAcetalHSEC acetal
HSEC acetal

320

in
3.9
7.9
3.9
7.9

mm
100
200
100
200

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.50 in(12.7 mm)
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf
2,500
5,800
2,000
4,700

N
11,10025,8008,900
20,900Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft
2.08
4.15
2.08
4.15

kg/m
3.10
6.18
3.10
6.18

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
3.0
5.9
153.5
0.98
-

mm
76
150
3900
25
-

0%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

3.0"(76 mm)

3.0"(76 mm)SERIES 10000

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Closed upper surface with fully flush edges.
• Tread pattern provides a non-skid walking surface to increase safety.
• Edges have a Flat Top surface, with no tread pattern.
• Available with yellow edges. Staggered yellow edges make it easy to
distinguish the moving belt from the stationary floor.
• Slidelox are an acetal copolymer.
• Available in high strength electrically conductive acetal, which has asurface resistivity of 1,000 ohms according to IECE 62631.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Wheel chocks are available. Use Series 10000 Flat Top modules tomount the wheel chocks.
• Flat Top indent: 2.0 in (50 mm) from belt edge.

3.0"(76 mm).95"(24.1 mm)

1.65"
(41.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
HSEC acetal

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.50 in(12.7 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft8,000

N/m
117,000

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
6.85

kg/m²
33.44

321

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Non Skid Perforated
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
3.00
5.9
153.5
0.98
0.10 x 0.31

mm
76.2
150
3900
25
2.8 x 7.9

3%
ClosedSlidelox; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 10000• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Fully flush edges have a Flat Top surface with no tread pattern.
• Open slots improve drainage. Diamond tread pattern provides a nonskid walking surface to increase safety.
• Available with yellow edges. Staggered yellow edges make it easy to
distinguish the moving belt from the stationary floor.
• Slidelox are an acetal copolymer.
• Available in high strength electrically conductive acetal, which has asurface resistivity of 1,000 Ohms according to IEC 62631.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Wheel chocks are available. Use Series 10000 Flat Top modules tomount the wheel chocks.
• Flat Top indent: 1.97 in (50.0 mm) from edge of belt.

3.0"(76 mm)

3.0"(76 mm)

3.0"(76 mm).79"(20.1 mm)1.49"
(37.8 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalHSEC acetal

322

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.50 in(12.7 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

Belt Strength
lbf/ft10,0008,000

N/m
146,000
117,000

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
6.48
6.48

kg/m²
31.64
31.64

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangea

Wearstrips

mm
100
150
200
250
300
350
400

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
1
2
2
3
3
3

Carryway
2
2
2
3
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
3
3

17.7
19.7
23.6
29.5
31.5
35.4
41.3
47.2
53.1

450
500
600
750
800
900
1,050
1,200
1,350

3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9

3
4
4
5
5
5
6
7
7

3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
6

8
9
11
12
15
17
18
18
18
18
19

6
7
8
9
11
13
14
14
14
14
14

Maximum 6 in (152 mm)
centerline spacing

Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

59.1
1,500
9
70.9
1,800
13
82.7
2,100
21
94.5
2,400
23
118.1
3,000
29
143.7
3,650
35
145.7
3,700
37
147.6
3,750
37
149.6
3,800
37
151.6
3,850
37
153.5
3,900
41
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing.c

SERIES 10000

in
3
5.9
7.9
9.8
11.9
13.8
15.7

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.97 in(50 mm) increments beginning with a minimum width of 3.94 in (100 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets. Sprockets require a maximum 5.91 in (150 mm) centerline spacing.

c Lock the center sprocket. If only two sprockets are used, lock the sprocket on the drive journal side. For locked sprocket locations, see Retainer Rings andCenter Sprocket Offset.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

323

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

A 0.5

5.0

A 4.0

127

0.4

16T
12T 14T
10T

0.3

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

SERIES 10000

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

Nylon Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10(4.70%) 9.9 251
12(3.29%) 11.8 300
14(2.43%) 13.7 348

16(1.84%)

15.7

399

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

9.7

246

1.5

38

3.5

90

11.7

297

1.5

38

3.5

90

13.6

345

1.5

38

3.5

90

15.6

396

1.5

38

3.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

100,
120,
140

90

Flat Top Wheel Chocks and Side Wheel Chocks
Available Height
Available Width
in
mm
in
mm
Available Materials
0.8
20
1.5
37
Nylon
1.6
40
4.9
125
Nylon
2
50
4.9
125
Nylon
• Fasteners and modified S10000 Flat Top modules are required.
• Minimum indent without wheel chocks is 2.0 in (50 mm).

324

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
Insert Nuts
Base Belt Style
Material
Insert Nut Sizes
Flat Top
Acetal6 mm–1 mm, 8 mm–1.25 mm• Insert Nuts easily allow the attachment of fixtures to the belt.
• Insert nuts are square. The square flange ensures that the insert nut stays in place when the bolt istightened or loosened.
• Ensure that attachments connected to more than one row do not prohibit belt rotation around the
sprockets.
• All nut placement dimensions are referenced from the edge of the belt when placing an order. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for nut location options available for your individual belt specifications.
• Sprockets can be located in-line with insert nuts if a 0.187 (4.75 mm) clearance is maintained. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for the appropriate bolt length to fit the application.
• The fastener torque specification: 40-45 in lbf (4.5-5.0 N-m).
• Minimal indent from the edge of the belt: 1.22 in (31 mm)• Minimal distance between nuts across the width of the belt 0.492 in (12.5 mm)• Spacing along the length of the belt: 3 in (76 mm) increments.

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 69: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S10000 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm

C

E

in

mm

in

mm

in

mm

3.33
3.73
4.03
4.33

85
95
102
110

9.90
11.80
13.70
15.70

251
300
348
399

5.71
6.66
7.61
8.61

145
169
193
219

Flat Top
9.9
11.8
13.7
15.7

251
300
348
399

10
12
14
16

4.02-4.25
5.01-5.20
5.98-6.15
7.01-7.15

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

102-108
127-132
152-156
178-182325

SERIES 10000

0.187 in(4.75 mm)STRAIGHT-RUNNING BELTS
S10000 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
mm
in
Non Skid Raised Rib

mm

in

mm

in

mm

9.9
11.8
13.7
15.7

251
300
348
399

10
12
14
16

4.02-4.25
5.01-5.20
5.98-6.15
7.01-7.15

102-108
3.33
127-132
3.73
152-156
4.03
178-182
4.33
Non Skid Perforated

85
95
102
110

10.15
12.05
13.95
15.95

258
306
354
405

5.96
6.91
7.86
8.86

151
176
200
225

9.9
11.8
13.7
15.7

251
300
348
399

10
12
14
16

4.02-4.25
5.01-5.20
5.98-6.15
7.01-7.15

102-108
127-132
152-156
178-182

85
95
102
110

9.99
11.89
13.79
15.79

254
302
350
401

5.80
6.75
7.70
8.70

147
171
196
221

3.33
3.73
4.03
4.33

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

SERIES 10000

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S10000 Dead Plate Gap

in
9.9
11.8
13.7
15.7

326

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
251
300
348
399

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
10
12
14
16

in
0.233
0.194
0.166
0.145

mm
5.9
4.9
4.2
3.7

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINERADIUS BELTS
ENGINEERING ANALYSIS FOR SPIRAL AND RADIUS BELTS
Intralox can provide an engineering analysis for spiral and radiusapplications, to determine the estimated belt pull, and ensure that the belt isstrong enough for the application. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
The following information is required for an engineering analysis:• Any environmental conditions which can affect the friction coefficient. For
dirty or abrasive conditions, use higher-than-normal friction coefficients.
• Belt width• Length of each straight section• Angle, direction, and inside radius of each turning section• Carryway and hold down wearstrip materials.
• Product load lbf/ft² (N/m²)• Product accumulation conditions• Belt speed• Elevation changes in each section• Operating temperatures• Sprocket and shaft specifications
Intralox can help select radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral belts
for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

327

328

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
ZERO TANGENT™ Radius Flat Topin

Row-to-Row Angle
Maximum Width
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Typemm
1.33 degrees
55.12
1400
7.87
200
7.87
200
0%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 2100

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt shape completely eliminates the need for straight sections before
and after turns.
• Pitch distance changes, depending upon the location of the modulefrom the center of the turn.
• Uses nylon rods.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Intralox provides complete design guidelines, which minimize
engineering design investment.
• Designed for radius applications with a minimum inside-turn radius of
23.62 in (600 mm).
0.20 in(5.0 mm)0.40 in(10.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf/ft907

N/m
13,200Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.89

kg/m²
9.25

329

RADIUS BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
Belt Width Rangeab
in
7.87
15.75
23.62
31.50
39.37

Wearstrips

Minimum Number of
Sprockets per Shaftc
2
4
6
8
10

mm
200
400
600
800
1,000

Carryway
2
3
4
5
6

Returnway
2
2
2
3
3

a If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b For other widths, use an even number of sprockets at maximum sprocket spacing: 3.94 in (100 mm). Maximum carryway spacing: 7.87 in (200 mm). Maximum

returnway spacing: 15.75 in (400 mm)

c Lock all sprockets.

SERIES 2100

Nylon (FDA) Molded Sprocket
Number of Nom. Pitch Nom. Outer Nom. Hub
Diameter Diameter
Width
Available Bore Sizes
Teeth(ChordalRound SquareRound Square
Action)in mm in mm in mm
in
in
mm mm
12 (3.41%)

2.3

58

2.4

61

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

2.6

66

2.7

70

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

3.0

76

3.1

78

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

3.3

84

3.4

87

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

3.7

94

3.8

96

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

4.0

102

4.1

104

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

4.4

112

4.5

113

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

4.7

119

4.8

122

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

5.1

130

5.1

131

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

5.4

137

5.5

139

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

5.8

147

5.8

148

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

6.2

157

6.2

157

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

6.5

165

6.5

165

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

12 (3.41%)

6.9

175

6.9

174

1.0

25

–

–

40

–

330

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Number of
Teeth(ChordalAction)12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
2.3
2.6
3.0
3.3
3.7

mm
58
66
76
84
94

in
2.4
2.7
3.1
3.4
3.8

mm
61
70
78
87
96

in
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

mm
25
25
25
25
25

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Squareina
inmma mm1-7/16–––1-7/16–––1-7/16–––1-7/16–––1-7/16–––

12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)
12 (3.41%)

4.0
4.4
4.7
5.1
5.4
5.8
6.2
6.5
6.9

102
112
119
130
137
147
157
165
175

4.1
4.5
4.8
5.1
5.5
5.8
6.2
6.5
6.9

104
113
122
131
139
148
157
165
174

1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

1-7/161-7/161-7/161-7/161-7/161-7/161-7/161-7/161-7/16

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 70: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

331

SERIES 2100

Nylon (FDA) Machined Sprocket
Nom. Pitch
Diameter

RADIUS BELTS
600
6.30

700

800

900

1000

C

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

E

5.51

1600
160
140

4.72

120

F
G
H

3.94

A 3.15
2.36
1.57
0.79
0.00
23.6

100
80

B

60
40
20

27.6

31.5

35.4

39.4

43.3

D

A Dimension, in
B Dimension, mm
C Turn radius (TR), in
D Turn radius (TR), mm

47.2

51.2

55.1

59.1

0.0
63.0

E C drive dimension:
0.089TR-0.01 in (-0.25 mm)
F E drive dimension: 0.045TR+.0.26 in (+6 mm)
G A drive dimension:
0.043TR-0.20 in (-5 mm)
H B drive dimension: 0.022TR+.0.82 in (+20 mm)

SERIES 2100

Figure 71: Conveyor Frame Dimensions

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
600
0.120

700

800

900

1000

C

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1.100

1600
3.0
2.5

0.080

2.0

E

A 0.060

1.5

0.040

1.0

0.020

0.5

0.000
23.6

27.6

31.5

35.4

39.4

43.3

D

47.2

A Gap, in
B Gap, mm
C Turn radius (TR), mm

51.2

55.1

59.1

B

0.0
63.0

D Turn radius (TR), in
E Gap = 0.0015TR

Figure 72: S2100 dead plate gap

332

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.50
5
1.00
0.50 × 0.75

mm
38.1
127
25.4
12.7 × 19.7

50%
37%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2200

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edge or tab edge available.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Lightweight, strong belt with a smooth surface grid.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Non-sliding drive system reduces belt and sprocket wear, and provides
low back tension.
• Designed for radius applications with a minimum turn radius of 2.2
times belt width (measured from inside edge).
• If a standard edge or tabbed edge wearstrip is used to hold the belt inplace, do not retain sprockets on the shaft. In this case, the wearstrip
maintains the lateral belt position.
• Tab edge belt width measurement does not include tabs. Tabs extend
approximately 0.5 in (13 mm) × 0.25 in (6 mm) on each side of belt,
inside wearstrip.
• Maximum belt width in turns: 36 in (914 mm)
Figure 73: Series 2200 tab edge dimensions

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
Polyethylenea
AcetalPolypropylene

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalNylon
Polypropyleneb

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
1,000
2,500
1,400

N/m
23,40014,60036,50020,400Temperature Range(continuous)
Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact
Intralox Customer Service.

°F
34 to 200
-50 to 150-50 to 200
34 to 220°C
1 to 93-46 to 66-46 to 93
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.86
1.96
2.82
1.78

kg/m²
9.10
9.56
13.80
8.69

a Polyethylene cannot exceed 150°F (66°C)

b Polypropylene rods can be installed in polypropylene belts when extra chemical resistance is required. Please note lower belt strength.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

333

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid High Deck
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.50
6
1.00
0.50 × 0.75

mm
38.1
152
25.4
12.7 × 19.7

50%
37%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2200

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Makes turns with an inside radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Provides more beam strength than the standard S2200 belt. Thisfeature can reduce retrofit costs in spirals.
• Uses standard S2200 wearstrips.
• If a standard edge or tabbed edge wearstrip is used to hold the belt inplace, do not retain sprockets on the shaft. In this case, the wearstrip
maintains the lateral belt position.
• 0.5 in (12.7 mm) higher than the standard S2200 belt.
• Standard indent: 1.25 in (31.8 mm).

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Straight Belt
Strengtha

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)Nylon

lbf/ft2,500

Polypropylene

Acetal1,600

Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
23,400
Customer Service.

N/m36,500Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

lb/ft²
3.66

kg/m²
17.87

34 to 200

1 to 93

2.41

11.77

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) is de-rated to 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m). All other belts maintaintheir published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability ofpolyurethane sprockets.

334

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.50
5
1.00
0.50 × 0.75

mm
38.1
127
25.4
12.7 × 19.7

50%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

SERIES 2200

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox Conveyor Belting
Installation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual for more information.
• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edge or tab edge available.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Available in grey polypropylene with grey rubber, white polypropylene with white rubber, andnatural polyethylene, with white rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Non-sliding drive system provides reduced belt and sprocket wear, and low back-tension.
• Designed for radius applications with a minimum turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width(measured from the inside edge).
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics affect the maximum
degree of incline. Consider these factors when designing conveyor systems using thesebelts.
• If a standard edge or tabbed edge wearstrip is used to hold the belt in place, do not retain
sprockets on the shaft. In this case, the wearstrip maintains the lateral belt position.
• Tab edge belt width measurement does not include tabs. (Tabs extend approximately 0.5 in(13 mm) × 0.25 in (6 mm) on each side of belt, inside the wearstrip.)• Molded indent: 1.75 in (44 .5 mm).
• Maximum belt width in turns: 36 in (914 mm).

Figure 74: Tab edge dimensions

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Figure 75: Flush edge dimensions

Belt Data
Default Rod
Material,
DiameterBase/Friction
0.24 inTop(6.1 mm)Grey/grey
AcetalWhite/white
AcetalNatural/white Acetal
Grey/grey
Polypropylene
White/white
Polypropylene

Belt Strength

Temp. Range(continuous)

Base Belt
Curved Belt
Material
lbf/ft N/mStrength°F°C
lb/ft² kg/m²
Polypropylene
1,600 23,400 For curved belt 34 to 150
1 to 66
2.20 10.74
strength
Polypropylene
1,600 23,400
34 to 150
1 to 66
2.20 10.74
calculations,
Polyethylene
1,000 14,600 contact
-50
to
120
-46
to
49
2.30 11.23
Intralox
Polypropylene
1,400 20,400
34 to 150
1 to 66
2.12 10.35
Customer
Service.
Polypropylene
1,400 20,400
34 to 150
1 to 66
2.12 10.35
a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
Friction Top
Hardness
64 Shore A
55 Shore A
55 Shore A
64 Shore A
55 Shore A

FDA(USA) EU MCa
b
b

c
c

b

c

335

RADIUS BELTS
Radius with Edge Bearing
Pitch
Minimum Width (Bearings one side)
Minimum Width (Bearings both sides)
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.50
7
9
1.00
0.50 x 0.75

mm
38.1
178
229
25.4
12.7 x 19.7

50%
37%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2200

• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox Conveyor Belting
Installation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual for more information.
• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Both flush edge and tab edge are available for belts with bearings on only one side. Flushedge and tab edge must be placed on the outside edge of the turn.
• Rod retention allows for easier insertion and removal of rods.
• Edge bearings are only available for turning belts.
• Bearings are available on one side for belts that turn in only one direction or on both sides
for belts that turn in both directions.
• Bearings must be configured in every other row of the belt.
• Bearings are chrome steel, recommended for dry applications only.
• Bearings are retained with a stainless pin.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Bearings must be placed on the inside edge of the turn.
• Designed for radius applications with a minimum turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width(measured from the inside edge of the wearstrip channel).
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to determine if edge bearings are suitable for theintended application.
• Maximum belt speed: 350 fpm (107 mpm).
• The plastic portion of the bearing edge is indented 0.125 in (3.2 mm). Belt width ismeasured to the end of the bearing.
• Belts with bearings on one side work with standard edge, hold down wearstrips with a 0.50
in (12.7 mm) deep channel.
• Belts with bearings on both sides require the wearstrip on the outside of the turns to have atleast a 0.75 in (19.1 mm) deep channel.
• Maximum belt width: 36 in (914 mm).

1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)0.375" NOM.
(9.5 mm)0.75" NOM.
(19.1 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal336

Straight Belt
StrengthDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)lbf/ft

Nylon

2,000

N/m

Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
29,200 calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass°F°C

lb/ft²

kg/m²-50 to 200-46 to 93

2.82

13.80

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid High Deck with Edge Bearing
Pitch
Minimum Width (bearings one side)
Minimum Width (bearings both sides)
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.50
7.0
9.0
1.0
0.50 x 0.75

mm
38.1
177.8
228.6
25.4
12.7 x 19.7

50%
37%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

SERIES 2200

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox Conveyor Belting
Installation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual for more information.
• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Occluded edge rod retention provides easier rod insertion and removal.
• Bearings are chrome steel, and are retained in the belt using a stainless pin.
• Bearings are placed in every other row of the belt, on the inside edge of the turn.
• Edge bearings are only available for turning belts. Bearings are available on one side forbelts that turn in only one direction or on both sides for belts that turn in both directions.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Edge bearings are only recommended for dry applications.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to determine if edge bearings are suitable for theintended application.
• Designed for radius applications with a minimum turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width,
measured from the inside edge of the wearstrip channel.
• 0.5 in (12.7 mm) higher than the standard S2200 belt.
• Standard indent: 1.75 in (44.5 mm).
• The plastic portion of the bearing edge is indented 0.125 in (3.2 mm). Belt width ismeasured to the end of the bearing.
• Belts with bearings on one side work with standard edge, hold down wearstrips with a 0.50
in (12.7 mm) deep channel.
• Belts with bearings on both sides require the wearstrip on the outside of the turns to have atleast a 0.75 in (19.1 mm) deep channel.
• Maximum belt width: 36 in (914 mm).
• Maximum belt speed: 350 fpm (107 meters per minute).

A
1.25"(31.8 mm)0.75"
(19.1 mm)1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.5" NOM.
(38.1 mm)0.375"(9.5 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalStraight Belt
StrengthDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)lbf/ft

Nylon

2,000

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

N/mCurved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
29,200 calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass°F°C

lb/ft²

kg/m²-50 to 200-46 to 93

3.66

17.87

337

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid (2.6) with Insert Rollers
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.50
7
1.00
0.50 × 0.75

mm
38.1
178
25.4
12.7 × 19.7

50%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2200

• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox Conveyor Belting
Installation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual for more information.
• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edge or tabbed edge available.
• Uses acetal rollers.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• For applications where low back-pressure accumulation is required. Product accumulationload is 5% to 10% of product weight.
• For low back-pressure applications, place wearstrips between rollers. For driven
applications, place wearstrips directly under rollers.
• If a standard edge or tabbed edge wearstrip is used to hold the belt in place, do not retain
sprockets on the shaft. In this case, the wearstrip maintains the lateral belt position.
• Tab edge belt width does not include tabs. (Tabs extend approximately 0.5 in (13 mm) ×0.25 in (6 mm) on each side of belt.)• Belts 16 in (406 mm) wide and less have a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width. Wider
belts have a turn radius of 2.6 times the belt width.
• For belts wider than 24 in (610 mm), contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Do not place sprockets inline with rollers.
• Minimum roller indent: 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
• Standard roller spacing:- across width: staggered 4 in (102 mm) or inline 2 in (51 mm), 3 in (76 mm), or 4 in (102mm).
- along length: staggered 1.5 in (38.1 mm) or inline 3 in (76.2 mm).
- Custom roller placement is available.

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data

Belt Material

Default Rod
Material,
Diameter
0.24 in(6.1 mm)Polypropylene

AcetalAcetalNylon

Polypropylene

Polypropylenea

Straight Belt Strength
Roller Width Spacing
Temp. Range
Roller Indents Curved Belt (continuous)
Belt Mass
lbf/ft N/m lbf/ft N/m lbf/ft N/minmm
Strength°F°C lb/ft² kg/m²
3.5 64, 89 For curved 34 to
400 5,840 710 10,400 900 13,100 2.5,
to 4.5 to 114 belt strength 200 1 to 93 1.86 9.08
3.5 64, 89 calculations, -50 to -46 to 2.82 13.8
630 9,190 1,110 16,200 1,410 20,600 2.5,
contact
to 4.5 to 114
200
93
Intralox
2.5,
3.5
64,
89
34
to
1
to
350 5,110 620 9,050 790 11,500 to 4.5 to 114 Customer
220
104 1.78 8.69
Service.
2 in 51 mm 3 in

7.6
mm

4 in

102
mm

a Polypropylene rods can be installed in polypropylene belts when extra chemical resistance is required. Please note lower belt strength.

338

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
in
5
6
7
8
10
12
14

mm
127
152
178
203
254
305
356

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
2
2
2
2
3
3
5

15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36
42

381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914
1,067

5
5
5
5
7
9
9
9
11

48
1,219
13
54
1,372
15
60
1,524
15
72
1,829
19
84
2,134
21
96
2,438
25
120
3,048
31
144
3,658
37
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at maximum 4 in
(102 mm) centerline spacing.

Wearstripsc
Carryway
2
2
2
2
3
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6

3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5

7
7
8

9
11
12
15
17
Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

SERIES 2200

Belt Width Rangea

5
6
6
7
8
9
11
13
Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 5 in (127 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service. Intralox does notrecommend turning belts wider than 36 in (914 mm). For turning applications that require wider belts, contact Intralox Customer Service.
b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets (Place sprockets every inch for heavily loaded applications). For lockdown
location, see Retainer Rings and Center Sprocket Offset.
c The number of wearstrips given does not include the hold down wearstrip.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

339

RADIUS BELTS
Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 0.5

11T

0.4

8T

0.3

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

A 4.0

16T

7

8

13T
9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

SERIES 2200

Molded Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
8 (7.61%) 3.999
13(2.91%) 6.3 160
16
7.7 196(1.92%)

340

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
4.0

mm
102

in
1.0

mm
25

6.4

163

1.0

25

2.5

60

7.8

198

1.0

25

1.5,
2.5

40, 60Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
EZ Clean™ Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
11(4.05%) 5.3 135

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.4

137

1.0

25

1.5

40

13
(2.91%)

6.4

163

1.0

25

1.5

40

6.3

160

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

the published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability ofpolyurethane sprockets.

Acetal Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
13
6.3 160(2.91%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.4

in
1.5

mm
163

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
1.5

Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprocketa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

13
(2.91%)

6.4

163

1.5

38

1-7/16

6.3

160

a Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred method of locking down sprockets and for proper sprocket timing.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

341

SERIES 2200

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) is de-rated to 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m). All other belts maintain

RADIUS BELTS
Streamline Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
4
102

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal• Streamline flights are smooth on both sides.
• Each flight extends from the center of the module, molded as one part.
No fasteners are required.
• Custom flight heights are available. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Flights are available in linear increments of 1.5 in (38 mm).
• Standard indent: 0.625 in (15.9 mm).

SERIES 2200

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 76: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S2200 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
3.9
5.3
6.3
7.7

342

99
135
160
196

Numberof Teeth
8
11
13
16

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm
in
mm
Radius Flush Grid, Radius with Edge Bearing

in

mm

in

mm

1.44
2.18
2.67
3.40

3.92
5.32
6.27
7.69

100
135
159
195

2.40
3.10
3.57
4.28

61
79
91
109

37
55
68
86

1.93
2.27
2.52
2.78

49
58
64
71

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S2200 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

3.9
5.3
6.3
7.7

99
135
160
196

8
11
13
16

3.9
5.3
6.3
7.7

99
135
160
196

8
11
13
16

3.9
5.3
6.3
7.7

99
135
160
196

8
11
13
16

A

B

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
mmin
Radius Friction Top
1.44-1.58
2.18-2.29
2.67-2.76
3.40-3.47

C

E

mm

in

mm

in

mm

36-40
1.93
49
55-58
2.27
58
68-70
2.52
64
86-88
2.78
71
Radius Flush Grid with Insert Rollers

4.17
5.57
6.52
7.94

106
142
166
202

2.65
3.35
3.82
4.53

67
85
97
115

102
138
162
198

2.48
3.19
3.66
4.37

63
81
93
111

112
148
172
208

2.90
3.60
4.07
4.78

74
91
103
121

1.44-1.58
36-40
1.93
49
4.00
2.18-2.29
55-58
2.27
58
5.42
2.67-2.76
68-70
2.52
64
6.36
3.40-3.47
86-88
2.78
71
7.78
Radius Flush Grid High Deck, Flush Grid High Deck with Edge Bearing
1.44-1.58
2.18-2.29
2.67-2.76
3.40-3.47

36-40
55-58
68-70
86-88

1.93
2.27
2.52
2.78

49
58
64
71

4.42
5.82
6.77
8.19

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2200 Dead Plate Gap

in
3.9
5.3
6.3
7.7

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
99
135
160
196

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
8
11
13
16

in
0.150
0.108
0.091
0.074

mm
3.8
2.8
2.3
1.9

HOLD DOWN WEARSTRIPS
S2200 is available with and without an edge tab. A hold down wearstrip style is available for each edge style.
The tab edge design allows the belt to be held down without the wearstrip interfering with the carryway
surface.
• For information about Intralox hold down wearstrips, see Custom Wearstrips.
• For information about conveyor design for hold down wearstrips, see Hold Down Wearstrips in the Design
Guidelines chapter.

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONSNOTE: For assistance with radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral selections, contact Intralox
Customer Service. Run the Engineering Program to ensure that the belt is strong enough for the radiusapplication in question. See Engineering Program Analysis for Spiral and Radius for more information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

343

SERIES 2200

Sprocket Description

RADIUS BELTS
DESIGN GUIDE SUMMARY
For typical layout configurations, see Radius Conveyors in the Design Guidelines chapter.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for inside turn radius guidelines.
• The minimum straight run required between turns of opposing direction is 2.0 times the belt width. Shorter
straight sections lead to high wear on the edge guide rail and high pull stresses in the belt.
• There is no minimum straight run required between turns that are in the same direction.
• The minimum final straight run (leading to drive shaft) must be a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m) is
not feasible, shorter lengths (down to 1.5 × belt width) require a gravity take-up to avoid sprocket wear
and tracking problems. See Take-Ups.
• The minimum length of the first straight run (immediately after the idle shaft) is 1.5 times the belt width.
When shorter lengths are required (down to 1.0 × the width), an idle roller can be used in place ofsprockets.

SERIES 2200
344

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid Nose-Roller Tight Turning
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Maximum Opening Size (Sphere)
Open Area (fully extended)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.0
12.0
30.0
3.0
0.245

mm
25.4
305
762
76.2
6.2

28%
ClosedOccluded edge; unheaded• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smooth upper surface provides free product movement.
• Smaller opening size enhances belt safety.
• Underside design allows the belt to run smoothly around a 0.75 in(19.1 mm) nosebar.
• Available with tight turning modules built on one side.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprockets have large lug teeth that enhance sprocket life.
• Designed for sideflexing applications with a minimum turn radius of
1.7 times belt width (measured from inside edge).
• Can make 180-degree turns.
• Belts can turn either clockwise or counterclockwise. Turning direction
must be specified at order. Not available for S-turn applications.
• Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Minimizes floor space requirements.
• Minimal back tension required for sprocket engagement.
• Turn radius for belts 12.0 in to 27.0 in (305 mm to 685.8 mm): 1.7
times belt width.
• Turn radius for belts 30.0 in (762 mm): 1.75 times belt width.
• Sprocket placement: every 3.00 in (76.2 mm) from outer edge, except
drive pocket nearest inner edge. Drive pocket nearest inner edge is
3.75 in (95.3 mm) from inner edge.

SERIES 2300

Product Notes

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

0.250 in(6.4 mm)0.675 in(17.1 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data
Temp. Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

Belt Material

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft°F°C

lb/ft² kg/m²

AcetalNylon

900-50 to 200-46 to 93

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

N/mCurved Belt Strength
curved belt strength calculations,
13,100 For
contact Intralox Customer Service.

2.40

11.72

345

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid Nose-Roller Tight Turning with Edge Bearing
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Maximum Opening Size (sphere)
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
12.0
30.0
3.0
0.245

mm
25.4
305
762
76.2
6.2

28%
ClosedOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2300

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Smaller opening size enhances belt safety.
• Edge bearings are stainless steel and are retained by stainless steelpins.
• Edge bearings are available on one side of the belt. Bearings must beplaced on the inside edge of the turn, and must be configured in every
other row of the belt.
• Underside design allows the belt to run smoothly around a 0.75-in(19.1-mm) nosebar.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for sideflexing applications with a minimum turn radius of
1.7 times belt width (measured from inside edge).
• Belts can turn either clockwise or counterclockwise. Turn direction
0.250 in1.00 in1.00 in1.00 in(25.4 mm)(25.4 mm)(25.4 mm)must be specified when ordering. Not available for S-turn applications. (6.4 mm)• Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to determine if edge bearings
are suitable for each application.
A• Turn radius for belts 12.0 in–27.0 in (305 mm–685.8 mm): 1.7 times
belt width.
A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications• Turn radius for belts 30.0 in (762 mm): 1.75 times belt width.

0.675 in(17.1 mm)

Belt Data
Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

Belt Material

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft°F°C

lb/ft² kg/m²

AcetalNylon

900

0 to 200-17.8 to 93

346

N/m

Curved Belt StrengthFor
curvedbelt strength calculations,
13,100 contact Intralox
Customer Service.

2.40

11.72

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid Nose-Roller Dual Turning
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (Sphere)
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.0
12
36
3
0.245

mm
25.4
305
914
76.2
6.2

28%
ClosedOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2300

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to determine the strength
requirement of most radius applications and ensure the belt is strong
enough for the application.
• Minimizes floor space requirements.
• Can be used in S-turn applications.
• Unheaded rods simplify maintenance.
• Underside design allows the belt to run smoothly around a 0.75-in(19.1 mm) nosebar.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for sideflexing applications with a minimum turn radius of
2.2 times belt width (measured from inside edge) for widths up to 27
in (685 mm). For widths 30 in (762 mm) to 36 in (914 mm), use 2.3
times belt width for minimum turn radius.
• Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Sprockets have large lug teeth that enhance sprocket life.
• Sprocket placement: every 3.00 in (76.2 mm) from outer edge, except
drive pocket nearest flush edge. Drive pocket nearest flush edge is
3.75 in (95.3 mm) from belt edge.
1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

0.250 in(6.4 mm)0.675 in(17.1 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalStraight Belt
StrengthDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)lbf/ft

N/m

Nylon

900

13,1002024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Temperature Range(continuous)
Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact
Intralox Customer Service.

Belt Mass°F°C

lb/ft²

kg/m²-50 to 200-46 to 93

2.40

11.72

347

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid Nose-Roller Dual Turning with Edge Bearing
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Maximum Opening Size (sphere)
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
12
36
3.0
0.245

mm
25.4
305
914
76.2
6.2

28%
ClosedOccluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2300

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Edge bearings are stainless steel and are retained by stainless steelpins.
• Edge bearings are on both sides of the belt and must be configured inevery other belt row.
• Underside design allows the belt to run smoothly around a 0.75-in(19.1-mm) nosebar.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for dual-turning applications.
• Designed for sideflexing applications with a minimum turn radius of
2.2 times the belt width (measured from the inside edge) for widths up
to 27 in (685 mm). For widths 30 in (762 mm) to 36 in (914 mm), use
2.3 times the belt width for the minimum turn radius.
• Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Before finalizing a conveyor design, use CalcLab to calculate theestimated belt pull and ensure the belt is strong enough for theapplication. To access CalcLab, go to calclab.intralox.com.
• Sprocket placement: every 3.00 in (76.2 mm) from the outer edge,
except the drive pocket nearest the flush edge. The drive pocket
nearest the flush edge is 3.75 in (95.3 mm) from the belt edge.

A
1.00 in(25.4 mm)1.00 in(25.4 mm)0.675 in(17.1 mm)

0.250 in(6.4 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal348

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
N/m

Nylon

900

13,100Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact
Intralox Customer Service.

Temperature Range(continuous)°F°C-50 to 200-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft² kg/m²
2.40

11.72

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid Mold to Width Nose-Roller Dual Turning
in
1.00
6.0
0.245

Pitch
Minimum Width
Opening Size (Sphere)
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
152.4
6.2

28%
ClosedSnap-lock; headed• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edge design features an extension to reduce the opening size.
• Sprockets have large lug teeth that enhance sprocket life.
• Flush edge or tab edge available.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for sideflexing applications with a standard turn ratio of 2.2
times the belt width (measured from inside edge).
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to determine the strength
requirement of most radius applications and ensure the belt is strong
enough for the application.
• Intralox recommends using Dynamic Nose-Rollers in tight transfer
applications.
• Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Minimum nose-roller diameter: 0.75 in (19.1 mm).
• Available widths: 6 in (152.4 mm) and 9 in (228.6 mm).
• Required number of sprockets:- 6 in (152.4 mm) belts: two sprockets. Avoid split sprockets. These
sprockets do not fit on a 6 in (152.4 mm) wide belt.
- 9 in (228.6 mm) belts: two sprockets. Split sprockets can be used.
• Tab edge belt measurement does not include tabs. Tabs extend
approximately 0.3 in (8 mm) x 0.24 in (6 mm) on each side of belt,
inside the wearstrip.

SERIES 2300

Product Notes

0.300 in(7.6 mm)0.225 in(5.7 mm)Figure 77: Tab edge dimensions
1.000 in(25.4 mm)

1.000 in(25.4 mm)

0.250 in(6.4 mm)0.675 in(17.1 mm)Figure 78: Flush edge dimensions

Belt Data
Belt Width

in
6
9

mm
152.4
228.6

Belt
Material
AcetalAcetalDefault Rod
Material,
Diameter
0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon
Nylon

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Straight Belt
Strength

lbf
700
700

N
3,110
3,110

Temperature Range(continuous)
Curved Belt
Strength
For curved belt
strength calculations,contact Intralox
Customer Service.

°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass

lb/ft
1.20
1.80

kg/m
1.79
2.68

349

RADIUS BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
NOTE: For sprocket carryway and returnway support wearstrip spacing, contact Intralox Customer Service or see the Series 2300 Design
Guidelines.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6

20T

A 0.5
0.3

12T
0.2

1

2

4

3

SERIES 2300

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

203

7.0

178

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 4.0

18T

0.4

8.0

16T
15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

Nylon Split Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16(1.92%) 5.1 130
18(1.52%) 5.8 147
20
6.4 163(1.23%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

5.2

132

1.9

48

1.25

1.5

30, 40

40

5.9

150

1.9

48

1.5

40

40

6.5

165

1.9

48

1.25,
1-7/16
1.25,
1-7/16

1.5

40

40

a Do not use with Mold to Width Flush Grid Nose-Roller Dual Turning belt.

350

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Nylon Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1299(3.41%) 3.9

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

3.9

99

1.0

25

1.25

1.5

16
(1.92%)

5.1

130

5.2

132

1.0

25

1.25

1.5

40

40

18
(1.52%)

5.8

147

5.9

150

1.0

25

1.25

1.5

40

40

20
(1.23%)

6.4

163

6.5

165

1.0

25

1.25

1.5

40

40

40

Dynamic Nose-Rollers

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SERIES 2300

Standard Nose-Roller Widths
U.S. Sizes (in)Metric Sizes (mm)
4.5
170.0
6.0
255.0
9.0
340.0
12.0
425.0
15.0
18.0
24.0
• U.S. sizes are available in 4.5 in, 6 in, and then in 3 in increments.
Metric sizes are available in 85 mm (3.35 in) increments.
• For other belt widths, combine multiple nose-rollers in the available
increments. For assistance, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Made of FDA-compliant, blue, oil-filled nylon.
• Roller diameter: 0.75 in (19 mm)

351

RADIUS BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 2300

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 79: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S2300 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
3.9
99
5.1
130
5.8
147
6.4
163

Numberof Teeth
12
16
18
20

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
1.44-1.51
2.09-2.14
2.41-2.45
2.73-2.77

mm
37-38
53-54
61-62
69-70

in
1.92
2.27
2.46
2.57

mm
49
58
62
65

in
3.69
4.95
5.58
6.22

mm
94
126
142
158

in
2.24
2.88
3.19
3.51

mm
57
73
81
89

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2300 Dead Plate Gap

in
3.9
5.1
6.4

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
99
130
163

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
12
16
20

in
0.065
0.050
0.039

mm
1.7
1.3
1.0

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONSNOTE: For assistance with radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral selections, contact Intralox
Customer Service. Run the Engineering Program to ensure that the belt is strong enough for the radiusapplication in question. See Engineering Program Analysis for Spiral and Radius for more information.

352

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
DESIGN GUIDE SUMMARY
For typical layout configurations, see Radius Conveyors in the Design Guidelines chapter.
• The minimum turn radius for the standard edge S2300 belts is 2.2 times the belt width, measured from theinside edge. For widths 30 in to 36 in (762 mm to 914 mm), use 2.3 times the belt width for minimum turn
radius.
• The minimum straight run required between turns of opposing direction is 2.0 times the belt width. Shorter
straight sections lead to high wear on the edge guide rail and high pull stresses in the belt.
• There is no minimum straight run required between turns that are in the same direction.
• The minimum final straight run (leading to the drive shaft) must be a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m)
is not feasible, shorter lengths (down to 1.5 × belt width) require a gravity take-up to avoid sprocket wear
and tracking problems. See Take-Ups.

SERIES 2300

• The minimum length of the first straight run (immediately after the idle shaft) is 1.5 times the belt width.
When shorter lengths are required (down to 1.0 × the width), an idle roller or an Intralox Dynamic NoseRoller can be used in place of sprockets.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

353

RADIUS BELTS

SERIES 2300
354

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Tight Turning Radius
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
7
0.50
0.35 × 0.30

mm
25.4
178
12.7
8.9 × 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

SERIES 2400

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Available with tight turning modules built into one side or both sides of the belt.
• Available with 1.7 modules on the inside and 2.2 modules on the outside for
improved strength.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Sprocket drive system is designed to minimize wear and require low return-side
tension.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 1.7 times the belt width(measured from inside edge). Maximizes plant floor space.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to identify the strength requirements ofmost radius applications, and ensure that the belt is strong enough for theapplication.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt width greater than 18 in(457 mm) in spiral and flat turning applications.
• Looking in the direction of flat-turning travel, the minimum sprocket indent fromthe right side belt edge with tight turning modules is 2.625 in (66.7 mm).
• Minimum sprocket indent from the left side belt edge with tight turning
modules: 2.875 in (73 mm).
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.375 in (34.9 mm).

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data
Default Rod Material,
Diameter
Belt Material
0.18 in (4.6 mm)
Polypropylene Acetal
AcetalNylon
Polypropylene Polypropylenea

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
600
600
600

N/m
8,760
8,760
8,760

Temp. Range (continuous)
Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

°F
34 to 200
-50 to 200
34 to 220°C
1 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.20
1.73
1.12

kg/m²
5.86
8.44
5.47

a Polypropylene rods can be installed in polypropylene belts when extra chemical resistance is required. Please note lower belt strength.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

355

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid (2.2)
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4
0.50
0.35 × 0.30

mm
25.4
102
12.7
8.9 × 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprocket drive system is designed to minimize wear and require low
return side tension.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt
width (measured from inside edge).
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to identify strength
requirements for radius applications, and ensure that the belt is strong
enough for the application.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
0.5"• Available with hold down guides, see Hold Down Guides (2.2 Only) for(12.7 mm)details.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt wider than 36 in(914 mm) in flat-turning or spiral applications.
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.5 in (38.1 mm) with hold down guides
A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
and 1.375 in (34.9 mm) without hold down guides.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalDetectable acetal
Polypropylene
X-ray detectable acetalb
HR nylon
HHR nylon
PK

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
AcetalNylon
HR nylon
Polypropylenea
X-ray detectable acetal
HR nylon
HHR nylon
PK

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,700
1,300
1,000
1,700
1,700
1,700
1,700

Curved Belt
StrengthN/m17,50024,80019,000 For curved belt
strength
14,600calculations,24,800 contact Intralox
24,800 Customer Service.
24,80024,800Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
-50 to 200-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 200-50 to 240-50 to 310-40 to 176°C
1 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 93-46 to 116-46 to 154-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.10
1.59
1.70
1.04
1.85
1.43
1.43
1.40

kg/m²
5.40
7.76
8.30
5.11
9.03
6.98
6.98
6.84

a Polypropylene rods can be installed in polypropylene belts when extra chemical resistance is required. Please note lower belt strength.

b Designed specifically for detection by X-ray machines.

356

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Mold to Width Radius Flush Grid 2.2
Pitch
Molded Width
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
101.6
8.9 x 7.6

42%Open
Snap-lock; headed

0.25 in NOM.
(6.4 mm)

1.0 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)

1.0 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)

1.0 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)

0.5 in NOM.
(12.7 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod
Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
Nylon

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf
560

N
2,490

Polypropylene

Acetal400

1,780

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

Temp. Range (continuous)

Belt Mass°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

lb/ft
0.56

kg/m
0.83

34 to 200

1 to 93

0.39

0.57

357

SERIES 2400

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires low return-side
tension.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to identify the strength
requirements of most radius applications, and ensure that the belt isstrong enough for the application.
• Available with hold down guides, see Hold Down Guides (2.2 Only) for
details.
• Hold down guides cannot be used with 2 in and 2.9 in pitch diametersprockets or 3.9 in pitch diameter square bore sprockets.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.5 in (38.1 mm) with hold down guides
and 1.375 in (34.9 mm) without hold down guides.

RADIUS BELTS
Radius with Edge Bearing
Pitch
Minimum Width (Bearings One Side)
Minimum Width (Bearings Both Sides)
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
7.5
9.0
36
0.5
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
191
229
914
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Occluded edge rod retention allows for easier insertion and removal ofrods.
• Edge bearings are only available for turning belts.
• Edge bearings are stainless steel and are retained by a plastic pin.
• Edge bearings are available on one side (for belts that turn in only one
direction) or on both sides (for belts that turn in both directions).
Bearings must be placed on the inside edge of the turn, and must be
configured in every other row of the belt.
• Both flush edge and hold down guide edge are available for belts thathave bearings on only one side and must be placed on the outsideedge of the turn.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
0.25"
1.00"
1.00"
1.00"
1.00"
combination for your application.
(6.4 mm)(25.4 mm)(25.4 mm)(25.4 mm)(25.4 mm)
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
0.5"
Line.
(12.7 mm)
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt
width.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to determine if the Edge
A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Bearing is suitable for your application.

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal358

Straight Belt
StrengthDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)lbf/ftNylon

1,700 24,800

N/m

Temperature Range(continuous)
Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

Belt Mass°F°C

lb/ft²kg/m²

0 to 200-18 to 93

1.59

7.76

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid with Heavy-Duty Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.0
4.0
0.50
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
101.6
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%OpenOccluded edge; unheaded

SERIES 2400

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Heavily reinforced and carefully sculpted edge is designed to resist belt
snagging and edge damage while maintaining cleanability.
• Flush edge features an intuitive molded-in arrow to indicate preferred
run direction, and extensions to reduce finger entrapment.
• Load-Sharing™ belt edge improves how the load is shared andminimizes belt fatigue failure.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt
width (measured from the inside edge).
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires low return-side
tension.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt wider than 36 in(914 mm) in flat-turning or spiral applications.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Available with hold down guides.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.375 in (34.9 mm).

A
1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)0.50 in(12.7mm)0.25 in(6.4 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 inBase Belt Material(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
PK
AcetalPK
PK
PK

Temp. Range(continuous)a

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,700
1,700

N/m
17,50024,80024,800Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

°F
34 to 176
-40 to 176-40 to 176°C
1 to 80-40 to 80-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.10
1.59
1.4

kg/m²
5.37
7.76246.8348a Sideflexing applications must not exceed 180°F (82°C).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

359

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid with Load-Sharing™ Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
10.5
36
0.5
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
266.7
914
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Flush edge design features an extension to reduce the opening size.
• Load-Sharing belt edge improves how the load is shared and minimizes fatigue
failure in various areas of the belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires very low return-side
tension.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics affect the
maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when designing conveyor
systems using these belts.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to predict strength requirements formost radius and low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications, and ensure thebelt is strong enough for the application.
• Available with hold down guides.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.5 in (38 mm) with hold down guides and 1.375 in(34.9 mm) without hold down guides.

0.25 in(6.4 mm)A
1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)0.50 in(12.7 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data
Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 inBase Belt Material(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
AcetalAcetalNylon
Polypropylene
Polypropylene
X-ray detectable X-ray detectable acetal
acetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,700
1,000
1,700

Curved Belt Strength
N/m
17,50024,800For curved belt strength
14,600 calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.
24,800Temp. Range(continuous)a

Belt Mass°F
34 to 200
-50 to 200
34 to 200°C
1 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104lb/ft²
1.10
1.59
1.04

kg/m²
5.37
7.76
5.10

-50 to 200-46 to 93

1.85

9.03

a Sideflexing applications must not exceed 180° F (82° C).

360

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid MTW with Load-Sharing™ Edge
in
1.00
4.0
0.35 x 0.30

Pitch
Minimum Width
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
101.6
8.9 x 7.6

42%Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edge design features an extension to reduce the opening size.
• Load-Sharing™ belt edge improves how the load is shared and minimizes belt fatigue
failure.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Designed for sideflexing applications with a standard turn ratio of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Minimum recommended turn ratio is 1.95. Consult Intralox Customer Service when
considering minimum turn ratio.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics affect the maximum
degree of incline. Consider these factors when designing conveyor systems using thesebelts.
• Available with hold down guides.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Available widths: 4 in (101.6 mm), 6 in (152.4 mm), 8 in (203.2 mm), and 10 in (254 mm).
• For 4 in (102 mm) wide belts with hold down guides, do not use glass-filled nylon split
sprockets.
• Maximum number of sprockets for 4 in (101.6 mm) belts:- without hold down guides: two- with hold down guides: one• Maximum number of sprockets for 6 in (152.4 mm) belts: Maximum number of sprockets
for 6 in (152.4 mm) belts•- without hold down guides: four.
- with hold down guides: three.
• Maximum number of sprockets for 8 in (203.2 mm) belts with and without hold down
guides: five.
• Maximum number of sprockets for 10 in (254 mm) belts with and without hold down
guides: seven.
• Minimum nosebar diameter for belts:- without hold down guides: 1.375 in (34.9 mm)- with hold down guides: 1.50 in (38.1 mm).

1.00 in NOM(25.4 mm)A

1.00 in NOM(25.4 mm)0.25 in NOM(6.4 mm)0.50 in NOM(13 mm)A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Belt Data

Base Belt
Material

Default Rod
Material,
DiameterHold
0.18 inDown(4.6 mm) Guides

AcetalNylon

Polypropylene

Nylon

Without
With
Without
With

Straight Belt Strength lbf (N)
4 in(101.6mm)484(2,150)242(1,080)400(1,780)242(1,080)2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

6 in(152.4mm)
850(3,780)726(3,230)600(2,670)600(2,670)Temp. Range(continuous)

Belt Mass lb/ft (kg/m)

8 in
10 in
(203.2 (254 Curved Belt
4 in
6 in
8 in
10 in
mm) mm)Strength°F°C (101.6) (152.4) (203.2) (254)
1,133 1,417-50 to -46 to 0.57
0.89
1.19
1.50
(5,040) (6,300) For curved
200
93(0.85) (1.32) (1.77) (2.23)
1,133 1,417 belt strength -50 to -46 to 0.64
0.96
1.26
1.56
(5,040) (6,300) calculations, 200
93(0.95) (1.42) (1.88) (2.32)
contact
800
1,000
34 to 1 to
0.39
0.60
0.82
1.01
Intralox(3,560) (4,450) Customer
220 104 (0.58) (0.89) (1.22) (1.50)
800
1,000
34 to 1 to
0.43
0.65
0.86
1.06
Service.
(3,560) (4,450)
220 104 (0.64) (0.978) (1.28) (1.58)

361

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid High Deck
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4
0.50
0.35 × 0.30

mm
25.4
102
12.7
8.9 × 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush Grid High Deck is 0.4 in (10 mm) higher than the standard S2400
belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Makes turns with an inside radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Works with standard S2400 wearstrips.
• Standard indent: 0.875 in (22.2 mm).

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
HR nylon
Acetal
X-ray detectable acetal
PK

362

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in (4.6 mm)
AcetalNylon
Acetal
X-ray detectable acetal
PK

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,700
1,700
1,700
1,700

Curved Belt
StrengthN/m17,500For curved belt
24,800strength24,800calculations,24,800 contact Intralox
Customer Service.
24,800Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
-50 to 240-50 to 200-50 to 200-40 to 176°C
1 to 93-46 to 116-46 to 93-46 to 93-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.90
2.30
2.83
3.31
2.49

kg/m²
9.28
11.23
13.82
16.16
12.16

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid High Deck with Edge Bearing
Pitch
Minimum Width (Bearings One Side)
Minimum Width (Bearings Both Sides)
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
7.5
9.0
36
0.5
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
191
229
914
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Occluded edge rod retention allows for easier insertion and removal of rods.
• Edge bearings are only available for turning belts.
• Edge bearings are available on one side (for belts that turn in only one direction)or on both sides (for belts that turn in both directions). Bearings must be placedon the inside edge of the turn, and must be configured in every other row of thebelt.
• Edge bearings are stainless steel and are retained by plastic pins.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to determine if the Edge Bearing issuitable for your application.
• Belt height: 0.4 in (10 mm) higher than standard S2400 belt.
• Standard indent: 1.88 in (47.75 mm).

1.00" NOM
(25.4 mm)1.00" NOM
(25.4 mm)1.00" NOM
(25.4 mm)1.00" NOM
(25.4 mm)0.90" NOM
(22.8 mm)

0.50"
(12.7 mm)

0.25"
(6.4 mm)A

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Straight Belt
StrengthDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 inBase Belt Material(4.6 mm)lbf/ftAcetal

1,700

Nylon

Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
24,800 calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.
N/m

Temp. Range(continuous)a

Belt Mass°F°C

lb/ft²kg/m²

0 to 200-18 to 93

2.83

13.82

a Sideflexing applications must not exceed 180°F (82°C).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

363

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid High Deck with Heavy-Duty Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4
0.5
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
101.6
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Heavily reinforced and carefully sculpted edge is designed to resist belt
snagging and edge damage while maintaining cleanability.
• Flush edge features an intuitive molded-in arrow to indicate preferred run
direction, and extensions to reduce finger entrapment.
• Load-Sharing™ belt edge improves how the load is shared and minimizes belt
fatigue failure.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires low return-side tension.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Makes turns with an inside radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt wider than 36 in (914mm) in flat-turning or spiral applications.
• Flush Grid High Deck is 0.4 in (10 mm) higher than the standard S2400 belt.
• Standard indent: 0.875 in (22.2 mm)• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.375 in (34.9 mm).

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

0.9 in(22.8 mm)

0.5 in(12.7 mm)0.25 in(6.4 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalPK

364

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
PK
PK
PK

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,700
1,700

N/m
17,50024,80024,800Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

°F
34 to 176
-40 to 176-40 to 176°C
1 to 80-40 to 80-40 to 80

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.90
2.83
2.49

kg/m²
9.28
13.82
12.16

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid High Deck with Load-Sharing™ Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
10.5
36
0.5
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
266.7
914
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

SERIES 2400

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Flush edge design features an extension to reduce the opening size.
• Load-Sharing belt edge improves how the load is shared and minimizes fatigue
failure in various areas of the belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires very low return-side
tension.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to predict strength requirements formost radius and low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications, and ensure thebelt is strong enough for the application.
• Uses a standard S2400 wearstrip.
• Standard indent: 0.875 in (22.2 mm).
• Load-Sharing Edge height: 0.4 in (10 mm) higher than the standard S2400 belt.

A

0.50 in(12.7 mm)0.90 in(22.8 mm)1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)0.25 in(6.4 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 inBase Belt Material(4.6 mm)Polypropylene
AcetalAcetalNylon
Polypropylene
Polypropylene

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,700
1,000

Curved Belt Strength
N/m
17,500For curved belt strength
24,800 calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.
14,600Temp. Range(continuous)a°F
34 to 200
-50 to 200
34 to 200°C
1 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.90
2.83
1.84

kg/m²
9.28
13.82
8.99

a Sideflexing applications must not exceed 180ºF (82ºC).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

365

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid (2.4) with Insert Rollers
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
9
1.00
0.35 × 0.30

mm
25.4
229
25.4
8.9 × 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Uses acetal rollers.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• For radius applications requiring low back pressure accumulation withminimum radius of 2.4 times belt width (measured from inside edge).
• For low back pressure applications, place wearstrip between rollers.
For driven applications, place wearstrip directly under rollers.
• Do NOT place sprockets in line with rollers.
• Belts 12 in (305 mm) wide and less have a turn ratio of 1.7.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt width greaterthan 24 in (610 mm) in a flat turning or spiral applications.
• Standard roller width spacings: 2 in (51 mm), 3 in (76 mm) or 4 in (102mm).
• Standard roller row spacings: 2 in (51 mm) or 4 in (102 mm).
• Roller indents: 3.5 in (89 mm) or 4 in (102 mm) based on roller width
spacing selected.

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Default Rod Straight Belt
Material,
Strength
Roller Indents
Diameter 0.18 in
Belt Material(4.6 mm)lbf/ft N/minmm
Polypropylene Acetal
500 7,300 3.5 or 4.0 89 or 102
AcetalNylon
500 7,300 3.5 or 4.0 89 or 102
Polypropylene Polypropylene
500 7,300 3.5 or 4.0 89 or 102

366

Temperature Range(continuous)
Curved Belt Strength°F
For curved belt strength 34 to 200
calculations, contact-50 to 200
Intralox Customer
34 to 220
Service.

Belt Mass°C
lb/ft² kg/m²
1 to 931.20 5.86-46 to 93 1.73 8.44
1 to 104 1.12 5.47

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Flush Grid (2.8) with Insert Rollers
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
6
1.00
0.35 × 0.30

mm
25.4
152
25.4
8.9 × 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• This belt uses the Series 2400 Radius Flush Grid (2.2) as a base. Due to roller
placement, turn radius increases to 2.8.
• For low back-pressure applications, place wearstrips between rollers. For driven
applications, place wearstrips under rollers.
• Do not place sprockets in-line with rollers.
• For radius applications requiring low back-pressure accumulation with aminimum radius of 2.8 times belt width (measured from inside edge).
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt width greater than 24 in(610 mm) in flat-turning or spiral applications.
• Standard roller row spacing: 2 in (51 mm) or 4 in (102 mm).
• Standard roller width spacing: 2 in (51 mm), 3 in (76 mm), or 4 in (102 mm).
• Minimum width with hold down guides: 8 in (203 mm).
• Roller indents: 2 in (51 mm), 2.5 in (63 mm), 3 in (76 mm), or 3.5 in (89 mm)based on roller width spacing.
• Minimum roller indent with hold down guides: 3 in (76 mm).

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Straight Belt Strength
Roller Width Spacing
Default Rod
Material,
Diameter 0.18 in 2 in 51 mm 3 in 76 mm 4 inBelt Material(4.6 mm)lbf/ft N/m lbf/ft N/m lbf/ft
Polypropylene

AcetalAcetalNylon

Polypropylene

Polypropylene

102mm

Roller Indents Curved Belt
N/m
in
mm
Strength2
51
700 10,200 800 11,700 900 13,100 2.5 to 64 to
For curved
3.5
89
belt strength
251calculations,
1,000 14,600 1,200 17,500 1,300 12,749 2.5 to 64 tocontact
Intralox
3.5
89
Customer
2
51
Service.
600 8,760 700 10,200 800 11,700 2.5 to 64 to
3.5
892024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Temp. Range(continuous)

Belt Mass°F°C

lb/ft² kg/m²

34 to
200

1 to
93

1.21

1.21

-50 to -46 to 1.61
200
93

7.68

34 to
220

5.11

1 to
104

1.04

367

RADIUS BELTS
Flush Grid Friction Top 2.2 with Load-Sharing™ Edge
in
1.00
10.5
36.0
0.35 x 0.30

Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
266.7
914.0
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Flush edge design features an extension to reduce the opening size.
• Load-Sharing belt edge improves how the load is shared and minimizes fatigue failure invarious areas of the belt.
• Available in grey polypropylene with grey rubber and white polypropylene with white rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires very low return-side tension.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics affect the maximum
degree of incline. Consider these factors when designing conveyor systems using thesebelts.
• Available with hold down guides.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Indent for friction surface: 1.125 in (28.6 mm).
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.5 in (38 mm) with hold down guides and 1.375 in (34.9 mm)without hold down guides.

A

0.2 in(5.1 mm)1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)1.00 in NOM.
(25.4 mm)

0.7 in(17.8 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Base/Friction
Top

Default Rod
Belt Strength
Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)lbf/ft N/mPolypropylene

Grey/Grey

AcetalPolypropylene

White/White

AcetalPolypropylene

Grey/Grey

Polypropylene

Polypropylene

White/WhitePolypropylene

Base Belt
Material

1,200 17,500

Temp. Range(continuous)
Curved Belt
Strength

For curved belt
strength
1,200 17,500
calculations,contact Intralox
1,000 14,600
Customer
Service.
1,000 14,600

°F
34 to
150
34 to
150
34 to
150
34 to
150

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft² kg/m²

Friction Top
Hardness

1 to 66

1.35

6.59

64 Shore A

1 to 66

1.35

6.59

55 Shore A

1 to 66

1.29

6.30

64 Shore A

1 to 66

1.29

6.30

55 Shore A

°C

FDA
(USA)

EU MCabcbca European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

3682024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Friction Top Mold to Width with Load-Sharing™ Edge
Pitch
Minimum Width
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4.0
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
101.6
8.9 x 7.6

42%Open
Snap-lock; headed

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before designingequipment or ordering a belt.
• Flush edge design features an extension to reduce the opening size.
• Load-Sharing™ belt edge improves how the load is shared and minimizes belt fatigue
failure.
• Available in grey polypropylene with grey rubber and white polypropylene with white rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available. Intralox canhelp identify the best belt and rod material combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• Designed for sideflexing applications with a standard turn ratio of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Minimum recommended turn ratio is 1.95. Contact Intralox Customer Service when
considering minimum turn ratio.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics affect the maximum
degree of incline. Consider these factors when designing conveyor systems using thesebelts.
• Available with hold down guides.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Available widths: 4 in (101.6 mm), 6 in (152.4 mm), 8 in (203.2 mm), and 10 in (254 mm).
• Indent for friction surface:- On 4-in (101.6 mm) and 6-in (152.4 mm) widths: indent molded at 0.70 in (17.78 mm).
- On 8-in (203.2 mm) and 10-in (254 mm) widths: indent molded at 0.95 in (24.1 mm).
• For 4 in (102 mm) wide belts with hold down guides, do not use glass-filled nylon split
sprockets.
• Maximum number of sprockets:- 4 in (101.6 mm) belts without hold down guides: two sprockets.
- 4 in (101.6 mm) belts with hold down guides: one sprocket.
- 6 in (152.4 mm) belts without hold down guides: four sprockets.
- 6 in (152.4 mm) belts with hold down guides: three sprockets.
- 8 in (203.2 mm) belts with and without hold down guides: five sprockets.
- 10 in (254 mm) belts with and without hold down guides: seven sprockets.
• Minimum nosebar diameter:- belts without hold down guides: 1.375 in (34.9 mm).
- belts with hold down guides: 1.50 in (38.1 mm).

A

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Base Belt
Material

Polypropylene

Temp. Range
Default Rod
Straight Belt Strength lbf (N)(continuous)
Material,
Diameter
4.0 in6.0 in8.0 in 10.0 in
0.18 in
Hold Down (101.6 (152.4 (203.2(254
Curved Belt
(4.6 mm)
Guides
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Strength
F°
C°
400
600
800
1,000
For
curved
belt
34
to
1
to
Without(1,780) (2,670) (3,560) (4,450)
strength
150
66
calculations,
Nylon
contact Intralox 34 to
242
600
800
1,000
1 to
With
Customer(1,080) (2,670) (3,560) (4,450)
150
66
Service.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Mass lb/ft (kg/m)
4.0 in(101.6mm)
0.39(0.58)

6.0 in(152.4mm)
0.60(0.89)

8.0 in(203.2mm)
0.82(1.22)

10.0 in
(254
mm)
1.01
(1.50)

0.43(0.64)

0.65(0.978)0.86(1.28)

1.06(1.58)

369

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Friction Top (2.2)
in
1.00
4
0.50
0.35 × 0.30

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
102
12.7
8.9 × 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Available in grey polypropylene with grey rubber and white
polypropylene with white rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Radius belt wearstrips are available.
• Available with hold down guides, see Hold Down Guides (2.2 Only) for
details.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt width greaterthan 36 in (914 mm) in turning or spiral applications.
• Indent for friction surface: 1.125 in (28.6 mm).
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.5 in (38.1 mm) with hold down guides
and 1.375 in (34.9 mm) without hold down guides.

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Temp. Range(continuous)

Base/Friction
Top

Default Rod
Belt Strength
Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)lbf/ft N/mPolypropylene

Grey/grey

Acetal

1,200 17,500

Polypropylene

White/white

AcetalPolypropylene

Grey/grey

Polypropylene

Polypropylene

White/white

Polypropylene

Polypropylene

Highperformance FT Acetal
blue/blue

1,200 17,500 For curved belt
strength
1,000 14,600 calculations,contact Intralox
Customer
1,000 14,600
Service.

°F
34 to
150
34 to
150
34 to
150
34 to
150

1,200 17,500

34 to
200

Base Belt
Material

Curved Belt
Strength

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft² kg/m²

Friction Top
Hardness

1 to 66

1.35

6.59

64 Shore A

1 to 66

1.35

6.59

55 Shore A

1 to 66

1.29

6.30

64 Shore A

1 to 66

1.29

6.30

1 to 93

1.35

6.59

°C

FDA
(USA)

EU MCabc

55 Shore Abc

59 Shore Abca European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

370

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Friction Top with Heavy-Duty Edge
in
1.0
4.0
0.50
0.35 x 0.30

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
101.6
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Heavily reinforced and carefully sculpted edge is designed to resist belt
snagging and edge damage while maintaining cleanability.
• Load-Sharing™ belt edge improves how the load is shared andminimizes belt fatigue failure.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Available in grey polypropylene with grey rubber, white polypropylene
with white rubber, and blue polypropylene with high-performance blue
rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires low return-side
tension.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt wider than 36 in(914 mm) in flat-turning or spiral applications.
• Designed for radius applications with a turn radius of 2.2 times the belt
width.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Available with hold down guides.
• Indent for friction surface: 1.125 in (28.6 mm).
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.375 in (34.9 mm).

SERIES 2400

Product Notes

A
1.00 in(25.4 mm)1.00 in(25.4 mm)1.00 in(25.4 mm)0.20 in(5.2 mm)0.50 in(12.7 mm)0.25 in(6.4 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Base/Friction
Top

Default Rod
Belt Strength
Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)lbf/ft N/mPolypropylene

Grey/grey

PK

Polypropylene

White/white

PK

Polypropylene

Blue/highperformance FT
blue

PK

Base Belt
Material

Temperature
Range(continuous)
Curved Belt
Strength

1,200 17,500 For curved belt
strength
1,200 17,500 calculations,contact
Intralox
Customer
1,200 17,500
Service.

Belt Mass

AgencyAcceptability
EU
FDA(USA) MCalb/ft² kg/m²

Friction Top
Hardness

1 to 66

1.29

6.30

64 Shore A

34 to
150

1 to 66

1.29

6.30

55 Shore A

b

c

34 to
176

1 to 80

1.35

6.59

59 Shore A

a

c

°F

°C

34 to
150

a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

371

RADIUS BELTS
0.4 in High Radius Friction Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4
0.5
0.35 x 0.30

mm
25.4
102
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Makes turns with an inside turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Indent for friction surface is molded at 0.95 in (24.1 mm).
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.375 in (34.9 mm).

A
1.00 in(25.4 mm)1.00 in(25.4 mm)1.00 in(25.4 mm)

0.9 in(22.8 mm)

0.5 in(12.7 mm)

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data
Temperature
Range(continuous)

AgencyAcceptability
Friction
FDA EU
Curved Belt
Top
°F
°C
lb/ft² kg/m² Hardness (USA) MCa
Strength
34 to 1 to 66 1.77 8.65 55 Shorebc1,200 17,500
150
A
For curved belt
to55 Shorebc
1,000 14,600 strength calculations, 34
150 1 to 66 1.69 8.25
A
contact Intralox
Customer Service. 34 to 1 to
59 Shorebc1,200 17,500
212 100 1.77 8.65
A

Belt Material

Default Rod
Belt Strength
Material,
Base/Friction Diameter 0.18 in
lbf/ft N/m
Top(4.6 mm)Polypropylene

White/white

AcetalPolypropylene

White/white

Polypropylene

Polypropylene

Blue/highperformance
FT blue

Polypropylene

Belt Massa European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.

b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

372

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
0.4 in High Radius Friction Top with Heavy-Duty Edge
in
1.0
4.0
0.50
0.35 x 0.30

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
101.6
12.7
8.9 x 7.6

42%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Heavily reinforced and carefully sculpted edge is designed to resist belt
snagging and edge damage while maintaining cleanability.
• Load-Sharing™ belt edge improves how the load is shared andminimizes belt fatigue failure.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Available in white polypropylene with white rubber and blue
polypropylene with high-performance blue rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sprocket drive system minimizes wear and requires low return-side
tension.
• Temperature, environmental conditions, and product characteristics
affect the maximum degree of incline. Consider these factors when
designing conveyor systems using these belts.
• Makes turns with an inside radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service before using a belt wider than 36 in(914 mm) in flat-turning or spiral applications.
• Indent for friction surface: 0.95 in (24.1 mm)• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.375 in (34.9 mm).

1.00 in(25.4 mm)1.00 in(25.4 mm)1.00 in(25.4 mm)0.40 in(10.2 mm)0.50 in(12.8 mm)0.25 in(6.4 mm)

Belt Data
Default Rod
Belt Strength
Material,
Base/Friction Diameter 0.18 in
Belt MaterialTop(4.6 mm)lbf/ft N/mPolypropylene

White/white

PK

Polypropylene

Blue/highperformance
blue

PK

Curved Belt
StrengthFor
curved belt
1,200 17,500
strength
calculations,contact Intralox
1,200 17,500
Customer
Service.

Temperature
Range(continuous)
°F
34 to
150

°C
1 to
66

34 to
176

1 to
80

AgencyAcceptability

Belt MassEU
Friction Top FDA
lb/ft² kg/m² Hardness (USA) MCc
1.69

8.25

55 Shore A

d

e

1.77

8.65

59 Shore Adec European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.

d FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
e EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

373

SERIES 2400

Product Notes

RADIUS BELTS
Radius Raised Rib
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Product Contact Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
4
0.50
0.35 × 0.30

mm
25.4
102
12.7
8.9 × 7.6

42%
18%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes

SERIES 2400

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Permits airflow through the belt to provide cooling in food-processing
applications.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Makes turns with an inside turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width.
• Facilitates smooth transfers of small packages with the addition oftransfer plates.
• Works with standard S2400 wearstrips.
• Standard indent: 1.12 in (28.6 mm).
• Belt deck height: 0.5 in (12.7 mm) higher than the standard S2400
belt.

A preferred run direction for flat, turning applications
Belt Data

Belt Material
Polypropylene
AcetalPolypropylene
HR nylon

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.18 in(4.6 mm)
AcetalNylon
Polypropylenea
Nylon

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,200
1,700
1,000
1,700

N/m
Curved Belt Strength
17,500For curved belt strength
24,800calculations, contact Intralox
14,600
Customer Service.
24,800Temperature Range(continuous)°F
34 to 200
-50 to 200
34 to 220
-50 to 240°C
1 to 93-46 to 93
1 to 104-46 to 116

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.98
3.00
1.92
2.5

kg/m²
9.68
14.67
9.39
12.25

a Polypropylene rods can be installed in polypropylene belts when extra chemical resistance is required. Please note lower belt strength.

374

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference
in
4
5
6
7
8
10
12

mm
102
127
152
178
203
254
305

14
15
16
18
20
24
30
32
36

356
381
406
457
508
610
762
813
914

Wearstripsc

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftb
1
2
2
2
2
2
3

Carryway
2
2
2
2
2
3
3

Returnway
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

3
5
5
5
5
5
7
7
7

3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5

3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

6
7
Maximum 9 in (229 mm)
centerline spacing

5
5
Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
centerline spacing

42
1,067
9
48
1,219
11
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing

a If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 0.50 in(12.7 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 4 in (102 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

b This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets. For lockdown location, see Retainer Rings and Center Sprocket Offset.

c The number of wearstrips given does not include the hold down wearstrip.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

203

7.0

178

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

5.0

127

A 0.5
9T
6T

0.3

0.2

A 4.0

20T

0.4

1

2

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

102

16T

3.0

76

12T

2.0

51

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

1.0
0%

B

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized

90%

100%

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

375

SERIES 2400

Belt Width Rangea

RADIUS BELTS
Molded Sprocketa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)
in mm
6c, d

(13.40%)9c, d(6.03%)
12(3.41%)
16(1.92%)
20(1.23%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
inb
in
mmb
mm

2.0

51

2.0

51

0.54

14

0.75

20

2.9

74

2.9

74

1.0

25

1

1

25

25

3.9

99

4.0

102

1.0

25

1 to 1.5

1.5d

25 to
40

40d

5.1

130

5.2

132

1.0

25

1 to 1.5

1.5

40

6.4

163

6.4

163

1.0

25

1 to 1.5

1.5

25 to
40
25 to
40

40

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) is de-rated to 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m). All other belts maintain

SERIES 2400

the published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service for availability ofpolyurethane sprockets.
b Imperial key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.
c The 2.0 in (51 mm) pitch diameter 6 tooth sprocket and the 2.9 in (74 mm) pitch diameter 9 tooth sprocket have a recommended belt pull of 60 lbf/sprocket(267 N/sprocket).
d Do not use this sprocket with hold down guides.

Split Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16(1.92%) 5.1 130
20
6.4 163(1.23%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.2

132

1.0

25

1.5b

40b

6.4

163

1.0

25

1.5

40

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

a When using polyurethane sprockets, the belt strength for belts rated over 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) is de-rated to 750 lbf/ft (10,900 N/m) and all other belts

maintain their published rating. The temperature range for polyurethane sprockets is 0°F to 120°F (-18°C to 49°C). Contact Intralox Customer Service foravailability of polyurethane sprockets.
b FDA-compliant materials are available.

376

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Nylon (FDA) Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
1299(3.41%) 3.9

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm

4

102

1.0

25

1, 1-1/4

16(1.92%)

5.1

130

5.2

132

1.0

25

1.25

20
(1.23%)

6.4

163

6.4

163

1.0

25

1.5b
40
1.5

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

SERIES 2400

b Do not use this sprocket with hold down guides.

Split Natural Nylon (FDA) Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
20
6.4 163(1.23%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.4

in
1.5

mm
163

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5

Acetal Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)
in mm
12
3.9
99
(3.41%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
3.9

in
1.0

mm
99

mm
25

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
b
1-1/4
1.5

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.
b Do not use this sprocket with hold down guides.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

377

RADIUS BELTS
Glass-Filled Nylon Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16
5.1 130(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.2

in
1.0

mm
132

mm
25

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5
40

Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprockets

SERIES 2400

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16
5.1 130(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.2

in
1.5

mm
132

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
1-1/4
30, 40a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

HR Nylon EZ Clean™ Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16
5.1 130(1.92%)

378

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.2

in
1.0

mm
132

mm
25

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
40

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
No-Cling Flights
Available Flight Height
in
mm
3.0

76

Available Materials
Polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal, X-ray
detectable acetal• Flights do not have bottom hold down guides, but can be used with thebottom hold down belt style, with a minimum flight spacing of 4 in (102mm).
• Minimum indent: 1.125 in (29 mm).

Heavy-Duty Edge Flights

SERIES 2400

Available Flight Heightinmm
Available Materials
3.0
76
Acetal, Propylene, PK• Heavily reinforced and carefully sculpted edge is designed to resist belt
snagging and edge damage while maintaining cleanability.
• Flush edge features an intuitive molded-in arrow to indicate preferred
run direction, and extensions to reduce finger entrapment.
• Flights do not have bottom hold down guides, but can be used with thebottom hold down belt style, with a minimum flight spacing of 4 in (102mm).
• Minimum indent: 1.125 in (29 mm).

Universal Sideguards
Available Sideguard Heightinmm
Available Materials
1
25
Polypropylene, acetal
376• Standard overlap design ensures product containment.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Can be used in multiple rows to separate product.
• Easily cleanable. Suitable (FDA accepted) for food applications.
• Minimum indent required: 0.9 in (22 mm) for 2.2 turn ratios, 1.4 in (35mm) for 2.2 turn ratios with hold down guide, 2.9 in (73 mm) for 1.7 turnratios.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

379

RADIUS BELTS
Heavy-Duty Edge Sideguards
Available Sideguard Height
in
mm
1.0
25

Available Materials

Polypropylene, polyethylenea, acetal
3.076• Standard overlap design ensures product containment.
• Fastens to belt with hinge rods. No other fasteners required.
• Easily cleanable. Suitable (FDA accepted) for food applications.
• Minimum indent required: 0.9 in (22 mm) for 2.2 turn ratios, 1.4 in (35mm) for 2.2 turn ratios with hold down guide, 2.9 in (73 mm) for 1.7 turnratios.

a Only available in 3.0 in (76 mm)

SERIES 2400

Finger Transfer Plates
Available Widths
Number ofinmm
Fingers
Available Materials
4
102
16
Acetal• Designed for use with Series 2400 Raised Rib belts, to eliminate producttransfer and tipping problems.
• The fingers extend between the belt ribs, to allow a smooth continuationof the product flow as the belt engages the sprockets.
• Finger transfer plates are easily installed on the conveyor frame withconventional fasteners.

380

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M

PP
AC

mm
61
5

5.83
3.96
2.50
0.74
2.00
3.979
3.976

148
101
64
19
51
101.1
101.0

SERIES 2400

Dimensional Requirements for S2400 Finger Transfer Plate Installation
in
2.38
0.19

M spacing between finger transfer plates, at ambient temperature

Figure 80: Finger transfer plate and conveyor assembly

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

381

RADIUS BELTS
Hold Down Guides (2.2 Only)• Materials available: polypropylene, acetal, HR nylon.
• Hold down guides are on the bottom of the belt for use when the beltedges must be clear. Also available on friction top modules.
• Hold down guides allow two belts to run next to each other without alarge gap in between.
• The belt edge is smooth for reduced friction, and is relatively thick toprovide wear resistance and protection for the rod retention.
• Not recommended for low-tension capstan drive spiral applications.
• Cannot be used with 2 in and 2.9 in pitch diameter sprockets or 3.9 inpitch diameter square bore sprockets.
• Other sprocket PDs with large bores may not produce enough clearance
between the hold down guide and shaft. Subtracting bore size from thePD easily identifies these sprockets. If the number is less than 2.0 in (51mm), this sprocket cannot be used with hold down guides.
• Minimum nosebar diameter: 1.5 in (38.1 mm).

A

SERIES 2400

A Belt width

Figure 81: Front view

B preferred run direction for flat, turning applications

Figure 82: Side view

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 83: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

382

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S2400 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Pitch Diameter
in
mm

A

B

C

Range (bottom to top)a
Numberof Teeth
in
mm
in
mm
in
Radius Flush Grid - Straight Edge with or without hold down guides

E
mm

in

mm

2.0b

51b

6

0.62-0.75

16-19

1.22

31

2.00

51

1.31

33

2.9b

9

1.12-1.21

28-31

1.51

38

2.92

74

1.77

45

3.9
5.1
6.4

74b
99
130
163

12
16
20

1.62-1.68
41-43
1.86
47
3.86
2.26-2.31
57-59
2.11
54
5.13
2.91-2.95
74-75
2.31
59
6.39
Radius Flush Grid High Deck, 0.4-in High Radius Friction Top

98
130
162

2.24
2.88
3.51

57
73
89

2.0b

51b

6

0.62-0.75

16-19

1.22

31

2.40

61

1.71

43

2.9b

74b

9

1.12-1.21

28-31

1.51

38

3.32

84

2.17

55

3.9
5.1
6.4

99
130
163

12
16
20

1.62-1.68
41-43
1.86
47
4.26
2.26-2.31
57-59
2.11
54
5.53
2.91-2.95
74-75
2.31
59
6.79
Radius Friction Top - with or without hold down guides

108
140
172

2.64
3.28
3.91

67
83
99

2.0b

51b

6

0.62-0.75

16-19

1.22

31

2.20

56

1.51

38

2.9b

74b

9

1.12-1.21

28-31

1.51

38

3.12

79

1.97

50

3.9
5.1
6.4

99
130
163

12
16
20

1.62-1.68
41-43
1.86
47
4.06
2.26-2.31
57-59
2.11
54
5.33
2.91-2.95
74-75
2.31
59
6.59
Radius with Insert Rollers (all styles) - free floating rollers

103
135
167

2.44
3.08
3.71

62
78
94

2.0b

51b

6

0.62-0.75

16-19

1.22

31

2.09

53

1.40

36

2.9b

74b

9

1.12-1.21

28-31

1.53

39

3.01

76

1.86

47

3.9
5.1
6.4

99
130
163

12
16
20

1.62-1.68
41-43
1.78
45
3.95
2.26-2.31
57-59
2.06
52
5.21
2.91-2.95
74-75
2.31
59
6.48
Radius with Insert Rollers (all styles) - Driven Rollers

100
132
165

2.33
2.96
3.60

59
75
91

2.0b

51b

6

0.53-0.66

13-17

1.24

31

2.09

53

1.40

36

2.9b

74b

9

1.04-1.12

26-31

1.57

40

3.01

76

1.86

47

3.9

99

12

1.53-1.59

39-40

1.92

49

3.95

100

2.33

59

5.1
6.4

130
163

16
20

2.18-2.23
2.82-2.86

55-57
2.19
72-73
2.41
Radius Raised Rib

56
61

5.21
6.48

132
165

2.96
3.60

75
91

2.0
2.9
3.9

51
74
99

6
9
12

0.62-0.75
1.12-1.21
1.62-1.68

16-19
28-31
41-43

1.22
1.51
1.86

31
38
47

2.50
3.42
4.36

64
87
111

1.81
2.27
2.74

46
58
70

5.1
6.4

130
163

16
20

2.26-2.31
2.91-2.95

57-59
74-75

2.11
2.31

54
59

5.63
6.89

143
175

3.38
4.01

86
102

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

b Cannot be used with hold down guides.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

383

SERIES 2400

Sprocket Description

RADIUS BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2400 Dead Plate Gap

in
2.0
2.9
3.9
5.1
6.4

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
51
74
99
130
163

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
6
9
12
16
20

in
0.134
0.088
0.065
0.050
0.039

mm
3.4
2.2
1.7
1.3
1.0

HOLD DOWN WEARSTRIPSSERIES 2400

The use of hold down wearstrips along both belt edges over the full carryway is recommended, except inheavily loaded or high-speed applications.
• For information about Intralox hold down wearstrips, see Custom Wearstrips.
• For information about conveyor design for hold down wearstrips, see Hold Down Wearstrips in the Design
Guidelines chapter.

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONSNOTE: For assistance with radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral selections, contact Intralox
Customer Service. Run the Engineering Program to ensure that the belt is strong enough for the radiusapplication in question. See Engineering Program Analysis for Spiral and Radius for more information.

DESIGN GUIDE SUMMARY
For typical layout configurations, see Radius Conveyors in the Design Guidelines chapter.
• The minimum turn radius for the standard edge S2400 is 2.2 times the belt width, measured from theinside edge. For the tight turning style, the minimum turn radius is 1.7 times the belt width.
• The minimum required straight run between turns of opposing direction is 2.0 times the belt width. Shorter
straight sections lead to high wear on the edge guide rail and high pull stresses in the belt.
• There is no minimum straight run required between turns that are in the same direction.
• The minimum final straight run leading to the drive shaft is a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m) is not
feasible, shorter lengths, down to 1.5 times the belt width, require a gravity take-up to avoid sprocket wear
and tracking problems. For more information, see Take-Ups.
• The minimum length of the first straight run immediately after the idle shaft is 1.5 times the belt width.
When shorter lengths are required, down to 1.0 × the width, an idle roller can be used in place ofsprockets.

384

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Knuckle Chain
Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2.25

mm
50.8
57

ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 3000

WARNING: Hold down wearstrips are mandatory on the inside andoutside edges of all turns, on both the carrying and return side of thebelt. Unless they interfere with the operation of the carrying equipment,
use hold down wearstrips throughout the conveyor to protect the belt andpersonnel next to the conveyor.
• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Thick, durable plastic surface around stainless steel pins for long lifeand less breakage.
• Available with extended pins.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Can run on the same tracks as other common chains.
• Available in both straight and turning versions. The straight version
cannot be used for turning applications. Use the turning version for
turning applications only.
• The turning version is designed for applications with a minimum
centerline turn radius of 16 in (406 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
Figure 84: Series 3000T

Belt Data

Chain Material
Acetal (straight)
Acetal (turning)

Default Rod Material, Diameter
0.25 in (6.4 mm)
303 SS
303 SS

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Chain Strength
lbf
700
560

N
3,110
2,490

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Chain Mass
lb/ft
0.88
0.90

kg/m
1.21
1.25

385

RADIUS BELTS
Mesh Top
Pitch
Minimum Width
Opening Size (approximate)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
2.3
-

mm
50.8
57.2
-

ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 3000

WARNING: Hold down wearstrips are mandatory on the inside andoutside edges of all turns, on both the carrying and return side of thebelt. Unless they interfere with the operation of the carrying equipment,
use hold down wearstrips throughout the conveyor to protect the belt andpersonnel next to the conveyor.
• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Mesh Top design eliminates open area for improved worker safety.
• Thick, durable plastic surface around stainless steel pins provides longlife and less breakage.
• Available with extended pins.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Can run on the same tracks as other common chains.
• Improved design simplifies cleaning.
• Available in both straight and turning versions.
NOTE: Only the turning version can be used for turning applications.
The straight version cannot be used for turning applications.
• The turning version is designed for applications with a minimum
centerline turn radius of 16 in (406 mm).
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

0.9"(23 mm)

2.25"
2.77"
(57.2 mm) (70.9 mm)

2.0"(50.8 mm)0.4"
(10.2 mm)

0.25"
(6.4 mm)0.8"(20.4 mm)

Belt Data

Chain Material
Acetal (straight)
Acetal (turning)

386

Default Rod Material,
0.25 in (6.4 mm)
303 SS
303 SS

Chain Strength
lbf
700
560

N
3,110
2,490

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Chain Mass
lb/ft
0.89
0.91

kg/m
1.32
1.36

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Strength Factor
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6

A 0.5

12T

0.4

10T
8T

0.2

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

Chain Pull Limit with UHMW-PE Sprockets, Based on Bore Size
No. of
Teeth
8
10
12

Nom. Pitch
Diameter
in
mm
5.2
132
6.5
165
7.7
196

1.5 in square
lbf
N
640
2,850
520
2,310
432
1,920

40 mm square
lbf
N
640
2,850
520
2,310
432
1,920

Sprocket Bore Size
1 in round
lbf
N
74
330
78
250
65
290

1.25 in round
lbf
N
90
400
95
420
79
350

1.5 in round
lbf
N
162
720
172
770
143
640

UHMW-PE Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
8 (7.61%) 5.2 132
squarebore

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.3

mm
135

in
1.5

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
1.5
40

8 (7.61%) 5.2
round
bore
10
6.5
(4.89%)
12
7.7(3.41%)

132

5.3

135

1.2

30

1-1/4

165

6.7

170

1.5

38

1-1/4

1.5

40

196

8.0

203

1.5

38

1-1/4

1.5

40

a Imperial key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

387

SERIES 3000

0.3

RADIUS BELTS
Extended Pins
• Modules with 303 stainless steel extended pins can be spliced into both thebasic turning and straight running chains.
• These pins are commonly used in side-by-side chain strands where rollers
are used for low back pressure applications.
• The minimum extended pin spacing is 2.0 in (50.8 mm).
• The extended pin modules can be spliced into the standard chain every 2.0
in (50.8 mm).
• Intralox offers only extended tabs and extended pins. Attachments for eitherof these accessories are not available through Intralox. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for lead times.
2.25"(57.2 mm)3.75"
(95.3 mm)

SERIES 3000

Extended pins for straight or turning versions

Extended Tabs
• Modules with extended tabs can be spliced into both the basic turning andstraight running chains.
• These extended tabs can be used to attach flights, cleats, etc.
• The extended tab modules are based on the turning chain design, so therating for the turning chain should be used even if the extended tab modules
are spliced into straight running chain.
• The minimum tab spacing is 2.0 in (50.8 mm).
• The tabs can be spliced into the standard chain every 2.0 in (50.8 mm).
• Intralox offers only extended tabs and extended pins. Attachments for eitherof these accessories are not available through Intralox. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for lead times.

0.90"(23 mm)2.25"(57.2 mm)3.75"
(95.3 mm)

Extended tabs for straight or turning versions

388

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 85: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S3000 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
5.2
6.5
7.7

132
165
196

Numberof Teeth
8
10
12

A

B

C

E

Range (bottom to top)ain
2.01–2.21
2.68–2.84
3.33–3.46

inmm
Knuckle Chain, Mesh Top
51-56
2.29
68-72
2.63
85-88
2.94

mm

in

mm

in

mm

58
67
75

5.23
6.47
7.73

1.33
164
196

3.14
3.76
4.39

80
96
112

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S3000 Dead Plate Gap

in
5.2
6.5
7.7

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
132
165
196

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
8
10
12

in
0.200
0.158
0.132

mm
5.1
4.0
3.4

389

SERIES 3000

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

RADIUS BELTS

SERIES 3000
390

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S4009 Flush Grid
in
1.00
3.3

Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
84

13%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Same deck thickness as the straight-running belt counterpart Series
900 FG [0.344 in (8.7 mm)].
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses S1400 sprockets.
• All S1400 and S4000 sprockets are split, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to calculate the estimated belt
pull for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• Corner tracks, with bevel design, are mandatory on the inside edges of
all turns.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
Acetal
HHR nylon

in
3.3
3.3

mm
84
84

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
500
500

°F
-50 to 200-50 to 310

lb/ft
0.97
0.97

N
2,220
2,220

°C
-46 to 93-46 to 154

kg/m
1.44
1.44

Minimum
Centerline Turn
Radius
in
18
18

mm
457
457

391

RADIUS BELTS
S4009 Flat Top
in
1.00
3.3

Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
84

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses S1400 sprockets.
• All S1400 and S4000 sprockets are split, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to calculate the estimated belt
pull for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• See the belt data table for minimum centerline turn radius.
• Corner tracks, with bevel design, are mandatory on the inside edges of
all turns.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
Acetal
HHR nylon

392

in
3.3
3.3

mm
84
84

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 SS
303 SS

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
500
500

°F
-50 to 200-50 to 310

lb/ft
1.11
0.98

N
2,220
2,220

°C
-46 to 93-46 to 154

kg/m
1.65
1.46

Minimum
Centerline Turn
Radius
in
18
18

mm
457
457

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S4014 Flat Top
in
1.00
3.3

Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
84

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Same deck thickness as the straight-running belt counterpart, S1400
Flat Top: (0.5 in (12.7 mm).
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses S1400 sprockets.
• All S1400 and S4000 sprockets are split, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to calculate the estimated belt
pull for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• Corner tracks, with bevel design, are mandatory on the inside edges of
all turns.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
Acetal

in
3.3

mm
84

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
500

°F
-50 to 200

lb/ft
1.29

N
2,220

°C
-46 to 93

kg/m
1.92

Minimum
Centerline Turn
Radius
in
18

mm
457

393

RADIUS BELTS
S4030 7.5-in ProTrax™ Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs
in
1.00
7.5

Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
191.0

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two powerful, blue, Teflon™-coated magnets are embedded in each
module (one magnet per wing).
• Blue, metal-detectable, nylon caps retain magnets in modules.
• Hold down tabs match dimensions of S4090.
• Thicker deck than Series 409X Flat Top for increased wear resistance.
• Standard configuration consists of alternating rows of magnetic
modules and Series 403X Sideflexing Flat Top modules.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses the same sprockets as S1400 and S4000.
• Needs only one drive sprocket and one idle sprocket per belt strand.
• Determine belt spacing based on maximum surface contact with thebottom surface of the conveyed product.
• Ideal for incline, decline, vertical switch, and other applications.
• Minimum sprocket pitch diameter: 3.9 in (99.0 mm).

0.64 in(16.3 mm)1.65 in(41.9 mm)

0.48 in(12.2 mm)

0.47 in(12.0 mm)2.36 in(59.9 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

.91 in(23.1 mm)1.11 in(28.3 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
HHR nylon

394

in
7.5

mm
191

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
500

°F
-50 to 310

lb/ft
2.44

N
2,220

°C
-46 to 154

kg/m
3.63

Minimum
Centerline Turn
Radius
in
24

mm
610

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S4031 7.5-in ProTrax™ Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs
in
1.00
7.5

Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
191.0

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two powerful, blue, Teflon™-coated magnets are embedded in each
module (one magnet per wing).
• Blue, metal-detectable, nylon caps retain magnets in modules.
• Hold down tabs match dimensions of S4091.
• Thicker deck than S409X Flat Top for increased wear resistance.
• Standard configuration consists of alternating rows of magnetic
modules and S403X Sideflexing Flat Top modules.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses the same sprockets as S1400 and S4000.
• Needs only one drive sprocket and one idle sprocket per belt strand.
• Determine belt spacing based on maximum surface contact with thebottom surface of the conveyed product.
• Ideal for incline, decline, vertical switch, and other applications.
• Minimum sprocket pitch diameter: 3.9 in (99.0 mm).

0.66 in(16.8 mm)1.65 in(41.9 mm)0.53 in(13.5 mm)

0.47 in(12.0 mm)

2.17 in(55.1 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

.91 in(23.1 mm)1.13 in(28.2 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
HHR nylon

in
7.5

mm
191

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
500

°F
-50 to 310

lb/ft
2.44

N
2,220

°C
-46 to 154

kg/m
3.63

Minimum
Centerline Turn
Radius
in
24

mm
610

395

SERIES 4000

Product Notes

RADIUS BELTS
S4032 7.5-in ProTrax™ Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs
in
1.00
7.5

Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
191.0

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two powerful, blue, Teflon™-coated magnets are embedded in each
module (one magnet per wing).
• Blue, metal-detectable, nylon caps retain magnets in modules.
• Hold down tabs match dimensions of S4092.
• Thicker deck than S409X Flat Top for increased wear resistance.
• Standard configuration consists of alternating rows of magnetic
modules and S403X Sideflexing Flat Top modules.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses the same sprockets as S1400 and S4000.
• Needs only one drive sprocket and one idle sprocket per belt strand.
• Determine belt spacing based on maximum surface contact with thebottom surface of the conveyed product.
• Ideal for incline, decline, vertical switch, pan indexing, metering, delidding, and radius applications.
• Minimum sprocket pitch diameter: 5.1 in (129.5 mm).

0.47 in(12.0 mm)0.70 in(17.8 mm)0.90 in(22.9 mm)2.22 in(56.4 mm)2.98 in(75.6 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

.91 in(23.1 mm)

1.37 in(34.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
HHR nylon

396

in
7.5

mm
191

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
500

°F
-50 to 310

lb/ft
2.66

N
2,220

°C
-46 to 154

kg/m
3.95

Minimum
Centerline Turn
Radius
in
24

mm
610

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S4033 7.5-in ProTrax™ Sideflexing Flat Top
in
1.00
7.5

Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
191.0

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Two powerful, blue, Teflon™-coated magnets are embedded in each
module (one magnet per wing).
• Blue, metal detectable, nylon caps retain magnets in modules.
• Standard configuration consists of alternating rows of magnetic
modules and Series 403X Sideflexing Flat Top modules.
• Thicker deck than Series 409X Flat Top for increased wear resistance.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses the same sprockets as S1400 and S4000.
• Needs only one drive sprocket and one idle sprocket per belt strand.
• Determine belt spacing based on maximum surface contact with thebottom surface of the conveyed product.
• Ideal for incline, decline, vertical switch, and other applications.
• Minimum sprocket pitch diameter: 3.9 in (99.0 mm).

0.47 in(12.0 mm)0.44 in(11.2 mm)1.65 in(41.9 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

1.0 in(25.4 mm)

.91 in(23.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
HHR nylon

in
7.5

mm
191

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass

lbf
500

°F
-50 to 310

lb/ft
2.29

N
2,220

°C
-46 to 154

kg/m
3.41

Minimum
Centerline Turn
Radius
in
18

mm
457

397

SERIES 4000

Product Notes

RADIUS BELTS
S4090 Sideflexing Flat Top
in
1.00
3.25
4.5
7.5

Pitch
Molded Width

Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
83
114
191

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Same deck thickness as the straight-running counterpart, S900 Flat
Top [0.384 in (9.8 mm)].
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses S1400 sprockets.
• All sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to calculate the estimated belt
pull for your system. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• See Belt Data for minimum centerline turn radius.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
• Minimum backbend radius:- For 3.25 in (83 mm) and 4.5 in (114 mm) wide belts, the minimum
backbend radius is 6 in (152.4 mm).
- For 7.5 in (191 mm) wide, the minimum backbend radius is 9.25 in(235 mm) but 12 in (305 mm) is recommended.

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetal
HR nylon
HR nylon
HHR nylon
HHR nylon
HHR nylon

398

in
3.25
4.5
7.5
3.25
7.5
3.25
4.5
7.5

mm
83
114
191
83
191
83
114
191

Default Pin Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel

Belt Strength
lbf
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500

N
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 240-50 to 240-50 to 310-50 to 310-50 to 310°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 116-46 to 116-46 to 154-46 to 154-46 to 154

Belt Mass

Minimum
Centerline
Turn Radius

lb/ft
1.21
1.40
1.86
1.02
1.54
1.04
1.18
1.57

in
18
18
24
18
24
18
18
24

kg/m
1.80
2.08
2.77
1.52
2.29
1.55
1.76
2.34

mm
457
457
610
457
610
457
457
610

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S4091 Sideflexing Flat Top
in
1.00
3.25
4.5
7.5

Pitch
Molded Width

Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
83
114
191

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Same deck thickness as the straight-running belt counterpart, S900
Flat Top [0.384 in (9.8 mm)].
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses S1400 sprockets.
• All sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• See Belt Data for minimum centerline turn radius.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to calculate the estimated belt
pull for your system. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
• Minimum backbend radius:- For 3.25 in (83 mm) and 4.5 in (114 mm) wide belts, the minimum
backbend radius is 6 in (152.4 mm).
- For 7.5 in (191 mm) wide, the minimum backbend radius is 9.25 in(235 mm) but 12 in (305 mm) is recommended.

Belt Data

Belt Width
Belt Material
AcetalAcetalAcetal
HR nylon
HR nylon
HHR nylon
HHR nylon
HHR nylon

in
3.25
4.5
7.5
3.25
7.5
3.25
4.5
7.5

mm
83
114
191
83
191
83
114
191

Default Pin Material,
Diameter 0.25 in(6.4 mm)
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel
303 Stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Belt Strength
lbf
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500

N
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220
2,220

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 240-50 to 240-50 to 310-50 to 310-50 to 310°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 116-46 to 116-46 to 154-46 to 154-46 to 154

Belt Mass

Minimum
Centerline
Turn Radius

lb/ft
1.22
1.40
1.84
1.02
1.54
1.04
1.18
1.57

in
18
18
24
18
24
18
18
24

kg/m
1.81
2.08
2.74
1.52
2.29
1.55
1.76
2.34

mm
457
457
610
457
610
457
457
610

399

RADIUS BELTS
S4092 Sideflexing Flat Top
in
1.00
3.25
4.5
7.5

Pitch
Molded Width

Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
25.4
83
114
191

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

Product Notes

SERIES 4000

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Same deck thickness as the straight-running counterpart S900 Flat
Top: 0.384 in (9.8 mm).
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Uses S1400 sprockets.
• All sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be
removed for retrofits and changeovers.
• 3.9 in (99 mm) pitch diameter sprockets are not compatible with
S4092 belts.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to calculate the estimated belt
pull for your system. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.
• Minimum backbend radius:- For 3.25 in (83 mm) and 4.5 in (114 mm) wide belts, the minimum
backbend radius is 6 in (152.4 mm).
- For 7.5 in (191 mm) wide, the minimum backbend radius is 9.25 in(235 mm) but 12 in (305 mm) is recommended.
Belt Data

Belt Width

Belt Strength

Temperature Range(continuous)

Default Pin Material,
Belt Materialinmm Diameter 0.25 in (6.4 mm) lbf
N°F°C
Acetal3.25 83 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 200-46 to 93
Acetal4.5 114 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 200-46 to 93
Acetal7.5 191 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 200-46 to 93
HR nylon
3.25 83 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 240-46 to 116
HR nylon
7.5 191 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 240-46 to 116
HHR nylon
3.25 83 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 310-46 to 154
HHR nylon
4.5 114 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 310-46 to 154
HHR nylon
7.5 191 303 Stainless steel
500 2,220 -50 to 310-46 to 154
a Japan Ministry of Health, Labour, and Welfare
b European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
c Fully compliant

400

Belt Mass

Minimum
Centerline
Turn Radius

lb/ft
1.43
1.61
2.05
1.26
1.71
1.28
1.40
1.80

in
18
18
24
18
24
18
18
24

kg/m
2.13
2.40
3.05
1.87
2.55
1.92
2.08
2.68

mm
457
457
610
457
610
457
457
610

AgencyAcceptability
FDA(USA) Ja
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c

EU
MCb
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
S4092 Sideflexing Square Friction Top
Pitch
Molded Width
Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.00
7.5

mm
25.4
191

0%
ClosedPress fit; knurled pin

SERIES 4000

Product Notes• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Available in blue acetal with black rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Use the same sprockets as S1400 and S4000.
• Sprockets feature a split design, so shafts do not have to be removed
for retrofits and changeovers.
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to calculate the estimated belt
pull for your system. Contact Intralox Customer Service for assistance.
• 3.9 in (99 mm) pitch diameter sprockets are not compatible with
S4092 belts.
• Available in 10 ft (3 m) increments.

0.20"(5.1 mm)0.90"(22.9 mm)0.584"(14.8 mm)0.70"
(17.8 mm)2.22"
(56.4 mm)2.98"
(75.6 mm)

Belt Data

Base Belt
Material
AcetalDefault Rod
Material,
Belt Width
Base/
Diameter
Friction
0.25 in
inmm
Top(6.4 mm)
Stainless
7.5
191 Blue/black 303
steel

Belt
Strength

Temp. Range(continuous)

lbf°F-10 to130N

500 2,220

Belt Mass

Minimum
Centerline
Turn Radius

AgencyAcceptability
FDA(USA) EU MCa

°C

lb/ft

kg/m

Friction Top
Hardnessinmm-23 to 54

2.35

3.50

54 Shore A

24

610

b

c

a European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
c EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

401

RADIUS BELTS
S4032 ProTrax with Tabs and S4033 ProTrax Magnet Force
Vs. Metal Thickness

Strength Factor
1.0
0.9
0.8

35.58

7.00

31.15

6.00

0.7
0.6

31T

A 0.5
0.3

1

2

4

3

A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

26.69

C

5.00

22.24

A 4.00

21T
18T
16T
12T

0.4

0.2

8.00

13.34

2.00

8.90

1.00

4.45

0.00
20

17.79

3.00

0

5

10

15

A magnet force (lbf)
B magnet force (N)C metal thickness (steel gauge)

SERIES 4000

To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of
the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

20

B

25

30

35

0.00

NOTE: Magnet force shown is for a single magnet within one wing of
one module, using a flat pan. Results vary for different pan styles andsurface textures.

Molded Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)
in mm
12
a
99a
(3.41%) 3.9
15(2.19%) 4.9 124
18(1.52%) 5.7 145

24(0.86%)

7.7

196

Nom. Outer
DiameterNominal Hub
Width

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

in

mm

in

mm

3.9

99

1.5

38

1.5

40

4.9

124

1.5

38

2.5

60

5.8

148

1.5

38

7.8

198

1.5

38

2

2.5

2.5

50

60

60

a 3.9 PD sprockets are not compatible with S4092 belts.

402

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
Nylon (FDA) Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
16
5.1 130(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.2

in
1.5

mm
132

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
1.25,
1.5
30
40
1.5

Maximum Load per Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprocket

No. ofTeeth
18
21

Nom. Pitch
Diameter
in
mm
5.7
145
6.7
170

1-1/4 in to 1-3/8
1 in to 1-3/16 in
in
lbf
N
lbf
N
300
1,330
340
1,510
225
1,000
275
1,220

Round Bore Size Range
1-7/16 in to1-3/4 in
1-13/16 in to 2 in 25 mm to 35 mm 40 mm to 50 mm
lbf
N
lbf
N
lbf
N
lbf
N
400
1,780
540
2,400
240
1,070
410
1,820
350
1,560
500
2,220
175
780
400
1,780

Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
18(1.52%) 5.7 145
21
6.7 170(1.12%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.8

148

2.0

51

6.8

172

2.0

51

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
ina
in
mma
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5
25 to
1 to 2bc50
1.5,40, 602.5

a Imperial key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

b in 1/16 in increments
c in 5 mm increments

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

403

SERIES 4000

a U.S. key sizes on round bore sprockets are based on ANSI standard B17.1-1967 (R1989) and metric key sizes are based on DIN standard 6885.

RADIUS BELTS
Polypropylene Composite Split Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
18(1.52%) 5.7 145

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

5.8

148

2.0

51

21
(1.12%)

6.7

170

6.8

172

2.0

51

1.5,
2.5

31
(0.51%)

9.9

251

10.1

257

2.0

51

3.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1.5,
40, 602.5
40, 60

Polyurethane Composite Split Sprockets

SERIES 4000

Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
31
9.9 251(0.51%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter
in
10.1

mm
257

Nom. Hub
Width

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
mm
in
in
mm
mm
1.50, 38, 44
3.5
1.67
2.5a

a The 2.5 in square bore is created by using a bore adapter in the 3.5 in square bore sprocket.

Machined Sprockets
Numberof Teeth(ChordalAction)18(1.52%)

404

Nom. Pitch
Diameter

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
5.7

in
5.8

in
1.5

mm
145

mm
148

mm
38

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
30, 402024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

RADIUS BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 86: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S4000 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in

in
mm
S4009 Flush Grid

mm

in

mm

in

mm

3.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
9.9

99
130
145
170
251

12
16
18
21
31

2.07-2.14
2.73-2.78
3.05-3.10
3.54-3.58
5.15-5.18

53-54
2.31
69-71
2.51
77-79
2.54
90-91
2.70
131-132
3.15
S4009 Flat Top

59
64
65
69
80

4.62
5.90
6.54
7.50
10.70

117
150
166
191
272

2.73
3.37
3.69
4.17
5.77

69
86
94
106
147

3.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
9.9

99
130
145
170
251

12
16
18
21
31

2.07-2.14
2.73-2.78
3.05-3.10
3.54-3.58
5.15-5.18

53-54
2.31
69-71
2.51
77-79
2.54
90-91
2.70
131-132
3.15
S4014 Flat Top

59
64
65
69
80

4.66
5.94
6.58
7.54
10.74

118
151
167
192
273

2.77
3.41
3.73
4.21
5.81

70
87
95
107
148

3.9
5.1

99
130

12
16

2.07-2.14
2.73-2.78

53-54
69-71

59
64

4.24
5.49

108
139

2.68
3.64

68
92

5.7
6.7
9.9

145
170
251

18
21
31

3.05-3.10
77-79
2.54
65
6.09
3.54-3.58
90-91
2.70
69
7.09
5.15-5.18
131-132
3.15
80
10.86
S4030 and S4031 7.5-in ProTrax Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs

155
180
276

3.95
4.43
5.93

100
113
151

3.9
5.1
5.8
6.7
9.9

99
130
147
170
251

12
16
18
21
31

2.07-2.17
2.73-2.78
3.05-3.10
3.54-3.58
5.15-5.18

118
152
168
193
274

2.77
3.459
3.779
4.259
5.859

70
88
96
108
149

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

53-54
67-71
77-79
90-91
131-132

2.31
2.51

2.31
2.51
2.54
2.7
3.15

59
64
65
69
80

4.66
5.989
6.629
7.589
10.789405

SERIES 4000

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

RADIUS BELTS
S4000 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)a
in
mm
in
mm
in
S4032 7.5-in ProTrax Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs

mm

in

mm

SERIES 4000

5.1
5.8
6.7
9.9

130
147
170
251

16
18
21
31

2.73-2.78
3.05-3.10
3.54-3.58
5.15-5.18

67-71
2.51
64
77-79
2.54
65
90-91
2.7
69
131-132
3.15
80
S4033 7.5-in ProTrax Sideflexing Flat Top

5.99
6.63
7.59
10.79

152
168
193
274

3.46
3.78
4.26
5.86

88
96
108
149

3.9
5.1
5.8
6.7
9.9

99
130
147
170
251

12
16
18
21
31

2.07-2.17
2.73-2.78
3.05-3.10
3.54-3.58
5.15-5.18

53-54
2.31
59
67-71
2.51
64
77-79
2.54
65
90-91
2.7
69
131-132
3.15
80
S4090, S4091, S4092 Sideflexing Flat Top

4.66
5.989
6.629
7.589
10.789

118
152
168
193
274

2.77
3.459
3.779
4.259
5.859

70
88
96
108
149

3.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
9.9

99
130
145
170
251

12
16
18
21
31

2.07-2.14
2.73-2.78
3.05-3.10
3.54-3.58
5.15-5.18

53-54
2.31
59
69-71
2.51
64
77-79
2.54
65
90-91
2.70
69
131-132
3.15
80
S4092 Sideflexing Square Friction Top

4.62
5.90
6.54
7.50
10.70

117
150
166
191
272

2.73
3.37
3.69
4.17
5.77

69
86
94
106
147

5.2
5.8
6.8
10.0

132
147
173
254

16
18
21
31

2.73-2.78
3.05-3.10
3.54-3.58
5.15

6.14
6.78
7.74
10.94

156
172
197
278

2.84
3.16
3.64
5.24

72
80
92
133

69-71
77-79
90-91
131

2.51
2.54
2.70
3.15

64
65
69
80

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S4000 Dead Plate Gap

in
3.9
5.1
5.7
6.7
9.9

406

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
99
130
145
170
251

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
12
16
18
21
31

in
0.066
0.050
0.044
0.038
0.025

mm
1.7
1.3
1.1
1.0
0.6

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINESPIRAL BELTS
ENGINEERING ANALYSIS FOR SPIRAL AND RADIUS BELTS
Intralox can provide an engineering analysis for spiral and radiusapplications, to determine the estimated belt pull, and ensure that the belt isstrong enough for the application. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
The following information is required for an engineering analysis:• Any environmental conditions which can affect the friction coefficient. For
dirty or abrasive conditions, use higher-than-normal friction coefficients.
• Belt width• Length of each straight section• Angle, direction, and inside radius of each turning section• Carryway and hold down wearstrip materials.
• Product load lbf/ft² (N/m²)• Product accumulation conditions• Belt speed• Elevation changes in each section• Operating temperatures• Sprocket and shaft specifications
Intralox can help select radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral belts
for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

407

408

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 1.0
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (1.0TR)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
18
50
1.0
0.85 x 0.88

mm
50.8
660
1270
25.4
21.6 x 22.5

56%
22%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2600

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 1.0 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).
• Use the Intralox Engineering Program to predict strength
requirements for radius applications, and ensure that the belt is strong
enough for the application.
• For belt widths under 26 in (660 mm) and over 50 in (1270 mm),contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside (collapsed) edge of the
spiral: 12 in (304.8 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter
0.24 in (6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,300
1,100

N/m
19,000
16,100Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
300
300

N
1,330
1,330

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.46
1.24

kg/m²
7.13
6.05

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

409

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 1.1
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (1.1 turn ratio)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
15
44
1.00
0.85 × 0.88

mm
50.8
381
1118
25.4
21.6 × 22.5

56%
22%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2600

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 1.1 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).
• For belt widths under 15 in (381 mm) and over 44 in (1118 mm),contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside (collapsed) edge of the
spiral: 9.0 in (228.6 mm).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,300
1,100

N/m
19,000
16,100Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
300
300

N
1,330
1,330

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.44
1.24

kg/m²
7.03
6.05

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

410

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 1.6, 2.0
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (1.6 Turn Ratio)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
24
60
1.00
0.94 × 0.65

mm
50.8
610
1524
25.4
23.8 × 16.5

54%
40%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2600

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 1.6 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).
• When considering belt widths under 24 in (610 mm), contact Intralox
Customer Service• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropyleneb
SELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,700
1,500
1,500

N/m
24,80021,90021,900Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
375
300
300

N
1,670
1,330
1,330

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 200°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.41
1.01
1.24

kg/m²
6.88
4.93
6.05

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

b Available in 1.6 radius only.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

411

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 2.2, 2.5, and 3.2
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (2.2 Turn Ratio)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
24
60
1.00
0.94 × 0.65

mm
50.8
610
1524
25.4
23.8 × 16.5

57%
32%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2600

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).
• When considering belt widths under 24 in (610 mm), contact Intralox
Customer Service• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
SELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,700
1,500
1,500

N/m
24,80021,90021,900Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475
400
375

N
2,110
1,780
1,670

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 200°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.54
1.04
1.24

kg/m²
7.52
5.08
6.05

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

412

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral Rounded Friction Top
in
2.00
24
60
1.00
0.94 × 0.65

Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

mm
50.8
610
1524
25.4
23.8 × 16.5

Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Friction Top is available in white polypropylene with white rubber, blue
polypropylene with black rubber, and natural polyethylene with whiterubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• When considering belt widths under 24 in (610 mm), contact Intralox
Customer Service• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for minimum indent requirements.
Belt Data

Base/Friction
Top

Default Rod
Material,
Diameter
0.24 in(6.1 mm)lbf/ftAcetalBlue/black

Acetal

1,700 24,800

AcetalWhite/white

Acetal

1,700 24,800

Polypropylene

Blue/black

Acetal

1,500 21,900

Polypropylene

White/white

Acetal

1,500 21,900

Base Belt
Material

Belt StrengthN/mSpiral Belt
Strength 1.6 TR(2.2, 2.5, 3.2 TR)
lbf
375
(475)
375
(475)
300
(400)
300
(400)

N
1,670
(2,110)1,670(2,110)1,330(1,780)1,330(1,780)Temperature
Range(continuous)°F°C

34 to 150 1 to 66
35 to 150 2 to 66
34 to 150 1 to 66
34 to 150 1 to 66

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.44(1.54)
1.44(1.54)
1.01(1.04)
1.01(1.04)

kg/m²
7.03(7.52)
7.03(7.52)
4.93(5.08)
4.93(5.08)

Friction Top
Hardness

FDA
(USA)

EU
MCa

55 Shore Abc

55 Shore Adc

55 Shore Ad55 Shore Adca European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
b Fully compliantc EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
d FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

413

SPIRAL BELTS
Dual Turning 2.0
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
18
60
1.0
0.94 x 0.65

mm
50.8
457.2
1524
25.4
23.8 x 16.5

57%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2600

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Do not use in spiral conveyor systems.
• Designed for standard drive and i-Drive systems.
• Rod insertion is accomplished from the edge of the belt. No special
tools are required.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Turn ratio of 2.0 times belt width (radius measured at inside edge).
• Consult the Intralox Engineering Program and i-Drive Program forspecific widths not listed here.

2.0"(50.8 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm)
0.59"
(15 mm)0.295"(7.5 mm)

Belt Data
Base Belt
Material
AcetalPolypropylene
SELM

414

Default Rod Material,
Diameter
0.24 in (6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,500
1,500
1,500

N/m
21,90021,90021,900Temperature Range(continuous)
Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 200°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.54
1.04
1.24

kg/m²
7.52
5.08
6.05

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Referencea
Wearstrips

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftc
3

26
660
3
28
711
5
30
762
5
32
813
5
34
864
5
36
914
5
38
965
5
40
1,016
5
42
1,067
5
44
1,118
7
46
1,168
7
48
1,219
7
50
1,270
7
52
1,321
7
54
1,372
7
56
1,422
7
58
1,473
7
60
1,524
9
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 6 in
(152 mm) centerline spacing

Carryway3

Returnway
3

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Contact Intralox Customer Service Maximum 12 in (305 mm)
for more information.
centerline spacinga For low-tension capstan drive spirals, contact Intralox Customer Service for suggested carryway support recommendations. Support belt edges using support

rollers on drive shafts. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

b If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 1.00 in(25.4 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 24 in (610 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

c This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets. For lockdown location, see Retainer Rings and Center Sprocket Offset.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

0.7
0.6

6.0

A 0.5

A 4.0

5.0

0.4

10T

0.3

8T
0.2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

203

D

7.0

178
152
127

E

102

3.0

76

2.0

51

1.0
0%

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D solid line: square bore sprockets
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of E dashed line: round bore sprockets
A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

90%

100%

the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

415

SERIES 2600

Belt Width Rangeb
in
mm
24
610

SPIRAL BELTS
Half Tooth Sprocketsb
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

mm

10
(4.89%)

6.7

170

0.8

20

6.5

165

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm

1-1/2

40

b Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred method of locking down sprockets and for proper sprocket timing.

SERIES 2600

Machined Sprocketsc
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

8 (7.61%) 5.2

132

5.4

136

0.8

10
(4.89%)

165

6.7

170

0.8

6.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
1-1/4, 1-1/2,
20 1-7/16, 2-1/2
40, 601-1/2, 220

1-1/4, 1-1/2,
1-7/16, 2-1/2
1-1/2, 2

40, 60c Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred method of locking down sprockets and for proper sprocket timing.

EZ Clean™ Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
10
6.5 165(4.89%)

416

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.7

in
0.8

mm
170

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
20.32
2.5

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Support Wheel
Pitch Diameter
in

mm

5.2

132

6.5

165

Available Bore Sizes
Round in Square in Round mm
1.25,
1-7/16, 1.5, 2.5
1.5, 2
1.25,
1-7/16,
1.5, 2

1.5, 2.5

Squaremm40, 6040, 60

Universal Sideguards
Available Materials

SERIES 2600

Available Height
in
mm
0.50
12.7
1.00
25.4

Acetal, SELM

2.00a
50.8a
• Maximizes product carrying capacity. Sideguards fit to the very edge ofthe belt, with no indent.
• Assembly does not require “finger cuts” on the modules, so the belt
beam strength is uncompromised.
• Compatible turn ratios: 1.6, 2.2, 2.5, and 3.2.

a Only available in 1.6 TR

Overlapping Sideguards
Available Height
in
mm
0.50
12.7
1.00
25.4

Available Materials
Acetal, SELM

• Maximizes product carrying capacity. Sideguards fit to the very edge ofthe belt, with no indent.
• Assembly does not require “finger cuts” on the modules, so the belt
beam strength is not compromised.
• Makes the outer edge of the belt more snag-resistant.
• Keeps small products from falling through belt gaps.
• Turn ratios for 0.50 in (12.7 mm) acetal overlapping sideguards are 1.6,
2.2, 2.5, and 3.2.
• Turn ratio for 1.00 in (25.4 mm) overlapping sideguards is 1.6 only.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

417

SPIRAL BELTS
Lane Dividers
Available Height
in
mm
0.75
19.0

Available Materials
Acetal, polypropylene• Assembly does not require finger cuts on the modules, so the belt beamstrength is uncompromised.
• For 1.6 turn radius modules, lane dividers can be placed on indents of
1.5 in(38.1 mm), 2.5 in (63.5 mm), 3.5 in (88.9 mm), 4.5 in (114 mm),11.5 in (292 mm), and up, in 1.00 in (25.4 mm) increments.
• For 2.2 turn radius modules, lane dividers can be placed on indents of
4.5 in (114 mm) and up in 1.00 in (25.4 mm) increments.

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSSERIES 2600

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 87: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S2600 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description

A

Pitch Diameterinmm

Nominal OD
in
mm

5.2
6.5

132
165

5.4
6.7

137
170

8
10

5.2
6.5

132
165

5.4
6.7

137
170

8
10

Numberof Teeth

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)aininmm
Spiral 1.0, 1.1, 1.6, 2.0, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2
2.12-2.32
54-59
2.25
2.78-2.94
71-75
2.54
Spiral Rounded Friction Top

mm

in

mm

in

mm

57
65

5.23
6.47

133
164

2.97
3.59

75
91

2.12-2.32
2.78-2.94

57
65

5.46
6.71

139
170

3.21
3.83

82
97

54-59
71-75

2.25
2.54

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

418

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2600 Dead Plate Gap

in
5.2
6.5

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
132
165

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
8
10

in
0.200
0.158

mm
5.1
4.0

HOLD DOWN WEARSTRIPS
The use of hold down wearstrips along both belt edges over the full carryway is recommended, except inheavily loaded or high-speed applications.
• For information about conveyor design for hold down wearstrips, see Hold Down Wearstrips in the Design
Guidelines chapter.

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONSNOTE: For assistance with radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral selections, contact Intralox
Customer Service. Run the Engineering Program to ensure that the belt is strong enough for the radiusapplication in question. See Engineering Program Analysis for Spiral and Radius for more information.

DESIGN GUIDE SUMMARY
For typical layout configurations, see Radius Conveyors in the Design Guidelines chapter.
• The minimum turn radius for S2600 is the turn radius times the belt width, measured from the inside edge.
• The minimum straight run required between turns of opposing direction is 2.0 times the belt width. Shorter
straight sections lead to high wear on the edge guide rail and high pull stresses in the belt.
• There is no minimum straight run required between turns that are in the same direction.
• The minimum final straight run (leading to the drive shaft) must be a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m)
is not feasible, shorter lengths (down to 1.5 times the belt width) require a gravity take-up to avoid
sprocket wear and tracking problems. See Take-Ups.
• The minimum length of the first straight run (immediately after the idle shaft) is 1.5 times the belt width.
When shorter lengths are required (down to 1.0 × the width), an idle roller can be used in place ofsprockets.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

419

SERIES 2600

• For information about Intralox hold down wearstrips, see Custom Wearstrips.

SPIRAL BELTS

SERIES 2600
420

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 1.6
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (1.6 TR)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
24
60
0.50
0.38 × 0.64

mm
50.8
610
1524
12.7
9.52 × 16.5

45%
27%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2700

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• When considering belt widths under 24 in (610 mm), contact Intralox
Customer Service• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 1.6 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
2,000
1,060

N/m
29,20015,500Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
375
300

N
1,670
1,330

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.74
1.36

kg/m²
8.50
6.64

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

421

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 2.2
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (2.2 TR)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
24
60
0.50
0.38 x 0.64

mm
50.8
610
1524
12.7
9.52 x 16.5

48%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2700

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• When considering belt widths under 24 in (610 mm), contact Intralox
Customer Service• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
SELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,700
1,500
1,060

N/m
24,80021,90015,500Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
375
300
300

N
1,670
1,330
1,330

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 200°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.85
1.26
1.44

kg/m²
9.03
6.15
7.03

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

4222024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 2.7
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (2.7 TR)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
2.00
24
60
0.50
0.38 x 0.64

mm
50.8
610
1524
12.7
9.5 x 16.5

48%
23%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• When considering belt widths under 24 in (610 mm), contact Intralox
Customer Service• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 2.7 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).

SERIES 2700

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

2.00" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.00" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.00" NOM.
(50.8 mm)2.00" NOM.
(50.8 mm)
0.59"
(15 mm)0.295"(7.5 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalPolypropylene
SELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,700
1,500
1,060

N/m
24,80021,90015,500Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
375
300
300

N
1,670
1,330
1,330

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200
34 to 200
-50 to 200°C-46 to 93
1 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.86
1.26
1.44

kg/m²
9.08
6.15
7.03

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

423

SPIRAL BELTS
Dual Turning 2.0
Pitch
Minimum Width (See ProductNotes.)
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended, see
Product Notes)
Minimum Open Area (2.0 TR)
Hinge Style

in
2.00
12

mm
50.8
304.8

60
0.50
0.38 x 0.64

1524
12.7
9.5 x 16.5
44%
23%
Open

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2700

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Do not use in spiral conveyor systems.
• Open area calculations for S2700 Dual Turning 2.0 are unique to thisstyle, and are not directly comparable to other S2700 styles.
• Rods are inserted from the edge of the belt. No special tools are
required.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for standard drive and i-Drive systems.
• Turn ratio of 2.0 times belt width (measured from inside edge).
• When considering belt widths under 12 in (305 mm), contact Intralox
Customer Service• Consult the Intralox Engineering Program and I-Drive Program forspecific widths not listed here.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.

2.0"(50.8 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm)2.0"
(50.8 mm)
0.59"
(15 mm)0.295"(7.5 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalAcetalSELM
SELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalNylon
AcetalNylon

Temperature Range(continuous)a

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,700
1,700
1,060
1,060

N/m
24,80024,80015,50015,500Curved Belt Strength
For curved belt strength
calculations, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 212°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 100

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.84
1.81
1.42
1.40

kg/m²
8.98
8.84
6.93
6.84

a Belt functions mechanically up to 240°F (116°C). Belt used in the temperature window of 212°F to 240°F (100°C to 116°C) is not FDA-compliant.

424

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Side Drive
Module Pitch
Drive Tooth Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area
Hinge Style

in
2.0
1.0
10
42
0.50
0.38 x 0.64

mm
50.8
25.4
254.0
1066.812.7
9.5 x 16.5
44%
Open

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2700

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual

for more information.
• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status before
designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Do not use in live-drum spiral conveyor systems.
• Teeth along the belt edge drive the belt and allow for atypical configurations andlong conveyors without transfer points.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials are available.
Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material combination for yourapplication.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product Line.
• A S2700 Spiral 1.6 module can be used on the inner edge to achieve a smaller
turn ratio, but only for single-direction curve applications.
• The Intralox Side Drive Program can help predict the strength requirements ofmost side-driven applications, ensuring that the belt is strong enough for theapplication. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• The Z-dimension is the distance between the edge of the belt (not including
drive teeth) and the outer diameter of the sprocket. Maintain this dimension toensure proper engagement of the belt and sprocket.
• S2700 lane dividers can be used with this belt, but sideguards cannot be used.
• Designed for side-driven applications with a minimum turn radius of 2.0 times
the belt width (measured from inside edge to outer edge, not including drive
teeth).

0.0625 in(1.5 mm)1.00 in1.00 in1.00 in1.00 in1.00 in(25.4 mm) (25.4 mm) (25.4 mm) (25.4 mm) (25.4 mm)

0.140 in(3.6 mm)0.59 in(15.0 mm)0.295 in(7.5 mm)

B

B

B

Belt Data
Straight Belt
StrengthDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 inBelt Material(6.1 mm)lbf/ft N/mAcetalAcetal175 2,550

Curved Belt Strengtha
lbf
150

N
667

Temperature Range(continuous)

Belt Mass°F
40 to 200

FDA
lb/ft² kg/m² (USA)c
2.17 10.6°C
4 to 93

AgencyAcceptability
EU
MCb
c

a Published curved belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Contact Intralox Customer Service for accurate comparison of

curved belt strengths.

b European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Directive 2002/72/EC and all its amendments to date.

c Fully compliant.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

425

SPIRAL BELTS
Side Drive V2Module Pitch
Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximately)Open Area
Hinge Style

in
2.0
1.0
10
42
0.50
0.38 x 0.64

mm
50.8
25.4
254.0
1067
12.7
9.5 x 16.5
44%
Open

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2700

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Do not use in live-drum spiral conveyor systems.
• Flat belt surface allows for easier product transfer over the belt end.
• Teeth along the belt edge drive the belt and allow for atypicalconfigurations and long conveyors without transfer points.
• The hold down tab location enables full use of the entire belt width.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for side-driven applications with a minimum turn radius of
2.0 times the belt width (measured from inside edge to outer edge, notincluding drive teeth).
• The Intralox Side Drive Program can help predict the strength
requirements of most side-driven applications, ensuring that the belt isstrong enough for the application. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• The distance between the belt edge (not including drive teeth) and the
sprocket outer diameter is critical. Maintain this dimension to ensure
proper sprocket engagement.
• For single-direction curve applications, a S2700 Spiral 1.6 module canbe used on the inner edge to achieve a smaller turn ratio.
• S2700 lane dividers can be used with this belt, but sideguards cannot
be used.

0.0625 in(1.5 mm)0.59 in(15.0 mm)1.00 in1.00 in1.00 in1.00 in1.00 in(25.4 mm) (25.4 mm) (25.4 mm) (25.4 mm) (25.4 mm)

0.295 in(7.5 mm)0.140 in (3.6 mm)

0.75 in(19.2 mm)0.72 in(18.4 mm)0.55 in (13.9 mm)
0.33 in(8.4 mm)0.95 in(24.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
Acetal426

Default Rod
Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalBelt Strength

Curved Belt Strength

lbf/ft
175

lbf
150

N/m
2,550

N
667

Temperature Range(continuous)°F
40 to 200

°C
4 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.17

kg/m²
10.59

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral Rounded Friction Top
in
mm
2
50.8
Varies according to base belt

Module Pitch
Minimum Width
Maximum Width
Width Increments
Hinge Style

0.50

12.7
Open

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Available in blue polypropylene (PP) and blue acetal with blue rubber or
blue PP and blue acetal Mini Rib only.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of Product
Line.
• Compatible with S2700 Side Drive, S2700 Dual Turning 2.0, andS2700 Spiral 1.6, 2.2, and 2.7.
• For minimum indent requirements, contact Intralox Customer Service.

2.00 in NOM(50.8 mm)2.00 in NOM(50.8 mm)2.00 in NOM(50.8 mm)

SERIES 2700

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

0.272 in
(6.9 mm)0.295 in(7.5 mm)0.59 in(15 mm)Figure 88: Module with Friction Top insert
2.00 in NOM(50.8 mm)2.00 in NOM(50.8 mm)2.00 in NOM(50.8 mm)

0.203 in(5.16 mm)0.295 in(7.5 mm)0.59 in(15 mm)Figure 89: Module with Mini Rib insert
Belt Data

Base Belt
Material
AcetalAcetalDefault Rod
Material,
Diameter
0.24 in(6.1 mm)

Accessory
Material
Friction Top insert:
blue PP base with Acetal
rubber overlay
Mini Rib insert: blue Acetal
acetalBelt Strengtha

Spiral Belt
Strength albf/ft

N/m

lbf

N

°F

°C

lb/ft²kg/m²

Friction Top FDA
Hardness (USA)

175

2,550

150

667

-50 to 200-46 to 93

2.17

10.59

54 Shore A

c

d

175

2,550

150

667

-50 to 200-46 to 93

2.17

10.59

–

c

d

Temperature Range(continuous)

AgencyAcceptability

Belt Mass aEU
MCba Provided values are for Side Drive base belts. Values for other compatible base belts are provided on the product page for each belt. Contact Intralox Customer
Service for more information.
b European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
c FDA Compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
d EU Compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

427

SPIRAL BELTS
Sprocket and Support Quantity Referencea
Belt Width Rangeb
in
mm
24
610

Wearstripsd

Minimum Number of Sprockets
Per Shaftc
5

SERIES 2700

26
660
5
28
711
5
30
762
5
32
813
5
34
864
7
36
914
7
38
965
7
40
1,016
7
42
1,067
7
44
1,118
7
46
1,168
9
48
1,219
9
50
1,270
9
52
1,321
9
54
1,372
9
56
1,422
9
58
1,473
11
60
1,524
11
For other widths, use an odd number of sprockets at Maximum 8 in
(203 mm) centerline spacing.

Carryway2

Returnway
2

2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
Maximum 25 in (635 mm)
centerline spacing

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
Maximum 30 in (762 mm)
centerline spacinga For low-tension capstan drive spirals, contact Intralox Customer Service for suggested carryway support recommendations. Support belt edges using support

rollers on drive shafts. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

b If belt width exceeds a number listed in the table, see the sprocket and support material minimums for the next larger width range. Belts are available in 0.50 in(12.7 mm) increments beginning with minimum width of 24 in (610 mm). If the actual width is critical, contact Intralox Customer Service.

c This number is a minimum. Heavy-load applications can require additional sprockets. For lockdown location, see Retainer Rings and Center Sprocket Offset.

d Carryway spacing depends on a distributed 2 lb/ft² at 65°F (18.3°C) for acetal belts with acetal rods with a 2 in (50.8 mm) and 4 in (101.6 mm) overhang.

Strength Factor

Sprocket Spacing as a Function of Belt Strength Utilized

1.0
0.9
0.8

8.0

0.7
0.6

6.0

152

A 0.5

5.0

A 4.0

127

7.0

0.4
0.3

0.2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

203

D

178

E

102

10T

3.0

76

8T

2.0

51

15

B
V belt speed, ft/min (m/min)
L shaft centerline distance,ft (m)

20

1.0
0%

25

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

C
A sprocket spacing, in
B sprocket spacing, mm
C percentage of allowable belt strength utilized
D solid line: square bore sprockets
To determine the speed/length ratio, divide the belt speed by the shaft
centerline distance. The strength factor is found at the intersection of E dashed line: round bore sprockets
A strength factor
B speed/length ratio (V/L)
T number of teeth

B

90%

100%

the speed/length ratio and the appropriate sprocket line. See Belt
Selection Instructions for more information.

428

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Acetal Sprocketsa
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in

mm

in

8 (7.61%) 5.2

132

5.4

136

0.8

10
(4.85%)

165

6.7

170

0.8

6.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
1-1/4, 1-1/2,
20.32 1-7/16, 2-1/2
60
2
20.32

1-1/4, 1-1/2,
1-7/16, 2-1/2
240, 60a Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred method of locking down sprockets and proper sprocket timing.

Pitch Diameter
in

mm

5.2

132

6.5

165

SERIES 2700

Support Wheel
Available Bore Sizes
Round in Square in Round mm
1.25,
1-7/16, 1.5, 2.5
1.5, 2
1.25,
1.5, 2.5
1-7/16,
1.5, 2

Squaremm40, 6040, 60Overlapping Sideguards
Available Heightinmm
Available Materials
0.50
12.7
Acetal, SELM
1.00
25.4
• Maximizes product carrying capacity. Sideguards fit to the very edge ofthe belt, with no indent.
• Assembly does not require “finger cuts” on the modules, so the belt
beam strength is not compromised.
• Makes the outer edge of the belt more snag-resistant.
• Keeps small products from falling through belt gaps.
• Turn ratio for 0.50 in (12.7 mm) acetal overlapping sideguards in acetalis 1.6.
• The turn ratio for 1.00 in (25.4 mm) overlapping sideguard is 1.6 only.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

429

SPIRAL BELTS
Universal Sideguards
Available Height
in
mm
0.50
12.7
1.00

25.4

2.00a

50.8a

Available Materials
Acetal, SELM

• Maximizes product carrying capacity. Sideguards fit to the very edge ofthe belt, with no indent.
• Assembly does not require “finger cuts” on the modules, so the belt
beam strength is not compromised.

a Only available in 1.6 TR

Lane Dividers

SERIES 2700

Available Height
in
mm
0.75
19
2.00
50.8

Available Materials

Acetal, SELMCONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 90: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

430

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
S2700 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description

A

Pitch Diameterinmm

Nominal OD
in
mm

5.2
6.5

132
165

5.4
6.7

137
170

8
10

5.2
6.5

132
165

5.4
6.7

137
170

8
10

Numberof Teeth

B

Range (bottom to top)ain
mmin
Spiral 1.6, 2.2, 2.7
2.12-2.32
54-59
2.25
2.78-2.94
71-75
2.54
Spiral Rounded Friction Top
2.12–2.32
2.78–2.94

54–59
71–75

2.25
2.54

C

E

mm

in

mm

in

mm

57
65

5.23
6.47

133
164

2.97
3.59

75
91

57
65

5.50
6.74

140
171

3.24
3.87

82
98

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP

S2700 Dead Plate Gap

in
5.2
6.5

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
mm
132
165

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
8
10

in
0.200
0.158

mm
5.1
4.0

HOLD DOWN WEARSTRIPS
The use of hold down wearstrips along both belt edges over the full carryway is recommended, except inheavily loaded or high-speed applications.
• For information about Intralox hold down wearstrips, see Custom Wearstrips.
• For information about conveyor design for hold down wearstrips, see Hold Down Wearstrips in the Design
Guidelines chapter.

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONSNOTE: For assistance with radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral selections, contact Intralox
Customer Service. Run the Engineering Program to ensure that the belt is strong enough for the radiusapplication in question. See Engineering Program Analysis for Spiral and Radius for more information.

DESIGN GUIDE SUMMARY
For typical layout configurations, see Radius Conveyors in the Design Guidelines chapter.
• The minimum turn radius for the standard edge S2700 is 2.2 times the belt width, measured from theinside edge. For the tight turning style, the minimum turn radius is 1.7 times the belt width.
• The minimum straight run required between turns of opposing direction is 2.0 times the belt width. Shorter
straight sections lead to high wear on the edge guide rail and high pull stresses in the belt.
• There is no minimum straight run required between turns that are in the same direction.
• The minimum final straight run (leading to the drive shaft) must be a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m)
is not feasible, shorter lengths (down to 1.5 times the belt width) require a gravity take-up to avoid
sprocket wear and tracking problems. See Take-Ups.
• The minimum length of the first straight run (immediately after the idle shaft) is 1.5 times the belt width.
When shorter lengths are required (down to 1.0 × the width), an idle roller can be used in place ofsprockets.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

431

SERIES 2700

Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.

SPIRAL BELTS

SERIES 2700
432

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral GTech 1.6
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
24
1.00
1.1 x 0.42

mm
38.1
609.6
25.4
27.9 x 10.7

50%
36%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt aids productfreezing and cooling.
• Robust edge feature adds strength to the outside edge of the belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 1.6 times the belt width (measured from insideedge).
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside belt edge and from theoutside belt edge can vary. Contact Intralox Customer Service todetermine exact placement.

SERIES 2800

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

1.5"(38.1 mm)1.5"
(38.1 mm)1.5"
(38.1 mm)1.5"
(38.1 mm)0.295"(7.45 mm)0.59" (14.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
500

N/m
23,4007,300

Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475
375

N
2,110
1,670

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.60
1.28

kg/m²
7.81
6.25

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please contact Intralox Customer Service for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

433

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral GTech Rounded Friction Top
in
1.5
24
1.00
1.1 x 0.42

Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)
Hinge Style

mm
38.1
609.6
25.4
27.9 x 10.7
Open

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2800

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Robust edge feature adds strength to the outside edge of the belt.
• Available in white polypropylene with white rubber or blue
polypropylene with high-performance blue rubber.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside belt edge and from theoutside belt edge can vary. Contact Intralox Customer Service todetermine exact placement.
• Must have a 2.0 in (50.8 mm) minimum gap between friction inserts
for correct sprocket placement.

0.535 in(13.59 mm)

1.50 in(38.0 mm)1.50 in(38.0 mm)

.24 in(6.1 mm)1.50 in(38.0 mm)

.59 in(15.0 mm)

Belt Data

Base/Friction
Top

Default Rod
Material,
Diameter
0.24 in(6.1 mm)lbf/ftAcetalWhite/white

AcetalAcetalHighPerformance FT Acetal
blue/blue

Base Belt
Material

Belt StrengthN/mSpiral Belt
Strengtha

Temperature
Range(continuous)

Agency1,700 24,800

lbf
375
(475)

N
°F
°C
1,670 34 to 150 1 to 66(2,110)lb/ft²
1.44(1.54)

kg/m²
7.03(7.52)

1,700 24,800

375
(475)

1,670
(2,110) 34 to 212

1.44(1.54)

7.03(7.52)

1 to100

Acceptabilityb

Belt Mass
Friction Top
Hardness

FDA
(USA)

EU MCc55 Shore Ade

59 Shore Adea Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Contact an Intralox spiral engineer for accurate comparison of
spiral belt strengths.
b Before Intralox developed S2800, USDA-FSIS Meat and Poultry discontinued publishing a list of acceptable new products designed for food contact. As of theprinting of this manual, third-party approvals are being investigated, but are not yet sanctioned by the USDA-FSIS.
c European Migration Certificate providing approval for food contact according to EU Regulation 10/2011.
d FDA compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.
e EU compliant with restriction: Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods.

434

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral GTech 2.2 and 3.2
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
24
1.00
1.1 x 0.42

mm
38.1
609.6
25.4
27.9 x 10.7

50%
36%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt aids productfreezing and cooling.
• Robust edge feature adds strength to the outside edge of the belt.
• Open hinge and slot design simplifies cleaning.
• Lightweight belt with extreme beam strength prevents bowing andbuckling.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Designed for low-tension, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width (measured from theinside edge).
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside belt edge and from theoutside belt edge can vary. Contact Intralox Customer Service todetermine exact placement.

SERIES 2800

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

1.5"(38.1 mm)1.5"
(38.1 mm)1.5"
(38.1 mm)1.5"
(38.1 mm)0.295"(7.45 mm)0.59" (14.9 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
500

N/m
23,4007,300

Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475
375

N
2,110
1,670

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.60
1.27

kg/m²
7.81
6.3

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

435

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral DirectDrive™
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
24
1.00
1.1 x 0.42

mm
38.1
609.6
25.4
27.9 x 10.7

50%
36%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2800

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, relatively strong belt with smooth surface grid.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt to aid productfreezing and cooling.
• Robust edge feature adds strength to the outside edge of the belt.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside belt edge and from theoutside belt edge can vary. Contact Intralox Customer Service todetermine exact placement.

1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)0.295 in(7.5 mm)0.590 in
(15 mm)Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM
Detectable MX

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalDetectable MX

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
500
1,600

N/m
23,4007,300
23,400Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475
375
475

N
2,110
1,670
2,110

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.60
1.27
1.85

kg/m²
7.81
6.2
9.03

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Contact Intralox Customer Service for accurate comparison of

spiral belt strengths.

436

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Acetal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
13
6.2 157(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.4

in
1.2

mm
163

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
mm
in
in
mm
mm
30.5 1-7/16, 1.5,
40, 601-1/2, 2 2.5

Support Wheel

in
6.2

mm
157

Available Bore Sizes
Round in Square in Round mm
1-7/16, 2 1.5, 2.5

SERIES 2800

Pitch Diameter

Squaremm40, 60Overlapping Sideguards
Available Heightinmm
Available Materials
0.50
12.7
Acetal
1.00
25.4
Acetal• Maximizes product carrying capacity. Sideguards fit to the very edge ofthe belt, with no indent.
• Assembly does not require “finger cuts” on the modules, so the belt
beam strength is not compromised.
• Makes the outer edge of the belt more snag-resistant.
• Keeps small products from falling through belt gaps.
• Turn ratio for 0.50 in (12.7 mm) overlapping sideguards is 1.6.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

437

SPIRAL BELTS
Lane Dividers
Available Height
in
mm
0.75
19

Available Materials
Acetal, SELM

• Assembly does not require finger cuts on the modules, so the belt beamstrength is not compromised.
• Lane dividers can be spaced 2 in (50.8 mm) apart along the width of thebelt.
• Minimum indent requirements: contact Intralox Customer Service.

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSSERIES 2800

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 91: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S2800 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameterinmm

Numberof Teeth

6.2

157

13

6.2

157

13

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ainmm
mm
Spiral GTech 1.6, 2.2 and 3.2 and DirectDrive
2.75-2.84
70-72
2.51
64
Spiral GTech Rounded Friction Top
in2.75-2.84

70-72

2.51

64

in

mm

in

mm

6.27

159

3.49

89

6.51

165

3.74

95

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

438

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2800 Dead Plate Gap

in
6.2

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diametermm
157

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
13

in
0.091

mm
2.3

HOLD DOWN WEARSTRIPS
The use of hold down wearstrips along both belt edges over the full carryway is recommended, except inheavily loaded or high-speed applications.
• For information about Intralox hold down wearstrips, see Custom Wearstrips.

SERIES 2800

• For information about conveyor design for hold down wearstrips, see Hold Down Wearstrips in the Design
Guidelines chapter.

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONSNOTE: For assistance with radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral selections, contact Intralox
Customer Service. Run the Engineering Program to ensure that the belt is strong enough for the radiusapplication in question. See Engineering Program Analysis for Spiral and Radius for more information.

DESIGN GUIDE SUMMARY
For typical layout configurations, see Radius Conveyors in the Design Guidelines chapter.
• The minimum turn radius for the S2800 standard edge is 1.6 times the belt width, measured from theinside edge.
• The minimum required straight run between turns of opposing direction is 2.0 times the belt width. Shorter
straight sections lead to high wear on the edge guide rail and high pull stresses in the belt.
• There is no minimum straight run required between turns that are in the same direction.
• The minimum final straight run leading to the drive shaft is a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m) is not
feasible, shorter lengths, down to 1.5 times the belt width, require a gravity take-up to avoid sprocket wear
and tracking problems. For more information, see Take-Ups.
• The minimum length of the first straight run immediately after the idle shaft is 1.5 times the belt width.
When shorter lengths are required, down to 1.0 × the width, an idle roller can be used in place ofsprockets.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

439

SPIRAL BELTS

SERIES 2800
4402024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
DirectDrive™ Stacker
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
12
2.00
1.1 x 0.42

mm
38.1
304.8
50.8
27.9 x 10.7

50%
36%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox
Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

SERIES 2850

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, strong belt with smooth surface grid for good productrelease.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt to aid productfreezing and cooling.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sideplates are permanently installed and cannot be replaced.
• Designed for stacker applications using patented DirectDrive
technology.
• Tier spacing: available in 60 mm, 80 mm, or 100 mm.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.

0.295 in(7.45 mm)0.59 in(14.9 mm)1.50 in(38.1 mm)1.50 in(38.1 mm)1.50 in(38.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft1,600

N/m
23,400Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475

N
2,110

Temperature Range(continuous)b°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.96

kg/m²
9.57

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

b Sideflexing applications must not exceed 180°F (82°C).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

441

SPIRAL BELTS
Acetal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
13
6.2 157(1.92%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.4

in
1.2

mm
163

mm
30.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
2,
1.5,
40, 601-7/16
2.5

Support Wheel

SERIES 2850

Pitch Diameter
in
6.2

442

mm
157

Available Bore Sizes
Round in Square in Round mm
1-7/16, 2 1.5, 2.5

Squaremm40, 602024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 92: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S2850 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
6.2

157

Numberof Teeth
13

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
2.75-2.84

inmm
DirectDrive Stacker
70-72
2.51

mm

in

mm

in

mm

64

6.27

159

3.49

89

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2850 Dead Plate Gap

in
6.2

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diametermm
1572024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
13

in
0.091

mm
2.3

443

SERIES 2850

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

SPIRAL BELTS

SERIES 2850
444

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral DirectDrive™ (DD)
Pitch
Minimum Width (See ProductNotes.)
Maximum Width (See ProductNotes.)
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area (collapsed)
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
13.5

mm
38.1
343

61.7

1567

1.0
0.52 x 0.39

25.4
13 x 10

44%
26%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2900

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Width dimension includes tooth protrusion.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Robust edge feature adds strength to the outside edge of the belt.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt to aid productfreezing and cooling.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside belt edge and from theoutside belt edge can vary. Contact Intralox Customer Service todetermine exact placement.

1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)1.50 in NOM.
(38.1 mm)0.295 in(7.5 mm)0.590 in
(15 mm)Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM
Detectable MX

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalDetectable MX

Straight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
500
1,600

N/m
23,4007,300
23,400Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475
375
475

N
2,110
1,670
2,110

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lbf/ft²
1.78
1.46
2.08

kg/m²
8.69
7.13
10.16

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

445

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 1.6
Pitch
Minimum Width (See ProductNotes.)
Maximum Width (See ProductNotes.)
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
13.5

mm
38.1
343

61.7

1567

0.5
0.52 x 0.39

12.7
13 x 10

44%
26%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox

SERIES 2900

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt aids productfreezing and cooling.
• Robust edge feature adds strength to the outside edge of the belt.
• Cage-friendly inside edge and frame-friendly outside edge
• Enhanced beam stiffness.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Eliminates product contamination from metal-wear debris.
• Enables simple, quick repairs and changeovers.
• Designed for friction drive, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 1.6 times the belt width (measured from theinside edge).
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside belt edge and from theoutside belt edge can vary. Contact Intralox Customer Service todetermine exact placement.

1.5 in(38.1 mm)

1.5 in(38.1 mm)

1.5 in(38.1 mm)0.295 in(7.5 mm)0.590 in
(15 mm)Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
500

N/m
23,4007,300

Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475
375

N
2,110
1,670

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.78
1.46

kg/m²
8.69
7.13

a Published curved belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of curve belt strengths.

446

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Spiral 2.2
Pitch
Minimum Width (See ProductNotes.)
Maximum Width (See ProductNotes.)
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
13.5

mm
38.1
343

61.7

1567

0.5
0.52 x 0.39

12.7
13 x 10

44%
26%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt aids productfreezing and cooling.
• Robust edge feature adds strength to the outside edge of the belt.
• Cage-friendly inside edge and frame-friendly outside edge.
• Enhanced beam stiffness.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Eliminates product contamination from metal-wear debris.
• Enables simple, quick repairs and changeovers.
• Designed for friction drive, capstan drive spiral applications with aminimum turn radius of 2.2 times the belt width (measured from theinside edge).
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.
• Minimum sprocket indent from the inside belt edge and from theoutside belt edge can vary. Contact Intralox Customer Service todetermine exact placement.

SERIES 2900

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

1.5 in(38.1 mm)

1.5 in(38.1 mm)

1.5 in(38.1 mm)0.295 in(7.5 mm)0.590 in
(15 mm)Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalSELM

Default Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalAcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft
1,600
500

N/m
23,4007,300

Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475
375

N
2,110
1,670

Temperature Range(continuous)°F-50 to 200-50 to 200°C-46 to 93-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
1.78
1.46

kg/m²
8.69
7.13

a Published curved belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of curve belt strengths.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

447

SPIRAL BELTS
Acetal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
13
6.2 157(2.97%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.4

in
1.2

mm
163

mm
30.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1-7/16, 1.5,
40, 602
2.5

Support Wheel

SERIES 2900

Pitch Diameter
in
6.2

mm
157

Available Bore Sizes
Round in Square in Round mm
1-7/16, 2 1.5, 2.5

Squaremm40, 60Overlapping Sideguards
Available Heightinmm
Available Materials
0.50
12.7
Acetal, Detectable MX
1.00
25.4
Acetal, Detectable MX• Maximizes product carrying capacity. Sideguards fit to the very edge ofthe belt, with no indent.
• Assembly does not require “finger cuts” on the modules, so the belt
beam strength is not compromised.
• Makes the outer edge of the belt more snag-resistant.
• Keeps small products from falling through belt gaps.
• Turn ratio for 0.50 in (12.7 mm) overlapping sideguards 1.6.

4482024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
Lane Dividers
Available Height
in
mm
0.75
19

Available Materials
Acetal, Detectable MX, SELM

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 93: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S2900 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
6.2

157

Numberof Teeth
13

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
2.75-2.84

inmm
Spiral DirectDrive
70-72
2.51

mm

in

mm

in

mm

64

6.27

159

3.49

89

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

449

SERIES 2900

CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONSSPIRAL BELTS
DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2900 Dead Plate Gap

in
6.2

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diametermm
157

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
13

in
0.091

mm
2.3

HOLD DOWN RAILS AND WEARSTRIPS
The use of hold down wearstrips along both belt edges over the full carryway is recommended, except inheavily loaded or high-speed applications.
• For information about Intralox hold down wearstrips, see Custom Wearstrips.
• For information about conveyor design for hold down wearstrips, see Hold Down Wearstrips in the Design
Guidelines chapter.

SERIES 2900

BELT SELECTION INSTRUCTIONSNOTE: For assistance with radius belt and low-tension capstan drive spiral selections, contact Intralox
Customer Service. Run the Engineering Program to ensure that the belt is strong enough for the radiusapplication in question. See Engineering Program Analysis for Spiral and Radius for more information.

DESIGN GUIDE SUMMARY
For typical layout configurations, see Radius Conveyors in the Design Guidelines chapter.
• The minimum turn radius for the S2900 standard edge is 1.6 times the belt width, measured from theinside edge.
• The minimum required straight run between turns of opposing direction is 2.0 times the belt width. Shorter
straight sections lead to high wear on the edge guide rail and high pull stresses in the belt.
• There is no minimum straight run required between turns that are in the same direction.
• The minimum final straight run leading to the drive shaft is a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m) is not
feasible, shorter lengths, down to 1.5 times the belt width, require a gravity take-up to avoid sprocket wear
and tracking problems. For more information, see Take-Ups.
• The minimum length of the first straight run immediately after the idle shaft is 1.5 times the belt width.
When shorter lengths are required, down to 1.0 × the width, an idle roller can be used in place ofsprockets.

4502024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
DirectDrive™ Stacker
Pitch
Minimum Width
Width Increments
Opening Size (approximate)Open Area (fully extended)
Minimum Open Area
Hinge Style
Rod Retention; Rod Type

in
1.5
12
1.00
0.52 x 0.39

mm
38.1
304.8
25.4
13.0 x 10.0

44%
26%
Open
Occluded edge; unheaded

Product Notes• This belt has pinch points. See the Safety section in the Intralox• Contact Intralox for precise belt measurements and stock status
before designing equipment or ordering a belt.
• Lightweight, strong belt with smooth surface grid for good productrelease.
• Belt openings pass straight through the belt to simplify cleaning.
• Relatively uniform open area across the width of the belt to aid productfreezing and cooling.
• Each belt material has a default rod material. Other rod materials areavailable. Intralox can help identify the best belt and rod material
combination for your application.
• Detailed material information is provided at the beginning of ProductLine.
• Sideplates are permanently installed and cannot be replaced.
• Designed for stacker applications using patented DirectDrive
technology.
• Tier spacing: available in 60 mm, 80 mm, or 100 mm.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for preferred run direction on spiralapplications.

SERIES 2950

Conveyor Belting Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual for more information.

0.590 in(14.985 mm)

0.295 in(7.493 mm)

1.500 in(38.1 mm)1.500 in(38.1 mm)1.500 in(38.1 mm)

Belt Data

Belt Material
AcetalDefault Rod Material,
Diameter 0.24 in(6.1 mm)
AcetalStraight Belt
Strength
lbf/ft1,600

N/m
23,400Spiral Belt Strengtha
lbf
475

N
2,110

Temperature Range(continuous)b°F-50 to 200°C-46 to 93

Belt Mass
lb/ft²
2.18

kg/m²
10.64

a Published spiral belt strengths and their method of calculation vary among belt manufacturers. Please consult an Intralox spiral engineer for accuratecomparison of spiral belt strengths.

b Sideflexing applications must not exceed 180°F (82°C).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

451

SPIRAL BELTS
Acetal Sprockets
Number Nom. Pitchof Teeth Diameter(ChordalAction)in mm
13
6.2 157(2.97%)

Nom. Outer
Diameter

Nom. Hub
Width

in
6.4

in
1.2

mm
163

mm
30.5

Available Bore Sizes
Round Square Round Square
in
in
mm
mm
1-7/16, 1.5,
40, 602
2.5

Support Wheel

SERIES 2950

Pitch Diameter
in
6.2

452

mm
157

Available Bore Sizes
Round in Square in Round mm
1-7/16, 2 1.5, 2.5

Squaremm40, 602024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

SPIRAL BELTS
CONVEYOR FRAME DIMENSIONS

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components
Figure 94: A, B, C, and E drive dimensions

S2950 Conveyor Frame Dimensions
Sprocket Description
Pitch Diameter
in
mm
6.2

157

Numberof Teeth
13

A

B

C

E

Range (Bottom to Top)ain
2.71-2.81inmm
DirectDrive Stacker
69-71
2.47

mm

in

mm

in

mm

63

6.20

157

3.46

88

a For general applications and applications where end transfer of tip-sensitive product is not critical, use the bottom of the range.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. Minimum gap
dimensions are provided in the following table. For more information, see Dead Plate Gap in the Design
Guidelines chapter.
S2950 Dead Plate Gap

in
6.2

Sprocket Description
Pitch Diametermm
1572024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

Minimum Gap
Number of Teeth
13

in
0.092

mm
2.3

453

SERIES 2950

All conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. These dimensions
are provided in the following table. For complete descriptions of these dimensions, see Frame Dimensions in
the Design Guidelines chapter.

2 PRODUCT LINE
SQUARE SHAFTS
MACHINED TO CUSTOMER SPECIFICATIONS
After the stock is cut to length, the raw shaft is precision straightened. The bearing journals are turned, thenthe retainer ring grooves*, keyways, and chamfers are cut. The final step is a thorough, quality control
inspection before shipping. For help with specifying shaft dimensions, contact Intralox Customer Service.
*If the shaft is to operate under high belt loads, retainer ring grooves are not recommended. Self-set or split
heavy-duty retainer type rings are recommended in these cases. For retainer ring recommendations, contact
Intralox Customer Service.
NOTE: If using the shaft in a hollow gearbox, contact Intralox Customer Service.

A length: overall
B length: bearing-end journal
C length: square section
D length: drive-end journal andkeyway dimensions
E diameter: bearing journal

F diameter: drive-end journal
G width: retainer ring groove
H width: sprocket hub
I diameter: ring groove
J length of keyway

Figure 95: Shaft dimensions required

Square Shafts Available from Intralox USAa
Size
0.625 in
1 in
1.5 in
40 mm
60 mm
2.5 inC1018 Carbon Steel+0.000 in to -0.003 in+0.000 in to -0.003 in+0.000 in to -0.003 in

3.5 inb

C1045 Carbon Steel

316 Stainless Steel+0.000 in to -0.004 in+0.000 in to -0.004 in+0.000 in to -0.006 in+0.000 in to -0.004 in

303/304 Stainless Steel+0.000 in to -0.004 in+0.000 in to -0.004 in+0.000 in to -0.006 in+0.000 mm to -0.160 mm+0.000 mm to -0.180 mm+0.000 in to -0.008 in+0.000 in to -0.005 in+0.000 in to -0.005 in

N/A

contact Intralox
contact Intralox+0.000 in to -0.008 in

a Consult Intralox for shafts longer than 12 ft (3.7 m).

b 3.5 in carbon steel shafts can be nickel plated for corrosion resistance.

454

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Square Shafts Available from Intralox Europea
Size
25 mm
40 mm
60 mm
65 mm
90 mm

KG-37 Carbon Steel+0.000 mm to -0.130 mm+0.000 mm to -0.160 mm+0.000 mm to -0.180 mm+0.000 mm to -0.180 mm+0.000 mm to -0.220 mm

303/304 Stainless Steel+0.000 mm to -0.130 mm+0.000 mm to -0.160 mm+0.000 mm to -0.180 mm+0.000 mm to -0.180 mm+0.000 mm to -0.220 mm

a Consult Intralox for shafts longer than 2 m.

Tolerances (unless otherwise specified)
Overall length
Journal diameter
Keyway widths< 48 in: ±0.061 in (< 1200 ±0.8 mm)> 48 in: ±0.125 in (> 1200 ±1.2 mm)-0.0005 in/ -0.003 in (Øh7 vlgs. NEN-ISO 286-2)+ 0.003 in/- 0.000 in (+ 0.05/- 0.00 mm)

Surface Finishes
JournalOther machined surfaces

63 microinches (1.6 micrometers)
125 microinches (3.25 micrometers)

Keyways
U.S. sizes
Metric sizes

Unless otherwise specified — U.S. keyways are for parallel square keys (ANSI B17.1 - 1967, R1973).
Metric keyways are for flat, inlaid keys with round ends (DIN 6885-A).

RETAINER RINGS AND CENTER SPROCKET OFFSET
SELECTING RECOMMENDED RETAINER RINGSIntralox recommends the use of retainer rings to fix the location of one sprocket on each shaft. The fixed
sprocket limits transverse movement of the belt during operation. In many applications, spring-type rings areused with success; however these rings require cutting small grooves into the corners of the shafts. In some
applications where belt loads are higher and stresses in the shaft are greater, the presence of ring grooves isundesirable, as they create places where stresses are concentrated. In these cases, Intralox recommends
using alternative retainer rings that require no grooves, such as the Self-Set or Split Collar rings.
Use Table 5: Belt Pull Limits Vs. Shaft Span for Retainer Ring Grooves to identify recommended limits of belt
pull versus shaft span between bearings, then determine if retainer ring grooves can be used. For a given
shaft size and span, if the belt pull (BP), exceeds the values shown, select a ring that requires no grooves inthe shaft.

STANDARD RETAINER RINGSIntralox provide standard retainer rings in plastic and stainless steel.
• For information about plastic retainer rings, see Standard Plastic Retainer Rings.
• For information about stainless steel retainer rings, see Standard Stainless Steel Retainer Rings.

STANDARD PLASTIC RETAINER RINGS• Plastic retainer rings are available in sizes to fit 1.5 in and 2.5 in square shafts.
• Plastic retainer rings are made from polysulfone.
• The temperature range of polysulfone is -125°F to 300°F (-98°C to 149°C).
• Plastic retainer rings require grooves identical to the grooves used for stainless steel retainer rings on 1.5
in and 2.5 in shafts. See Retainer Ring Groove and Chamfer Dimensions.
• Plastic retainer rings are not compatible with all sprockets. See Stainless Steel Retainer Ring Restrictions.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts455

2 PRODUCT LINE
PLASTIC RETAINER RING RESTRICTIONSStandard retainer rings do NOT work with the following sprockets:
Pitch Diameter
Retainer Ring Size
1.5 in2.5 inSeries

in
4.0
3.2
5.2
3.1

400
1600
400
1100

Bore Size
mm
102
81
132
79

in
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5

mm
40
40
40
40

STANDARD STAINLESS STEEL RETAINER RINGS• Stainless steel retainer rings are available to fit 5/8 in, 1.0 in, 1.5 in, 2.5 in, 3.5 in, 25 mm, 40 mm, 60 mm,
65 mm, and 90-mm square shafts.
• Stainless steel retainer rings are not compatible with all sprockets. See Stainless Steel Retainer Ring
Restrictions.
The following ANSI Type 3AMI rings, conforming to MIL SPEC R-2124B are available:

STAINLESS STEEL RETAINER RING RESTRICTIONS
Stainless steel retainer rings do not work with the following sprockets:
Pitch Diametera
Retainer ring size

Series

1.219 in

900
1100

in
2.1
2.3

mm
53
58

a To lock down the S900 2.1 in (53 mm) and (58 mm) pitch diameter sprockets, a setscrew is required. Place the setscrew on each side of the sprocket. Contact

Intralox Customer Service for more information.

RETAINER RING GROOVE AND CHAMFER DIMENSIONS

A ring groove diameter for plastic retainer rings
B ring groove diameter for stainless steel retainer rings
Figure 96: Retainer ring groove diameters456

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Retainer Ring Groove and Chamfer Dimensionsa
Shaft Size
5/8 in1 in

Groove Diameter
0.762 ± 0.003 in
1.219 ± 0.005 in

Width
0.046 + 0.003/- 0.000 in
0.056 + 0.004/- 0.000 in

Chamferb
0.822 ± 0.010 in
1.314 ± 0.010 in

1.5 in2.5 in3.5 in
25 mm
40 mm
60 mm
65 mm
90 mm

1.913 ± 0.005 in
3.287 ± 0.005 in
4.702 ± 0.005 in
30 ± 0.1 mm
51 ± 0.1 mm
80 ± 0.1 mm
85 ± 0.1 mm
120 ± 0.1 mm

0.086 + 0.004/- 0.000 in
0.120 + 0.004/- 0.000 in
0.120 + 0.004/- 0.000 in
2.0 + 0.15/- 0.00 mm
2.5 + 0.15/- 0.00 mm
3.5 + 0.15/- 0.00 mm
3.5 + 0.15/- 0.00 mm
4.5 + 0.15/- 0.00 mm

2.022 ± 0.010 in
3.436 ± 0.010 in
4.773 ± 0.010 in
33 ± 0.25 mm
54 ± 0.25 mm
82 ± 0.25 mm
89 ± 0.25 mm
124 ± 0.25 mm

a In some instances, the retainer ring grooves are offset from the shaft center. See Sprocket Retention.
b For S200, S400, and S800 molded sprockets, shafts must be chamfered to fit.

LOCKED SPROCKET POSITION ON SHAFT
A B

C

E

D

A shaft centerline
B sprocket centerline
C center sprocket offset

D retainer ringE sprocket

Figure 97: Locked sprocket position

Use the following table to determine the proper center sprocket offset.
To prevent incorrect placement of machined retainer ring grooves, consider using Self-Set Retainer Rings orSplit Collar Retainer Rings, which allow easy adjustment of the center sprocket placement and do not
require machined groves on the shaft.
Center sprocket placement can change when belt styles are combined. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.
Center Sprocket Offset
Series100
200
200 Raised Rib
400

Number of
Links
even
odd
even, odd
even, odd
even
odd

Offset
in
0
0.12
0
0.09
0
0.16

mm
0
3
0
2.3
0
4

400 Roller Top,
Angled Roller,
Transverse Roller
Top
560
800

Max. Sprocket Spacing
in
mm
6
152
6
152
7.5
191
7.5
191
6
152
6
152

Notes

See Center Sprocket Offset for Roller Belts.
even
odd
even, odd

0.5
002024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

12.7
0
0

6
6
6

152
152
152

457

2 PRODUCT LINE
Center Sprocket Offset
Series800 Angled EZ
Clean sprockets
800 Raised Rib
850
888
900
900 Open Flush Grid
1000
1000 Insert Roller,
High Density Insert
RollerOffsetNumber of
Links

in

mm

even, odd

0.16

4Max. Sprocket Spacing
in
mm
6

152

even
odd
even, odd

3
76
6
152
0
0
6
152
0
0
6
152
See Series 888 in the Installation Instructions or contact Intralox Customer Service.
even
0
0
4
102
odd
0.16
4
4
102
For offset and number of links, see Series 900 in the Installation Instructions or contact Intralox Customer Service.
even
0
0
6
152
odd
0.25
6.44
6
152
even
1.5
38.1
6
152
odd

0

0

6

152

even
odd
even (whole)odd (whole)

1.67
0
0
0.5

42.5
0
0
12.7

6
6
4
4

152
152
102
102

even, odd

0.25

6.35

4

102

even (whole)odd (whole)

0.19
0.31

4.8
7.9

4
4

102
102

even, odd

0.06

1.52

4

102

6

152

6
6

152
152

1400 FG

6

152

1500

6

152

4
4
4
4

102
102
102
102

4

102

6

152

3

76

3.94

100

1000 High Density
Insert Roller 85 mm

1100

1100 EZ Tracksprockets

1200
1400

1600
1650
1700
1750
1800

even
odd

even, odd
even, odd
even
odd
even
odd
even, odd

0
0.5

0
0.25
0.5
0
0
0.5
0

0
12.7

0
6.4
12.7
0
0
12.7
0

1900
2100

458

Notes
Ensure 6-, 10-, and 16-tooth sprockets are placedon belt centerline.

even, odd

1.97

50

The 8- and 12-tooth steel sprockets can be placedon belt centerline.
Even or odd number of links in increments of 0.5 in(12.7 mm). The 8- and 12-tooth steel sprockets canbe placed on belt centerline.

Even or odd number of links in increments of 0.5 in(12.7 mm)
For offset and number of links, see Series 1200 in
the Installation Instructions or contact Intralox
Customer Service.

For offset and number of links, see Series 1400 in
the Installation Instructions or contact Intralox
Customer Service.
For offset and number of links, see Series 1500 in
the Installation Instructions or contact Intralox
Customer Service.
The 20-tooth sprocket has zero offset.

When determining number of links, drop the 0.5 link.

For offset and number of links, see Series 1900 in
the Installation Instructions or contact Intralox
Customer Service.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Center Sprocket Offset
SeriesOffsetMax. Sprocket Spacinginmm

Number of
Links

in

mm

even

0.25

6.4

4

102

odd

0.25

6.4

4

102

even
odd

0
1.5

0
38

6
6

152
152

even

0.125

3.2

6

152

When determining number of links, drop the 0.5 link.
Offset to left of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.

odd

0.125

3.2

6

152

When determining number of links, drop the 0.5 link.
Offset to right of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.

even, odd
even, odd
even
odd
even, odd
even
odd
even
odd
even
odd

0
0
0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0
0
0.5
0.5
0

0
0
0
12.7
12.7
12.7
0
0
12.7
12.7
0

8
8
6
6
9
6
6
6
6
4
4

203
203
152
152
229
152
152
152
152
102
102

even

0.25

6.3

5.91

150

odd

0.25

6.3

5.91

150

even

0.25

6.3

5.91

150

odd

0.25

6.3

5.91

150

even

0

0

6

152

odd

1

25.4

6

152

2200

2300

2400

2600
2700
2800
4400
4500
4500 dual tooth
sprockets
9000
10000 hinge drive(preferred)

10000 center drive

Notes
When determining number of links, drop the 0.5 link.
Offset to left of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.
When determining number of links, drop the 0.5 link.
Offset to right of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.

Offset to left of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.
Offset to right of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.
Offset to right of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.
Offset to left of shaft centerline looking in the
direction of the preferred belt run direction.

Numberof Rollers
Per Row
400 Roller Top,
Angled Roller,
Transverse Roller
Top

CENTER SPROCKET OFFSET FOR ROLLER BELTS
Center Sprocket Offset for Roller Belts
OffsetSeries
400
4500
4550

Number of Rollers
even
odd
even
odd
even
odd

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

in
0
1
0
1
0
1

mm
0
25.4
0
25.4
0
25.4

Max. Sprocket Spacing
in
mm
6
152
6
152
6
152
6
152
6
152
6
152

Notes

459

2 PRODUCT LINE
Center Sprocket Offset for Roller Belts
OffsetSeries
7000
7050
7050

Number of Rollers
Divisible by 4

in
1

mm
25.4

Not divisible by 4
Divisible by 8
Not divisible by 8

0
1
0

0
25.4
0

Max. Sprocket Spacing
in
mm
Notes
6
152
Number of rollers = belt width in inches- 1 (belt width in mm/25.4 - 1)
6
152
6
152
6
152

SELF-SET RETAINER RINGS
Self-set retainer rings are available to fit 1.0 in, 1.5 in, 2.5 in, 3.5 in, 40 mm, 60 mm, and 65-mm shafts.

Figure 98: Self-set retainer rings• Retainer rings are made from non-corrosive 316 stainless steel.
• There is no need for machined grooves on the shaft and the shaft does not need to be removed to installthese retainer rings.
• Self-set retainer rings are USDA-FSIS accepted.
• Self-set retainer rings snap into place on the square shaft and are fixed in position with a unique setscrewthat cannot fall out of the retainer ring during operation.
• The shaft must have chamfered edges for the retainer ring to work properly.
• Self-set retainer rings are not recommended in applications where high lateral forces are to be expected.
• Self-set retainer rings have the following restrictions:Self-Set Retainer Ring Restrictions

Retainer Ring
Size
1.0 in460

Self-set retainer rings do NOT work with thefollowing sprockets:
Pitch Diameter
Series
in
mm
100
2.0
51
900
2.1
53
1100
2.3
58

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Self-Set Retainer Ring Restrictions
Self-set retainer rings do NOT work with thefollowing sprockets:
Pitch Diameter
Series
in
mm
900
3.1
79
1000
3.1
79
1100
3.1
79
1600
3.2
81
400
5.2
132

Retainer Ring
Size

40 mm

65 mm
1.84

0.46
80°

R. 7/64 TYP.
A

45°
90°

1.84

80°

0.46

A Custom setscrew, fully inserted, head first, from this side
Figure 99: Self-set retainer ring dimensions

ROUND SHAFT RETAINER RINGS

Figure 100: Round shaft retainer ring

• Round shaft retainer rings are available to fit 0.75 in, 1.0 in, and 25 mm round shafts.
• Made of stainless steel.
• Do not require a groove for placement, because friction holds the retainer rings in place.
NOTE: Avoid grooves on round shafts. Grooves cause fatigue and shaft failure.

SPLIT COLLAR RETAINER RINGS

Figure 101: Split collar retainer rings

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

461

2 PRODUCT LINE
Split collar retainer rings are available to fit the following shaft sizes:
Split Collar Retainer Ring Shaft Compatibility
Square Shafts
1.5 inRound Shafts
3/4 in2.5 in
40 mm
60 mm

1 in
1-3/16 in
1-1/4 in1-3/8 in1-7/16 in
1-1/2 in
2 in

• The retainer rings are made from 304 stainless steel.
• For use in applications with high lateral loads on the sprockets.
• These retainer rings do not require the shaft to be chamfered and do not require shaft removal, simplifying
installation.
• Split collar retainer rings have the following restrictions:
Split Collar Retainer Ring Restrictions
Split Collar Retainer Rings are not compatible with 3.0 in (76.2 mm) pitch diameter or smaller sprockets or with the following
sprockets.
Pitch Diameter
Retainer Ring Size
Series
in
mm
400
4.0
102
900
3.1
79
900
3.5
89
1.5 in and 40 mm
1000
3.1
79
1100
3.1
79
1100
3.5
89
1600
3.2
81
400
5.2
132
1000
4.6
117
1100
4.6
117
2.5 in and 60 mm
1400
4.9
124
2600
5.2
132
2700
5.2
132

SPROCKET SPACERS
Use of sprocket spacers and retainer rings in the recommended locations prevents problems associatedwith sprocket migration and belt drift. Intralox can provide a recommended drive configuration, including
sprockets, spacers, and retainer rings for your application and detailed guidelines for designing conveyors
for use with Intralox™ FoodSafe® modular plastic belts. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.

Figure 102: Sprocket spacers on square shaft with sprockets and retainer rings

462

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Sprocket Spacera
Available Bore Sizes
Nom. Sprocket Spacer Width
in
mm
1.0
25
1.5
38
2.0
51
3.0
76
3.5
89
4.0
102
5.0

U.S.
Round in127

MetricSquare in
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5

Round mm

1.5

Square mm
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

a Contact Intralox Customer Service for available materials.

ROUND BORE ADAPTERS
Sprocket inserts are available to adapt 1.5 in square bore sprockets to use 1 in diameter shafts. Theseinserts are only recommended for lightly loaded belts or for narrow belts up to 18 in (460 mm) wide.
Adapters are made of glass-filled polypropylene for strength and chemical resistance and are available in 2.5
in (64 mm) and 3.5 in (89 mm) lengths. The 2.5 in (64 mm) adapter has a torque limit of 875 in-lbf (99 N-m).
The 3.5 in (89 mm) adapter is limited to 1200 in-lbf (135 N-m). The operating temperature limits are between
45°F and 120°F (7°C and 50°C).
Setscrews are provided to retain the sprockets on the adapters and to lock the center sprocket to the shaft.
The 3.5 in (89 mm) adapter has a third tapped hole to accommodate a range of hub widths. To determine
which adapter to use with a given sprocket hub width, see the following table.
For certain sprocket and adapter combinations, more than one sprocket can be placed on each adapter.
See the sprockets per adapter column in the following table for more information.
NOTE: Round bore adapters are not recommended for use with split sprockets or abrasion resistantsprockets.

A 1/4 in - 20 × 5/8 in setscrews (UNC threads)
B keyway - 0.25 in × 0.125 in (6 mm × 3 mm)
C gap between setscrews:2.5 in (64 mm) adapter1.5 in (38 mm) gap3.5 in (89 mm) adapter2.5 in (64 mm) gap
Figure 103: Round bore adapter

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts463

2 PRODUCT LINE
Round Bore Adapter Selection Tablea
Locked Center Sprocket
Adapter Sizes
Sprockets per
Adapter
in
mm
2.5
64
2
2.5
64
1
3.5
89
2
2.5
64
1
3.5
89
1

Sprocket Hub Widths
in
mm
0.75
19
1.00
25
1.25
32
1.50
38
2.50
64

Floating Sprockets
Adapter Sizes
Sprockets per
Adapter
in
mm
2.5
64
1
3.5
89
1
3.5
89
1
3.5
89
1
3.5
89
1

a Spacers can be required to lock down center sprockets on adapters.

SCROLL IDLERS
A scroll idler can be used in applications where excessive debris can hamper sprocket performance or
damage the belt or where the drive shaft and sprockets must be kept clean. The curved, flighted surface ofthe scroll directs debris away from the belt center, toward the edges, where it can fall away from the belt andconveyor components.

Figure 104: Scroll idler

Intralox offers scrolls in two nominal diameters: 6 in (152 mm) and 9 in (229 mm). Flight pitch, the axial
distance for the flight to sweep through a full circle, is also 6 in (152 mm) and 9 in (229 mm), respectively.
Since the scroll idler also serves as the idle shaft, each scroll idler has a minimum scroll length to ensure
proper belt support. For narrow belts, or for extra support, a double-flighted scroll is available.
Scroll Dimensions
DiameterNominalin69Actual
mm
152
229

in
6.7
9.7

mm
170
246

Minimum Scroll Length (exclusive of journals)
Single-Flighted
Double-Flighted
in
mm
in
mm
12.5
318
6.5
165
18.5
470
9.5
241

Intralox scrolls are offered in carbon steel and stainless steel with a thick section of UHMW-PE wearstrip
attached to the flight edges. Carbon steel scrolls are treated and painted for protection. Stainless steel
scrolls with a polished weld bead are available for USDA-FSIS applications.

464

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Flight Material
Scroll Features
6 in (152 mm) scroll diameter9 in (229 mm) scroll diameter

Carbon Steel••Stainless Steel
•
•

•

•

Intermittent welds
Continuous, polished welds
UHMW-PE flight edging
Primer grey paint••

Stainless Steel USDA-FSIS
•
•
•
•

•

• All scrolls are mounted on a 2.5 in (63.5 mm) diameter round shaft.
• Maximum journal diameter is 2.5 in (63.5 mm) and minimum journal length is 2 in (50.8 mm).
• Position the scroll idler assembly in the conveyor frame so the V-shape at the center of the scroll (where
the left and right flights meet) points in the direction of belt travel. Adjust the shaft take-up, if there is one,to have even tension on both sides.
• Intralox scrolls have no built-in tracking ability. It can be necessary to use side-mounted wearstrips on theinfeed end.

WEARSTRIPSFLAT WEARSTRIPS
Standard flat wearstrips are available in UHMW-PE and Nylatron® (a molybdenum-filled nylon). UHMW-PE
wearstrips measure 0.25 in (6 mm) thick × 1.25 in (32 mm) wide × 120 in (3048 mm). Nylatron wearstrips
measure 0.125 in (3 mm) thick × 1.25 in (32 mm) wide × 48 in (1219 mm). UHMW wearstrips are FDA and
USDA-FSIS compliant for direct food contact. Nylatron wearstrips are not FDA or USDA-FSIS accepted forfood applications.
Flat finger-joint wearstrips have a notched end design which provides overlapping sections for continuous
support. UHMW-PE wearstrips are available in 24 in (610 mm) and 60 in (1524 mm) lengths. Fasteners aresupplied.

Figure 105: Flat finger-joint wearstrips

L

A

B

C

24 in (610 mm)
60 in (1524 mm)

1.125 in (28.6 mm)
1.875 in (47.6 mm)

1.75 in (44.5 mm)
2.25 in (57.2 mm)

0.75 in (19.1 mm)
1.50 in (38.1 mm)

ANGLE AND CLIP-ON WEARSTRIPS
Intralox also offers various angle and clip-on wearstrips. All clip-on wearstrips styles come in 120 in (3048mm) lengths. These wearstrips are designed to attach directly to the conveyor frame without fasteners.
• For new applications, use flat wearstrips with wide surface area for carryways and returnways.
• Use clip-on wearstrips only for lightly loaded retrofit applications or to prove concepts. Clip-on wearstrips
are not recommended for normal production operation.
• Contact Intralox Customer Service for application-specific information.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts465

2 PRODUCT LINE

Figure 106: Standard angle UHMW wearstrips(B6XX21IXXWMV)Figure 108: Clip-on with leg UHMW wearstrips(B6XX26IXXWMV)Figure 110: Barbed clip-on UHMW wearstrips(B6XX23IXXWMV)Figure 112: Standard bar snap-on UHMW wearstrips(B6XX28IXXWMV)

466

Figure 107: Clip-on UHMW wearstrips (B6XX25IXXWMV)Figure 109: Guide rail snap-on UHMW wearstrips(B6XX27IXXWMV)Figure 111: Barbed clip-on with leg UHMW wearstrips(B6XX24IXXWMV)Figure 113: Full round snap-on UHMW wearstrips(B6XX29IXXWMV)2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINESTAINLESS STEEL-BACKED UHMW-PE WEARSTRIP• Stainless steel-backed UHMW-PE wearstrip can be used to create a rigid belt carryway surface on any
frame with cross members.
• Stainless steel-backed UHMW-PE wearstrip is mounted to cross members with a self-tightening stainlesssteel clip with nut (self-tightening stainless steel clip with nut sold separately).
• Can be installed in parallel, chevron, or other configurations.
• Recommended for temperatures up to 160°F (71°C).
• Available in two profiles: flat (T) wearstrip and flanged (L) wearstrip.
• Available in 120 in (3048 mm) lengths.
• Allow for thermal expansion and contraction when installing wearstrips.
• Always chamfer or bend down the leading edges of any wearstrip.

A 120 in stainless steel back clip-on with leg l UHMW-PE wearstrip (B6XX43IXXWMV-00)
B 120 in stainless steel back t clip-on UHMW-PE wearstrip (B6XX42IXXWMV-00)
C stainless steel self-tightening wearstrip clip and nut, 5/16-18 UNC (C9AX1XXXXXXX-01)
Figure 114: Stainless steel backed UHMW-PE wearstrips

UHMW-PE PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE
Intralox offers UHMW-PE self-adhering wearstrip tape in rolls of 54 ft. (16.5 m). This tape can be used forquick and easy conversion of steel wearstrips to a lower friction UHMW-PE wearstrip. The 1 in (25.4 mm)
wide and 2 in (50.8 mm) wide tape is available in thicknesses of 0.010 in (0.25 mm) and 0.030 in (0.76 mm).
NOTE: UHMW-PE pressure sensitive tape is only to be used in light-duty applications and temporary
solutions.

CUSTOM WEARSTRIPSRADIUS BELT WEARSTRIPS
All radius belt wearstrips are available in natural UHMW-PE and self-lubricating, grey, oil-filled UHMW-PE.
The angle and center rail wearstrips use the EZ Clean design. All wearstrips are available in either 1/8 in (3.2mm) or 3/16 in (4.7 mm) sizes. S2400 is available in UHMW-PE only.
See the following figures for wearstrip dimensions and part numbers.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

467

2 PRODUCT LINE
Standard Edge Hold Down Wearstrips
Material
UHMW-PE
UHMW-PE

Size (A)
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

Part Number
B6XX33IXXWMV-00
B6XX32IXXWMV-00

Oil-filled UHMW-PE
Oil-filled UHMW-PE

1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

B6XX33IXXWMW-00
B6XX32IXXWMW-00

A conveyor frame thickness
B 1.00 in (25.4 mm) for 1/8 in (3.2 mm) wearstrips;
1.13 in (29 mm) for 3/16 in (4.7 mm) wearstrips
Tabbed Edge Hold Down Wearstrips
Material
UHMW-PE
UHMW-PE
Oil-filled UHMW-PE
Oil-filled UHMW-PE

Size (A)
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

Part Number
B6XX39IXXWMV-20
B6XX38IXXWMV-10
B6XX39IXXWMW-00
B6XX38IXXWMW-00

A conveyor frame thickness
B 1.00 in (25.4 mm) for 1/8 in (3.2 mm) wearstrips;
1.06 in (27 mm) for 3/16 in (4.7 mm) wearstrips
Angled Hold Down Wearstrips
Material
UHMW-PE
UHMW-PE

Size (A)
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

Part Number
B6XX37IXXWMV-00
B6XX36IXXWMV-00

Oil-filled UHMW-PE
Oil-filled UHMW-PE

1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

B6XX37IXXWMW-00
B6XX36IXXWMW-00

A conveyor frame thickness
B 1.00 in (25.4 mm) for 1/8 in (3.2 mm) wearstrips;
1.06 in (27 mm) for 3/16 in (4.7 mm) wearstrips

468

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Center Rail Hold Down Wearstrips
Material
UHMW-PE
UHMW-PE

Size (A)
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

Part Number
B6XX41IXXWMV-00
B6XX40IXXWMV-00

Oil-filled UHMW-PE
Oil-filled UHMW-PE

1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

B6XX41IXXWMW-00
B6XX40IXXWMW-00

A conveyor frame thickness
B 1.56 in (40 mm) for both 1/8 in (3.2 mm)
and 3/16 in (4.7 mm) wearstrips
Series 2400 Hold Down Guide Wearstrips
Material
UHMW-PE
UHMW-PE

Size (A)
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.7 mm)

Part Number
B6F546IXXWMV-00
B6F547IXXWMV-00

A conveyor frame thickness
B 1.03 in (26 mm) for 1/8 in (3.2 mm) wearstrips;
1.09 in (28 mm) for 3/16 in (4.7 mm) wearstrips

PUSHER BARS
Accumulation tables are most often used in the beverage industry, allowing upstream production machineryto operate continuously and economically when downstream machinery interrupts product flow. Thesetables act as a buffer to absorb the product overflow until the downstream problem is rectified. The principal
function of a pusher bar is to move the last few product rows off the accumulation table, past the dead platearea, and onto the primary conveyor lines. Pusher bars rest on the accumulation table, which must use a
Raised Rib style belt (S100, S400, and S900).

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts469

2 PRODUCT LINE

Figure 115: Pusher bar side view

The bar is a 2.5 in (63.5 mm) square stainless or carbon steel shaft which rides in several slotted UHMW
guide shoes. The shoes are slotted on the bottom to mesh with the ribs of the belt and keep the bar aligned,
perpendicular to the direction of belt travel. The shoes bear the entire weight of the pusher bar, so it isrecommended that wearstrips be placed to support the belt directly under the shoes.
The blade of the pusher bar actually does the pushing. Blades are available in 24 in to 120 in (610 mm to3048 mm) lengths and consists of a rigid steel bar capped with UHMW-PE wearstrips, to avoid marking or
damaging products. The blade is set off from the weighted shaft by threaded steel rods, making the amountof offset adjustable to individual needs.

A bladeB barstock
C clip-on wearstrip

D threaded rod
E weight
F guide shoe (slotted bottom
surface)

Figure 116: Pusher bar assembly

4702024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINEA dual blade pusher bar is also available for tall or contoured products. The upper blade of this configurationis adjustable up and down and can be extended past or retracted further back from the lower blade.
Adjustment of the pusher bar is dependent upon: 1) placement of the device which limits forward travel ofthe pusher bar, and 2) dimensions of the product being conveyed. Standard offset is approximately equal to
the length of the finger plate to be used:• S100: 5.75 in (146 mm)• S400: 7.5 in (191 mm)• S900: 6.5 in (165 mm)

A adjustable
B adjustable from 2–4 in (51–102 mm)
Figure 117: Dual blade pusher bar assembly

TRANSFER PLATESIntralox offers UHMW-PE transfer plates with operating temperature limits of -100°F to 180°F (-73°C to82°C).

A holes for 0.25 in (6 mm) bolts
Figure 118: Transfer plates

EZ CLEAN IN PLACE (CIP) SYSTEM™

Compatible with most conveyors, the EZ CIP system cleans belts quickly, effectively, and consistently while
minimizing water usage.

Figure 119: EZ Clean In Place (CIP) System

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

471

2 PRODUCT LINEThe CIP system features a spray bar optimally located to increase and expedite debris removal and acustom-engineered spray pattern. The spray pattern is designed to provide thorough cleaning of the belt
underside, sprockets, and shaft. The system mounts within the conveyor frame behind the conveyor shaft
and sprays the belt at three separate locations. Fan nozzles spray through the open belt hinges below andabove the shaft as the belt travels around the sprockets. High-impact nozzles spray the belt underside along
the belt drive bars to maximize the debris channeling effect built into EZ Clean belts. Cleaning is further
optimized when used along with Angled EZ Clean sprockets.
This system can be installed on the drive end or idle end, but the drive end is preferred. The system is madeof 303/304 stainless steel, with highly polished surfaces. The minimum water pressure recommended at thesystem intake is 150 PSI (10 bar).

Figure 120: Spray pattern designed to clean of belt underside, sprockets, and shaft

HOLD DOWN ROLLERS
Hold down roller assemblies can be used in place of hold down shoes or rails on wide elevating conveyors.
On typical elevating conveyors, flights have a notch in the center of the belt so that a hold down rail or shoe
can be used to keep the belt on the conveyor frame. Product loss or damage from these shoes is aninevitable side effect.

Figure 121: Hold down rollers

Figure 122: Hold down rollers, side view

Standard roller assemblies have a bracket made of acetal, with polypropylene rollers and rods, and areavailable for the following belt styles:
Style
Series
S200
S400
S800

472

Flat Top•••

Flush Grid•••

Open Grid•

Open Hinge••

Mesh Top

Perforated Flat
Top
•

•

•

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE
Hold down roller assemblies are built securely into the underside of the belt, held in place by the belt hingerods. The rollers ride in tracks that anchor the belt in position as it enters the incline of the conveyor. These
assemblies can also be used in place of traditional hold down rails or shoes on the side of the conveyor.
Hold down rollers can be placed as frequently as every other belt row, a minimum of 4 in (102 mm) apart to a
recommended maximum of 24 in (610 mm) apart. Normally, 8 in (203 mm) spacing, every fourth row is
sufficient. Sprocket size is limited by the rollers protruding from the bottom surface of the belt. To keep
rollers from coming into contact with the shaft, when using a 1.5 in or 40-mm square shaft, the minimum
allowable sprocket pitch diameter is 6.4 in (163 mm). When using a 2.5 in or 60-mm shaft, the minimum
sprocket pitch diameter allowable is 7.7 in (196 mm). See Design Guidelines for more information.

ABRASION RESISTANCE SYSTEM
Excessive rod and sprocket wear in abrasive applications can cause various undesirable conditions. Asidefrom the obvious effect of reduced belt life, there can be added difficulties in making repairs. A badly wornrod cannot be removed easily. Often, belt modules are damaged in the process. Worn rods also cause belt
pitch to increase, which decreases sprocket engagement and, in turn, increases the wear rate on sprocket
teeth. The belt may not run as smoothly as it should under these circumstances.
Intralox has developed stainless steel split sprockets and Abrasion Resistant (AR) hinge rods which enhance
the performance of Intralox belts in abrasive or gritty environments. Rigorous testing shows that these AR
components significantly outlast standard components and increase belt module life. Abrasive particles areless likely to become embedded in the harder AR material. Thus, the components themselves do not
become abrasive surfaces wearing on the belt.

SPLIT SPROCKETS
Intralox split sprockets are an alternative to molded plastic sprockets. Split sprockets are constructed from
FDA-compliant materials, but are not USDA-FSIS accepted. See the individual shaft and sprocket data
pages for detailed information.
The old style—all stainless steel abrasion-resistant sprockets—are still available as special order items.
Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

Figure 123: Split sprockets

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts473

2 PRODUCT LINE

Figure 124: Abrasion resistant (all steel) sprockets

ABRASION RESISTANCE HINGE RODS
Abrasion resistant (AR) rods are stiffer than standard rods, so belt pull capabilities are not sacrificed. AR
rods are lighter, less expensive and are more flexible than steel rods. They also provide good chemical
resistance, low friction, a wide operating temperature range and are FDA-compliant for direct food contact.
In all belt styles which employ the Intralox snap-lock rod retention system, AR rods are held in place withrodlets installed on both edges of the belt. Rodlets are short, headed rods that are also made of abrasion
resistant material.

Figure 125: AR rods and rodlets

Belts that utilize an unheaded rod retention system or belts with Slidelox do not require a head of any type.

Figure 126: Unheaded rod retention

474

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

2 PRODUCT LINE

Figure 127: Slidelox rod retention

The Slidelox rod retention system is an unheaded rod retention method. This system uses a Shuttleplug toretain the rods during operation. The Slidelox plug can be easily moved to the side when work on the belt is
required.
To remove a rod after a belt has been in service for some time, apply a soapy solution or other lubricant tothe belt hinge. This approach helps loosen any grit that has become trapped between the rod and themodule.
AR rods can absorb water and expand in length and diameter when used in continuously wet, elevatedtemperature environments. If an application requires an AR rod in these conditions, contact Intralox
Customer Service to determine the approximate expansion due to water absorption.

EZ MOUNT FLEX TIP SCRAPER
Available Height

Available Length

in

mm

in

mm

Available Materials

2.75

70

72

1830

Rigid PVC base with flexible
polyurethane tip• Available in only one size.
• Only cut to length upon receipt.
• Designed for wet or greasy product applications.
• Not for use with dry products or applications.
• FDA compliant.

RETURNWAY RINGS
Available Sizes
Outer Diameter Inner Diameter
Ring Width
Available
Materials
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
4
102
1.90
48.3
1.0
25
4
102
2.50
63.5
0.7
19
Black rubber
6
152
2.50
63.5
2.0
51
6
152
2.36
60.0
2.0
51
• 4 in (102 mm) rings are not available with text indicating bore
diameter.
• Solid rubber material dampens sound.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

475

476

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
Every conveyor design has unique objectives and limitations. Rather than provide a step-by-step guide forevery design, Intralox provides design guidelines that can be applied to most conveyors. For any conveyor
design:• Apply good machine design principles.
• Ensure the performance characteristics of the selected belt and components are suitable for theapplication.
• Use the provided design resources.

ADDITIONAL RESOURCES• Intralox provides CalcLab™ to help calculate and evaluate many aspects of conveyor design. CalcLab isan always up-to-date replacement for legacy engineering programs that runs in the browser and can beaccessed from any internet-connected computer. To use CalcLab, go to calclab.intralox.com.
• In addition to these general design guidelines, Intralox provides more specific guidelines for certain belts
and applications. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Engineering assistance, design reviews, CAD files, and other services and resources are available. For
more information, see Intralox Resources.

CONVEYOR DESIGNThe following figure identifies the main components of a flat, straight-running, end-drive conveyor. Incline,
decline, spiral, and radius conveyors have different components and design requirements. For more
information about these designs, see Other Conveyor Designs. For information about other drive locations,see Drive Location.

A run direction
B beltC carryway wearstrips
D drive motor
E drive shaft and sprockets

F shaft bearing
G snub roller
H catenary sag
J returnway support rollers
K idle shaft and sprockets

Figure 128: Conveyor components

NOTE: Figures in this publication are simplified to improve legibility and not intended for use as mechanicaldrawings.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts477

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
CRITICAL CONSIDERATIONSApply the guidelines provided in this chapter when designing carryways, returnways, drive systems, productcontainment, and transfers.
• Always identify a belt and accessories before designing the conveyor frame. For belt selection guidelines,
see Belt Selection Process.
• Consider the effects of chordal action when selecting a belt and sprockets. See Chordal Action.
• If the operating temperature differs from the ambient temperature, consider thermal expansion andcontraction when designing the conveyor. See Dimension Changes.
• Consider the effects of speed and adapt the conveyor design as needed for high-speed applications. See
Belt Speed.
• For abrasive applications, use the recommended guidelines to minimize wear to belts, sprockets, andother components. See Abrasion.
• In high-impact applications, protect the belt and wearstrips from deflection and damage. See High-Impact
Applications.
• Consider the expected exposure to cleaning, sanitation, or other chemicals when selecting materials. See
Chemical Damage.

CONVEYOR FRAMES
Use the following guidelines when designing conveyor frames:• Follow all local, state, and national safety regulations and standards.
• Provide proper machine safeguarding.
• Use the provided conveyor frame dimensions for the selected belt and sprockets. See Frame Dimensions.
• Avoid catchpoints. Provide a chamfer or fillet on conveyor frame components that contact the belt. In
particular, protect the belt edges and rod retention system from damage.
• Provide openings in the frame for rod insertion and removal.
• Consider belt installation and maintenance requirements when designing the frame. For installation andbelt maintenance information, see the Intralox Modular Plastic Conveyor Belts Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual at www.intralox.com.
• Accommodate cleaning and sanitation requirements. Consider openings to provide access for cleaning,
tool-free assembly methods, and avoidance of frame assembly methods that can harbor bacteria.

478

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
FRAME DIMENSIONSAll conveyors designed for use with Intralox belts have certain dimensional requirements. Carryway andreturnway dimensions for each belt and sprocket combination are provided in the Product Line chapter.
Intralox uses the following definitions for conveyor frame dimensions:

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm); see A Drive Dimension
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm); see B Drive Dimension
C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top; see C Drive Dimension
D minimum clearance between belt edge and outer wearstrip: 0.25 in (6 mm). See D Drive Dimension
E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and other components; see E Drive Dimension
Figure 129: A, B, C, D, and E drive dimensions

A DRIVE DIMENSION
The A drive dimension is the vertical distance (A) between the shaft centerline and the top of the carryway.
This distance combines with chordal action of the belt to affect belt-to-sprocket engagement and end-on or
end-off product transfers. For more information about chordal action, see Chordal Action.

A vertical distance between shaft centerline and carryway top, ± 0.03 in (1 mm)
Figure 130: A drive dimension

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts479

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESB DRIVE DIMENSION
The B drive dimension is the horizontal distance (B) between the shaft centerline and the beginning of thecarryway. Using this recommended distance is critical to avoiding sprocket interference.
• The B drive dimension assumes a carryway height of 0.5 in (13 mm). If product loads require a thicker
carryway to reduce deflection, consider chamfering the carryway ends to avoid sprocket interference. For
more information, see Avoiding Sprocket Interference.
• For applications where product stability is a concern, consider extending carryway wearstrips in between
the sprockets. For more information, see Anti-Sag Wearstrip Configuration.

A carryway height
B horizontal distance between shaft centerline and beginning of carryway, ± 0.125 in (3 mm)
Figure 131: B drive dimension

C DRIVE DIMENSIONThe C drive dimension is the vertical distance (C) between the top of the carryway and the top of the
returnway supports. Using this recommended distance ensures the belt properly wraps around and engages
the sprockets.
Most belts must wrap 180 degrees to 210 degrees around the sprockets. Certain belts have different ormore exact requirements. For more information about proper sprocket engagement, see Returnways andTake-Ups.

C vertical distance between carryway top and returnway support top
Figure 132: C drive dimension

480

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESD DRIVE DIMENSION
The D drive dimension is the minimum clearance (D) between the belt edges and the outer wearstrips. Somebelt materials require more clearance. This clearance is necessary to accommodate temporary belt
expansion due to temperature changes or moisture absorption. For applications that operate above theambient temperature, additional clearance can be needed.
• To calculate expected expansion due to temperature changes, see Accommodating Thermal Expansion
and Contraction and Belt Material Growth.
• Provide additional room if the operating temperature is above ambient.

D minimum clearance between belt edge and outer wearstrip: 0.25 in (6 mm)
Figure 133: D drive dimension

E DRIVE DIMENSIONThe E drive dimension is the minimum horizontal distance (E) between the shaft centerline and othercomponents or adjacent equipment. This distance is necessary to prevent interference during operation.
Belts with flights, sideguards, or other raised features require additional distance.

E minimum horizontal distance between shaft centerline and adjacent equipment
Figure 134: E drive dimension

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

481

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESCARRYWAYS
The carryway supports the belt in the load-bearing part of a conveyor. The primary purpose of the carryway
is to provide a lower friction surface for the belt to slide against. Carryways are commonly made of lowfriction material to reduce wear on the belt and conveyor frame.
Use the following guidelines for flat, straight-running conveyor carryways. For other conveyor types, see
Other Conveyor Designs.
• Ensure carryway materials are suitable for the application. See Materials.
• Select an appropriate carryway design. See Solid-Plate Carryways and Wearstrip Carryways.
• For wearstrip carryways:- Use a recommended wearstrip. See Wearstrip Types.
- Select an appropriate wearstrip configuration. See Wearstrip Configuration.
- Accommodate thermal expansion and contraction. See Accommodating Thermal Expansion andContraction.

MATERIALS
An appropriate carryway material reduces belt wear and power requirements. Intralox recommends ultrahigh molecular weight polyethylene (UHMW-PE) for most carryways. UHMW-PE has better wear
characteristics, impact resistance, and an excellent combination of physical and mechanical properties
compared to other materials. UHMW-PE is FDA and USDA-FSIS compliant for direct food contact, and canbe used in temperatures up to 160°F (71°C).
Molybdenum-filled nylon (Nylatron®) can be used in temperatures up to 250°F (121°C) but is not FDA or
USDA-FSIS compliant for direct food contact.
Stainless steel can be used when carryway abrasion or corrosion is a concern, but the steel must be smoothand free of burrs. A 303/304 stainless steel with a 2B, cold-rolled surface finish provides the lowest frictionof any stainless steel carryway. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information about design
requirements for stainless steel carryways.
For frictional characteristics of belt and carryway materials, see Friction Factors.
For chemical resistance characteristics of carryway materials, see the Chemical Resistance Guide.

WEARSTRIP CARRYWAYS
A wearstrip carryway is appropriate for most applications. In this carryway design, the belt slides overnarrow strips of low-friction material. Wearstrips can be arranged in a chevron or a straight, parallel pattern.
Intralox offers carryway wearstrips in UHMW-PE, HDPE, and Nylatron. For more information about Intralox
wearstrips, see Wearstrips in the Product Line chapter.

482

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESWEARSTRIP TYPES
Intralox provides standard flat wearstrips, flat finger-joint wearstrips, angled wearstrips, and clip-on
wearstrips. For available dimensions, see Flat Wearstrips and Angle and Clip-on Wearstrips in the ProductLine chapter.
Angle and clip-on wearstrips are designed for use in applications where belt edge protection is needed orlateral product transfer is required. These strips attach to the frame without the need of fasteners.
Standard flat wearstrips are relatively thick, narrow, flat bars that are attached directly to the conveyor framewith plastic bolts and nuts in slotted holes. The slotted holes allow the wearstrips to freely expand andcontract with temperature changes.
Flat finger-joint wearstrips are designed to overlap, providing continuous belt support without sharp edges.
Flat finger-joint wearstrips are fastened in short lengths at the leading end only. Small gaps at theoverlapping ends provide room for expansion and contraction.

A finger-joint wearstrips
B standard flat wearstrips
Figure 135: Flat wearstrips

WEARSTRIP CONFIGURATION• Arrange wearstrips in either a chevron or straight parallel pattern. See Chevron Pattern and Straight
Parallel Pattern.
• Allow for thermal expansion and contraction when designing and installing wearstrips. See
Accommodating Thermal Expansion and Contraction.
• Consider an anti-sag wearstrip configuration for tip-sensitive products. See Anti-Sag Wearstrip
Configuration.
• Ensure the wearstrips do not interfere with the sprockets. See Avoiding Sprocket Interference.

CHEVRON PATTERN
In this configuration, wearstrips are placed in an overlapping chevron pattern. Compared to straight parallel
wearstrips, a chevron pattern more evenly distributes wear and more evenly supports the belt. This pattern isa good choice for abrasive or heavily loaded applications. A chevron pattern also helps to remove debris
from the belt bottom.
• Use the Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference table for the selected belt to determine the number ofwearstrips required.
• Provide a minimum 0.4 in (10 mm) gap between the chevron points to reduce debris buildup.
• Reduce the space between adjacent chevrons to decrease wearstrip load and decrease unsupported belt
area.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts483

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A run direction
B wearstrip angle: 20 degrees to 60 degrees
C conventional recommended spacing: 2 in (51 mm), maximum spacing: 5 in (127 mm)
D gap between chevron points: ≥ 0.4 in (10 mm)
Figure 136: Carryway wearstrips in chevron pattern

STRAIGHT PARALLEL PATTERN
Straight, parallel wearstrips are placed parallel with the belt run direction. This pattern is commonly used, but
can wear grooves on the underside of the belt. Straight, parallel wearstrips increase belt stress anddeflection because load and wear are not evenly distributed across the belt.
• Attach wearstrips to the frame with plastic bolts and nuts in slotted holes. This approach allows thewearstrips to expand and contract with temperature changes.
• Use the Sprocket and Support Quantity Reference table for the selected belt to determine the number ofwearstrips required.

A run direction
Figure 137: Straight, parallel wearstrip pattern

484

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESAVOIDING SPROCKET INTERFERENCE
The recommended distance between the shaft centerline and the beginning of the carryway assumes thewearstrip height is not greater than 0.5 in (13 mm). Some product loads require a wearstrip height greaterthan 0.5 in (13 mm) but this additional height can cause sprocket interference.
• When wearstrip height is greater than 0.5 in (13 mm), use the following methods to avoid sprocketinterference:- Position the wearstrips so the ends extend in between the sprockets. See Anti-Sag Wearstrip
Configuration.
- Chamfer the wearstrip ends. Use a 45-degree angle starting 0.5 in (13 mm) below the wearstrip top.

A wearstrip height: ≤ 0.5 in (13 mm)
B wearstrip height: > 0.5 in (13 mm)
C sprocket interference
D angle: 45 degrees
E 0.5 in (13 mm) below wearstrip top
Figure 138: Chamfer wearstrips to avoid sprocket interference

ACCOMMODATING THERMAL EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
Wearstrip materials expand and contract due to changes in temperature or moisture. It is important toaccommodate these dimension changes when specifying wearstrip design and attachment methods.
For wearstrips supplied by Intralox, use the following guidelines to accommodate thermal expansion andcontraction. For other wearstrips, contact your supplier for recommendations.
• At operating temperatures above 100°F (38°C):- Determine the clearance gap from thermal expansion calculations. See Thermal Expansion andContraction for coefficients of expansion.
- Bevel-cut the opposing wearstrip ends at a 60-degree angle from horizontal.
- Stagger the wearstrip joining locations to enable smooth belt operation.
• At operating temperatures at or below 100°F (38°C):- Provide a clearance gap between wearstrips of 0.3 in (8 mm).
- Bevel-cut the opposing wearstrip ends at a 30-degree angle from horizontal.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

485

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A clearance gap: 0.3 in (8 mm)
B 30-degree cut angle for operating temperatures ≤ 100°F (38°C):
C clearance gap determined using thermal expansion calculation
D 60-degree cut angle for operating temperatures > 100°F (38°C)
Figure 139: Wearstrip gaps and cut angles

ANTI-SAG WEARSTRIP CONFIGURATION
When belt tension is not sufficient to support product near the conveyor ends, the belt can buckle and tall
products can tip. An anti-sag wearstrip configuration can eliminate buckling.
• To prevent product tipping due to belt buckling, extend wearstrips between the sprockets to within 0.5 in(13 mm) of the shaft centerline.

A belts can buckle between wearstrip and sprocket
Figure 140: Belts can buckle near conveyor ends

486

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A wearstrip ends at recommended location
B wearstrip extends between the sprockets
C sprocket
D shaft
Figure 141: Anti-sag wearstrip configuration

SOLID-PLATE CARRYWAYS
In a solid-plate carryway design, the belt slides over a continuous sheet of metal, UHMW-PE, or HDPE that
extends the full belt width and below all impact zones.
• Use a solid-plate carryway in applications with heavy loads or high impacts, to provide continuous belt
support.
• Consider adding slots, holes, or similar perforations to allow for drainage or passage of foreign material.

RETURNWAYS AND TAKE-UPS
Returnways on conveyors designed for use with Intralox modular plastic belts are generally exposed to low
tension loads, but are important for proper conveyor function. Properly designed returnways will:• Help create the back tension required to engage the drive sprockets.
• Provide storage to manage belt length changes.
Proper returnway design is critical for ensuring proper belt-to-sprocket engagement and minimizing belt
maintenance requirements.
NOTE: On bi-directional and push-pull conveyors where return side tensions are high, special attention mustbe paid to the returnway design. For information about returnways for bi-directional and push-pullconveyors, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Accommodate temporary changes in belt length during conveyor operation. See Belt Length
Management.
• Provide adequate belt tension to ensure proper belt-to-sprocket engagement. See Back Tension.
• Consider adding a gravity or screw take-up if catenary sag alone does not provide adequate back tension.
See Take-Ups.
• Select a returnway design appropriate for the conveyor length and application conditions. See Returnway
Design Options.
• Ensure flights, buckets, and raised belt features are supported and protected from damage. See Support
for Accessories and Textured Belts.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts487

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESBELT LENGTH MANAGEMENT
An important function of the returnway is to accommodate belt length changes during conveyor operation.
Belt length management is vital to maintain sufficient tension after the belt disengages from the drive
sprockets.
Belts expand or contract due to temperature variations, temporary elongation while under load, andpermanent elongation due to break-in and wear. A belt which increases in length can disengage from thedrive sprockets if the returnway is not properly designed. A belt which contracts due to cold temperatures
can cause over-tensioning and excessive shaft loads if the belt is not long enough to accommodate
contraction.

TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS
Any significant change above or below the ambient temperature results in expansion or contraction of thebelt. The amount of contraction or expansion depends on the belt material, the difference between operating
and ambient temperature, and the overall belt length.
• Identify the expected ambient temperature of the application. Intralox assumes an average ambient
temperature of about 70°F (21°C).
• To calculate expected thermal expansion and contraction, see Thermal Expansion and Contraction.

ELONGATIONAll belts temporarily elongate when tension is applied. The amount of elongation depends upon the belt
design, the material, the amount of tension (belt pull) applied, and the operating temperature.
Permanent belt length changes occur over time, as rods and module links rub together and wear. Over time,wear can deform a round hinge rod into a shape that looks like a vehicle camshaft. This camshaft-style hinge
rod wear, along with rod hole deformation in the belt run direction, causes the belt length to increase.
Significant length changes can result in sprocket disengagement.
Belts have a break-in period during the first several days to weeks of conveyor operation. Depending on theapplication and environment, break-in growth can range from 0.5% to 1% of total length.
• Frequently measure catenary sag and belt pitch during the break-in period.
For more information about measuring belt-pitch and adjusting the belt length, contact Intralox Customer
Service.

CATENARY SAG
Belts grow longer while a conveyor is running. This elongation is due to product load, temperature variations,and wear. One or more catenary sag sections in the conveyor returnway are required to accommodate these
temporary length changes. During operation, these sections provide storage as the belt length increases.
For applications where significant length change is expected, other arrangements can be needed. For more
information, see Returnway Design Options.
• Ensure the depth of the first catenary sag section after the snub support does not exceed 1–4 in (25–102mm). Additional catenary sag decreases belt tension and can lead to sprocket disengagement.

488

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A catenary sag depth decreases when conveyor is not operating
B catenary sag depth increases when conveyor is operating and under load
Figure 142: Use catenary sag to manage temporary belt length changes

BACK TENSION
To ensure proper belt-to-sprocket engagement, adequate belt tension must be provided in the returnway.
This tension is commonly referred to as back tension. The length and the depth of the first catenary sag
section directly after the drive sprockets provide this back tension. Back tension increases as the catenary
sag section length increases. Back tension also increases as catenary sag depth decreases.
It can be necessary to identify the length of belt within a catenary sag section, and the tension created bythat belt section. Intralox can help calculate these values. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.

A adjusted belt pull (ABP)
B back tension
C first catenary sag section
Figure 143: Back tension

RETURNWAY DESIGN OPTIONS
End-drive conveyors shorter than 6 ft (1.8 m) usually do not require returnway support. The catenary sag
between the shafts is sufficient for good operation if the sag depth is limited to a maximum of 4 in (102 mm).

Figure 144: Short returnway

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts489

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
End drive conveyors longer than 6 ft (1.8 m) must accommodate temporary belt length changes. Catenarysag, or catenary sag combined with a slide bed are commonly used for this purpose. When catenary sag is
not sufficient, a take-up can be used.
For most applications, a full catenary returnway provides low-tension control of temporary belt lengthchanges and creates the back tension required to engage the drive sprockets. For more information about
this design, see Full Catenary Returnways.

Figure 145: Full catenary returnway

A slide bed returnway can stabilize the belt and minimize resonance that causes catenary vibration on slowspeed conveyors. A slide bed returnway can also protect the belt from contact with objects or debris below
the returnway. For more information about this design, see Slide Bed Returnways.
End drive and slide bed conveyors that do not provide sufficient catenary sag can use a take-up to ensure
proper belt tension and storage. See Take-Ups.

Figure 146: Slide bed returnway

FULL CATENARY RETURNWAYS
On conveyors longer than 6 ft (1.8 m) intermediate returnway supports are needed, but the belt must be
unsupported for a significant part of the total length.
• For belts up to 1.07 in (27 mm) pitch, use returnway support rollers with a minimum diameter of 2 in (50mm). For larger pitch belts, use returnway support rollers with a minimum diameter of 4 in (100 mm).
• Place the returnway supports 36 in to 48 in (900 mm to 1200 mm) apart. This distance combines with thefirst catenary sag section depth and the distance from the shaft to the snub support to provide the belttension required for proper sprocket engagement.
• Place the snub support rollers 9 in to 18 in (229 mm to 457 mm) from the drive and idle shafts. Position thesnub support roller so the belt wraps between 180 degrees and 210 degrees around the sprockets.
• Ensure the depth of each catenary sag section is between 1 in and 4 in (25 mm and 102 mm).

490

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A drive shaft and sprockets
B snub support roller: 9 in to 18 in (229 mm to 457 mm) from shaft
C catenary sag section depth: 1 in to 4 in (25 mm to 102 mm)
D returnway support roller: 36 in to 48 in (900 mm to 1200 mm) apart
Figure 147: Catenary returnways

SLIDE BED RETURNWAYS• For belts up to 1.07 in (27 mm) pitch, use returnway support rollers with a minimum diameter of 2 in
(50 mm). For larger pitch belts, use returnway support rollers with a minimum diameter of 4 in (100 mm).
• Place the returnway supports 36 in to 48 in (900 mm to 1200 mm) apart. This distance combines with thefirst catenary sag section depth and the distance from the shaft to the snub support to provide the belttension required for proper sprocket engagement.
• Place the snub support rollers 9 in to 18 in (229 mm to 457 mm) from the drive and idle shafts. Position thesnub support roller so the belt wraps between 180 degrees and 210 degrees of wrap around the sprocket.
• After the snub roller at the drive end, provide a minimum of two catenary sag sections before the slide
bed.
• Provide at least one catenary sag section after the slide bed.
• Ensure the slide bed is not longer than two-thirds of the conveyor length. The remaining one-third
provides catenary sag required for belt storage. If the slide bed must be longer than two-thirds of theconveyor length, use a take-up to provide adequate back tension. See Take-Ups.
• Provide a lead-in radius for the slide bed. This radius prevents catchpoints that can cause belt damage.
Ensure the radius arc is equal to or greater than the returnway support roller diameter.
• Ensure the depth of each catenary sag section is between 1 in and 4 in (25 mm and 102 mm).

A drive shaft and sprockets
B snub support roller: 9 in to 18 in (229 mm to 457 mm) from shaft
C catenary sag section depth: between 1 in and 4 in (25 mm and 102 mm)
D returnway support roller: 36 in to 48 in (900 mm to 1200 mm) apart
E slide bed lead-in radius: radius arc ≥ returnway support roller diameterF slide bed: at least 7.5 ft (2.3 m) from drive sprockets; and ≤ two-thirds of conveyor length
Figure 148: Slide bed returnways

TAKE-UPS
When using a take-up:• Ensure the shafts remain aligned. Screw take-ups introduce the risk of misaligned shafts, which can lead
to belt tracking issues.
• Avoid belt overtightening. Overtightening reduces belt and sprocket life and increases shaft deflection.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

491

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESGRAVITY TAKE-UPS
Gravity take-ups usually consist of a weighted (gravity) roller resting on the belt in the returnway. The roller
weight creates the belt tension required to maintain proper sprocket engagement. A gravity take-up is mosteffective when placed near the drive end. Gravity take-ups are recommended for conveyors with any of thefollowing conditions:• Over 75 ft (23 m) long
• Over 50 ft (15 m) long with belt speeds over 150 ft/min (30 m/min)• Spatial constraints, such as with overhead conveyors• Belt speeds over 50 ft/min (15 m/min) with frequent starts under product loads greater than 25 lbf/ft2(1,197 N/m2)• Large temperature variations
Use the following guidelines when designing conveyors with a gravity take-up:• Use the recommended backbend roller diameter. See the following table for recommendations.
• Provide a gravity take-up roller with a diameter at least as large as the backbend roller diameter.
- For belt pitches under 1.00 in (25.4 mm), provide a gravity take-up roller with a mass that generates aminimum back tension of 10 lbf/ft (146 N/m) of belt width. For most applications, this back-tension
ensures proper sprocket engagement at 100% of allowable belt pull.
- For belt pitches equal to or greater than 2.00 in (50.8 mm), provide a gravity take-up roller with a massthat generates a minimum back tension of 20 lbf/ft (292 N/m) of belt width. For most applications, thisback-tension ensures proper sprocket engagement at 100% of allowable belt pull.
- Intralox can help calculate back tension for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service formore information.
• Provide enough distance between the backbend rollers to allow room for the gravity take-up roller.
• Ensure the distance between the gravity take-up roller centerline and backbend roller centerline is no lessthan three (3) times the belt pitch.
Recommended Backbend Roller Diameters
Belt Pitch
in≤0.5
0.6 to 12
2.5

Minimum Roller Diametermm≤12.7
15.2 to 25.4
50.8
63.5

in
2
4
6
8

mma
50
100
150
200

a Metric roller diameters are not an exact conversion of U.S. customary units.

492

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A load-bearing backbend roller
B gravity take-up roller (can be retained with a swing arm or vertical slotted hole in conveyor frame)
C distance between backbend rollers
D centerline distance between the gravity take-up roller and backbend roller
E centerline distance between drive shaft and backbend roller: 9 in to 18 in (229 mm to 457 mm)
F centerline distance between backbend roller and returnway support roller: 36 in to 48 in (900 mm to 1200 mm)
Figure 149: Gravity take-up

SCREW TAKE-UPS
Screw take-ups shift the position of one of the shafts by using adjustable machine screws. With a screw
take-up, the shaft bearings are placed in horizontal slots in the conveyor frame. The machine screws areused to move the shaft within the horizontal slots, changing the length of the conveyor. Screw take-ups canbe used to make minor adjustments to maintain proper catenary sag depth, but should not be used as
primary length control devices.
When using a screw take-up:• Ensure shafts are aligned after the conveyor length is adjusted.
• Ensure the belt is not overtightened. Overtightening reduces belt and sprocket life and increases shaft
deflection. For more information, see Shaft Deflection.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts493

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A adjustable machine screw
B horizontal slot
C shaft bearing
D adjustment gauge on both sides to verify shaft alignment
E longitudinal movement adjusts conveyor length
Figure 150: Screw take-up

SUPPORT FOR ACCESSORIES AND TEXTURED BELTS
Flights, buckets, sideguards require accommodation in the returnway. Friction Top, Nub Top, and similarbelts with textured surfaces designed to enhance or reduce friction require similar accommodations.
• Avoid rubbing contact between returnway components and any flights, buckets, sideguards, or textured
belt surfaces.
• Prevent contact with floors or any components below the returnway.
• Use straight, parallel wearstrips at the belt edges to support belts with flights, buckets, or sideguards.
• For design requirements for inclining and declining conveyors, see Incline and Decline Conveyors.
• For more information about product containment belts and accessories, see Flights, Buckets, andSideguards and Textured-Surface Belts.

A flight
B sideguard
C belt support wearstrips
Figure 151: Straight, parallel wearstrip at the belt edges

494

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES• Provide a center notch and an additional support wearstrip between flights and buckets when:- The belt pitch is less than or equal to 1.07 in (27.2 mm) and the belt width is greater than 18 in (457mm).
- The belt pitch is greater than 1.07 in (27.2 mm) and the belt width is greater than 24 in (610 mm).
- If belt accessories cannot be notched due to the application requirements, contact Intralox Customer
Service for design assistance.

A flighted belt
B center notch between flights
C belt support wearstrips
Figure 152: Center notch for wide belts

DRIVE SYSTEM
Drive systems for Intralox belts use plastic sprockets mounted on a square shaft, operated under low
tension to positively drive the belt.
• Use CalcLab to identify and validate belt strength and selection of drive system components. For more
information about CalcLab, see Additional Resources.
A typical drive system consists of the drive motor, gearbox, and the shaft and sprocket assembly on theconveyor drive end. Each component is important for proper conveyor function.

A gearbox
B drive motor
C sprocket
D square shaft

E center sprocket
F center sprocket retainer ringG outer sprocket retainer ring
(optional)

Figure 153: Drive system components

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts495

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
Use the following guidelines when designing drive systems:• Whenever possible, use an end-drive design. See Drive Location.
• Ensure the selected shaft is large enough to absorb the expected deflection and torque load. See Shafts.
• Use the recommended size and quantity of sprockets. See Sprockets.
• Ensure the center sprockets are properly retained, and all other sprockets can move laterally along theshaft. See Sprocket Retention.
• Consider mechanical efficiency losses when determining power requirements. See Power Requirements.
• Use a soft-start electric motor, variable-frequency drive (VFD), or wet or dry fluid couplings. See Soft-Start
Motors and Fluid Couplings.

DRIVE LOCATION
For most applications, Intralox recommends an end-drive design, which uses a drive shaft located at theoutfeed end. Center-drive designs can be used if an end-drive design is not possible, or if the conveyor must
be bi-directional.

END DRIVE
On end-drive conveyors, the drive shaft is located at the outfeed end and a freely spinning shaft with rollers
or sprockets is placed at the infeed end. The drive shaft pulls the belt through the carryway. Since the beltload typically peaks as the belt reaches the drive sprockets, about half of the belt is under tension during
each belt revolution. Compared to center-drive conveyor belts, end-drive conveyor belts are exposed to lesstension because the belt experiences less articulation under load. Less tension results in longer belt life.
• Use an end-drive design whenever possible to maximize belt life and minimize maintenance requirements.

A run direction
B portion of belt under tension (shown in orange)
C one (1) high-tension articulation point
D drive motor
E snub support
F portion of belt not under tension (shown in blue)
G returnway support
H idle shaft and sprockets
Figure 154: Belt tension on end-drive conveyors

CENTER DRIVE
When it is not possible to locate the drive system at the outfeed end, or if the conveyor must be bidirectional, a center-drive design can be used. In a center-drive design, the drive is mounted in the
returnway and freely spinning rollers or sprockets are placed at the infeed and outfeed ends. With a centerdrive design, the belt load typically peaks as the belt reaches the drive sprockets. Because the drive
sprockets are in the returnway, the belt is under tension through more than half of each belt revolution. As aresult, center-drive designs have the following characteristics compared to end-drive designs:

496

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES• There is an increased need for proper catenary sag to achieve adequate back-tension and maintainsprocket engagement.
• The outfeed shafts on a center-drive conveyor are under twice the load compared to an end-drive
conveyor. The increased load requires larger shafts and results in increased wear on the bearings. On a bidirectional conveyor, both end shafts are considered outfeed shafts.
• The belt is under tension through a portion of the returnway, between the conveyor outfeed and the drive
motor.
• There is increased articulation under load, since the belt remains under tension through the conveyor
outfeed, into the returnway, and onto the drive sprockets. The increased articulation accelerates wear ofrods, belt hinges, and all returnway components.

A run direction
D five (5) high-tension articulation
pointsB portion of belt under tension
E drive motor(shown in orange)
C portion of belt not under tension(shown in blue)
Figure 155: Belt tension on center-drive conveyors

Load-Bearing Backbend Rollers
The load on backbend rollers begins as a horizontal load then changes to a vertical load. The result is avector load that is higher than the belt tension. To accommodate this vector load:• Use the recommended roller diameters provided in the following table. Smaller rollers wear faster, leading
to roller distortion and belt misalignment.
• Provide bearings for all load-bearing backbend rollers.
• Ensure shafts are properly sized.
• Ensure the distance between the drive shaft centerline and the backbend roller centerline is a minimum of
three times the belt pitch.
• Place the backbend rollers so the belt wraps 180 degrees around the sprockets.
Recommended Backbend Roller Diameters
Belt Pitch
in≤0.5
0.6 to 12
2.5

Minimum Roller Diametermm≤12.7
15.2 to 25.4
50.8
63.5

in
2
4
6
8

mmb
50
100
150
200

b Metric roller diameters are not an exact conversion of U.S. customary units.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts497

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A backbend roller (see preceding table for diameter recommendations)
B minimum of 3× belt pitch
C belt wraps 180 degrees around sprockets
Figure 156: Load-bearing backbend roller configuration

SHAFTS
Shaft design and the relationship between shaft design and belt pull are critical aspects of conveyor design.
Use the following guidelines to design shafts:• Use square shafts whenever possible. See Shaft Selection.
• Use CalcLab to determine the proper shaft size and material for your application.
• Ensure shaft deflection and torque are within acceptable limits. See Shaft Deflection and Torque Load.

SHAFT SELECTION
Intralox can supply square shafts machined to your specification. For more information, see Square Shafts in
the Product Line chapter.
Square shafts provide maximum efficiency in driving the belt. Square shafts have many benefits:• Positive transmission of torque without the need for keys and keyways.
• Four contact points to transmit torque.
• Smooth lateral sprocket movement along the shaft, as the belt expands or contracts due to temperaturechanges.
• Accommodation of the different lateral expansion characteristics of the belt and shaft materials.

498

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A square shaft
B round shaft
Figure 157: Square shafts have four contact points to transmit torque

Alternatives to square shafts include round shafts, rollers, and scroll idlers.
Round shafts are recommended on the infeed end for conveyors with two belts running side-by-side on one
shaft.
• In applications with multiple belts on one shaft, use a round idle shaft with sprockets keyed on the shaft
for only one belt.
• Leave the remaining sprockets unkeyed, to freely spin around the round shaft. This approach mitigates therisk of belt-to-sprocket disengagement if the belts elongate at different rates.
For more information about including round shafts, rollers, and scroll idlers in your design, contact Intralox
Customer Service.

SHAFT DEFLECTION
Shafts act as beams supported by bearings. Shafts are subjected to stress by belt tension transmitted
through the sprockets. If shafts are not properly designed, this stress can result in excessive shaft deflection
or shaft failure. Excess shaft deflection causes sprocket misalignment and improper belt-to-sprocket
engagement.
• Use CalcLab to calculate deflection, or contact Intralox Customer Service for assistance.
• Ensure deflection of both the drive shaft and idle shaft is within acceptable limits:- For end-drive conveyor drive and idle shafts, ensure deflection is less than or equal to 0.10 in (2.5 mm)- For all center-drive conveyor shafts, ensure deflection is less than or equal to 0.22 in (5.6 mm). The
greater deflection is acceptable for center-drive conveyors because the tension load on the sprockets isgreater and more uniformly distributed.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts499

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A sprocket misalignment
B shaft deflection
Figure 158: Excessive shaft deflection (top view)

Intermediate Bearings to Reduce Deflection
For applications with wide belts or heavy loads, one or more additional bearings can be used to reduce
deflection to acceptable levels.
• Use CalcLab to calculate deflection when using more than two bearings.
• When using intermediate bearings, select sprockets with the largest practical diameter. Larger sprockets
create space for the bearings to fit.
• For low speed, non-abrasive applications, a static shoe support can be used instead of an intermediate
bearing.

TORQUE LOAD
Drive shafts must be large enough to absorb the expected torque load. Belt pull, acting through the
sprockets, causes torsional or twisting load on the drive shaft. If shafts are not properly designed, twisting
can lead to shaft failure. Shaft twisting can cause many issues, including:• Uneven belt pull across the sprockets• Sprocket disengagement• Belt and sprocket damage• Increased risk of foreign material contamination

A shaft twisting
B misaligned sprockets
Figure 159: Shaft twisting

500

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES• Use CalcLab to calculate the shaft strength needed to transmit the required torque, or contact Intralox
Customer Service for assistance.
• Ensure the selected shaft is large enough to absorb the expected torque load. See Table 4: Maximum
Recommended Torque on Drive Shaft in the Formulas and Tables chapter.
• If a particular shaft size is desired but the calculated torque exceeds the recommendation for that shaft,recalculate the torque using a smaller diameter sprocket if the application allows.
- Sprocket size directly affects the relationship between belt pull and drive shaft torque. Larger sprockets
apply more torque to the shaft and motor when compared to smaller sprockets at the same belt pull.

SPROCKETS
Sprockets come in different styles, materials, and sizes. Consider all aspects of a sprocket when designing a
conveyor drive system.
Belt speed pulsates as belt modules engage with sprockets. The variation in speed is inversely proportional
to the number of teeth on the sprocket. For example, a belt driven by a six-tooth sprocket has a pulsating
speed variation of 13.4%, while a belt driven by a 19-tooth sprocket has a variation of only 1.36%. Belt
speed pulsation is caused by chordal action, which is the vertical movement of a belt as it wraps aroundsprockets. For more information, see Chordal Action.
The required sprocket quantity depends on belt width and other factors. A recommended minimum numberof sprockets for each series is provided in the Product Line chapter. These recommendations are minimums
and do not include application product loads. Greater product loads often require more sprockets.
• In applications where product tipping is a concern, or where smooth, even speed is critical, selectsprockets with the maximum number of teeth available.
• Ensure the sprocket quantity is appropriate for the application. Use CalcLab or contact Intralox Customer
Service for assistance.
• Use an odd number of sprockets whenever possible. This approach ensures an easily identifiable centersprocket for consistent locking and proper belt tracking.

SPROCKET RETENTION
It is necessary to laterally retain one sprocket on both the drive and idle shafts. The locked sprockets
provide the positive tracking necessary to keep the belt properly positioned within the conveyor frame. Allother sprockets must be allowed to move laterally, to accommodate thermal expansion differences between
the belt and other components.
Some applications require hold down wearstrips to maintain belt position. Sprocket retention is not needed
when hold down wearstrips are used, since the wearstrips maintain lateral belt position.
• Use the recommended location for the locked sprocket. See Locked Sprocket Position on Shaft.
• In general, lock the sprocket on or next to the belt centerline. When only two sprockets are used, lock the
sprocket closest to the drive journal.
- Retaining components are available for various shaft sizes, belt loads, and hygienic needs. For productinformation, see Retainer Rings and Center Sprocket Offset and Sprocket Spacers in the Product Linechapter.
• Ensure the locked sprockets on the idle and drive shaft are aligned with each other.
• Optionally, place retainer rings on the outer side of the outer sprockets to prevent unwanted sprocket
migration past the belt edges.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

501

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
POWER REQUIREMENTS
For formulas to determine the power required to drive the belt, see Belt Selection Instructions in the ProductLine chapter. Calculated belt power does not include the power required to overcome mechanical or other
inefficiencies in the system. Use the following table to identify mechanical efficiency losses in your design.
Average Mechanical Efficiency Losses
Ordinary
SleeveBearings

Ball
Bearings

2% to 5%

1%

Gear Reducers
Spur And Helical Gears
SingleDoubleTripleReduction
Reduction
Reduction

2%

4%

Worm Gears
SingleDoubleReduction
Reduction

5%5%

10% to 20%

Roller Chains

V Belts

3% to 5%2% to 4%

Hydraulic Power
Systems

Consult the
manufacturer.

Use the following formula to determine the required motor power:
Formula 12:

HP =

A
× 100
100 - B

where:
HP = required motor horsepower
A = belt drive power
B = total of all average mechanical efficiency losses

SOFT-START MOTORS AND FLUID COUPLINGS
Rapid starts of high-speed or loaded conveyors shortens belt and sprocket life. Rapid starts also havenegative effects on the entire drive train. The use of soft-start electric motors, VFDs, or fluid couplings
greatly reduces these negative effects.
• When the motor power exceeds 1/4 horsepower per foot of belt width (612 watts per meter), always use asoft-start electric motor, VFD, or wet or dry fluid couplings.

IDLE END
In many applications, pipe rollers supported by stub shafts can be used instead of an idle shaft andsprockets. These pipe rollers can be considerably stiffer than a solid square shaft of the same length. For
example:• A 4 in (102 mm) schedule 40 pipe has more than twice the stiffness of a 2.5 in (64 mm) square steel shaft.
• A 6 in (152 mm) schedule 40 pipe has more than twice the stiffness of a 3.5 in (89 mm) square steel shaft.
In heavily loaded applications with wide belts, the use of rollers instead of an idle shaft and sprockets caneliminate the need for intermediate bearings to reduce shaft deflection. Flanging or spooling on the rollers
ends can be used to retain the belt laterally.
Scroll idlers can also be used in place of idle sprockets. Scroll idlers help remove debris from the returnway.
For more information, see Scroll Idlers in the Product Line chapter.
• Use an idle shaft and sprockets whenever possible. Sprockets promote belt tracking.
• If sprockets are not used, provide edge containment.

PRODUCT CONTAINMENT
Flights, sideguards, and similar product containment accessories must be accommodated throughout theconveyor, and particularly in the returnway. Friction Top, Nub Top, and similar belts with textured surfaces
designed to enhance or reduce friction also require accommodation and are not compatible with all
conveyor designs.

502

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESFLIGHTS, BUCKETS, AND SIDEGUARDS• Provide a backbend radius of 12 in to 18 in (305 mm to 457 mm). If considering a smaller backbend
radius, contact Intralox Customer Service.
• Ensure flight spacing is compatible with the backbend radius.
• Provide proper returnway belt support. See Support for Accessories and Textured Belts.
• Ensure the entire belt path is free of catchpoints that can damage flights, buckets, and sideguards.
• Ensure there is enough clearance between static sidewalls and flights.
• For sideguards, consider whether product-friendly or conveyor-friendly orientation is needed.
- Product-friendly orientation is standard. This approach prevents product loss but can create
catchpoints that can damage sideguards.
- Conveyor-friendly orientation avoids catchpoints but can increase product loss.

A run direction
B conveyor-friendly orientation: leading edge of sideguard is inward, toward productC product-friendly orientation: leading edge of sideguard is outward, toward conveyor frame
Figure 160: Sideguard orientation

TEXTURED-SURFACE BELTS
Friction Top, Nub Top, and similar belts with textured surfaces designed to enhance or reduce friction havean increased risk of accelerated belt wear and product damage during transfer on and off the belt. Use thefollowing guidelines to minimize these risks:• Avoid using textured-surface belts in applications where product accumulates. Friction between the
product and a textured-surface belt is deliberately high, resulting in high flow pressure and increased beltpull.
• Avoid sliding side transfers when using textured-surface belts with sensitive products that are easily
damaged. Use end-to-end transfers at both the infeed and outfeed ends.
• Design the returnway to avoid rubbing contact with textured-surface belts. Avoid using a slide bed
returnway design. For more information, see Support for Accessories and Textured Belts.

TRANSFERSAll conveyor designs require careful attention to ensure successful product transfer on and off the belt.
Applications with tight-transfer requirements, or 90-degree transfers have additional design requirements.

DEAD PLATE GAP
Most conveyors require a gap at each transfer point to accommodate chordal action. For more information
about chordal action, see Chordal Action.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts503

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES• For belts without finger transfer plates, provide a gap at the transfer point onto the dead plate. Gap
dimensions are provided in the dead plate gap table for the selected belt series in the Product Linechapter.
• At the infeed end, position the dead plate 0.03 in (1 mm) above the belt surface.
• At the outfeed end, position the dead plate 0.03 in (1 mm) below the belt surface.
• If the application requires continual contact between the tip of the dead plate and the belt, use a hinged
mounting bracket to attach the dead plate. This approach allows the dead plate to move, but does resultin slight oscillation which can cause products to tip.

A dead plate gap
B dead plate
Figure 161: Dead plate gap

FINGER TRANSFER PLATESIntralox Raised Rib belts and matching finger transfer plates are a highly efficient, low-maintenance transfer
system currently used in many container handling applications.
Proper configuration of finger transfer plates is essential for trouble-free service and long belt life. Installation
is particularly important in applications where belts are subjected to high temperature variations andsignificant thermal expansion.
• In applications with wide belts and large temperature variations, ensure expansion and contraction arewith limits. See Temperature Effects on Finger Transfer Plates for more information.
• Drill and tap the metal plate support angle used to secure the finger transfer plates to the conveyor framefor 1/4–20 (metric size M6) screws. Accurate drilling and tapping are important.
• For an odd number of finger transfer plates, straddle the centerline. For an even number of plates, position
the plates from the belt centerline.
• Ensure the finger transfer plate is level with the belt +0.03 in (1 mm) -0.00 with the hinge rod at top deadcenter.
• For series-specific dimensional requirements, see Dimensional Requirements for Finger Transfer Plate
Installation for the selected series.

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS ON FINGER TRANSFER PLATESAs temperature varies, belt widths change in proportion to the magnitude of the temperature change. To
ensure proper finger transfer plate operation, perform the following check:
1. Determine the maximum expected change in temperature from ambient.
2. Multiply the maximum temperature change by the belt width.

504

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
3. If the calculated value is greater than the value provided for the selected belt series, contact Intralox
Customer Service for guidance.
NOTE: For temperature effect values for the selected belt, see the selected belt in the Product Line chapter.

90-DEGREE CONTAINER TRANSFERS
For 90-degree transfer of beverage containers from one conveyor to another, full-radius guide rails with deadplates are commonly used. A dead plate spans the space between the two conveyors. With this rail shape,containers exert high pressure on the rail and on each other, often resulting in container damage.

C

D

B
E

A
A delivery conveyor run direction D dead plate
B receiving conveyor run direction E high-pressure forces on guiderail (longer, thicker arrow =C continuous guide railincreased pressure)
Figure 162: Conventional full-radius guide rail contour with excessive container pressure force buildup

PARABOLIC GUIDE RAILS
Compared to a full-radius guide rail, a parabolic guide rail provides better distribution of container pressure
forces. The following figure shows the forces are more evenly distributed. This approach results insignificantly less potential for container damage along the outer rail. However, an excessively large deadarea, which can strand containers, arises along the inner parabolic guide rail contour.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts505

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
C

D

B
E

A
A delivery conveyor run direction D dead plate
B receiving conveyor run direction E high-pressure forces on guiderail (longer, thicker arrow =C parabolic guide railincreased pressure)
Figure 163: Parabolic guide rail contours

ONEPIECE LIVE TRANSFER BELTS
ONEPIECE Live Transfer belts provide a solution to the dead area problem. ONEPIECE Live Transfer belts
run in the same direction as the delivery conveyor. This approach replaces the dead plate, enabling
continuous container movement and eliminating stranded containers.

D

C
B

A
A delivery conveyor run direction
B ONEPIECE Live Transfer belt
C receiving conveyor run direction
D continuous guide rail
Figure 164: Parabolic guide rail with ONEPIECE Live Transfer belt

For information on ONEPIECE Live Transfer belts, see the selected series in the Product Line chapter orcontact Intralox Customer Service.

506

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESTIGHT-TRANSFER METHODS
Dynamic nose-rollers and static nosebars are often used in tight-transfer applications. Increased belt hinge
movement and increased tension as a belt moves around a nose-roller or nosebar can lead to accelerated
wear on the belt and rods. This increased tension is a function of the friction between the belt and nosebar
and the angle of wrap between the belt and the nosebar. Use the following guidelines to minimize these
impacts:• Select an acetal belt and abrasion resistant nylon rods if the application allows. Intralox can recommend
an appropriate material for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Use a nose-roller rather than a nosebar whenever possible. Always use a nose-roller for high-pressure or
high-speed applications.
- Intralox offers a Dynamic Nose-Roller for certain belts. See Dynamic Nose-Rollers or contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
- When designing a nose-roller, consult your bearing supplier to identify bearings that are appropriate forthe expected RPM and applied forces.
• If using a nosebar, select a material that provides the lowest possible sliding friction between the belt andnosebar. Lower friction reduces belt tension. A nosebar is often exposed to a combination of high contactpressure and high belt speed. The nosebar material must withstand this combination of pressure andspeed.
- Use a wear-resistant material such as oil-filled nylon.
- Consult with your material supplier to ensure the pressure-velocity (PV) value of the selected material isappropriate for your application.
• Use the recommended conveyor frame dimensions. See Frame Dimensions.
• Minimize the amount of belt wrap around the nose-roller or nosebar. Place the shaft so the belt
approaches or leaves the nosebar or nose-roller at the recommended angle. Larger angles increase wear
on rods and rod holes. See the following table for return angle recommendations.
• Position the load-bearing roller to provide exactly 180 degrees of belt wrap around the drive sprockets.
• Use the recommended dimensions and distances in the following table.
- Detailed conveyor design guidelines are available for certain belts. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.
- For series not listed in the table, contact Intralox Customer Service.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

507

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESA Dynamic Nose-Roller
B load-bearing roller
C distance between nose-roller top surface and shaft centerline
D distance between shaft centerline and load-bearing roller centerline
E return angle
Figure 165: Typical tight-transfer infeed and outfeed configuration

Recommended Dimensions for Conveyors with Dynamic Nose-Rollers or Static Nosebars

SeriesMinimum DistanceNose-Roller or
Load-Bearing Roller (C) Between NoseNosebar (A) Minimum(B) Minimum
Roller Top Surface
Diametera
Diameterand Shaft Centerline
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm

Centerline Distance(D) Between Shaft
Returnand Load-Bearing
RollerAngle (E)binmm
degrees

S560

0.236

6

2

51

<12

<304

4

100

20–25c

S1000

0.75d

19d

3

76

<12

<304

<4

<100

20

S1100
S1500

0.875
0.5

22
12.7

3
3

76
51

<12
<12

<304
<304

<4
<4

<100
<100

20–25
20–25

S2300

0.75d

19d

4

102

<12

<304

<4

<100

20

S2400 without hold down guides
S2400 with hold down guides

1.375
1.5

34.9
38.1

4
4

102
102

<12
<12

<304
<304

<4
<4

<100
<100

20
20

a For belts not listed, use the smallest sprocket diameter for the nosebar diameter.
b Contact Intralox for application-specific recommendations.
c 20 degrees is ideal.

d Use an Intralox Dynamic Nose-Roller with S1000 and S2300 belts.

508

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESADDITIONAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS• Always identify a belt and accessories before designing the conveyor frame. For belt selection guidelines,
see Belt Selection Process.
• Consider the effects of chordal action when selecting a belt and sprockets. See Chordal Action.
• If the operating temperature differs from the ambient temperature, consider thermal expansion andcontraction when designing the conveyor. See Dimension Changes.
• Consider the effects of speed and adapt the conveyor design as needed for high-speed applications. See
Belt Speed.
• For abrasive applications, use the recommended guidelines to minimize wear to belts, sprockets, andother components. See Abrasion.
• In high-impact applications, protect the belt and wearstrips from deflection and damage. See High-Impact
Applications.
• Consider the expected exposure to cleaning, sanitation, or other chemicals when selecting materials. See
Chemical Damage.

CHORDAL ACTION
Chordal action is the vertical movement of a belt as it wraps around the sprockets on an end-drive conveyor.
As each belt row engages the sprockets, the row rises when the center of the belt hinge is at the top of the
sprockets (D). The belt row returns to horizontal when the center of a module is at the sprocket center (A),then drops below horizontal as the module center passes the sprocket center.

A module center at sprocket center
B belt at horizontal
C belt above horizontal
D belt hinge center at sprocket center
Figure 166: Chordal action

Chordal action is greatest when a large pitch belt is combined with small pitch diameter sprocket, as shownin the following figure. On a small sprocket, a belt articulates (bends) more and the chordal action isgreatest. The same belt articulates (bends) less when combined with a larger sprocket.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts509

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A large pitch belt with small pitch sprocket = most articulation
B large pitch belt with medium pitch sprocket = less articulation
C large pitch belt with large pitch sprocket = least articulation
Figure 167: Impact of sprocket size

Chordal action contributes to belt vibration, increases the potential for product tipping, and increases
articulation wear on belt hinges and rods. Use the following guidelines to minimize chordal action on enddrive conveyors:• To reduce chordal action, select the sprocket with the largest pitch diameter. Use CalcLab to calculate
expected torque for the selected sprocket. For more information about torque, see Torque Load.
• Consider an anti-sag wearstrip configuration for better support at transitions. See Anti-Sag Wearstrip
Configuration.

DIMENSION CHANGESThe following guidelines provide general information about thermal expansion and contraction. For
information about changes in dimension from other causes, see Belt Material Growth. For specific material
properties, see the belt and sprocket material information at the beginning of the Product Line chapter.

THERMAL EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
With few exceptions, the dimensions of all substances increase as temperature increases and contract as
temperature decreases. Since plastics expand and contract rather significantly, thermal expansion andcontraction must be considered in a conveyor design whenever operating temperatures differ from ambient
temperature.
Proper conveyor design can help accommodate thermal expansion and contraction. Conveyors that do notaccommodate these dimension changes have increased risk of shortened belt life, increased risk of belt
wear, and increased need for belt maintenance.
• To calculate expected dimension changes due to thermal expansion or contraction, use CalcLab or see
Thermal Expansion and Contraction in the Product line chapter.
• Ensure the catenary sag in the returnway is sufficient to absorb the increase in belt length. See
Returnways and Take-Ups.
• Provide side clearance, particularly on wide belts, to prevent interference with the side structure. See D
Drive Dimension.
• In low temperature applications, ensure the conveyor frame fully supports the belt while cold, but does notinterfere at ambient temperatures.

510

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESBELT SPEED
Faster belts speeds increase belt and sprocket wear and increase belt vibration. Vibration, especially in the
returnway, can lead to sprocket disengagement. Certain belts, conveyor designs, and components, such as
nose-rollers, nosebars, and hold down guides, can require slower speeds.
For all conveyor designs, increased belt speed leads to:• Increased product loss or damage, depending on product characteristics• Increased risk that the belt snags on catchpoints• Increased belt movement in the returnway• Unwanted conveyor movement• Increased noise during conveyor operation• Unwanted changes to activated or passive roller function
Radius belts have specific speed recommendations. Intralox can help determine the best speed for yourradius application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• For belt speeds of 150 fpm (46 mpm) or greater, use edge bearings or edge bearing belts.
• Consider pressure velocity (PV) analysis and limits when selecting wearstrip materials.
• When using hold down guides with belt speeds over 80 fpm (24 mpm), contact Intralox Customer Service.

ABRASION
Abrasive materials embed in softer materials and wear harder materials. Use the following guidelines toaccommodate and minimize wear in abrasive environments:• Ensure the selected belt material is suitable for abrasive applications. See Special Application Belt
Materials.
• Select abrasion resistant sprockets, EZ Clean sprockets, or sprockets made of another durable material.
See Sprocket Material Availability.
• Consider using a chevron pattern for carryway wearstrips. See Chevron Pattern.
• Use a scroll idler to help remove abrasive debris. See Scroll Idlers.
• Consider an EZ Clean in Place (CIP) System to increase debris removal. See EZ Clean™ in Place (CIP)
System.
• Plan regular cleaning according to Intralox recommendations for wet or dry environments. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.
• Plan regular preventive maintenance inspections to identify and replace worn components. For more
information, see the Intralox Modular Plastic Conveyor Belts Installation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Manual at www.intralox.com.

HIGH-IMPACT APPLICATIONS
In applications with high impacts or concentrated (point) loads, belts supported by carryway wearstrips are
susceptible to increased deflection and damage in the unsupported areas between the wearstrips. Use thefollowing guidelines to avoid deflection and increase belt life.
• Consider using a solid-plate carryway or add impact plates to impact zones.
• In applications where product drops from a chute or hopper onto the carryway:- Use a lower belt speed and reduce the chute or hopper load as much as possible to prevent belt
damage.
- Avoid using flighted belts.
- For high impacts or heavy loads concentrated in a small area, contact Intralox Customer Service.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

511

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESCHEMICAL DAMAGE
Over time, continued chemical exposure degrades plastics. Factors affecting the degree of degradation are
dwell time, temperature, and chemical concentration. To minimize belt damage, use the chemical supplierrecommendations for effective dwell times, temperatures, and concentrations.
Chemical resistance information for common belt materials is provided in the Chemical Resistance Guide.

OTHER CONVEYOR DESIGNS• Incline or decline conveyors are similar to horizontal designs, but have certain additional design
requirement for good operation. See Incline and Decline Conveyors.
• Vacuum conveyors introduce additional belt pull and require attention to airflow through the belt. See
Vacuum Conveyors.
• Radius conveyors require specific dimensions for turning and straight sections, and often include noserollers or take-ups. See Radius Conveyors.
• Spiral conveyors can be structure-supported or belt-supported and have additional drive method options.
See Spiral Conveyors.
Intralox engineers and technical experts are available to provide engineering assistance and design reviews
for any conveyor design. Detailed design guidelines are available for certain belts and applications. Contact
Intralox Customer Service for more information.

INCLINE AND DECLINE CONVEYORSStraight incline or decline conveyors are fully inclined. These conveyors require careful attention to angle,
motor placement, and the amount of back tension on drive sprockets. Intralox can help determine the best
design for your conveyor. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
Two-part incline or decline conveyors include a horizontal section either before or after the incline. Threepart incline or decline conveyors include horizontal sections before and after the incline section. For more
information about these designs, see, Two-Part and Three-Part Incline/Decline Conveyors.

A straight incline or decline
B two-part incline or decline with horizontal section after incline
C two-part incline or decline with horizontal section before incline
D three-part incline
Figure 168: Incline and decline conveyor types

512

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES• Avoid attempting to push product up an incline.
• For proper sprocket engagement, prevent belt sag between the drive sprockets and the first roller or shoe.
A snub roller can be required if the infeed straight is larger than 4 ft (1.2 m).
• Provide an active or dynamic take-up on the idle shaft to ensure proper catenary sag. As the angle ofincline increases, the effectiveness of catenary sag as a belt length control method decreases.
• Ensure belts and accessories move freely through the returnway and do not contact drip pans or othercomponents below the conveyor. See Support for Accessories and Textured Belts.
• On two- and three-part incline or decline conveyors:- Provide a hold down shoe at the intermediate point in the lower part of the carryway. Ensure the shoeradius is as large as the application allows. The minimum radius is 6 in (152 mm). See Two-Part andThree-Part Incline/Decline Conveyors.
- Provide an internal roller or shoe at the transition point in the lower part of the returnway. The minimum
diameter is 3 in (76 mm).
• Consider a drum or scroll on the idle shaft if product or debris is expected to fall between the belt and the
sprockets.

TWO-PART AND THREE-PART INCLINE/DECLINE CONVEYORS
The following figure shows design features and options commonly used on elevating conveyors.

G
A

BC

D

E

F
J
M

A run direction
B idle shaft and sprockets at
infeed end
C take-up
D flight
E beltF shoe at transition point

HKL

G sideguards
H drive shaft and sprockets at
outfeed end
J returnway support roller
K belt support wearstrips
L drip pan
M internal roller at transition point

Figure 169: Three-part incline/decline conveyor

HOLD DOWN ROLLER ACCESSORIES
Two- and three-part elevating conveyors must be guided through elevation transitions. Guidance can beprovided with hold down shoes or rollers above the belt, or by using hold down roller accessories available
for certain belts. These accessories are built into the underside of the belt and held in place by the belt hingerods. The rollers ride in steel rails below the belt and anchor the belt in position as it enters a transition. For
information about compatible belts and accessory placement on the belt, see Hold Down Rollers in the
Product Line chapter.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

513

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES
Use the following guidelines for conveyors with hold down rollers.
• Select sprockets large enough to prevent hold down rollers from contacting the shafts.
- When using a 1.5 in or 40-mm square shaft, the minimum allowable sprocket pitch diameter is 6.4 in(163 mm).
- When using a 2.5 in or 60-mm shaft, the minimum allowable sprocket pitch diameter is 7.7 in (196 mm).
• Provide steel rails in the carryway and the returnway.
- Provide a minimum rail width of 0.75 in (19 mm).
- Provide a minimum rail height of 0.125 in (3 mm). A thicker rail requires a larger rail bend radius.
- Ensure the rail bend radius is a minimum of 12 in (305 mm). To minimize wear, provide a bend radius aslarge as the application allows.
- In applications where large temperature variations are expected, rails must be placed carefully toaccommodate the thermal expansion of the belt. The transverse movement of the roller assemblies canbe calculated by using the coefficients of thermal expansion. See Thermal Expansion and Contraction.
Use the distance of the hold down roller assembly to the belt centerline to calculate the movement.

A belt top surface
B belt bottom surface
C steel rail, minimum height: 0.125 in (3 mm), minimum width: 0.75 in (19 mm)
D hold down roller
E distance between steel rails: 0.5 in (13 mm)
F clearance above hold down rollers: 0.26 in (7 mm)
Figure 170: Hold down roller

A beltB hold down roller
C steel rail
Figure 171: Hold down roller

514

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESVACUUM CONVEYORS
In vacuum applications, differential pressure holds products to the belt and holds the belt to the carryway.
This pressure introduces additional belt pull. If only a small area of the belt area is under vacuum with a low
differential pressure, the added belt pull can be insignificant. For larger belt areas with high differential
pressure, the additional pull is higher. Intralox can help calculate the expected belt pull for your application.
Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
When designing a vacuum conveyor, it can be useful to determine expected airflow through the belt at
various differential pressures. Airflow through the belt depends on several factors:• The amount of open area in the selected belt
• The differential pressure• Product spacing on the belt
• Air leakage around the belt edges
For airflow rates on belts commonly used in vacuum applications, see Table 6: Airflow Rate Through Belt,
per Square Foot of Belt Area.

RADIUS CONVEYORS
Use the following guidelines when designing radius conveyors:• Use the recommended radius for inside turns (A). Each belt has unique inside turn radius requirements.
See the product information for the selected belt or contact Intralox Customer Service for more
information.
• Ensure the straight section between turns of opposing direction (B) is a minimum of 2.0 × the belt width.
Using less than the recommended minimum length increases the risk of higher wear, higher belt tensions,and increased belt vibration.
• There is no minimum straight section required between turns that are in the same direction.
• Ensure the length of the final straight section at the outfeed end (C) is at least 5 ft (1.5 m). If 5 ft (1.5 m) is
not feasible, shorter lengths (down to 1.5 × the belt width) can be used. Shorter lengths require a gravity
take-up to ensure the belt properly engages the drive sprockets. For more information, see Gravity TakeUps.
• Ensure the first straight section at the infeed end (E) is a minimum 1.5 × the belt width. This length can beshortened to 1 × the belt width if using a nose-roller, idle roller, or disks rather than sprockets on the idle
shaft.
• For infeed and outfeed configuration on tight-transfer conveyors, see Tight-Transfer Methods.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

515

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A inside turnB straight section between turns of opposing direction
C straight section at outfeed
D drive motor
E straight section at infeed
F infeed end
G outfeed end
H run direction
Figure 172: Typical layout for turns in both directions

A inside turnB straight section at outfeed
C drive motor
D straight section at infeed

E infeed end
F outfeed end
G hold down wearstrip
H run direction

Figure 173: Typical layout for turns in one direction

516

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESHOLD DOWN WEARSTRIPS
The use of hold down wearstrips along both belt edges over the full carryway is recommended, except inheavily loaded or high-speed applications. For applications that require the full belt width for producttransport, belts with integrated hold down guides can be used with hold down guide wearstrips placed
below the belt.
For information about hold down wearstrips and hold down guide wearstrips, see Custom Wearstrips.
NOTE: In heavily loaded or high-speed applications, do not use hold down guides to guide the belt througha turn. Rapid wear to the hold down guides and wearstrips occurs in applications with high loads or speeds.
Do not use hold down guides to hold the belt down through a negative transition. Intralox can provide a belt
pull analysis for your application. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.
• Provide continuous hold down guides through an entire turn, in both the carryway and the returnway.
- Start the hold down guides before the turn, at a distance of 1 × the belt width.
- End the hold down guides after the turn, at a distance of 1 × the belt width.
- Ensure hold down guide wearstrips provide adequate hold down at the outside edge.
- Provide enough clearance between the belt and the hold down wearstrips to prevent binding at theoutside edge. Factors include belt width, wearstrip design, curve radius, molding tolerances, andapplication temperatures and conditions. Intralox can help determine the proper clearance for yourapplication.

A hold down wearstrip
B clearance on outside edge
C belt on carryway
D belt on returnway
Figure 174: Hold down wearstrips for standard belts

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

517

3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

A hold down wearstrip
B clearance on outside edge
C belt on carryway
D belt on returnway
Figure 175: Hold down wearstrips for High Deck and Raised Rib flush edge belts

A inside edge
B belt on carryway
C hold down guide wearstrip
D clearance on outside edge

E hold down guide
F hold down wearstrip
G belt on returnway

Figure 176: Hold down guide wearstrips for belts with hold down guides

518

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESSPIRAL CONVEYORSIntralox can provide an engineering analysis for your spiral conveyor design and recommend an appropriate
belt for your application. For more information, see Engineering Analysis for Spiral and Radius Belts orcontact Intralox Customer Service.

DIRECTDRIVE
DirectDrive belts use positive engagement to drive the inside edge of the belt using a drum with drive bars.
This technology significantly reduces belt tension and total system stress. DirectDrive structure-supported
spirals ensure better system performance, reduced downtime, and substantially longer belt life.

Figure 177: DirectDrive structure-supported spiral conveyor

DIRECTDRIVE STACKER
The DirectDrive Stacker belt supports its weight on the inner and outer edges, removing the need for a
traditional carryway. This approach allows for twice the amount of belt within the same vertical space as astructure-supported spiral conveyor.
DirectDrive is a licensed technology. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

Figure 178: DirectDrive Stacker spiral conveyor

FRICTION DRIVE SYSTEMSFriction-driven spiral conveyors use two VFDs and two motors connected through a control panel. The takeup motor determines the line speed. The drum rotation is used to control belt tension.
Overdrive refers to the relative motion between the drum and the belt. Overdrive is the difference between
the drum speed and the linear belt speed. Adjusting the overdrive allows control of belt tension andimproves product orientation.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

519

3 DESIGN GUIDELINESSIDE DRIVE
Side Drive belts are driven by sprockets at multiple locations along the belt with a drive motor at eachsprocket. In turning sections, sprockets are placed at the outside edge. In straight sections, sprockets areplaced on both belt edges. Some Side Drive conveyors use additional drive motors on the infeed or outfeed
shafts. This conveyor design accommodates long belts, minimizes transfer points, and provides a simple,
fully washdown-capable conveyor. Side Drive is a licensed technology. Contact Intralox Customer Service
for more information.

Figure 179: Side Drive belt and sprocket• For sprocket placement, see the Intralox Modular Plastic Conveyor Belts Installation, Maintenance &Troubleshooting Manual at www.intralox.com.

SPIRAL SHAFT CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the typical shaft configuration for a spiral conveyor. Each belt has different
configuration requirements. Contact Intralox Customer Service for more information.

A shaft
B beltC support wheel

D split heavy-duty retainer ringE sprocket

Figure 180: Spiral shaft configuration

520

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLES
Intralox technical experts can help apply this information to your conveyor design. Contact Intralox
Customer Service for more information.

TABLE 1: SERVICE FACTORS
Operating Conditions

Add

Starts under no load, with load applied gradually
Frequent starts under load (more than once per hour)
Operation at speeds greater than 100 fpm (30 m/min)Elevating conveyor
Pusher conveyor
Service factor (SF)

1.0
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.2
total

NOTE: At speeds greater than 50 fpm (15 m/min) on conveyors that are started with product accumulation,
consider soft-start motors.

TABLE 2: TEMPERATURE FACTORSNOTE: These graphs can be used to manually calculate a conveyor belt analysis. The Intralox Engineering
Program calculates the temperature factor automatically, based on the operating temperature of theapplication.
Acetal and HSEC Acetal
°C

0.2
130

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

ChemBlox
0.9

°F

120

248

110

230

100

100

212

D

90

°C

1.0
266

194

80

176

70

158

60

140

A 50

122

40

104

30

86

20

68

10

50

122

40

104

30

86

20

68
50

-4
-22

-40

-40

10

-50
0.2

-58
1.0

00

0.8

0.9

Figure 181: Acetal and HSEC acetal temperature factor

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

158

A 50

-30

0.7

D

140

-20

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D Acetal and HSEC acetal temperature factor—Intermittent
exposure above 200°F (93°C).

212

60

14

0.6

°F

1.0

176

70

B

0.8

80

32

0.5

0.6

194

00

0.4

0.4

90

-10

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

B

32

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D ChemBlox
Figure 182: ChemBlox temperature factor

521

4 REFERENCE TABLES
Detectable MX
°C

°F

100

212

90

194

D

80

A

Detectable Polypropylene Composite

176

70

158

60

140

50

122

40

104

30

86

20

68

10

50

0

32

-10

14

-20

-4

-30

-22

-40
0.3

0.4

0.5

°C

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

1.1

B

-40

130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
A 30
20
10
00
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80

°F
0.0

0.1

0.2

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.0

1.1

1.2

1.3

D

0.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

266
248
230
212
194
176
158
140
122
104
86 B
68
50
32
14
-4
-22
-40
-58
-76
-94
-100

A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D Detectable polypropylene

Figure 184: Detectable polypropylene composite
temperature factor

Figure 183: Detectable MX temperature factor

FR TPES, Nylon, SELM, and LMAR

Hi-Impact
°F

1.0
266

°C

°F

120

248

100

212

110

230

90

194

100

212

130

0.2

0.4

C

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D detectable MX

°C

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

80

176

176

70

158

70

158

60

140

60

140

50

122

90

194

E

80

50

122

D

A 40

104 B

30

86

20

68

10

50

00

32

-10

14

-20

-4

-30

-22

-40

-40

-50

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

-58
1.0

C

A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D flame retardant
E nylon, SELM, LMAR

Figure 185: FR TPES, nylon, SELM, LMAR temperaturefactors

522

40

A

D

104

30

86

20

68

10

50

0

32

-10

14

-20

-4

-30

-22

B

-40
-40
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D Hi-Impact

Figure 186: Hi-Impact temperature factor

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLES
HR Nylon and HHR Nylon°C 0.1
160

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

°F

1.0

320

°C

°F

100

212

149

300

138

280

90

194

127

260

80

176

106

240

D

104
93
71

200

140

180

50

122

40

104

30

86

20

68

10

50

0

32

140 B

49

120

38

100

27

80

16

60

4

40

A

-7

20

-10

14

-18

0

-20

-4

-29

-20

-30

-22

-40
0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

-40
1.0

-40
0.3

C

0.4

0.5

Figure 187: HR nylon and HHR nylon temperature factors

0.2
130

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

1.1

1.0

1.1

-40

Figure 188: PK temperature factor

Polyethylene

°C

0.6

Polypropylene Composite
0.8

0.9

°C 0.1

°F

130

1.0
266

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

°F
266

118

244

106

222

120

248

110

230

100

212

90

194

80

176

81

70

158

69

156

57

134

44

112

32

90

20

68

8

46

D

60
50

140
122

40

104

30

86

20

68

10

50

93

B
A

200

D

178

00

32

-10

14

-20

-4

-4

24

-30

-22

-17

02

-40

-40

-28

-50
0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D polyethylene temperature factor

Figure 189: Polyethylene temperature factor

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

B

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D PK

A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D HHR nylon
E HR nylon

A

158

60

160

60

D

70

220

E

82

A

0.4

PK

0.9

-58
1.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

B

-20

C

A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D polypropylene composite—Intermittent exposure above
220°F (104°C). Avoid high impact below 45°F (7°C).

Figure 190: Polypropylene composite temperature factor

523

4 REFERENCE TABLESPolypropylene
°C

0.2
130

0.3

0.4

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

°F

1.0
266

120

248

110

230

D

100
90

A

0.5

PVDF
°C

°F

90

194

100

212

D

80

212
194

176

70

158

60

140

50

122

40

104

30

86

20

68

80

176

70

158

60

140

50

122

40

104

30

86

20

68

10

50

10

50

00

32

0

32

-10

14

-20

-4

-10

14

-30

-22

-20

-4

-40

-40

-30

-22

-50
0.2

-58
1.0

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

B
A

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D polypropylene temperature factor (T)—intermittent exposure
above 220°F (104°C). Avoid high impact below 45°F (7°C).

Figure 191: Polypropylene temperature factor

-40
0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

1.1

B

-40

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D PVDF

Figure 192: PVDF temperature factor

X-Ray Detectable PK
°C

°F

100

212

90

194

D

80

A

176

70

158

60

140

50

122

40

104

30

86

20

68

10

50

0

32

-10

14

-20

-4

-30

-22

-40
0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

1.1

B

-40

C
A belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °C
B belt temperature at drive end of conveyor, °F
C temperature factor
D X-ray detectable PK

Figure 193: X-ray detectable PK temperature factor

524

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLESTABLE 3: SHAFT DATA
Shaft Weight (Q), lbf/ft (N/m)
Carbon SteelStainless Steel

Moment of Inertia (I), in4 (mm4)5/8 in square

1.33a

1.33a

0.013

1 in square

3.40a

3.40a

0.083

1.5 in square

7.65a

7.65a

0.42

2.5 in square

21.25a21.25a3.25

3.5 in square

41.60a

41.60

12.50

25 mm square(48)b(4.920)b(32,550)

40 mm square(123)b

(12.55)b(213,300)

60 mm square(285)b

(29.11)b(1,080,000)

65 mm square(335)b(34.16)b(1,487,600)

30,000,000 (21,100)

28,000,000 (19,700)

Shaft Size

Modulus of elasticity (E) lb/ln2 (kg/mm2)

a Intralox USA can supply square shafts machined to specifications in these sizes in carbon steel (C-1018), stainless steel (303/304 and 316), and aluminum(6061-T6).

b Intralox Europe offers square shafting in these sizes in carbon steel (KG-37) and stainless steel (304).

TABLE 4: MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED TORQUE ON DRIVE
SHAFT
E

F

D
C

A

1000

1 .0

1 .5

2 .0

A torque, in-lbf
B shaft journal diameter, inC 303/304/316 stainless steel

B

2 .5

3 .0

3 .5

D 1018 carbon steel (cold-rolled)
E 2205 duplex stainless steel(cold-rolled)
F 4140 alloy steel (cold-rolled)

Figure 194: Maximum recommended torque on drive shaft

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

525

4 REFERENCE TABLESTABLE 5: BELT PULL LIMITS VS. SHAFT SPAN FOR RETAINERRING GROOVES
140
120
100

A 80
60
40
20
0
-500

C

D

E

1500

500

2500

B
A shaft span between bearings, in D 2.5 in square shafts
B maximum recommended belt
E 3.5 in square shafts
pull, lb/ft
C 1.5 in square shafts
Figure 195: Belt pull limits vs. shaft span for retainer ring grooves

526

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLESTABLE 6: AIRFLOW RATE THROUGH BELT, PER SQUARE FOOT
OF BELT AREA
X2
10

2.8

8

5.6

A

6

B*

11.3

C* D

16.8

22.6

28.3

55.6

4

169.9

226.5

280
254
203

O

I

E
F*
G*

113.3

152

J

H

102

M

K
L

2

50.8

N

Y1

Y2

1

25.4

0.8

20.3

0.6

15.2

P

0.4

10.2

Q
5.08

0.2

2.54

0.1
100

200

400

600

800

1,000

2,000

4,000

6,000

8,000 10,000

X1
Y1 Pressure drop, inches of water
Y2 Pressure drop, millimeters of water
X1 Airflow Rate, feet3/minute
X2 Airflow rate, meters3/minute
A S400 Flat Top
B* S1100 Edge Loss
C* S1100 Flat Top
D S900 Flat Top
E S900 Perforated Flat Top 1/8 in
F* S1100 Perforated Flat Top Ø 5/32 in
G S900 Perforated Flat Top Ø 5/32 in
H S900 Perforated Flat Top Ø 3/16 in
I S400 Flush Grid
J S800 PFT, S800 PFT Ø 5/32 in, S2000
K S100 Flush Grid
L S100 and S400 Raised Rib
M S200 Flush Grid, S200 Open Hinge
N S1100 Flush Grid
O S900 Flush Grid and Raised Rib
P S200 Open Hinge
Q S2200
Figure 196: Airflow rate through belt, per square foot of belt area

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

527

4 REFERENCE TABLESTABLE 7: MAXIMUM DRIVE SHAFT SPAN LENGTH
X2

X2
1000

500
10,000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

500

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4000

5000

2000
1000
500

1000

Y1

1000

250

500

Y2

Y1

20,00010,00010,000

5000

5000

2500

100

1000

50

100
50

500

1000
500

20

200

10

100

5

10
20

30

40

50

60

70

80

100
20

90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160

50
30

40

50

60

70

80

1500

2000

2500

X2
3000

3500

500

4000

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4000

5000

2000
1000
500

1000

Y1

100 110 120 130 140 150 160

Figure 198: Conventional conveyors with three (3) or moreequally spaced bearings; maximum allowed deflection:
0.10 in (2.5 mm)

X2
1000

90

X1

X1

Figure 197: Conventional conveyors with only two (2)bearings; maximum allowed deflection: 0.10 in (2.5 mm)

500
10,000

Y2

250

500

Y2

20,00010,00010,0005000

Y1 5000

2500

100
50

100

50

20

1000

500

1000

500

200

10
5

10
20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160

Y2

100
100

50
20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160

X1

X1

Figure 199: Bi-directional and pusher conveyors with only Figure 200: Bi-directional and pusher conveyors with threetwo (2) bearings; maximum allowed deflection:(3) or more equally spaced bearings; maximum allowed
0.22 in (5.6 mm)
deflection: 0.22 in (5.6 mm)

Y1 total shaft load, lb
Y2 total shaft load, kg
X1 max. shaft span length, in
X2 max. shaft span length, mm

528

A 3.5 in and 90-mm square carbon steel
B 3.5 in and 90-mm square stainless steel
C 2.5 in and 65-mm square carbon steel
D 2.5 in and 65-mm square stainless steel
E 60-mm square carbon steel
F F 60-mm square stainless steel
G 1.5 in and 40-mm square carbon steel

H 1.5 in and 40-mm square stainless steel
I I 1.5 in square aluminum
J 1.0 in and 25.4-mm square carbon steel
K 1.0 in and 25.4-mm square stainless steel
L 1.0 in square aluminum
M 5/8 in square carbon steel
N 5/8 in square stainless steel2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLESCHEMICAL RESISTANCE GUIDEThe following chemical resistance data is based on information from polymer manufacturers and Intralox
field experience. The data is indicative only for the conditions under which it was collected and is arecommendation only, not a guarantee. This data pertains to chemical resistance only, and the temperatureslisted are generally the chemical application temperatures. Other design and personal safety concerns were
not considered in making recommendations. Always test materials and products under exact intended
service conditions to determine their suitability for a particular purpose.
Chemicals listed without a concentration are for the undiluted chemical. Chemicals listed with aconcentration are in solution with water. Descriptions in parentheses are the active ingredient. In general, as
the chemical application temperature, chemical concentration, and exposure time rise, the chemical
resistance of a material decreases. For more information about chemicals and materials of construction
contact Intralox Customer Service.
Thermoplastics elastomers (TPE) are a growing class of polymers that offer a unique combination of plastic
and elastomeric properties. The most obvious of these properties is the ability to be injection molded onto asubstrate for achieving a performance criteria. The fact that a rubber (elastomeric) component is presentmeans that exposure to various chemicals in the application must be considered. Sources of chemicals
include the product to be conveyed, materials used to clean and maintain the equipment and belt, and anyother potential sources in the area. Intralox suggests doing appropriate testing and consulting with our staff
of experts early on to establish fitness for use in a particular application. In general, TPEs are compatible
with both weak acids, most alkalis, and alcohols. Contact with strong acids poses a problem. Due to arubber component, oils and fats will have a swelling effect over time. Organic solvents and varioushydrocarbons are also expected to cause problems. Generally speaking, fuels of any type will cause
problems over time. In food handling applications, ensure that the ingredients present in the food areconsidered. Also, in food handling, the higher the applied chemical temperature, chemical concentration,and exposure time, the more rapid the reaction between the chemical and the TPE will be.
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Nylon
Material
EC Acetal
Nylon SELM

Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name

Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information

Acetic acid–5%

R

R

R

R

Acetic acid–10%

R

R

R

R

Acetic acid–50%

R

R

R

R

Acetone

R

R

R

R

Alcohol, all types

R

R

R

Alum, all types

R

R

R

Almond oil

RR

Aluminum alum

R

Aluminumcompounds

R

—

R

R

R

—

LR

—

LR

NR

R

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

—

LR

NR

—

NR

NR

NR

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

LR

LR

R

R

R

—

R

—

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

—

—

R

R

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

R

R

R

R

R

LR

—

Aluminum chloride

R

R

R

R

LR

NR

—

—

LR

NR

R

Aluminum fluoride

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Aluminumhydroxide

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Aluminum nitrate

R

R

—

—

LR

NR

—

—

LR

NR

LR

LR

—

—

R

—

R

—

Aluminum
phosphate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

Aluminum sulfate

R

R

R

R

LR

NR

—

—

LR

NR

LR

LR

R

R

R

—

R

—

Ammonia

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

LR

LR

R

R

R

NR

R

—

Ammoniumcompounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

R

—

LR

R

R

R

R

R

LR

—

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

529

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Ammoniumacetate

R

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Ammoniumcarbonate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Ammonium
chloride

R

R

R

R

R

LR

R

R

R

LR

R

LR

R

R

R

—

R

—

Ammoniumfluoride

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ammoniumhydroxide

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

LR

R

R

—

—

—

—

LR

NR

LR

—

Ammonium nitrate

R

R

R

R

R

LR

—

—

R

LR

R

LR

R

R

R

—

R

—

Ammonium
phosphate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

LR

R

R

—

—

—

—

Ammonium salts

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ammonium sulfate

R

R

R

R

R

LR

R

—

R

LR

R

LR

R

R

R

—

R

—

Amyl acetate

NR

NR

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

NR

NR

NR

R

NR

NR

NR

Amyl chloride

NR

NR

LR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Aniline

R

LR

R

R

—

LR

NR

NR

—

LR

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

NR

NR

Antifreeze

R

R

R

T

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

R

—

—

Aqua regia

LR

NR

NR

NR

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Apple juice

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Arsenic acid

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Asphalt

—

—

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Bariumcompounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

Barium carbonate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Barium chloride

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Barium hydroxide

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Barium soap
grease

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Barium sulfate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Battery acid

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Beer

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Benzene

LR

NR

LR

NR

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

NR

Benzenesulfonic
acid

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Benzoic acid

R

R

R

R

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

LR

LR

—

—

R

—

NR

NR

Benzyl alcohol

—

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

LR

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Bone oil

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Borax

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Boric acid

R

R

R

R

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

LR

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Brake fluid

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

R

R

LR

LR

—

Brine acid

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Brine saturated

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Brine water

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bromic acid

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Bromine, liquid or
fumes

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

Bromine water

NR

NR

R

—

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

Butter

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

530

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Butyl acetate

NR

NR

R

LR

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

Butyl acrylate

NR

NR

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

LR

LR

—

—

Butyl glycol

—

—

R

R

R

LR

—

—

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

Butyric acid

R

R

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

NR

NR

Calciumcompounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

—

—

R

R

R

—

Calcium carbonate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Calcium chloride

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

LR

R

—

R

LR

R

LR

R

—

R

—

Calcium hydroxide

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

NR

NR

Calcium
hypochlorite

R

R

R

R

NR

—

—

—

NR

—

NR

NR

—

—

LR

—

R

—

Calcium nitrate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Calcium
phosphate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Calcium soap
grease

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Calcium sulfate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Calgonite–0.3%

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Carbon dioxide

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

—

Carbon disulfide

LR

NR

LR

NR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

NR

R

—

R

—

NR

NR

Carbontetrachloride

LR

NR

NR

NR

R

LR

R

R

R

LR

R

R

R

R

R

LR

LR

—

Castor oil

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Cellosolve™

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Chloroacetic acid
0–10%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Chlorine, gas

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

—

Chlorine, liquid

NR

NR

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Chlorine water–
0.4% Cl

R

LR

R

LR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

—

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

—

Chlorobenzene

NR

NR

LR

NR

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

R

LR

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Chloroform

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Chlorosulfonic
acid

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Chromic acid–
10%

R

R

LR

LR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

LR

—

NR

NR

Citric acid

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

R

R

R

—

Citric acid–10%

R

LR

R

R

LR

NR

—

—

LR

NR

LR

—

R

—

R

LR

R

—

Citrus juices

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Clorox®

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

—

Coconut oil

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Coffee

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Coppercompounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

LR

—

R

R

R

—

Copper chloride

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

—

R

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Copper fluoride

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Copper nitrate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Copper salts

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Copper sulfate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

LR

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

Corn oil

R

R

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

531

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Cottonseed oil

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Cresol

R

R

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

Crude oil

—

—

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

R

NR

—

—

Cyclohexane

R

NR

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

Cyclohexanol

R

LR

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Cyclohexanone

R

NR

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

N

—

Detergents

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

Dextrin

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Dibutyl phthalate

R

LR

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

LR

NR

NR

Diesel fuel

R

LR

R

LR

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

R

LR

NR

R

—

Diethyl ether

R

NR

LR

LR

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

R

—

NR

NR

Diethylamine

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Diethylene

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Diglycolic acid–
30%

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Diisooctyl
phthalate

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Dimethyl phthalate

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Dimethylamine

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Dioctyl phthalate

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ethyl acetate

R

LR

R

LR

R

NR

R

LR

R

NR

R

—

—

—

LR

LR

NR

NR

Ethyl alcohol(ethanol)

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LR

R

R

R

—

R

—

—

—

LR

LR

Ethyl ether

LR

LR

LR

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ethylamine

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ethylene chloride

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ethylene glycol

R

R

R

R

R

LR

R

LR

R

LR

R

LR

—

—

R

—

LR

—

Ferric or ferrous
compounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

Ferric chloride

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

LR

—

LR

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

Ferrous chloride

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Ferric nitrate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Ferrous nitrate

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ferric or ferrous
sulfate

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Fertilizers

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Formaldehyde–
30%

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

R

NR

R

—

NR

NR

Formic acid–10%

R

—

R

R

LR

LR

LR

—

LR

LR

NR

NR

LR

NR

R

LR

NR

NR

Formic acid–85%

R

LR

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

LR

NR

NR

NR

Freon

R

LR

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

Fuel oils

R

LR

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Furfural

—

NR

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Gasoline

R

NR

R

LR

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

R

R

LR

LR

—

Glucose

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Glycerin

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

LR

R

R

R

LR

R

—

Glycerol

R

R

—

—

R

LR

—

—

R

LR

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

n-Heptane

LR

NR

R

LR

R

—

R

LR

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

R

R

—

Hexane

R

NR

R

LR

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

R

R

R

R

—

532

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Hydrobromic acid–
10%

R

R

R

R

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

NR

NR

—

—

LR

—

NR

NR

Hydrochloric acid

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

R

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

LR

NR

—

Hydrochloric acid–
2%

—

—

R

R

LR

NR

R

R

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

—

R

—

Hydrochloric acid–
10%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

—

—

—

Hydrochloric acid–
38%

R

LR

R

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

Hydrofluoric acid–
10%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

Hydrofluoric acid–
35%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

Hydrofluoric acid–
50%

R

LR

R

LR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

Hydrogenperoxide–3%

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LR

R

R

NR

NR

R

R

R

LR

R

—

Hydrogenperoxide–30%

R

LR

LR

NR

NR

NR

LR

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

NR

R

LR

LR

—

Hydrogenperoxide–90%

LR

LR

LR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

Hydrogen sulfide

R

R

R

R

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

LR

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Hydroiodic acid

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

—

Igepal

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Iodine

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

R

—

Isobutyl alcohol

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Isopropyl alcohol

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

—

Isooctane

NR

NR

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

R

—

—

NR

—

Jet fuel

LR

NR

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Kerosene

R

NR

R

LR

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

R

R

R

—

Lactic acid–10%

—

—

R

R

R

LR

R

R

R

LR

R

NR

R

R

R

—

LR

—

Lactic acid–80%

R

R

R

R

R

NR

—

—

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

—

Lactose

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Lanolin

R

LR

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Lard

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Lauric acid

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Lead acetate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Lemon oil

LR

NR

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

Ligroin

LR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Lime sulfur

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Linseed oil

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Lubricating oil

R

LR

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

LR

R

R

R

R

R

—

Magnesiumcompounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

R

—

—

—

NR

—

Magnesium
carbonate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Magnesiumchloride

R

R

R

R

R

—

LR

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

Magnesiumhydroxide

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Magnesium nitrate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

533

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Magnesium
sulfate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Malic acid

R

LR

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

R

—

R

—

Maple syrup

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Manganese sulfate

R

L

R

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

Margarine

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Meat juices orsauces

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Mercuric
compounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

—

Mercuric chloride

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

R

—

—

—

R

—

Mercury

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Methyl alcohol

R

R

R

R

R

R

LR

LR

R

R

LR

—

R

R

NR

NR

LR

—

Methyl cellosolve

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Methyl chloride

NR

NR

LR

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Methyl ethyl
ketone

R

R

R

NR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

LR

R

—

R

R

NR

NR

LR

—

Methyl isobutyl
ketone

R

R

R

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

NR

NR

Methylene
chloride

LR

NR

LR

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Methylsulfuric acid

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Milk

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

LR

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Mineral oil

R

LR

R

LR

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

—

Mineral spirits

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Molasses

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Motor oil

R

NR

R

LR

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

R

R

LR

R

—

Naphtha

R

LR

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Nickel compounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

LR

—

—

—

—

—

Nickel chloride

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Nickel nitrate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Nickel sulfate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Nitric acid–10%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

LR

NR

NR

Nitric acid–30%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

Nitric acid–50%

NR

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Nitric acid–fuming

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

Nitrobenzene

R

LR

NR

LR

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

LR

NR

LR

LR

R

—

NR

NR

Nitrous acid

LR

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Nut oil

R

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Nutmeg oil

NR

NR

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Nitrous oxide

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Oleic acid

R

L

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

R

R

NR

R

R

R

—

Olive oil

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Orange oil

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Oxalic acid–10%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

LR

NR

R

LR

R

R

—

—

Oxalic acid–50%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Oxygen(atmosphericpressure)

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

—

Ozone

LR

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

—

LR

NR

R

—

534

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Palm nut oil

R

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Palmitic acid

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

R

—

Peanut oil

R

LR

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Peppermint oil

R

NR

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

Perchloric acid–
20%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

Perchloroethylene

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

NR

LR

NR

—

—

—

—

Peroxyacetic acid

R

R

—

—

NR

NR

R

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

NR

—

—

R

—

Phthalic acid–50%

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Phenol

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

Phenol–5%

R

R

R

LR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Phosphoric acid–
10%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

R

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Phosphoric Acid–
30%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

R

R

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Phosphoric acid–
50%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Phosphoric acid–
85%

R

R

R

LR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

Photographic
solutions

R

R

LR

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

—

Pineapple juice

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Plating solutions

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Potassiumcompounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

NR

—

Potassium
carbonate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Potassiumchlorate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

LR

—

—

—

—

Potassium chloride

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LR

R

—

Potassiumhydroxide

R

R

R

R

LR

—

R

—

LR

—

LR

—

R

R

R

R

R

—

Potassium iodine

R

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Potassium iodide(3% iodine)

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

—

Potassium
permanganate–
1%

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

LR

NR

NR

Potassium sulfate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Silicone

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Silicone oil

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

Silver cyanide

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Silver nitrate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Sodium acetate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Sodiumbicarbonate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

LR

R

—

Sodium bisulfate

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

Sodium bisulfite

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

NR

—

NR

NR

—

—

R

LR

R

LR

—

—

Sodium borate

R

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Sodium bromide

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Sodium carbonate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

R

R

R

LR

R

—

Sodium chlorate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

R

LR

—

—

R

—

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

535

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Sodium chloride

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

LR

R

—

R

—

Sodium cyanide

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Sodium fluoride

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Sodiumhydroxide–10%

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

NR

R

R

LR

NR

R

R

R

—

R

—

Sodiumhydroxide–50%

R

R

R

R

LR

—

LRa

NR

LR

—

NR

NR

R

R

—

—

NR

—

Sodiumhypochlorite–5%
Cl

R

LR

R

—

NR

NR

LRa

—

NR

NR

LR

NR

R

NR

LR

NR

R

—

Sodiumhypochlorite–
12.5% Cl

R

LR

LR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

NR

LR

NR

—

—

Sodium nitrate

R

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Sodium phosphate

R

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Stannic chloride

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

Stannous chloride

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

R

—

Starch

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Starch syrup

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Stearic acid

R

—

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

NR

R

—

R

—

Succinic acid

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Sucrose

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Sugar

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Sulfamic acid–
20%

R

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Sulfate liquors

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Sulfur

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

Sulfur chloride

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Sulfur dioxide

R

R

R

R

NR

—

—

—

NR

—

R

LR

R

R

R

—

LR

—

Sulfuric acid–3%

R

R

R

R

LR

—

R

R

LR

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

R

R

—

Sulfuric acid–50%

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

R

—

—

—

Sulfuric acid–70%

R

LR

R

LR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

Sulfuric acid–
Fuming

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

LR

LR

—

—

Sulfurous acid

R

LR

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

Tallow

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

Tannic acid–10%

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

NR

NR

Tartaric acid

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

LR

R

LR

R

—

R

—

Tetrahydrofuran

R

LR

NR

NR

LR

—

—

—

LR

—

R

—

R

NR

LR

NR

NR

NR

Toluene

R

NR

LR

NR

R

R

R

LR

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

Tomato juice

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

Transformer oil

R

NR

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

R

R

R

R

—

—

Tributyl phosphate

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Trichloroacetic
acid

R

R

R

R

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

Trichloroethylene

R

NR

—

—

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Tricresyl
phosphate

R

LR

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Trisodium
phosphate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R

—

Turpentine oil

R

NR

LR

NR

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

LR

R

—

—

—

536

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

4 REFERENCE TABLES
General Application Belt Materials

Special Application Belt Materials
Heat
Flame
Resistant
Retardant
Polypropylene Polyethylene
AcetalPK
EC Acetal
Nylon
Nylon SELM
Material
Hi-Impact
70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F 70°F 140°F(21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C) (21°C) (60°C)
Chemical Name
Material Suitability Codes: R = Resistant, NR = Not resistant, LR = Limited resistance, — = No information
Urea

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

Varnish

R

—

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Vaseline

R

R

LR

LR

R

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

Vegetable oil

—

—

R

LR

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

—

—

R

R

—

—

Vinegar

R

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

—

—

—

R

LR

—

—

R

—

Wine

R

R

R

—

R

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

R

R

R

—

—

—

Xylene

NR

NR

LR

NR

R

R

—

—

R

R

R

R

R

R

LR

NR

NR

NR

Zinc compounds

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

LR

—

R

R

LR

—

Zinc carbonate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Zinc chloride

R

R

R

R

R

—

R

R

R

—

NR

NR

R

R

R

—

R

—

Zinc oxide

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Zinc sulfate

R

R

R

R

—

—

—

—

—

—

LR

—

R

R

R

—

R

—

a Limited resistance rating due to discoloration.

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

537

538

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic BeltsINDEXA
A Drive Dimension: 479
Abrasion: 511
Abrasion Resistance System: 474
Abrasion Resistant (AR) Nylon: 14
Abrasion Resistant Metal Sprockets: 200
Abrasion Resistant Split Metal Sprockets: 110
Acetal: 13, 14, 17, 20, 24
Acetal, Detectable: 14
Acetal, High Strength Electrically Conductive (HSEC): 17
Acetal Split Sprockets: 183, 341
Acetal Sprockets: 315, 415, 416, 428, 437, 442, 448, 452
Acetal, X-Ray Detectable: 20
Adapters, Round Bore: 463
Adjusted Belt Pull (ABP): 31
Allowable Belt Strength (ABS): 31
Allowable Belt Strength Utilized (ABSU): 32
Analysis for Radius and Spiral Belts: 10
Analysis for Straight Running Belts: 9
Angle and Clip-on Wearstrips: 465
Angled EZ Clean Sprockets: 111, 126, 263, 269, 288
Anti-Sag Wearstrip Configuration: 486

B
B Drive Dimension: 479
Back Tension: 489
Belt Construction: 6
Belt Contraction: 488
Belt Elongation: 488
Belt Expansion: 488
Belt Length Management: 488
Belt Material Compliance: 23
Belt Material Growth: 10
Belt Material Properties: 20
Belt Materials: 14
Belt Pitch: 9
Belt Pull (BP): 31
Belt Pullers: 118, 135, 289
Belt Selection Instructions: 30
Belt Selection Process: 9
Belt Speed: 510
Belt Strength: 9Belt Surface Wear: 10
Belt Wear: 503
Break-In Period: 488
Bricklayed: 6
Buckets, Conveyor Design for: 503
Buildup Resistant Acetal Sprockets: 134

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic BeltsC
C Drive Dimension: 480
Carryway Materials: 482
Carryway Wearstrip Configuration: 483
Carryway Wearstrips: 482
Carryways: 481
Carryways, Wearstrip: 482
Carryways, Solid Plate: 487
Catenary Sag: 488, 489
Center Drive Conveyor Designs: 496
Center Sprocket Offset: 457
ChemBlox: 14
Chemical Exposure: 511
Chemical Resistance Guide: 528
Chevron Pattern Wearstrips: 483
Chordal Action: 11, 509
Clean In Place (CIP): 471
Coefficient of Friction: 12
Coefficients of Thermal Expansion: 22
Compliance, Regulatory: 23
Container Transfers: 505
Conveyor Components: 477
Conveyor Design Guidelines: 477
Conveyor Drive Requirements: 495
Conveyor Frame Design: 478
Conveyor Frame Dimensions: 479
Custom Wearstrips: 467

D
D Drive Dimension: 480
Dead Plate Gap: 503
Decline Conveyors: 512, 513
Design Requirements: 8
Detectable Acetal: 14, 20
Detectable MX: 14
Detectable Nylon: 15
Detectable Polypropylene A22: 15
Dimension Changes: 510
Double Wide Rim Sprockets: 49
Drive Horsepower (HP): 33
Drive Location: 496
Drive Method: 7, 9
Drive Shaft Strength: 32
Drive Shaft Torque: 525
Drive Shaft Torque Load: 500
Drive System Design: 495
Dynamic Effects Of High Speed Operation: 10
Dynamic Nose-Rollers: 185, 351

539

E
E Drive Dimension: 481
Easy Release PLUS: 15
Easy Release Traceable Polypropylene: 16
Efficiency Losses: 501
Elongation: 488
End Drive Conveyor Designs: 496
Enduralox Polypropylene: 16
Enduralox Polypropylene Composite Dual Tooth Split
Sprockets: 308
Enduralox Polypropylene Composite Split Sprockets: 244,
307
Enduralox Polypropylene Composite Sprockets: 316
EU-Compliant Belt Material: 23
Expansion and Contraction: 22, 510
Expansion Due to Water Absorption: 474
Extended Pins: 387
Extended Tabs: 387
EZ Clean In Place (CIP) System: 471
EZ Clean Sprockets: 109, 160, 263, 288, 340, 416
EZ Mount Flex Tip Scraper: 475
EZ Track Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprockets: 202
EZ Track Molded Sprockets: 201
EZ Track/EZ Clean Sprocket: 202

F
FDA-Compliant Material: 23
Finger Transfer Plates: 215, 504, 504
Flame Retardant Thermoplastic Polyester (FR TPES): 16
Flat Finger-Joint Wearstrips: 465
Flat Top Base Flights (No-Cling): 111, 316
Flat Top Base Flights (Streamline Rubber): 164
Flat Top Base Flights (Streamline): 72, 202, 245
Flat Top Base Flights Streamline: 162
Flat Top Wheel Chocks: 309, 324
Flight Material: 464
Flights, Streamline/No-Cling: 40, 71, 72, 163
Flights, Streamline: 50, 72, 111, 126, 162, 164, 202, 245,
253, 276, 281, 342
Flights, Conveyor Design for: 503
Fluid Couplings: 502
Flush Grid Base Flights (Double No-Cling): 72
Flush Grid Base Flights (No-Cling): 112
Flush Grid Base Flights (Streamline): 253
Flush Grid Base Flights (Streamline/No-Cling): 71, 163
Flush Grid Nub Top Base Flights (Double No-Cling): 163
Flush Grid Nub Top Base Flights (No-Cling): 203
Formula for Adjusted Belt Pull (ABP): 31
Formula for Allowable Belt Strength (ABS): 31
Formula for Allowable Belt Strength Utilized (ABSU): 32
Formula for Belt Pull (BP): 31
Formula for Drive Horsepower (HP): 33
Formula for Required Motor Power: 501

540

Formula for Shaft Deflection: 32
Formula for Thermal Expansion and Contraction: 22
Formula for Total Shaft Load: 32
Formula for Transmitted Torque: 32
Frame Dimensions: 479
Friction Factors: 21
Full Catenary Returnways: 490

G
General Application Belt Materials: 13
General Application Sprocket Material: 24
Glass-Filled Nylon: 25
Glass-Filled Nylon Alternating Tooth Split Sprockets: 298
Glass-Filled Nylon Alternating Tooth Sprockets: 299
Glass-Filled Nylon Split Sprockets: 184, 243, 307, 378, 403
Glass-Filled Nylon Sprockets: 308, 378
Gravity Take-Ups: 491

HHeat Resistant (HR) Nylon: 16
Heat Resistant (HR) Nylon Split Sprockets: 69
Heavy-Duty Edge: 90, 139
Heavy-Duty Edge Flights: 113
Hi-Impact: 17
High Heat Resistant (HHR) Nylon: 17
High Strength Electrically Conductive (HSEC) Acetal: 17
High-Impact Applications: 511
Hinge Rods: 6
Hold Down Guides: 381
Hold Down Roller Accessories: 513
Hold Down Tabs: 73, 165, 214
Hold Down Wearstrips: 516
HR Nylon EZ Clean Sprockets: 378
HR Nylon Split Sprockets: 184
HR Nylon Sprockets: 70, 183

I
Idle End: 502
Impact Resistant Flights: 113, 288
Impact Resistant Flights, Open Hinge: 114
Incline Conveyors: 512, 513
Insert Nuts: 73, 214, 309, 324
Intermediate Bearings: 500
Intralox Belt Puller Set: 118, 135, 289
Intralox Rod Removers: 118

L
Lane Dividers: 417, 430, 437, 448
Load-Bearing Backbend Rollers: 497
Locked Sprocket Location: 457
Locked Sprocket Position: 457
Low Moisture Abrasion Resistant (LMAR): 17
Low Wear Plus: 18

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

M
Machined Sprockets: 84, 242
Material Compliance: 23
Material, EU-Compliant: 23
Material, FDA-Compliant: 23
Material Selection: 9Material Suitability: 528
Materials, Belt: 13
Maximum Recommended Drive Shaft Torque: 525
Maximum Sprocket Spacing: 32
Mechanical Efficiency Losses: 501
Mesh Nub Top Base Flights (No-Cling): 264
Metal Abrasion Resistant Sprockets: 49
Minimum Hinge Flat Top Base Flights (Double No-Cling):
269
Molded Sprockets: 40, 49, 110, 183, 200, 243, 252, 330,
340
Molded Tooth Plate Split Glass-Filled Nylon Sprockets: 162
Molded Tooth Plate Split Low Back Tension Polyurethane
Composite Sprockets: 68
Molded Tooth Plate Split Polyurethane Composite Sprockets:
69

N
90-Degree Container Transfers: 505
No-Cling Flights: 378
No-Cling Impact Resistant Open Hinge Flights: 112
Nose-Rollers: 506
Nose-Rollers, Dynamic: 185, 351
Nosebars: 185, 351, 506
Nub Top Base Flights (Double No-Cling): 112
Nylon: 18, 25
Nylon, Detectable: 15
Nylon (FDA) Machined Sprockets: 330
Nylon (FDA) Split Sprockets: 402
Nylon (FDA) Sprockets: 376
Nylon, Abrasion Resistant (AR): 14
Nylon Alternating Tooth Split Sprockets: 299
Nylon Alternating Tooth Sprocket: 299
Nylon FDA Split Sprockets: 252, 315
Nylon, Heat Resistant (HR): 16
Nylon, High Heat Resistant (HHR): 17
Nylon Split Sprockets: 308, 350
Nylon Sprockets: 324, 350

O
ONEPIECE Live Transfer Belts: 506
Open Flush Grid Flush Edge Base Flights (No-Cling): 163
Open Hinge Base Flights (Streamline/No-Cling): 72
Open Hinge Flat Top Base Flights (No-Cling): 264
Operating Temperature: 22
Overlapping Sideguards: 417, 429, 437, 448

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic BeltsP
Parabolic Guide Rails: 505
Pipe Rollers: 502
PK: 18
Plastic Retainer Rings: 455, 455
Plastic Split Sprockets: 213
Polyethylene: 13, 26
Polypropylene: 13, 25
Polypropylene Composite: 18, 25
Polypropylene Composite Split Sprockets: 184
Polypropylene, Detectable A22: 15
Polypropylene, Easy Release Traceable: 16
Polypropylene Enduralox: 16
Polyurethane: 25
Polyurethane Composite: 25
Polyurethane Composite Split Sprockets: 244, 404
Polyurethane, Ultra Abrasion Resistant: 26
Power Requirements: 33, 501
Product Accumulation: 503
Product Containment: 502
Product Tipping: 486, 509
Pusher Bars: 469
PVDF: 19

R
Radius Belt Wearstrips: 467
Radius Conveyor Designs: 515
Required Motor Power: 501
Retainer Ring Groove and Chamfer Dimensions: 456
Retainer Ring Selection: 455
Retainer Rings: 455, 455, 456, 456, 460, 461
Retainer Rings Self-Set: 460
Returnway Design for Flights, Buckets, and Sideguards:
503
Returnway Designs: 489
Returnway Rings: 475
Returnways and Take-Ups: 487
Ribbed Flights: 50
Rod Material Selection: 10
Rod Removers: 118
Round Bore Adapters: 463
Round Shaft Retainer Rings: 461

S
S100 Flush Grid: 37
S100 Raised Rib: 38
S200 Flush Grid: 46
S200 Open Hinge: 47
S200 Open Grid: 45
S400 0-Degree Angled Roller: 61
S400 0.78-in Diameter 90-Degree Angled Roller: 64
S400 0.85 in Diameter Transverse Roller Top: 60
S400 30-Degree Angled Roller: 62
S400 90-Degree Angled Roller: 63541

S400 Ball Belt: 65
S400 Flat Top: 56
S400 Flush Grid: 53
S400 Non Skid: 57
S400 Open Hinge: 55
S400 Raised Rib: 54
S400 Transverse Roller Top: 59
S560 Flat Top: 81
S560 Flush Grid: 82
S800 Cone Top: 102
S800 Flat Top: 87
S800 Flush Grid: 96
S800 Flush Grid Nub Top: 100
S800 Mesh Top: 97
S800 Mini Rib: 98
S800 Nub Top: 99
S800 Open Hinge Flat Top Mold to Width with Heavy-Duty
Edge: 90
S800 Open Hinge Flat Top with Heavy-Duty Edge: 89
S800 Open Hinge Cone Top: 103
S800 Perforated 11/32 in Round Hole with Heavy-Duty
Edge: 95
S800 Perforated Flat Top: 93
S800 Perforated Flat Top Round Hole: 94
S800 Raised Rib: 105
S800 Roller Top: 106
S800 Rounded Friction Top: 107
S800 SeamFree Open Hinge Flat Top: 91
S800 SeamFree Open Hinge Nub Top: 101
S800 SeamFree Open Hinge Cone Top: 104
S800 Tough Flat Top: 92
S850 SeamFree Minimum Hinge Cone Top: 124
S850 SeamFree Minimum Hinge Flat Top: 123
S888 Large Slot Stainless Steel Link: 131
S888 Medium Slot: 129
S888 Medium Slot Stainless Steel Link: 130
S888 Round Hole Enhanced: 132
S900 Diamond Friction Top: 151
S900 Flat Friction Top: 154
S900 Flat Top: 146
S900 Flush Grid: 138
S900 Flush Grid Nub Top: 157
S900 Flush Grid with Heavy-Duty Edge: 139
S900 Flush Grid with Insert Rollers: 155
S900 Mesh Top: 150
S900 Mold to Width 29 mm Square Friction Top: 153
S900 Mold to Width Flat Top: 147
S900 Mold to Width Flat Top with Holes: 158
S900 Mold to Width Flush Grid: 141
S900 Mold to Width Raised Rib: 145
S900 Nub Top: 156
S900 ONEPIECE Live Transfer Flush Grid: 142
S900 ONEPIECE Live Transfer Flat Top: 148

542

S900 Open Flush Grid: 140
S900 Open Grid: 137
S900 Perforated Flat Top: 149
S900 Raised Rib: 143
S900 Raised Rib with Heavy-Duty Edge: 144
S900 Square Friction Top: 152
S1000 Flat Friction Top: 178
S1000 Flat Friction Top 85 mm: 174
S1000 Flat Top: 169
S1000 Flat Top 85 mm: 176
S1000 Flat Top ONEPIECE Live Transfer 6.3 in: 177
S1000 High Density Insert Roller 85 mm: 173
S1000 High Density Insert Roller: 172
S1000 Insert Roller: 170
S1000 Mold To Width Insert Roller: 171
S1000 Mold to Width Flat Friction Top: 180
S1000 Mold to Width Flat Top: 179
S1000 Mold to Width Flat Top with Tabs: 175
S1000 Non Skid Raised Rib: 181
S1100 Cone Top: 197
S1100 Embedded Diamond Top: 196
S1100 Flat Top: 190
S1100 ONEPIECE Live Transfer Flush Grid: 194
S1100 Flush Grid: 189
S1100 Flush Grid Mold to Width, 38 mm and 46 mm Wide:198
S1100 Flush Grid Friction Top No Indent: 193
S1100 Flush Grid Friction Top: 192
S1100 Flush Grid Nub Top: 195
S1100 Perforated Flat Top: 191
S1200 Flat Top: 208
S1200 Flush Grid: 207
S1200 Non Skid: 210
S1200 Non Skid Raised Rib: 211
S1200 Raised Rib: 209
S1400 Flat Top Easy Release Traceable Polypropylene: 239
S1400 3.25 in Mold to Width Flat Friction Top with Tabs:
231
S1400 6 in (152 mm) Flat Top Mold to Width Self-Clearing
Edge: 226
S1400 Embedded Diamond Top: 237
S1400 Flat Friction Top: 229
S1400 Flat Top: 223
S1400 Flat Top Easy Release PLUS: 238
S1400 Flush Grid: 228
S1400 Mold to Width Flat Top: 224
S1400 Mold to Width Oval Friction Top: 234
S1400 Mold To Width Square Friction Top: 232
S1400 Non Skid: 236
S1400 ONEPIECE 9.3 in Live Transfer Flat Top: 227
S1400 ONEPIECE Live Transfer Flat Top: 225
S1400 Oval Friction Top: 233
S1400 ProTrax with Tabs: 240

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

S1400 Roller Top: 235
S1400 Square Friction Top: 230
S1500 Flush Grid: 249
S1500 Flush Grid with Contained Edge: 250
S1600 Mesh Nub Top: 260
S1600 Mesh Top: 259
S1600 Mini Rib: 258
S1600 Mold to Width Open Hinge Flat Top: 256
S1600 Nub Top: 257
S1600 Open Hinge Flat Top: 255
S1600 Raised Open Grid: 261
S1650 SeamFree Minimum Hinge Flat Top: 267
S1700 Flush Grid: 271
S1700 Flush Grid Nub Top: 272
S1700 Transverse Roller Top: 273
S1750 Flush Grid: 279
S1800 Flat Top: 285
S1800 Mesh Top: 286
S1900 Raised Rib: 291
S2100 ZERO TANGENT Radius Flat Top: 329
S2200 Radius Flush Grid 2.6 with Insert Rollers: 338
S2200 Flush Grid High Deck with Edge Bearing: 337
S2200 Radius Flush Grid: 333
S2200 Radius Flush Grid High Deck: 334
S2200 Radius Friction Top: 335
S2200 Radius with Edge Bearing: 336
S2300 Flush Grid Nose-Roller Dual Turning with Edge
Bearing: 348
S2300 Flush Grid Mold To Width Nose-Roller Dual Turning:
348
S2300 Flush Grid Nose-Roller Tight Turning: 345
S2300 Flush Grid Nose-Roller Dual Turning: 347
S2300 Flush Grid Nose-Roller Tight Turning with Edge
Bearing: 346
S2400 Radius Flush Grid Mold to Width with Load-Sharing
Edge: 361
S2400 Radius Friction Top Mold to Width with Load-Sharing
Edge: 369
S2400 Radius Flush Grid (2.8) with Insert Rollers: 367
S2400 Radius Flush Grid with Load-Sharing Edge: 360
S2400 Radius Friction Top with Heavy-Duty Edge: 371
S2400 0.4 in High Radius Friction Top: 372
S2400 0.4 in High Radius Friction Top with Heavy-Duty
Edge: 373
S2400 Flush Grid Friction Top 2.2 with Load-Sharing Edge:
368
S2400 Flush Grid High Deck with Load-Sharing Edge: 365
S2400 Flush Grid High Deck with Edge Bearing: 363
S2400 Mold to Width Radius Flush Grid 2.2: 357
S2400 Radius Flush Grid High Deck with Heavy-Duty Edge:
364
S2400 Radius Flush Grid with Heavy-Duty Edge: 359
S2400 Radius Flush Grid (2.4) with Insert Rollers: 366

2024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

S2400 Radius Flush Grid (2.2): 356
S2400 Radius Flush Grid High Deck: 362
S2400 Radius Friction Top (2.2): 370
S2400 Radius Raised Rib: 374
S2400 Radius with Edge Bearing: 358
S2400 Tight Turning Radius: 355
S2600 Dual Turning 2.0: 414
S2600 Spiral 1.0: 409
S2600 Spiral 1.1: 410
S2600 Spiral 1.6, 2.0: 411
S2600 Spiral 2.2, 2.5, and 3.2: 412
S2600 Spiral Rounded Friction Top: 413
S2700 Dual Turning 2.0: 424
S2700 Side Drive: 425
S2700 Side Drive V2: 426
S2700 Spiral 2.2: 422
S2700 Spiral 2.7: 423
S2700 Spiral 1.6: 421
S2700 Spiral Rounded Friction Top: 427
S2800 Spiral DirectDrive: 436
S2800 Spiral GTech 1.6: 433
S2800 Spiral GTech Rounded Friction Top: 434
S2800 Spiral GTech 2.2 and 3.2: 435
S2850 DirectDrive Stacker: 441
S2900 Spiral 1.6: 446
S2900 Spiral DirectDrive: 445
S2900 Spiral 2.2: 447
S2950 DirectDrive Stacker: 451
S3000 Knuckle Chain: 385
S3000 Mesh Top: 386
S4009 Flat Top: 392
S4009 Flush Grid: 391
S4014 Flat Top: 393
S4030 7.5-in ProTrax Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs: 394
S4031 7.5-in ProTrax Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs: 395
S4032 7.5-in ProTrax Sideflexing Flat Top with Tabs: 396
S4033 7.5-in ProTrax Sideflexing Flat Top: 397
S4090 Sideflexing Flat Top: 398
S4091 Sideflexing Flat Top: 399
S4092 Sideflexing Flat Top: 400
S4092 Sideflexing Square Friction Top: 401
S4400 Transverse Roller Top: 297
S4500 Embedded Diamond Top: 305
S4500 Flat Top: 302
S4500 Flush Grid: 301
S4500 Non Skid: 303
S4500 Non Skid Raised Rib: 304
S9000 Flush Grid: 313
S10000 Flat Top: 319
S10000 Mold to Width Flat Top: 320
S10000 Non Skid Perforated: 322
S10000 Non Skid Raised Rib: 321
S400 Roller Top: 58543

S800 Open Hinge Flat Top: 88
Screw Take-Ups: 493
Scroll Idlers: 464, 502
Self Extinguishing Low Moisture (SELM): 19
Self-Clearing Finger Transfer Plates: 77, 218, 245, 294
Service Factors (SF): 31, 521
Shaft Deflection: 32, 499, 500
Shaft Failure: 500
Shaft, Maximum Allowable Torque: 12
Shaft Selection: 498, 498
Shaft Strength: 12
Shaft Tolerances: 454
Shaft Twisting: 500
Shafts: 11
Side Wheel Chocks: 324
Sideguards, Conveyor Design for: 503
Slide Bed Returnways: 491
Soft Start Motors: 502
Solid Plate Carryways: 487
Special Application Materials: 26
Special Application Sprocket Materials: 24
Specific Gravity: 21
Spiral Conveyor Designs: 518
Spiral DirectDrive: 518
Spiral DirectDrive Stacker: 518
Spiral Friction Drive: 518
Spiral Side Drive: 518
Split Collar Retainer Rings: 461
Split Low Back Tension Ultra Abrasion Resistant
Polyurethane Sprockets: 67
Split Metal Sprockets: 40, 161, 201, 214, 282, 292, 314
Split Metal with Polyurethane (FDA) Joining Plates Reduced
Clearance Sprockets: 69, 161
Split Natural Nylon (FDA) Sprockets: 377
Split Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane (FDA) Sprockets:
109
Split Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Sprockets: 68,376
Sprocket Engagement: 489
Sprocket Interference: 484
Sprocket Retention: 501
Sprocket Selection: 501
Sprocket Size: 500, 509
Sprocket Spacers: 462
Sprocket Spacing: 32
Sprockets Material Availability: 26
Square Shaft: 454
Stainless Steel: 25
Stainless Steel Backed UHMW-PE Wearstrips: 466
Stainless Steel Retaining Rings: 456, 456
Standard Retainer Rings: 455, 456
Static Electricity: 12
Straight Parallel Wearstrips: 484

544

Streamline Flights: 50, 72, 111, 126, 162, 164, 202, 245,
253, 276, 281, 342
Streamline/No-Cling Flights: 40, 71, 72, 163
Support for Accessories and Textured Belts: 494
Support Wheels: 71, 416, 429, 437, 442, 448, 452

T
3-Piece Streamline Flights: 281
3A Dairy Tested Materials: 23
Take-Ups: 487, 491, 491, 493
Temperature Effects on Finger Transfer Plates: 504
Temperature Factors: 22, 521
Temperature Variations: 488
Textured-Surface Belts: 503
Thermal Expansion and Contraction: 22, 485, 488, 510
Thermoplastic: 16
3-Piece Perforated Bucket and Scoop Flights: 115
Tight-Transfer Methods: 506
Total Shaft Load: 32
Transfer Plates: 471
Transfers: 503
Transmitted Torque: 32
Two-Material Finger Transfer Plates: 75, 293

U
UFVR: 19
UHMW Polyethylene Split Sprockets: 315
UHMW Polyethylene Sprockets: 264
UHMW-PE Pressure Sensitive Tape: 467
UHMW-PE Sprockets: 387
Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Split Sprockets: 276
Ultra Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane Sprockets: 275, 280
Ultra Abrasion Resistant Split Sprockets: 281
Ultra-Abrasion Resistant Polyurethane: 26
UV Resistant: 19

V
Vacuum Conveyors: 514

W
Wearstrip Carryways: 482
Wearstrip Configuration: 483
Wearstrip Types: 482
Wearstrips: 12, 465, 465, 467
Wearstrips, Flat Finger-Joint: 465
Wearstrips, Stainless Steel Backed UHMW-PE: 466

X
X-Ray Detectable Acetal: 202024 Engineering Manual-Modular Plastic Belts

CONTACT

Intralox, L.L.C. USA, New Orleans, LA • +1-800-535-8848 • +1-504-733-0463
Intralox, L.L.C. Europe, Amsterdam, The Netherlands • +800-4687-2569 • +31-20-540-36-00
Intralox Shanghai LTD., Shanghai, China • 4008-423-469 • +86-21-5111-8400
For country- and industry-specific contact information, see www.intralox.com.

© 2024 Intralox, L.L.C. 5012156.2_English